Home

Tmax T Generation - Electrocomponents

1. Withdrawable Motor operator 5 4 version 105 5 5 105 55 E Rn Ger EE 5 Y E 27 isolating distance e gt ai lel lo el 1 i l L 55 DES 5 5 e T N s E d EE e Z Al zZ H nN B QN e A X ti X X m X E LI QU o h GU L s eji H Oe fii Bee j M d El S Ka 8 i E lt 2 272 Y 2 a 8 283 238 B Y R T5 630 A 121 8 2 272 75 2 101 3 5 25 46 5 4
2. Y Rx x 8 slo UI d SEC Lar ma m aur oe Y R5 5 1 l Lo o Y Y Ke Caption Drilling templates for support sheet D Rear horizontal terminals 2 Rear vertical terminals 61 25 6 Drilling template for fixing OF Y E onto support sheet E Ny Ny g 2 T Tightening torque 20 Nm RIO z Tm IV EM 70 140 E 192 5 262 5 6 29 1SDC210015D0205 o D o EE o 5 Front extended spread termi nals ES Tightening torque 18 Nm Phase separators 200 mm Protection plate Extended front terminals EF Phase separators 100 mm Overall dimensions of auxiliary co
3. 175 T 175 T 72 5 2 Front terminals for cables SN c 185 mm CuAl Y 3 Insulating courtse plate a pi 2 compulsory le i i i e milin Ninull High terminal covers with ES i degree of protection IP40 x compulsory 8 x WS X S X 5 Drilling templates for sup e 5 E port sheet g S ji E C 4 i 2 Y E Y 2 45 M4 163 30 D 30 130 E Y 2 ei FA 45 M4 A im T S i AiO S x x S L H X LO 5 T T hel 5 Ta a See 8 2 Y 26 c 66 5 Y 26 Tj 163 8 3 POLES 4 POLES Caption Front extended spread ES Insulating barriers between phases compulsory 135 52 5 52 5 30 30 30 gt ill S LY a lel fe a is S g e S 8 E D E Z X ur X a 6 6 1SDC210015D0205 Caption Front extended EF
4. 240 mm CuAI 3 Insulating courtse plate compulsory 4 High terminal covers with degree of protection IP40 5 Drilling templates for sup E port sheet f 8 8 3 POLES 4 POLES Caption Front extended spread ES e Insulating barriers between phases compulsory 25 10 5 58 I 200 103 A l i 8 Nm 1SDC210159F0001 6 36 1SDC210015D0205 Terminals Front extended EF
5. T5 400 630 T6 630 800 1000 230 V 230 V Pt 109 25 Pr 10 A2s 10 10 10 T6 800 1000 1 10 Ko d 107 2 1 10 102 os fz 10 10 10 108 Inns kA IS Ims KA T7 800 1000 1250 1600 230 V Pet 10 A2s 10 10 10 i 1 10 10 10 12 ims KA E 4 20 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210E42F0001 T1 160 T2 160 400 440 V 400
6. State of operation N Ia L2 La u L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 T TT T p T TT T 4 M eats baba 2 Oo NO NO ett bh SERA t 1 S E S D Lok dg B b d ds i Lud Three pole or four pole circuit breaker with Three pole circuit breaker with magnetic Three pole or four pole switch discon thermomagnetic trip unit trip unit nector on load isolating switch N Et LS K N u L3 13 r A T TYT 1 UN NN WM k x x X Che et ei Ae k51 eK S K51 WX N gt TI L1 TAA jisra gt xol vol i 2 T L2 YO1 e YO1 TI L3 29 T L3 E E ff ide 594 i HD E eT gt xoT2 tN D l1 Y AT T N T PR221MP 8 PRZ22S P 8 EE SE ES PR221GP E LAUR A PES E I I I I 1 S T PR223EF E i 2 9 Three pole or four pole circuit breaker with Three pole or four pole circuit break PR221 electronic trip unit er with PR222DS P PR222DS PD PR223DS or PR223EF electronic trip unit for T4 T5 and T6 N L1 L LA A I l 4 L1 L2 L3 A rv 4 ipe AAA X XX 5 n a L K51 E i f K87 l i TI L1 he xol sj XN S TI L2 1 gt von 5 k pe YO2 TI L3 mS yo mo 2 a 1 gt 8 M Room X0 2 8 PR222MP S l K p Rc222
7. END Y Aene v l E 70 70 70 em N 15 d E E ole g S HI Wl III L Ll ee s Y Caption Drilling templates for support sheet 0 Rear horizontal terminals f f C Rear vertical terminals E 6 Drilling template for fixing onto OF Y Dd S support sheet S D Tightening torque 20 Nm Hle 2 las 3 X X 17 5 s R T IV K n 2 mp 70 140 ee e E 192 5 262 5 B 9 6 24 1SDC210015D0205 o D ki E o 5 eec OO Front extended EF Extended front terminals EF Extended front spread terminals ES Drilling template for fixing onto support sheet 11 Tightening torque 18 Nm Phase separator 100 mm Protection plate 25 Phase separator 200 mm Clamp for auxiliary contacts 160 5 199 5 229 Front extended spread ES B IBI 4 118 sp TI RI D Moloto n ig ie ia R d A3 1 iA D 1 09 a j a n D TR Drilling templates for supp
8. Fixing on sheet Fixing on DIN EN 50022 rail 140 4P 83 52 5 78 71 5 35 35 35 70 JL 1 5 Y H s F OE E a H S 76 2 a i EE L SS S x i Wir AS _ Ge o L C 3 i Se ZN T D E 5 Y eg 2 S 84 5 105 3P 3 71 2 S 103 5 J 8 23 102 E Caption Depth of the switchboard in the case of circuit breaker with face Bracket for fixing on rail not extending from the compartment door with or without flange 4 Low terminal covers with degree of protection IP40 Depth of the switchboard in the case of circuit breaker with face extending from the compartment door Flange for Drilling templates of the compartment door compartment door 142 a qo pEL tor sis 2 Y ei Y ES Y e Y 8 E g H o X E x ix x s xi Hx ix E 2 x5 5 Ie Ut b T 1 Y Y Y Y E With flange and Without flange and Without flange and Without flange and circuit breaker face circuit breaker face circuit breaker face circuit breaker face flush with door flush with door extending 8 POLES extending 4 POLES 3 4 POLES 3 4 POLES Drilling templates for support sheet For front terminals For rear term
9. O O L 10 e Q i n Tel H d eil TT F4 S W 8 FEL 8 Ja E X elif Lais o mii eue dpi EE 14 E t B H B m ei api e o 29 u 19 u amp 8 Terminals Caption O Compartment door with Rear flat vertical VR Rear flat horizontal HR flange sheet drilling Rear segregation for rear terminals 8 8 E 9 Compartment door flange it A g 4 Flange fixing screws 5 Tightening torque 1 5 Nm 6 Drilling template for fixing Rear spread terminal RS onto support sheet End 8 T Tightening torque 21 Nm E 90 90 y 5 Front terminals 7 9 Rear horizontal terminals Rear vertical terminals 40 Rear segregation for front terminals 123 Flange for compartment 0 90 90 door 25 25 425 425 25 KE Auxiliary contact terminal _ Insulating protection ES ES ES EL 3 5 Rear spread terminals 4 Enn HEH H SH HBHERE 15 poles Y W Tightening torque 18 Nm Rear spread terminals 3 poles 6 51 1SDC210015D0205 Overall dimensions Tmax T7 Withdrawable circuit breaker Front extended spread ES Ti e EI K D c D c RS eM 14 mn ait IR Hia 1 o
10. 13 is s ols i v ae N d Sp S SEO ES x ge l i D i l e ZE Cu S J e V el S AE Oe Fee T gq Y E 210 4 4 poles 3 f SC 3 poles E S With flange Without flange mm mi 125 141 147 2 1 az OI H Wb BO races E RENE lo 1 Y S 190 2 206 E Drilling templates for Drilling templates of the support sheet compartment door C d ee SH V 192 16 35 b EY Geh y Y iD 7 Y Y al LR ON och X il X i i S E de XL E E z oc B Y Y 8 Deeg E ses 208 12 Y fe Y i 4 i IV ei ie L gje ui S 1 70 140 7 hie vk X 2 Sr X k eee gt H t vt E ZE H e y m ALLEN 54 m7 HOLES Y Y 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210L43F0001 Terminals Rear flat horizontal or vertical HR VR
11. Caption Y 2 l l ID j D Rear horizontal terminals ebe E old i i 99M 73 j 2 Rear vertical terminals e 6 Support sheet drilling tem _ 8 plate T ZEN tee DES X 2 T Tightening torque 20 Nm WW G N LN e 18 5 E i EI ep Y WICH EB De 46 5 3 59 B Drilling templates for support sheet C 61 25 cw Y C co o Chal ip K 2 15 Lol on Y E a D zo zo DI zo D oi Se E inb cl 8 adi MN Z T WEM SSES E 3 i 17 5 aio IA KEL sr g 5 5 M5 B Y 2 Ill IV re 70 140 192 5 262 5 6 23 1SDC210015D0205 Overall dimensions Tmax T7 Terminals Rear horizontal R
12. N LI L2 L3 N Lf L2 L3 Q61 2 A 5 in A 3 adic Zei 31 x int PN L1 02 7 In N Q2 E A a Ze Q61 1 4 1 zelt L1 01 S L 3 A N Q1 TA Voy i oeh AA A XX XX 02 K51 Q1 sk e K51 Q2 gt 21 22 24 26 28 30 Idi T u e A T L2 W ge NS TI L3 TI L3 34 33 32 31 ATS O10 TI N TI N L LL ti 24V or 48V _ m r ees E S 8 dE S 8 LOAD E S R 8 i g E amp S i K s 3 Se amp S mE S x a Sg i x S amp S5 E B 8 EE 5 x S ss 3 1 2 50 51 49 52 54 53 GEN START ALARM LOGIC ON LOAD DISC e amp x gt 3 4 K i amp x 3 a N Ei d x Lo x D L x 2 p 3 a S ATSO10 20 19 18 17 35 36 37 38 8 4 5 6 7 46 47 48 xa2 XA2 XA2 XA2 T ES 15 M x2 x2 x2 x2 l r r l l ps 1 l w i n xve xV 14 wg w s l l l l l X l X l ou sy F 4 oy 0 7 svi ef zu s i asf s14 sis s16 n I n S Ge xver w n xv 95 mi l po soi xb I ox oli l l l 1 7 1 7 L de 1 Ee LJ E me KEREN kl Qi XA2 XA2 0 2 X2 A2 e Dr Um ny S oi B i3 MEE S 3 x S S B B S E 5 S amp S amp S E E S 8 S amp amp G S E S E S B S 3 S 5 E E 5 a E N 3
13. Caption Front for lever operating mechanism 158 e Front for lever operating mech 27 140 anism 27 0T Det A Lock for the compartment Pom door i si Lenz CN eo 1 f t X T TX a L I l nao T E 3 a S L 8 Y 8 E Flange for the Drilling template for the compartment door compartment door Drilling of details A supplied as standard as Gupp 43 14 43 14 SES Y Y ali T D a 9 Be HiS At e d dE 4 te iD 1 SI a e x x an X x SE l i a x8 T S T 2 S gt 8 148 5 3 142 E y R min 200 8 Rhin 200 8 Drilling template for support sheet 70 140 5 5 M5 w 5 5 M5 EE PC T i 2 2 35 GI x S x x E i E in 8 aa E Y 3 Y E 3 POLES 4 POLES 6 80 08 1SDC210L25F0001 1SDC210015D0205 Withdrawable version Motor operator 27 5 isolating distance 241 281 5 Flange for the compartment door supplied as standard 210 75 25 1SDC210L30F0001 1SDC210L28F0001
14. ite eo L Bei e e Vi ite eo 60 P o CC b E Y N g E 5 X X S EC J Qe 3 2 Y 665 1 26 163 9 3 POLES 4 POLES Front extended spread ES 165 45 45 10 5 20 S D SS F wie eo e 85 j Front for copper aluminium cables FC CuAI 95 mm 17 5 14 x14 73 25 1SDC210142F0001 1SDC210143F0001 1SDC210145F0001 6 33 1SDC210015D0205 Overall dimensions Tmax T2 Caption Front extended EF e High terminal covers with 2 degree of protection IP40 3P 2 Insulating barriers between
15. 139 5 3P E 139 5 SP 275 isolating distance 69 75 275 isolating distance 69 75 33 46 5 465 46 5 T 23 46 5 46 5 46 5 1 Y 1 l FL i l es e E b lo VU HH Ac lo N 0 166 S 27 4 105 S e 166 HETAM E 105 E o8 e t Ia CH e oS bs CO i e 8 4 1 9 X 8 x T xi 8 x 8 x E UG tS N Ke E e l e fo C c i e A on _ Lo Ech 2 S S v g i ez F Z x b lc ee z D E 8 S N 8 D 5 I N oi 5 E B lt 2 190 5 2 101 25 m E T 8 196 8 186 4P 3 lt 2 190 5 E Y 8 9 196 D 101 25 3 186 4P B 400A 630A Caption Flange for compartment Drilling templates of the compartment door Fixed part door 165 96 2 Moving part with terminal 61 25 27 14 covers degree of protection Y Y IP40 GF is i m lo N 3 Lock for compartment door 3 e ml available on request o Vy X Vy X 2 7 4 Overall dimensions with cabled 3 co el tl accessories mounted SOR C 3 9 5 UVR C RC222 T K g R min 200 2 Drilling templates for support sheet For front terminals 630 A For rear terminals 400 A 680 A For front terminals 400 A 95 5 M5 Y 5 5 M5 v 72 5 119 955 5 y 5 5 M5 Y ES 36 25 2 m 36 25 72 5 119 U eI U o S X x 8 X X Wi x XS 9 m d 4 e 4
16. 500 500 500 470 ATO 470 17 5 73 5 158 5 2325 73 5 158 5 2325 735 17 5 47 5 Y Z Y Y Z Y Z Si CG ejje D D elle le X X x x X 8 eo Oe B als D e S X a 3 s d E Y a Y 9 Y z Y E Y z Y A B C 500 500 um 470 ach SE 73 5 158 5 2325 73 5 158 5 m Y Z Y AR p x x 0 D x lt 295 S 1SDC210K88F0001 18DC210K89F0001 L m i G Circuit breakers N 1 T4 F P W N 1 T4 F P W N 1 T4 F P W N 1 T5 400 F P W or T5 630 F N 1 T4 F P W N 1 T5 630 P W N 1 T5 400 F P W or T5 630 F N 1 T5 400 F P W or T5 630 F N 1 T5 400 F P W or T5 630 F N 1 T5 630 P W N 1 T5 630 P W N 1 T5 630 P W Note F Fixed circuit breaker P Plug in circuit breaker W Withdrawable circuit breaker 6 74 1SDC210K87F0001 1SDC210K90F0001 1SDC210015D0205
17. T1 160 T2 160 500 V 500 V Ip kA Ip kA 102 10 1 2 E 1 10 102 B 102 10 1 10 102 19 8 ken b i X Inns h i T3 250 T4 250 320 500 V 500 V Ip kA Ip kA 10 102 100A 320A H 132504 20A 25A 10 10 HoAl E 1 5 1 10 102 IS 1 10 102 108 Ims kA 5 Ims kA 4 33 1SDC210015D0205 Limitation curves T5 400 630 T6 630 800 1000 500 V 500 V p kA Ip kA 102 102 T6 800 1000 een 10 10 1 8 1 1 10 102 10 5 1 10 102 Ims KA Ims KA T7 800 1000 1250 1600 500 V Ip kA 10 rant 10 EN 10 10 10 10 KN 8 4 34 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210E80F0001 T1 160 690 V Ip kA T2 160 690 V Ip kA 102 107
18. 105 3P 52 5 mm 35 35 _ Y s t N Es Si x X e y co Y 140 4P 1SDC210173F0001 17 5 1SDC210I71F0001 25 D 250 250 84 30 18x18 10 Nm LPD p X4 E z o 31 Nm 2 36 18 1SDC210I74F0001 1SDC210I72F0001 6 39 1SDC210015D0205 6 40 Overall dimensions Tmax T4 Rear flat vertical VR 105 3P 52 5 Y 1 E o 3 S x X KI B Y 140 4P 2 35 35 35 41 Y _4 L i q e E J e 8 E S B WE S S Y 3 4 POLES Rear flat horizontal HR 4105 op 52 5 Y wo E S x x 3 140 4P B g 10 RI d o amp Y 3 4 POLES 18DC210177F0001 1SDC210180F0001
19. 1000 V 1000 V DO Ae Pt 10 A2s 10 10 i 1 10 1 B 102 z 101 1 10 102 E 1 10 102 Inns KA S lms KA T6 1000 V Pt kA s 102 10 1 10 1 8 1 10 10 J MAP 1 4 27 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210E62F0001 Specific let through energy curves 1SDC210E68F0001 T4 250 T5 400 630 1150 V 1150 V Pt kA s Pt kA s 10 10 1 1 10 1 B 102 g 107 1 10 10 1 10 102 Iech X lms KA 4 28 1SDC210015D0205 Limitation curves T1 160 T2 160 230 V 230 V Ip kA Ip kA 102 B B g 102 g i E 102 10 8 102 10 1 1 10 102 103 104 105 g kee kA S Ime KA S
20. 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210015D0205 Contact us ABB SACE A division of ABB S p A L V Breakers Via Baioni 35 24123 Bergamo Phone 39 035 395 111 Fax 39 035 395 306 433 www abb com The data and illustrations are not binding We reserve the right to modify the contents of this document on the basis of technical development of the product without prior notice Copyright 2010 ABB All rights reserved Power and productivity for a better world A P 1SDC210015D0205 07 2010 6 000
21. Tmax T4 T5 Plug in version Front F fixing on sheet T4 T5 400 A 186 140 35 35 35 46 5 46 5 46 5 15 aH Y op 175 Y 10 zm e fe fe D k 3 35 3 z TTS lt 103 cA Z i H l H xi X X X 1 55 S 2 27 g 27 lo I E IJ e 3 S e 52 5 8 3 i S 2 2 Y H E 23 189 3 69 75 E 7 Caption Flange for the compartment door Drilling templates of compartment T Fixed part door and fitting flange Q Mobile part e HE ou ns 107 Y E 3 Overall dimensions with cabled auxiliary contacts mounted E e only 3Q 1SY a i 2 8 Ou e DIO X Xz Bhi 5 e X Xy 98 ix For T5 630 A ask ABB SACE g 8 Y E Y 2 2 e For circuit breakers For residual current ei d Dei release Su E 3 S Y E Y With flange Without flange Drilling templates for support sheet T5 61 119 9 5 5 M5 Y Qj 5 5 M5 y 2 2 36 25 A x x 9 Hx X b o s e A Y E Y 2 6 62 1SDC210K20F0001 1SDC210015D0205 Fixed version T1 67 134 EH 2 x d 1 1SDC210K23F0001 Caption lt 1 1 Nm Depth of the switchboard with operating mechanism face extending 2 Depth of the switchboard with operating mechanism face flush with door 3 Low terminal covers with degree of protection IP40 O
22. Caption _ 35 35_ 35 10 i 19 9 e High terminal covers with S i Y degree of protection IP40 M E Pe le l ail Je l 2 Insulating barriers between la H i phases compulsory with ao out 1 mE co g LL ka s ixl RR lix l e q S re TC Dm It e Ve ea APY E Y E Caption Rear horizontal R e Low terminal covers with degree of protection IP40 SS Y 1 a BRL LU TELAT TD TIT I es KA fC ae e 2 e 4 WI fd ST o Gg amp x ES X Gi e Weu xp 4 A mi fe ID Ueleg TT OT XP 4 Hn Ce COC ANgi Y B E 6 37 1SDC210015D0205 Plug in circuit breaker Caption e Fixed part 2 Moving part with terminal covers degree of protection IP40 3 Overall dimensions with cabled accessories mounted SOR C UVR C RC222 223 4 Overall dimensions with cabled auxiliary contacts mounted only 3Q 1SY Drilling templates for support sheet Overall dimensions Tmax T4 Fixing on sheet Flange for compartment door 117 138 For front terminals x 1SDC210
23. 3 POLES Front extended spread ES 20 2 20 yo exa 1SDC210H47FO0001 1SDC210H44F0001 Front for copper aluminium cables FC CuAl 185 mm 19 o 18x18 Te 30 Nm Da LS Es S Wen m Dk 58 1SDC210H45F0001 1SDC210H46F0001 1SDC210H48F0001 6 9 1SDC210015D0205 Overall dimensions Tmax T3 Terminals Caption Front extended EF High terminal covers with degree of protection IP40 2 Insulating barriers between phases compulsory with out 1 18 Nm 1SDC210H49F0001 Caption Rear horizontal R Low terminal covers with degree of protection IP40
24. Drilling templates for the compartment door and fitting flange 75 25 150 1 1 Nm gt 10 y Y pe ES i l i S ij r Loy I 1 Y L DI egl L L zeg Is X E 1 C ES l ii CH TT L4 B EH l 1 5 l m S I 5 3 d 4 L a t 4 i 8 Y D B amp E S 9 6 81 1SDC210015D0205 Caption ei oi oi OM Padlock device for open position maximum 3 padlocks to be provided by the user Lock for compartment door Dimension with AUE connector early making contact Interlock mechanism Frame Drilling template for each ver sion of terminals 6 82 Overall dimensions Accessories for Tmax T6 Rotary handle operating mechanism on the circuit breakers Ur 27 5 isolating distance Di e 140 3 E GE M 1 i T L 3 P6 d z B rj A 2 S om t 7 1A A g n 2l o x __ air rq ng eS pex NE ya e UU H i w CH if LS La 5 3 l De S 8 ir T B S rie dls 1 E K Y ER 190 5 z2 S aie ae 8 240 33 9 gt el Ki Flange for the Drilling template for compartment compartment door door and fitting flange Drilling for detail A 210 43 14 75 25 Y E X D E te i E o oco oi g o
25. 42 Q 07 1 T 1 AQ EDUC QNSE ND 1 I K51 A11 1 l l l Lei i X X X SAI l xo i ABS e f Y Leni i i FDU I 1 i A13 l 1 13 5 hr ba 21 23 25 l x3 1 TI L1 7 d 2 II 23 L da 1 2 Yl KI RBI RBI IN OI FOI i ai x 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 E WE xs 4 i amp i e l Settee ES roce xs 31 L1NG C A 2 T 7 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 10 l ni xod x3 5j E i I MSI S57 I I s l xoT2 E l l l PR2220S PD SW l l PR223EF E E S E deem t UE d 1SDC210G10F0001 5 20 1SDC210015D0205 PR222DS PD PR223DS or PR223EF electronic trip unit connected with the FDU front display unit and the PRO21 K signalling unit 43 Q DES ME E EENEG d l K51 A11 I i m k x m ze T XA XD l i an X QN Lem Lem i FDU l i A13 13 5 7 19 21 23 25 x3 11 n u AU x3 2 LI d TI L2 R T K51 SA KS5IN kal KS KS K5IN K51 x 1 2 3 4 7 B 5 TI L3 x3 amp E ESEE EE x3 31 T ANS 1 D HED 7 2 T 3 7l 12 4 s bs om 22 z4 z 10 i xodi Si d I X i Yor ss1 i i S j i xoT2 i PR2220S PD Au PR
26. Motor Protection Tmax T2 Tmax T3 Rated uninterrupted current Al 160 250 Rated service current In A 1 100 100 200 Poles No 3 3 Rated service current Ue AC 50 60 Hz 690 690 DO 500 500 Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp Ik 8 8 Rated insulation voltage Ui 800 800 Test voltage at industrial frequency for 1 min 3000 3000 Rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity Icu N S H L N S AC 50 60 Hz 220 230 V kA 65 85 100 120 50 85 AC 50 60 Hz 380 415 V kA 36 50 70 85 36 50 AC 50 60 Hz 440 V kA 30 45 55 75 25 40 AC 50 60 Hz 500 V kA 25 30 36 50 20 30 AC 50 60 Hz 690 V kA 6 7 8 10 5 8 Rated service short circuit breaking capacity Ics AC 50 60 Hz 220 230 V Yolcu 100 100 100 100 75 50 AC 50 60 Hz 380 415 V Yolcu 100 100 100 75 70 kA 75 50 27 kA AC 50 60 Hz 440 V Yolcu 100 100 100 75 75 50 AC 50 60 Hz 500 V Yolcu 100 100 100 75 75 50 AC 50 60 Hz 690 V Yolcu 100 100 100 75 75 50 Rated short circuit making capacity lem AC 50 60 Hz 220 230 V kA 143 187 220 264 105 187 AC 50 60 Hz 380 415 V kA 75 6 105 154 187 75 6 105 AC 50 60 Hz 440 V kA 63 94 5 121 165 52 5 84 AC 50 60 Hz 500 V kA 52 5 63 75 6 105 40 63 AC 50 60 Hz 690 V kA 9 2 11 9 13 6 17 TT 13 6 Opening time 415 V ms 3 3 3 3 7 6 Utilisation category IEC 60947 2 A A Isolation
27. 154 Flange for the compartment door supplied as standard XJ Jf Xo o g 1 B o D L e 1SDC210L51F0001 304 Drilling templates of the compartment door 4 n 7HOLES 241 226 Y 280 210 n 103 6 70 op o Je a1 ERO ED Y UH NEM e Q Sen el E 448 5 33 x e 12 S ER Q x Z wo N F 7 o o x Sb WE S S S E e Le UAN Log W S i With flange Without flange i n E m 125 141 147 l d eg ins i IV ind 70 140 Tes i 190 e 206 E Drilling templates for support sheet 268 l ei Y e Y 3 iD Sr x yo i 85 S ji UU H 1 ix X S X i X z i B 5 5 M5 y 2 Y 2 208 10 Y Pad 192 AUN 201 43 14 18 x Y M Y E v3 i m x to oe ht d Ra Ze S SE 14 Se 9 2 Lasel N o d er s 2 5 S ee A CB l D EE r y v ky Y l 3 Y R min
28. Y if 1 d d O t H U t N LU UL pee in e I Ge 8 Lx 8 a Ke i Hae i73 U e UW E HIE S S LE I S 5 3 8 L S E Y 8 B Rear flat horizontal HR Front for copper cables FC Cu 25 25 25 ES 2062 la 12x12 ES o 7Nm TH 0 2 nu d tre SEKR E E du 5 5 d B 9 X E F Caption Front for copper aluminum cables FC CuAI 50 mm O High terminal covers with IP40 degree of protection compul sory 2 Insulating barriers between phases compulsory in the ab sence of top terminal covers 8 Front extended terminals 1SDC210L69F0001 4 Terminals for CuAl cables 95 mm 6 3 1SDC210015D0205 Overall dimensions Tmax T1 and single pole Tmax T1 Terminals 33 5 78 1SDC210H16F0001 Drilling templates of the compartment door 83 78 2 E Y Y N co X X d D X re t 5 rd r E Y Y 2 With flange and Without flange and circuit breaker face flush circuit breaker face flush with door 3 4 POLES with door 3 4 POLES or extending 8 POLES Flange for the compartment door Drilling templates for support sheet For rear terminals 25 25 04 5 M Y 25 WSS 53 27 4
29. 1 E 102 i 10 B 102 107 10 102 103 Ims kA 8 Ims kA T3 250 T4 250 320 690 V 690 V Ip kA Ip KA 102 400 9204 80A 10A 10 S E 1 1 10 102 10 J 1 10 102 103 kee h i 8 les kA 4 35 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210E82F0001 1SDC210E84F0001 Limitation curves 102 T5 400 630 690 V p kA T6 630 800 1000 690 V Ip kA B 8 1 10 10 10 10 102 ke e S L KAI T7 800 1000 1250 1600 690 V Ip kA 10 10 10 1 8 1 10 10 00 12 kms KA B 4 36 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210E86F0001
30. T2 160 Fixed F 4 Poles Front terminals F rem N a Thermomagnetic trip unit TMD Icu 415 V 36kA 1 6 16 050962 051006 051050 051094 2 20 050963 051007 051051 051095 2 5 25 050964 051008 051052 051096 32 32 050965 051009 051053 051097 4 40 050966 051010 051054 051098 5 50 050967 051011 051055 051099 6 3 63 050968 051012 051056 051100 8 80 050969 051013 051057 051101 10 100 050970 051014 051058 051102 12 5 125 050971 051015 051059 051103 16 500 050972 051016 051060 051104 20 500 050973 051017 051061 051105 25 500 050974 051018 051062 051106 32 500 050975 051019 051063 051107 40 500 050976 051020 051064 051108 50 500 050977 051021 051065 051109 63 630 050978 051022 051066 051110 80 800 050979 051023 051067 051111 100 1000 050980 051024 051068 051112 N 5096 125 1250 050981 051025 051069 051113 N 5096 160 1600 050982 051026 051070 051114 N 100 125 1250 051115 051117 051119 051121 N 100 160 1600 051116 051118 051120 051122 ETET R1 n D N S EEE om A OO mu 25 160 061875 061891 40 200 061876 061892 63 200 061877 061893 80 240 061878 061894 100 300 061879 061895 125 375 061880 061896 160 480 061881 061897 1SDA R1 N S H L Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 85 kA PR221DS LS I 10 051128 051138 051148 051158 PR221DS LS I 25 051129 051139 051149 051159 PR221DS LS I 63 051130 051140 051150 051
31. Y 186 4P 1SDC210J74F0001 1SDC210J67F0001 1SDC210015D0205 Withdrawable circuit breaker Caption 1 Fixed part 2 Moving part 3 Lock for compartment avail able on request 4 Overall dimensions with cabled accessories mounted SOR C UVR C Overall dimensions Tmax T6 630A T6 800A Fixing on sheet 280 4P B 27 5 isolating distance 210 BP 3 E Az E S S i T t 70 70 1 2 n L 1 E pmn ca b r1 rr DN d as N h io e j S X TH CEEEBE RN ae f amp The LAM L5 os d e eg 2 10 US N Y Ll am ES Se E 167 s B 4 1235 136 5 5 ges 1905 i Las ee i Flange for compartment Drilling templates of the compartment door door 210 75 25 i i Y Be N S el 2 is xa x8 2 18 3 148 5 e Y E gt 422 S 2 122 J 8 R min 200 S G Drilling templates for support sheet 210 140 ro Y R2 Y R2 E M wi T
32. SE 241 D ep Ee 12 208 12 Lesesb Y V Ay M i A l i wo wo gt e S 5 t K o ps 8 P 8 8 Lid e X X o X 2 S wo R 3 S9 T B g 9 S 2 2 i 5 1 Ge 8 Y Y 3 6 27 1SDC210015D0205 gx Overall dimensions Tmax T7M Rear flat horizontal or vertical HR VR 118 5 109 218 x lt x lt CT Bw 7 185 Je wm Caption O Rear horizontal terminals EN Rear vertical terminals 6 Drilling template for fixing onto support sheet T Tightening torque 20 Nm 1SDC210L84F0001 6 28 Drilling templates for support sheet G lt 39 75 II IV EM 70 140 192 5 262 5 1SDC210L85F0001 1SDC210015D0205 Rear horizontal H
33. 1SDC210J96F0001 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210J94F0001 Fixed version Flange for the compartment door T1 T2 T3 3 POLES e 118 2 125 1 132 6 e 444 3 44 1 44 1 Y Y Y e ei 3X X8 si EI ES X 8 x T X B T Y 2 Y 5 4 POLES 143 2 155 1 167 6 pi 42 Kei 42 88 2 42 88 2 e gt SIS ei zz j Ejs Y Y Y Si LLLI o 3X L X 5 x X z e HI Ga S 8 e MES B Y e 781 Y E 90 Y E 102 5 E Drilling template for fixing sheet T1 T2 T3 T1 rear flat horizontal HR 3 POLES 4 POLES 4 POLES Est NM D E 45 M4 GE 45 M 245 Me T y U o Fd Oo Fi fin lt i 8 x m x L x m X L X 2 lt Fd Fg 2 3 5 Ba d t 4 5 M4 Y 9 Y S 1SDC210J98 F0001 494 107 585 784 25 584 1941 107 1 Less Leon 7807 Le 1415 Lass Eer meer 18871 Ces 6 57 1SDC210015
34. 2 Circuit breakers coupling 165 25 plate z il 3 Drilling template for all termi 7 nal versions K Z Z The mechanical rear vertical interlock for Tmax T3 is not compatible with the RC221 and RC222 residual current releases 6 68 1SDC210961F0001 1SDC210015D0205 Caption Protection kit IP 42 for T1 fixed Q IP 42 protection 2 Compartment door sheet a ra steel drilling paar 7 p Sg E 4 BI rt faa d 1 Eis I eee d 1 E li 14 l J Fi xu i Z D LG Ki VER 8 Caption Protection kit IP 42 for T2 fixed D IP 42 protection LS T 2 Compartment door sheet al steel drilling E a mat a KS A ei H att e La z ul at a S W nz I P B a T S sa L S 183 3 E Caption Protection kit IP 42 for T3 fixed CO IP 42 protection SS sali v 2 Compartment door sheet uw beg steel drilling M o2 AR L E DH a GU Hl T Fo ox D lun l Fr Sd pi a TR H ED T 3 581 5 S 6 69 1SDC210015D0205 Fixed version Caption O Transmission unit 2 Rotary handle assembly with door lock device 3 Padlock device for open posi tion maximum 3 padlocks to be provided by the user 4 IP54 protection Supplied on request Min max distance from the front of the door without ac cessory 4 6 Min max distance from the front of the
35. 100048 0120QSL i N z i E e 19 v Doa 2 ds e E zy XN el Uu l 1 DAS Liette Tr 1 71 uo l L l o 1 a I l 1519 t C 9 in l l l 1 i l n l E j elg z x E SE 4 Bie ed e T T he e bg i ee oL ds o a K e n 12 bo DNA e xn i e d 2 S l 2 oo oo i az mz e 29 29 x x Xxx x Kk x S x o i a l 5 Sl re e lt i R STI o 2 l dd eee aan 12 Zy I la x amp T kat uv La 1 H 5x eee are K e St Ww LL 9 x o o z z e EES E o EE a lalo Cm melee m 89 a 9 m 7 o oj E ns Ro o om e m He LL N S S o Ka e les LE au pesce re 88 i l UA o RE ala E WW LJ T Ea LL Cu o a o x o o gt M zio E s xx lt x 3 lt S b S lol 8 UE Elele Coa Cm e Je Le 88 D E ala g Ad C C o IS 98 7 m lal Di L2 o 2 lt S x lt S lt 1SDC210015D0205 Wiring diagrams Electrical accessories for T1 T6 Auxiliary contacts A Ez d 79 A4 A4 A4 XA2 To T5 Te T2 T Pro T Ts XA7 T5 Te T5 T T5 Te T5 T XA6 T3 T2 T2 X2 y T5 Po T2 Fu To T Ts x7 US T5 T3 T pr Te T5 T4 X6 T2 XV 12 1
36. Tmax TA Tmax T5 Tmax T6 Tmax T7 250 320 400 630 630 800 800 1000 1250 10 320 320 400 630 630 800 3 3 3 3 690 690 690 690 750 750 750 8 8 8 8 1000 1000 1000 1000 3500 3500 3500 3500 N S H L V N S H L V N S H L S H L V 70 85 100 200 200 70 85 100 200 200 70 85 100 200 85 100 200 200 36 50 70 120 200 36 50 70 120 200 36 50 70 100 50 70 120 150 30 40 65 100 180 30 40 65 100 180 30 45 50 80 50 65 100 130 25 30 50 85 150 25 30 50 85 150 25 35 50 65 40 50 85 100 20 25 40 70 80 20 25 40 70 80 20 22 25 30 30 42 50 60 100 100 100 100 100 100 10096 10096 100 100 100 100 100 75 100 10096 10096 10096 10096 10096 10096 10096 10096 10096 10096 10096 10096 10096 100 100 100 75 100 10096 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 75 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 10096 10096 100 100 100 75 100 100 75 100 100 100 100 100 10096 100 10096 10096 100969 100 75 7596 75 75 100 75 75 75 154 187 220 440 660 154 187 220 440 660 154 187 220 440 187 220 440 440 75 6 105 154 264 440 75 6 105 154 264 440 15 6 105 154 220 105 154 264 330 63 84 143 220 396 63 84 143 220 396 63 94 5 105 176 105 143 220 286 52 5 63 105 187 330 52 5 63 105 187 330 52 5 73 5 105 143 84 105 187 220 40 52 5 84 154 176 40 52 5 84 154 176 40 46 52 5 63 63 88 2 105 132 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 10 9 8 7 15 10 8 8 A B 400 A A
37. 1 1 0 50 ip 102 0 20 10 1 10 0 05 104 105 0 02 102 S 10 6 i 10 102 107 10 102 108 lee KA gt Ims kA 8 690 V 690 V Pt 10 A2s Pt 109 A2s 10 eege m A 107 102 1 10 102 105 B 1 10 102 103 Le KA 18 Ims KA 8 4 25 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210E56F0001 1SDC210E58F0001 Specific let through energy curves T5 400 630 T6 630 800 1000 690 V 690 V Pt 10 Azs Ft 10 A s m 10 102 i 10 i 10 1 3 10 1 10 1 1 10 102 10 Ims KA 8 lms KA T7 800 1000 1250 1600 690 V Pt 109 A2s 10 10 10 107 8 1 10 10 10 2 ims KA 5 4 26 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210E60F0001 T4 250 T5 400 630
38. 400 440 V 400 440 V Ip kA Ip kA 108 102 10 102 1 208 258 168 B 1 E 102 1 10 102 103 E 10 1071 10 102 103 104 105 las KA IS Ims KA T3 250 T4 250 320 400 440 V 400 440 V Ip kA p kA 108 X 102 1004 8204 102 mm SBA S0A 250A 10 10 ei B 1 Z 1 1 10 102 10 1 10 102 103 lms KA 8 Ims KA 4 31 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210E70F0001 1SDC210E72F0001 Limitation curves T5 400 630 T6 630 800 1000 400 440 V 400 440 V Ip kA Ip kA 102 10 10 10 1 10 102 C Si 1 10 10 E E T7 800 1000 1250 1600 400 440 V Ip kA 10 10 10 1 8 1 10 10 10 ms KA 8 4 32 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210E74F0001
39. N w nm d PE DG M N N uou n0 IN WM INN NN WM uw MO No ZC E K51 o check 0 A AAA y XR1 I T 29 1 uo T L1 T12 AL iste mm c 4 T L2 T22 nal i naoso 3 T31 3 9 mosa 2 T TI L3 T32 WH xo L l gt r Le l XR1 d T 1 a UI LI C TM 7 1 gt Yoi y 9 T23 XO w i Ke SI Tue LEE 2 l T33 5 Bo RE f UI L3 IU 734 T43 H f UN KJ m cart 8 Ze Pr231 P l 5 l PR232 P 8 PR331 P ts i4 amp xi3 XV B T 8 r Z ali D E 7 B a D E T PR332 P w 9 E Three or four pole Four pole circuit breaker with PR231 P PR232 P PR331 P PR332 P electronic trip unit switch disconnector 5 15 1SDC210015D0205 Wiring diagrams Wiring diagram of the T7 circuit breakers State of operation Du o 3 l I Wf ke k51 Q XR1 m a TAL m2 gt 10 m oi TI L2 T22 012 Reg TI L3 T32 2314 gt XR1 T3 1 ren uA KT n S Tm 3 AQ 1 UI L2 ma C gt A T33 5 VIALS GE T4 6 39 Gett LL XO a Fa zb 1 T A X13 XV p B Ig a lda A SOA I E G EH St AE Ze ee G L L E I9 am 2l le T T9 i f LZ o noo D i i i N ou LG i3 EM EORR QA SECH H 16 Do ne ae ee ee a a TO URN iai Y PR332 P Three pole circuit breaker with PR332 P electronic trip unit residual current protection and U 690 V
40. Version T1 T2TMD T2PR221 T3 T4 TB T6 T7 AUX 250 V AC DC 1 open closed changeover contact pre cabled 1 release tripped changeover contac not cabled L L L B B B AUX 250 V AC DC 3 open closed changeover contacts pre cabled 1 release tripped changeover contac not cabled a a a E B B AUX 250 V AC DC 1 SA electronic release trip contact pre cabled 1 open closed changeover contact 1 release tripped changeover contac E AUX 250 V AC DC 2 open closed changeover contacts pre cabled 1 release tripped changeover contac B AUX 400 V AC 1 open closed changeover contact pre cabled 1 release tripped changeover contac E B B B AUX 400 V AC 2 open closed changeover contacts pre cabled E B B B AUX 24 V DC 1 open closed changeover contact pre cabled 1 release tripped changeover contac E AUX 24 V DC 2 open closed changeover contacts pre cabled B AUX 24 V DC 3 open closed changeover contacts pre cabled 1 release tripped changeover contac not cabled E E E E E B AUX SA 250 V AC 1 SA electronic release trip contac pre cabled a a B AUX MO 1 contact signalling manual remote not cabled a E E AUX RTC 24 V DC 1 contact signalling ready to close pre cabled B AUX RTC 250 V AC DC 1 contact signalling ready to close pre cabled L AUX SC 24 V DC 1 contact signalling closing springs charged pre cabled a AUX SC 250 V AC DC 1 contact signalling closing springs charged pre cabled B AUX E 1 open closed contact pre ca
41. T4 250 T5 400 630 1000 V 1000 V Ip kA Ip kA 102 102 10 10 1 1 i i NW NEUE Ims KAJ T6 1000 V Ip kA 102 10 1 2 1 10 102 E LW 8 4 37 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210E88F0001 Limitation curves T4 250 T5 400 630 1150 V 1150 V Ip kA Ip kA 102 102 10 10 B 1 1 10 10 1 10 102 lms KA lans KA 4 38 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210F70F0001 Temperature performances Circuit breakers with magnetic only or electronic trip units and switch disconnectors T1D 160 up to 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C Imax A Imax A Imax A Imax A FC 160 160 152 136 F 160 160 152 136 FC Front cable terminals F Front flat terminals lu A 170 165 160 155 150 145 140 135 130 125 120 115 110 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 TPC 4 39 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210E89F0001 Temperature performances Circuit breakers with magnetic only or electronic trip units and switch disconnectors T2 160 up to 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C Imax A Imax A Imax A Imax A F 160 1 153 6 0 96 140 8 0 88 128 0 8 EF 160 1 153 6 0 96 140 8 0 88 128 0 8 ES 160 1 153 6 0 96 140 8 0 8
42. 1SDA R1 N S lcu 415 V 36kA 50 kA 051241 051263 mm 051242 051264 051243 051265 051244 051266 051245 051267 051246 051268 250 2500 SAAT mm 1SDA R1 N S Icu 415V 36kA 50 kA 055105 055119 mE 055106 055120 055107 055121 055108 055122 055109 055123 055110 055124 SE 1SDA R1 N S Icu 415V 26 kA 50 kA 051252 051274 mE 051253 051275 051254 051276 051255 051277 051256 051278 051257 051279 051258 051280 051303 051307 051304 051308 051305 051309 051306 051810 1SDA R1 N S lcu 415 V 36kA 50 kA mea mem 0 055113 055127 055114 055128 055115 055129 055116 055130 055117 055131 055118 055132 63 630 80 800 100 1000 50 125 1250 50 160 1600 N 5096 200 2000 5096 250 2500 N 10096 125 1250 N 10096 160 1600 10096 200 2000 10096 250 2500 Thermomagnetic trip unit for generator protection TMG 63 400 80 400 100 400 125 400 160 480 200 600 250 750 see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210305F0004 T4 250 Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 N S H L V Thermomagnetic trip unit lcu 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 120 kA 200 kA TMDandTMA AAS LL 20 320 054171 054189 054207 054225 054243 32 320 054172 054190 054208 054226 054244 50 500 054173 054191 054
43. L 400 Hz I In MIN MED MAX 1 50 Hz Ka 1 400 Hz T2N 160 16 10 12 14 160 1 7 272 25 16 19 22 160 1 7 272 40 25 30 5 36 200 def 340 63 39 48 57 200 1 7 340 80 50 61 72 240 1 7 408 100 63 76 5 90 300 1 7 510 125 79 96 113 375 1 7 637 5 160 100 122 144 480 ET 816 T3 250 TMG 63 250 A 1 400 Hz I In MIN MED MAX 1 50 Hz Ka 1 400 Hz T3N 250 63 39 48 57 400 1 7 680 80 50 61 72 400 1 7 680 100 63 76 5 90 400 1 7 680 125 79 96 113 400 Wal 680 160 100 122 144 480 dat 816 200 126 153 180 600 ke 1020 250 157 191 225 750 1 7 1275 T3 250 TMD 63 125 A L 400 Hz I In MIN MED MAX 1 50 Hz Ka 1 400 Hz T3N 250 80 50 61 72 800 1a 1360 100 63 76 5 90 1000 1 7 1700 125 79 96 113 1250 1 7 2125 T4 250 TMD 20 50 A L 400 Hz I In MIN MED MAX 1 50 Hz Ka 1 400 Hz T4N 250 20 12 15 18 320 1 7 544 32 20 24 5 29 320 T 544 50 31 38 45 500 1 7 850 T4 250 320 TMA 80 250 A L 400 Hz L settings MIN 5xIn In MIN MED MAX 1 50 Hz Ka 1 400 Hz T4N 80 50 61 12 400 1 7 680 250 320 100 63 76 5 90 500 1 7 850 125 79 96 113 625 1 7 1060 160 100 122 144 800 1 7 1360 200 126 153 180 1000 1 7 1700 250 157 191 225 1250 1 7 2125 4 65 1SDC210015D0205 4 66 Special applications Use of apparatus at 400 Hz T5 400 630 TMA 320 500 A 1 400 Hz l settings MIN 5xIn In MIN MED MAX 1 50 Hz Ka 1 400 Hz TBN 320 201 244 288 1600 1 5 2400 400 630 400 252 306 360 2000 1 5 3000
44. 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C A MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX 16 13 18 12 18 12 dr 11 16 14 15 10 14 9 13 20 16 23 15 22 15 21 14 20 13 19 12 18 dl 16 25 20 29 19 28 18 26 18 25 16 23 15 22 14 20 32 26 37 25 35 24 34 22 32 21 30 20 28 18 26 40 32 46 31 44 29 42 28 40 26 38 25 35 23 33 50 40 58 39 55 37 53 35 50 33 47 31 44 28 41 63 51 72 49 69 46 66 44 63 41 59 39 55 36 51 80 64 92 62 88 59 84 56 80 53 75 49 70 46 65 100 81 115 77 110 74 105 70 100 66 94 61 88 57 81 125 101 144 96 138 92 131 88 125 82 117 77 109 71 102 160 129 184 123 176 118 168 112 160 105 150 98 140 91 130 For the T1 1p circuit breaker fitted with TMF fixed thermomagnetic trip unit only consider the column corresponding to the maximum adjustment of the TMD trip units Tmax T2 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C ia MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX 1 6 1 3 1 8 1 2 1 8 1 2 1 7 1 1 1 6 1 1 5 1 1 4 0 9 1 8 2 1 6 2 8 1 5 2 2 1 5 2 1 1 4 2 1 3 1 9 1 2 1 7 1 1 1 6 2 5 2 2 9 19 28 18 26 1 9 25 16 23 T5 32 2 1 4 2 3 2 26 37 25 35 24 34 22 32 241 3 19 28 18 26 4 32 46 31 44 29 42 28 4 26 37 24 35 23 32 5 4 57 89 55 37 53 3 5 5 33 4 7 3 43 28 4 6 3 5 1 72 49 69 46 66 44 63 Ai 59 38 55 36 54 8 64 92 62 88 59 84 56 8 52 75 4 9 T 45 6 5 10 8 115 7 7 11 7 4 10 5 7 10 6 5 9 3
45. x 1 1 Nm 165 B C 472 A D L D B 158 5 165 158 5 Y Y A Y Y d D z UU S n a 2 ul x ul 8 x 4 w S Y A Y Y Y 4 5 M4 B 2 S 1 Q A B C D E F ES EEN nee WEEN eA EE 50 80 115 85 53 5 53 5 SIS Bosom MTS 2251 565 1655 1SDC210K52F0001 6 67 1SDC210015D0205 Overall dimensions Accessories for Tmax T1 T2 T3 Caption Mechanical rear horizontal interlock between two T3 circuit breakers D Interlocking mechanism 2 Circuit breakers coupling plate D 440 3 Drilling template for all termi ui S k ZS nal versions Fhe 40 68 5 9925 134 25 27 1 5 28 7 2 IL E V j EJ D el A L QAQA a 165 L 165 e 6 5 S 6 5 u 1 P p u 1 T D ANNE Qo Z Sr Ko ai N P Pi i e i T s i m 7 Y M EU N Fe BALD de 8 L 1 i gl D S Caption Mechanical rear vertical interlock between two T3 circuit breakers D Interlocking mechanism
46. 87 5 25 25 7 i EE SECH LO ea pl e X E LI e e B E 3 9 94 5 M4 Y 8 E 6 55 1SDC210015D0205 Fixed version Front F 106 2 76 2 Overall dimensions Circuit breaker with RC221 222 residual current release Tmax T1 T2 T8 Fixing on sheet Rear flat horizontal HR 1312 101 2 67 67 187 187 Caption e Depth of the swi tchboard with circuit breaker face extending 3 Depth of the swi tchboard with circuit breaker face flush with door 3 Front terminals connection or cable 4 Low terminal covers with degree of protection IP40 6 56 T2 1SDC210J93F0001 67 187 TS 18DC210J95F0001 222
47. 1SDA R1 N S L Magnetic only trip unit MA Icu 415 V 36 kA 50 kA 120 kA 10 60 140 055068 055071 055074 25 150 350 055069 055072 055075 52 312 728 055070 055073 055076 80 480 1120 054296 054302 054308 100 600 1400 054297 054303 054309 195 750 1750 054298 054304 054310 160 oe 2240 054299 054305 054311 200 1200 2800 054300 054306 054312 1SDA R1 N S L Electronic trip unit for motor protection Icu 415V 36kA 50 kA 120 kA PR222MP 100 054522 054525 054528 PR222MP 160 054523 054526 054529 PR222MP 200 054524 054527 054530 1SDA R1 N S H L V Electronic trip unit mom 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 120 kA 200 kA PR221DS I 100 054000 054024 054048 054072 054096 PR221DS I 160 054001 054025 054049 054073 054097 PR221DS I 250 054002 054026 054050 054074 054098 T4 320 Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 N S H L V Electronic trip unit w n 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 120 kA 200 kA PR221DS I 320 054118 054126 054134 054142 054150 Note T2 T4 T5 and T6 in the three pole version equipped with PR221DS I electronic trip units and T7 in the three pole version equipped with PR231 P I electronic trip units can be used for motor protection see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 25 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210306F0004 7 26 Ordering codes Motor protection circuit breakers T5 400 Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals F
48. 1SDA R1 S H L V Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 50kA 70 kA 120 kA 150 kA PR231 P LS 800 061981 062658 062690 062722 PR231 P I 800 061980 062657 062689 062721 PR232 P LSI 800 061982 062659 062691 062723 PR331 P LSIG 800 061983 062660 062692 062724 8 PR332 P LI 800 061984 062661 062693 062725 E PR332 P LSI 800 061985 062662 062694 062726 8 PR332 P LSIG 800 061986 062663 062695 062727 PR332 P LSIRc 800 061987 062664 062696 062728 To allow the interchangeability of PR231 T7 T7M circuit breakers must be ordered specifying extra codes for its interchangeability See page 7 60 RC protection can be obtained only with 1SDA063869R1 toroid T7 800 M Fixed F 4 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 S H L V Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 50kA 70 kA 120 kA 150 kA PR231 P LS I 800 061989 062666 062698 062730 PR231 P 800 061988 062665 062697 062729 PR232 P LSI 800 061990 062667 062699 062731 PR331 P LSIG 800 061991 062668 062700 062732 PR332 P LI 800 061992 062669 062701 062733 PR332 P LSI 800 061993 062670 062702 062734 PR332 P LSIG 800 061994 062671 0627038 062735 PR332 P LSIRc 800 061995 062672 062704 062736 9 To allow the interchangeability of PR231 T7 T7M circuit breakers must be ordered specifying extra codes for its interchangeability See page 7 60 RC protection can be obtained only with 1SDA063869R1 toroid
49. E cof O1 125 T Lhe R70 MIN 146 5 1SDC210L68F0001 1SDC210015D0205 Caption e Mechanical vertical interlock for withdrawable circuit breakers Mechanical horizontal inter lock for withdrawable circuit breakers 5 Sheet drilling for wire passage of the mechanical interlock Mechanical interlock for withdrawable circuit breakers Y 1000 MAX R70 MIN 80 e 152 NR70 MIN GC e R70 MIN YR70 MIN x 1000 MAX L 175 1SDC210L68F0001 6 87 1SDC210015D0205 Overall dimensions Distances to be respected Insulation distances for installation in metallic cubicle
50. 02 Rear vertical terminal 02 Rear segregation for front terminals Flange for compartment door 5 Overall dimensions of the aux iliary contact terminals Insulating protection 07 Rear spread terminals 4 poles Tightening torque 18 Nm Rear spread terminals 3 poles 1SDC210L93F0001 6 53 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210L92F0001 Overall dimensions Tmax T7M Withdrawable circuit breaker Front extended spread ES GER 9 ab H 8 Pr ER S ia e 3 if ina S Drilling templates of the compartment door 278 5 165 5 c Y D 2 109 5 ae LTA uv mM BENI o wl t i d j T r D X SES T w 103 LE N M 6 2 l ER X Kes 2 Y 26 25 8 mE 153 75 153 75 8 T LL R min 200 8 Y Drilling templates for support sheet 3 NN Y 50 5 20 E r 8 tbe gt je SE E THERE o d e T u T or 1 SCH o 2 320 5 S le N 14 b N g DI
51. B A A A B C E mm mm mm 25 20 20 25 20 20 50 25 20 30 25 250 30 25 250 5 e 350 25 20 500 20 10 c e For Ub 440 V and T6L all versions distances A 100 mm E O For Un 440 V and lt 690 V A 60 mm C 45 mm and lt 690 V e Note For the insulation distances of the 1000 V circuit breakers please ask ABB SACE yy S Minimum centre distance between two circuit breakers side by side or superimposed For assembly side by side or superimposed check that the connection busbars or cables do not reduce the air insulation distance Minimum centre distance for two circuit breakers side by side Circuit breaker width mm Centre distance I mm 3 poles 4 poles 3 poles 4 poles 76 102 76 102 T2 90 120 90 120 T3 105 140 105 140 T4 105 140 1059 1400 e LES 140 186 1400 1860 T6 210 280 210 280 i T 210 280 210 280 i T4 For Ub 500 V and lt 690 V minimum centre mm 3 poles 145 minimum centre mm 4 poles 184 T5 For Ub 500 V and lt 690 V minimum centre mm 3 poles 180 minimum centre mm 4 poles 224 Minimum centre distance for superimposed circuit breakers H mm 60 T2 90 d 140 T 160 1 j T5 160 2 3 T6 180 H 17 180 a H Caption Dn Connection not insulated 3 Insulated cable 3 Cable terminal Note The dimensions shown apply for operating voltage Ub up to 690 V The dimensions to be respected must be added to the maximum dimensions of the
52. E x Te oM Position switch limit Switch break contact Position switch limit switch change over break before make contact Contactor contact open in the unoperated posi tion Circuit breaker discon nector with automatic trip unit Switch disconnector on load isolating switch Operating device general symbol Thermal relay Instantaneous overcurrent or rate of rise relay Overcurrent relay with adjustable short time lag characteristic Overcurrent relay with inverse short time lag characteristic Overcurrent relay with inverse long time lag char acteristic Earth fault overcurrent relay with inverse short time lag characteristic Phase balance current relay Gest gt Differential current relay Phase failure detection relay in a three phase system Locked rotor detection relay operating by current sensing Lamp general symbol Mechanical interlock between two devices Operated by electric motor Motor with series ener gization Screen shield it may be drawn in any convenient shape Equipotentiality Voltage transformer Winding of three phase transformer connection star Current sensing element 1SDC210015D0205 Wiring diagrams Wiring diagram of the T1 T6 circuit breakers
53. Front for copper aluminium cables FC CuAl 2x240 mm 70 70 4 70 Se zb 20 25 21 5 9 Nm 134 120 5 De EE Ki A 1 i 1 KEE x 1SDC210112F0001 x d 1SDC210113F0001 630A Front for copper aluminium cables FC CuAI 3x185 mm 70 70 70 T i 20 59 19 255 43 Nm Y L o Nm 120 5 EI 1SDC210H 4F0001 1SDC210I15F0001 800A Front for copper aluminium cables FC CuAl 4x150 mm gee Os gg Dg 59 B19 Y 26 1 26 1 fl d 43 Nm E QG 9 Nm Z OG TE LOG L ero 69 eod 120 5 1SDC210117F0001 x f 1 x lt 1SDC210116F0001 I Q Q e e gt 6 19 1SDC210015D0205 630A 800A He di Y imensions 280 e79 0 679 p Lo T Overall d Tmax T6 Front extended E
54. 51 L1 L2 L d ee E For o X zb K51 SE Ss xs 3 P ZW d L I x3 2 x3 1 i x37 ES ri x3 i i KN sesE i xg S51 i ES E MEL YO Se I E so3 f ETE aa je SET A T PR222MP 3 l 97 95 7 S U LI vol d4 a i sieur Pape oper Ee 3 7 S A15 1I 8 Ls 98 96 K a 4 6 4 zzp H1 K a E ee M x Mil sa E S 8 E 9 8 As an alternative to generic contact 0 1 5 25 1SDC210015D0205 Wiring diagrams Electrical accessories for T7 d undervoltage ing an i los ism opening c Motor operating mechan releases B C Q B Q Q P P 1000462501 ZOdst lt E i l sis als 5 E N N ol a to dip mo mle o elm 4 L lt i ta S zs 9 td j UI E E R Q 12 lt EE Kb EE a l j a d E ale l 58 RW ala Lay He elm H I Era QI ia L o zw LS i TU oie C T E E t 1 oLu o 2 12 3 a B al e 5 o aj a aa eee ee ch e 2 em 4 Cu id a a o E E R H 12 lt z lt wl m SI x m Aur js pes NI M E e Cmte dd Cu L a mot NIT l t T cle
55. 1SDA R1 N S H L V Vieni id trip unit Pan 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 120 kA 200 kA 20 320 054180 054198 054216 054234 054252 32 320 054181 054199 054217 054235 054253 50 500 054182 054200 054218 054236 054254 8 80 400 800 054183 054201 054219 054237 054255 E 100 500 1000 054184 054202 054220 054238 054256 E N 50 195 625 1250 054185 054208 054221 054230 054257 N 50 160 800 1600 054186 054204 054222 054240 054258 N 50 200 1000 2000 054187 054205 054223 054241 054259 N 50 250 1250 2500 054188 054206 054224 054242 054260 N 100 125 625 1250 054271 054275 054279 054283 054287 N 100 160 800 1600 054272 054276 054280 054284 054288 N 100 200 1000 2000 054273 054277 054281 054285 054289 N 100 250 1250 2500 054274 054278 054282 054286 054290 1SDA R1 N S H L V Electronic trip unit iB 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 120 kA 200 kA PR221DS LS 100 054009 054033 054057 054081 054105 PR221DS LS I 160 054010 054034 054058 054082 054106 PR221DS LS l 250 054011 054035 054059 054083 054107 PR221DS 100 054012 054036 054060 054084 054108 PR221DS I 160 054013 054037 054061 054085 054109 PR221DS4 250 054014 054038 054062 054086 054110 PR 22DS PAS 100 054015 054039 054063 054087 054111 PR 22DS PAS 160 054016 054040 054064 054088 054112 PR22DS PAS 250 054017 054041 054065 054089 054113 PR222DS P LSIG 100 054018 054042 054066 054090 054114 PR222DS P LSIG 160 054019 054043 054067 054091 054115 PR222DS P LSIG 250 054020 054044
56. 78 71 5 70 1 5 E E O x L2 g 3 XL S E CH a S 79 1 e 1 1 Nm Lo MB i n S 75 103 5 8 23 102 8 Drilling templates of the compartment door 83 78 2 92 122 gt J 46 D amp Y eo Y m Y eo Y y f E g X HX y 4X desch s a an db ee ebe Ge rk aera ESL 8 Y Y Y Y 9 With flange and Without flange and Without flange and Without flange and circuit breaker face circuit breaker face circuit breaker face circuit breaker face flush with door flush with door extending 3 POLES extending 4 POLES 3 4 POLES 3 4 POLES Drilling templates for support sheet For front terminals For rear terminals 30 30 30 30 30 30 Q 45 M4 45 M4 Ge Y Y 45 M Y a Dy Si is DO m Y J o Hei d d g 3 2 B S X x S X 5 X X x x 8 30 30 UO 30 90 30430 8 4 y A EDD DOD Y 45 M v 8 SZ Y 22 Y E 3 POLES 4 POLES 3 POLES 4 POLES 6 5 1SDC210015D0205 Overall dimensions Tmax T2 Terminals Front F Front for copper cables FC Cu Front for copper aluminium cables FC CuAl 95 mm MAK 20 uode 17 5 14x14 12 M 65 7 Nm 1SDC210H28F0001 1SDC210H29F0001 1SDC210H30F0001 Caption Front for copper aluminium cables FC CuAl 185 mm Qe Front extended terminals
57. I 1 sz a jo 3 S B Re Gi oO E 3 z ko x p Ix 010 SIV i i i i 5 5 8 m8 o ML o a 2 IN K e us m x I lt g i i TU ES 0 L o 5 o E e Q om S C ox Zz IN 3 m i ER Jx B am e etu et PEN ue eedem 1 a 5 s S E O ZS ml x om x m Ix i i i l i D o 9 ie o MS o c zx S in S E zi ic Ei x x m l o Sy g a Jo o e bi D o i5 g E o e g e S z ell z amp 2 De lass Sec ete es ce eo jx S S Ka e a an s a N N x x o z b cues 2 EAE A N x o LAM X Jol lt T x Ka E o E O N S E E a 2 a 2 39vd snolA38d WOH4 5 35 1SDC210015D0205 Wiring diagrams Automatic transfer switch ATSO10 for T7 Automatic transfer switch ATSO10 for the automatic transfer switch of the two T7 circuit breakers with safety auxiliary voltage supply in alternating current AC kd 40 15 e cf Age Q CB N O CB N C CB E O CB E C A i E NX Al 42 43 44 14 13 12 11 kd X12 GIL 02 GTB Aut XI2ACi1 020 XIS Au 3 1 Kos Ti I NE xveci xv ec xv eut f xv ci xv ect xv eu I S33M SE i 1 i i 1 i Q2 l Q1 l l I i ch i a i U G M C M i Y T LN i i YO Y U i xy ci2 xv C2 xveU2 yxy ci2 xv C2 xveU2 i ji Jj l WOUND ORE DUE K RN EE L b X12 YCci2 X12 Y C2 X15 U2 X12 7C12 X12 7 C2 X15
58. 1SDC210H50F0001 6 10 1SDC210015D0205 Fixed circuit breaker Caption Overall dimensions Tmax T4 Fixing on sheet Overall dimensions with cabled 105 GP accessories mounted SOR C 525 UVR C RC222 223 35 35 35 2 Overall dimensions with cabled mu auxiliary contacts mounted PEN 9669 only 3Q 1SY N N 2 7 405 5 nl a il 8 x d s b e epg Y S 140 4P 8 Z RS 139 8 Flange for Drilling templates of the compartment door compartment door 117 115 107 M a Kee ge v En 2 xx Xz x X L X B Y E S a Y 2 Y 2 3 4 POLES 3 4 POLES With flange Without flange Drilling templates for support sheet For front terminals For rear terminals 35 70 5 5 M5 5 5 M5 55M5 y 5 5 M5 F Y M Y d WD M INT ITD 17 5 10 E 8 S c 8 17 5 S lw 70 m x xX X X N S X xt g Re Xx Lee S B ele amp ZEN PPE S BID OD S Y E Y 2 S 25 35 35 B 025 35 35 35 8 a Y 3 POLES 4 POLES 3 POLES 4 POLES 6 11 1SDC210015D0205 Terminals Caption Front terminals for cable con nection 2x150 mm
59. Circuit breakers T2 T4 T5 T6 T4 T5 T6 T7 E S a o D a a a a m S 9 9 ra o4 z 3 Trip units S g q S S N a a 9 S a S A ES E Ls amp E amp a m Accessories TT1 Test unit B mH RS E El PRO10 T Test unit E E E E PRO21 K Signalling unit E E El E E FDU Front display unit E E L HMIO30 Interface on the front of switchgear L L D VM210 Voltage measuring unit R X3 Connectors E mo E HO mo X4 Connectors E H mo mo X13 Connectors SHORT LONG E E L L L L BTOSO Wireless communication unit DW E L E L E MOE E AUX E included Motor operator E L AUX E Auxiliary contacts L EP010 Field Bus plug CT Current transformers L L L E E PR212 Cl Contactor control unit D Extracode for interchangeability E Rating plugs E E El L PROSO B Power supply unit E PR330 D M Communication module PR330 V Voltage measuring module E PR330 R Actuator module L CT Sensor Current sensors SW210 Bus switch Accessories not compatible Accessories not compatible Compulsory 3 45 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210D04F0001 1SDC210D03F0001 3 46 Accessories Test and configuration accessories SACE PRO010 T test and configuration unit The SACE PRO10 T unit is an instrument capable of performing the Test programming and param eter reading functions for the protection units equipping SACE Is
60. 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 TPC 1SDC210F65F0001 4 44 1SDC210015D0205 T5 400 and T5D 400 up to 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C Imax A l Imax A L Imax A l Imax A l Fixed FC 400 1 400 1 400 1 352 0 88 F 400 1 400 1 400 1 352 0 88 R HR 400 1 400 1 400 1 352 0 88 R VR 400 1 400 1 400 1 368 0 92 FC Front cables terminals F Front flat terminals R HR Rear terminals horizontal R VR Rear terminals vertical lu A 405 400 395 390 385 380 FC F R HR 375 370 365 360 355 350 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 TPC 1SDC210E96F0001 T5 400 and T5D 400 up to 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C Imax A 1 Imax A l Imax A Plug in FC 400 1 400 1 Withdrawable F 400 1 400 1 368 0 92 336 0 84 1 i HR 400 1 400 VR 400 1 400 FC Front cables terminals F Front flat terminals HR Rear flat horizontal terminals VR Rear flat vertical terminals lu A 405 400 395 390 385 380 375 370 365 HR FC F 360 355 350 345 340 335 330 TPC 1SDC210E97F0001 4 45 1SDC210015D0205 Temperature performances Circuit breakers with magnetic only or electronic trip units and switch disconnectors T5 630 and T5D 630 up to 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C Imax A l Imax A L Imax A L Imax A l Fixed FC 630 1 580 0 92 529 0 84 479 0 76 F 630 1 580 0 92 529 0 84 479 0 76 R HR 630 1 580 0 92 529 0 84 4
61. 1SDA R1 N S L Electronic trip unit for motor protection Icu 415V 36kA 50 kA 120 kA PR222MP 320 054551 054553 054555 PR222MP 400 054552 054554 054556 1SDA R1 N S H L V Electronic trip unit MB 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 120 kA 200 kA PR221DS I 320 054318 054334 054350 054366 054382 PR221DS I 400 054319 054335 054351 054367 054383 T5 630 Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 N S H L V Electronic trip unit ais 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 120 kA 200 kA PR221DS I 630 054397 054405 054413 054421 054429 T6 630 Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 N S H L Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 26 kA 50 kA 70 kA 100 kA PR221DS 630 060227 060237 060247 060257 T6 800 Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 N S H L Electronic trip unit for motor protection Icu 415V 36kA 50 kA 70 kA 100 kA PR222MP 630 060311 060312 060313 060314 1SDA R1 N S H L Electronic trip unit Icu 415V 36kA 50 kA 70 kA 100 kA PR221DS 800 060269 060279 060290 060300 Note T2 T4 T5 and T6 in the three pole version equipped with PR221DS I electronic trip units and T7 in the three pole version equipped with PR231 P I electronic trip units can be used for motor protection see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 1SDC210015D0205 T7 800 Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 S H L V Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 50kA 70 kA
62. 5 26 1SDC210015D0205 Signalling contacts 21A 22A 31A A4 A4 x12 qT T 12 L I T2 T3 q T42 qT Un qa T2 T32 Ts qe Un mE e MEM XV 12 14 22 24 32 34 44 42 12 144 22 624 22 34 22 44 xr qoem ene Quo ea eue quae eue al zl ale a a 9 al zl a a a a 9 3 S 8 8 8 3 8 3 8 amp 2 4 2 4 S75E 1 S75E 2 1 1 2 f 2 f A1 Q 1 Q 2 Q 3 SY Q 1 Q 2 Q 3 Q 4 A3 S75T 1 S75T 2 1 4 1 4 2 5751 1 5751 2 1 1 Zo 5 x E 5 5 E S 5 5 XV n z 31 n on 2 5 n x12 ur Um UE Um UT UE UE Um XF 101 en 121 131 LEM 6151 A4 Z A4 E S 9 a 9 Auxiliary circuits of the PR331 P and PR332 P trip units xr AA xF 42A E 1 ty kreeg 1 M E d E l l Uaux Uaux l om mm I l x13 qe Te poss m Te qus qe Te Toz Tess XV LS k2 oss ec k2 x15 Sp 62 k2 985 o 2 p E b S z 2 2 N 2 2 S g e S E Q 5 oul 3 H H vert pn 2 tz Al K51 K51 Kai K51 S51 P1 KS S51 P1 K51 SZm DFi SZout DFout GZim DBin GZout DBout A A N PR3I31 P PRI32 P 2 3 2 E E B 3 XV ews ew 955 ows ow K e 955 X13 i w3 i w4 95S i w3 i w4 Lu Le LES a p d aa r 4 db cp zx jl I 8 A4 NJ NI S L T L 8 l li L T eo A B
63. 1SDC210L02F0001 Rmin 200 1SDC210K99F0001 1SDC210015D0205 Caption Protection kit IP42 for T4 fixed OO IP42 protection 199 i 2 Compartment door sheet f Ja 1 steel arilling 35 MH M rg 3 Spacing when equipped with SOR C UVR C RC221 222 a 103 8 pA i a 1SDC210Z86F0001 Caption Protection kit IP42 for T5 fixed D IP42 protection S 2 Compartment door sheet steel drilling 8 Spacing when equipped with SOR C UVR C RC221 222 a Spacing when equipped with AUX C DO 1SY only 1SDC210Z86F0001 6 77 1SDC210015D0205 Overall dimensions Accessories for Tmax T6 Fixed version Rotary handle operating mechanism on the compartment door 5 5 Y 2 5 5 Caption 103 5 85 500 110 500 4 33 19 68 Gi Transmission unit Rotary handle assembly with ge e K 9 door lock device 4 fa 7 1055 3 Padlock device for open K L BO position maximum 2 x padlocks to be provided i by the user IP54 protection supplied l on request 1SDC210L03F0001 s ER in max distance from the 41 5 i gt 0 12 front of the door without ac Y cessory 4 3 35 19 68 1 ei R31 5 b 1SDC210L04F0001 Drilling of compartment door in max distance from
64. Front terminals for multicable connection 3 High terminal covers with degree of protection IPAO Caption Insulating barriers between phases compulsory 6 12 Overall dimensions Tmax T4 Front F MAX 25 mg j Y prm ess e qe agp E nox 8 S U x 2 1SDC210H61F0001 Front for copper cables FC Cu 20 18 x18 10 Nm 84 75 1SDC210H62F0001 Front multicable MC 105 3P 52 5 35 35 35 2 y 8 HJ sg N Hd D Vi N 2 L x S d E LO N o 3 RA e eoo E 3 Y PH so E 140 4P 3 Front extended spread ES 102 5 T 1SDC210H67F0001 Front for copper aluminium cables FC CuAI 1SDC210H66F0001 25 9 18 9Nm 31 Nm SG 2 S x 1 103 5 18 16 Nm A amp L wo Es E zx co i S 4 X d N d E wm 6 Nm 28 2 6 Nm 1 165 E
65. is rb 3 H Ki T e A x S e X e d T E Z M wiped U A had AR AT dT di 189 H VH ia Na ud Zei af 13 9 i fR 6 Y D am J 1SDH000529R0121 278 5 i 17 165 5 y S x AY 9 A Y E Ekel D olo M 109 5 IN EEE B ILE 103 E o e l i Y E pX X z 29 o d E EI 9 X XS 1 T co IN E o i S 26 25 3 153 75 153 75 3 R min 200 8 N Y Drilling templates for support sheet 20 50 E A d 00 3l S D N o 1SDC210L57F0001 l 320 5 12 Sha LT Wi 2 4X x E Oley z D E i I 8 Y 6 52 1SDC210M07F0001 1SDC210L64F0001 Standard 287 II 160 206 219 Ronis 291 Caption 000 OO 000 do Drilling a hole in the sheet metal door to the compart ment with the flange for the RS VR HR EF ES terminals Rear segregation for rear terminals Flange fixing screws Tightening torque 1 5 Nm Drilling template for fixing onto support sheet Front terminals Rear segregation for front terminals Flange for compartment door nsulating protection Spread terminals Overall dimensions of auxil iary contact terminal IV 230 276 289 Profalux Kirk Castell 299 298 328 1SDC210015D0205 Overall dimensions
66. Service current Ib 200 A Circuit breaker T4 250 In 250A Desired magnetic protection 2000 A Magnetic threshold value to be set therefore in this specific case the setting for the adjustment value for the magnetic threshold is Set 2000 2222 A roughly equal to 9 In 0 9 4 63 1SDC210015D0205 4 64 Special applications Use of apparatus at 400 Hz At high frequencies the performances of the circuit breakers are reclassified to take the following phenomena into account e the increase in the skin effect and increase in the inductive reactance in a way directly propor tional to the frequency cause overheating of the conductor or of the copper components which normally carry the current in the circuit breaker e the elongation of the hysteresis ring and the reduction in the magnetic saturation value with consequent variation in the forces associated with the magnetic field at a given current value In general these phenomena have effects on the behaviour of both the thermomagnetic releases and of the elements of the circuit breaker for interrupting the current The following tables refer to circuit breakers with thermomagnetic releases with a breaking capacity of less than 36 kA This value is normally more than sufficient for protection of 400 Hz plants normally characterised by fairly low short circuit currents As can be seen from the data indicated the trip threshold of th
67. ua Ziel d Le xa x8 so l ZE x Eai xv 12 X7 5 XA751 e we ec nn z E XV 9 95 X7 2 xa72 7 d m E I Ke Xv 98 X7 4 xa74 AUX E E d l l A14 i V AEA MOE E l i x3 21 c i nal i xs 1 f Gl AT Rayo j G TI L2 Xc 2 Xc i Xc 3 Xc 4 CP T if xe Ul xag MER x3 4 Dell J scEA soE l 3 au C11X8C11 ang 2 R 4 p 4 x3 3i l WN CICI L 4 K 1 1 1 xv A1 X8 1 xag 5 el e i i vol zi i A17 i x3 i Sec i l i YO S51 l E l l EE nq 1 I PR222DS PD l l PR2230S 20 o PR223EF i i LL M d M NE J i H l l ll I Ny 54 X894 YAR 5 i e m I E l XV p02 X62 XAB 1 5 1 8 l amp EE 2 E PR222DS PD PR223DS or PR223EF electronic trip unit connected with the FDU front display unit and with the AUX E auxiliary contacts 146 Q ET A we ee 7 TT 1 K51 A12 I La _ xvi X71 KAT TY i H e d WH wm I XA XB so i Lae I Parag ad Sc DEEN e e 9 SE E E AC A X7 2 XA7 M XV e25 l i xc l XC sy 2 ji NV 98 X7 XA7 41 AUX E ka i l GG Ulrich 0 Se AM i l x3 21 na E i xs 1i i u
68. 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210F33F0001 1SDC21036FF0001 T7 800 1000 1250 1600 PR332 P L Function according to IEC 60255 3 k 0 14 a 0 02 10 10 x In 1SDC210F37F0001 T7 800 1000 1250 1600 PR332 P L Function according to IEC 60255 3 k 213 5 a 1 IEC 60255 3 102 xin T7 800 1000 1250 1600 PR332 P L Function according to IEC 60255 3 IEC 60255 3 102 x In 1SDC210F39F0001 T7 800 1000 1250 1600 PR332 P U Function k 0 14 a 0 02 xIn 4 11 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210F38F0001 1SDC210F48F0001 Trip curves for power distribution Circuit breakers with electronic trip units T7 800 1000 1250 1600 T7 800 1000 1250 1600 PR332 P with PR330 V PR332 P with PR330 V UV Function OV Function k 13 5 a 1 B T7 800 1000 1250 1600 T7 800 1000 1250 1600 PR332 P with PR330 V PR332 P with PR330 V RV Function RP Function 0 1 0 4 a F K R o o M o E o o o co To 1SDC210F51F0001 442 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210F50F0001 1SDC210F52F0001 Trip curves for zone selectivity Circuit breakers with PR223EF trip unit T4L 250 320 T5L 400 630 T6L 630 800 1000 PR223EF Vaux ON L S EF Functions Note The dotted curve of function L corresponds to the maximum delay t
69. PR223DS Auxiliary power supply galvanically insulated 24 V DC 2096 Maximum ripple x 596 Inrush current 24 V 4A for 0 5 ms Rated current 24 V 80mA Rated power 24 V 2W 2 21 1SDC210015D0205 PR231 P Protection L Against overload Socket for TT1 test unit Rating Plug Dip switch for network frequency PR231 P Protection functions and parameterisations Circuit breakers for power distribution Electronic trip units PR231 P The PR231 P trip unit is the basic trip unit for Tmax T7 It provides protection functions against overload L and short circuit S I version PR231 P LS I with this version by moving the dedicated dip switch you can choose whether to have protection S or protection Alternatively the version with only the protection function against instantaneous short circuit is available version PR231 P I see also page 2 45 and following Setting the trip parameters of the PR231 P trip unit is made directly on the front of the circuit breaker by means of dip switches and there is only one for the phases and the neutral so it is possible to set the protection threshold at 50 or at 100 of the phase protection To guarantee protection of the installation by means of the PR231 P protection trip unit it is necessary to select the rated network frequency 50 60 Hz by means of the special dip switch Interchangeability of PR231 P can be requested by means of the dedicated ordering code 1S
70. Trip units for T5 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles Thermomagnetic trip unit TMA N 50 N 100 TMA 320 3200 320 1600 3200 054723 054725 054731 TMA 400 4000 400 2000 4000 054724 054726 054732 TMA 500 5000 500 2500 5000 054727 054729 054733 Thermomagnetic trip 1SDA R1 unit for generator protection TMG 3 poles 4 poles TMG 320 1600 320 800 1600 055093 055101 TMG 400 2000 400 1000 2000 055098 055102 TMG 500 2500 500 1250 2500 055099 055103 1SDA R1 Electronic trip unit 3 poles 4 poles PR221DS LS I 320 054691 054699 PR221DS LS I 400 054692 054700 PR221DS LS I 630 054707 055159 PR221DS 320 054693 054701 PR221DS 400 054694 054702 PR221DS 630 054708 055160 PR222DS P LSI 320 054695 054703 PR222DS P LSI 400 054696 054704 PR222DS P LSI 630 054709 055161 PR222DS P LSIG 320 054697 054705 PR222DS P LSIG 400 054698 054706 PR222DS P LSIG 630 054710 055162 PR222DS PD LSI 320 054711 054715 PR222DS PD LSI 400 054712 054716 PR222DS PD LSI 630 054719 054721 PR222DS PD LSIG 320 054713 054717 PR222DS PD LSIG 400 054714 054718 PR222DS PD LSIG 630 054720 054722 PR223DS 320 059567 059568 PR223DS 400 059569 059570 PR223DS 630 059571 059572 Electronic trip unit 1SDA R1 for motor protection 3 poles PR222MP 320 054735 PR222MP 400 054736 see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 39 1SDC210015D0205 Ordering codes Trip
71. l CoCo on 1 CB E on RS Wee I o T LOAD off l l E j Caption VN Mains voltage CB N Normal line circuit breaker closed GE Generator VE Emergency line voltage CoCo Enable switching to emergency line CB E Emergency line circuit breaker closed LOAD Disconnection of lower priority connected loads 3 48 1SDC210015D0205 Side panel settings KE I LN Ou ums LE iesu Lid UN ieee GO 4 CRI TLOM LI Die F L E b iem Dx Tida Ti EN 112 7 1 4 Ge Ha Ta GES BET 8 14 81 a m Ti 1 CB QD 1SDC210D06F0001 Front panel 1SDC210D07F0001 Caption 1 Selectors to set the under and over voltage thresholds 2 Dip switches to set rated voltage normal single phase or three phase line mains frequency switching strategy 3 Switching delay time settings for T1 T5 Caption 1 Status of the ATSO10 unit and logic 2 Operating mode selector 3 Normal line check 4 Normal line circuit breaker status 5 Voltage on the emergency line 6 Emergency line circuit breaker status 7 Generator status 3 49 1SDC210015D0205 L1 V t 1SDC210D08F0001 1SDC210D38F0001 1SDC210D09F0001 3 50 Accessories Installation accessories and spare parts Bracket for fixing on DIN rail This is applied to the fixed circuit breaker and allows installation on standardized DIN EN 50022 rails It simplifies assembly of the T1 T2 T3 circuit breakers in stan
72. 063417 see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210247F0004 T4 250 Fixed F 4 Poles Front terminals for copper cables FC Cu 1SDA R1 rns 7 Icu 1000 V AC 20 kA Thermomagnetic trip unit Icu 1150 V AC 12 kA TMD and TMA Icu 1000 V DC 40 kA 32 320 054497 EE 50 500 054498 80 400 800 054499 100 500 1000 054500 B 125 625 1250 054801 E 160 800 1600 054502 B 200 1000 2000 054503 250 1250 2500 054504 1SDA R1 L V Icu 1000 V AC 12 kA 20 kA Electronic trip unit Icu 1150 V AC 129 kA PR221DS LS I 320 063477 063485 SERGE PR221DS 320 063478 063486 PR222DS P LSI 320 063479 063487 PR222DS P LSIG 320 063480 063488 PR221DS LS 400 054535 054530 PR221DS 400 054536 054540 PR222DS P LSI 400 054537 054541 PR222DS P LSIG 400 054538 054542 PR222MP 320 063456 PR222MP 400 063457 1SDA R1 L V Icu 1000 V AC 12 kA 20 kA Electronic trip unit Icu 1150 V AC 12 kA _ PR221DS LS I 320 063481 063489 PR221DS 320 063482 063490 PR222DS P LSI 320 063483 063491 PR222DS P LSIG 320 063484 063492 PR221DS LS I 400 063440 063444 PR221DS 400 063441 063445 PR222DS P LSI 400 063442 063446 PR222DS P LSIG 400 063443 063447 see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 29 1SDC210015D0205 ities
73. 900 850 800 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 TPC 1SDC210F58F0001 4 55 1SDC210015D0205 Temperature performances Circuit breakers with magnetic only or electronic trip units and switch disconnectors T7 S H L 1600 up to 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C and T7D 1600 Imax A l Imax A L Imax A L Imax A l VR 1600 1 1537 0 96 1403 0 88 1255 0 78 Fixed EF HR 1600 1 1481 0 93 1352 0 85 1209 0 76 EF Extended front VR Rear flat vertical HR Rear flat horizontal lu A 1700 1600 1500 VR 1400 EF HR 1300 1200 1100 1000 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 TPC T7 S H L 1600 up to 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C and T D 1600 Imax A L Imax A L Imax A L Imax A L VR 1600 1 1481 0 93 1352 0 85 1209 0 76 Withdrawable EF HR 1600 1 1280 0 80 1168 0 73 1045 0 65 EF Extended front VR Rear flat vertical HR Rear flat horizontal lu A 1700 1600 1500 VR 1400 1300 1200 EF HR 1100 1000 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 T C 4 56 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210F59F0001 1SDC210F60F0001 Temperature performances Circuit breakers with thermomagnetic trip units Tmax T1 and T1 1P
74. ENTER button to confirm data or change pages Alarm LED Cursor UP button Cursor DOWN button Warning indicator LED Button to exit submenus or cancel operations ESC Rating Plug barred Info test push button PR332 P with PR330 V Cursor UP button ENTER button to confirm data or change pages Cursor DOWN button PR330 V measurement module Alarm LED Selector for setting the voltage source for PR330 V EXT TEST INT PR330 V power supply LED Warning indicator LED Rating Plug Info test push button 1SDC210B58F0001 Button to exit submenus or cancel operations ESC 2 27 1SDC210015D0205 Circuit breakers for power distribution Electronic trip units PR332 P Protection functions and parameterisations p au Relation Thermal Zone 1 Protection functions Trip threshold Trip curves Excludability t f memory selectivity Against overload with inverse 2 04 1xIn Step 0 01 xin at3xl long time delay trip according to Trip between 1 05 1 2 xl 3 144s step 3s 8 um 8 IEC 60947 2 Standard SZ or in p MME Ser 1096 up to 6 x In Fa accordance with the EC 60255 3 ES 20 above 6 x In Standard E f c 9 are 0 4 1 x In step 0 01xIn at3xl z f o 8 Trip between 1 05 1 2 x 2 3 1448 step 3s E F S m Tolerance 10 up to 6 x In WEE 20 above 6 x In Against short circuit with short
75. 115 5 27 Y 15 UI R 200 MIN With flange 6 70 1SDC210K60F0001 R 200 MIN Without flange 1SDC210K61F0001 Ki ei 1SDC210K54F0001 Det A 80 Flange for the compartment door I FS 1SDC210K59F0001 138 76 x 1SDC210K62F0001 1SDC210015D0205 Caption Motor operator O Overall dimensions with cabled T4 auxiliary contacts mounted only 3Q 1SY 55 105 Flange for the compartment door 1 1 Nm supplied as standard X uN 76 138 x x 1SDC210K66F0001 i Drilling template for support sheet T4 35 25 5 M5 88 176 x x ie Y 1SDC210K69F0001 3 POLES 105 BB 191 5 Y E LM Z 2 lo e T 5 5 B 3 Su PF X Sa
76. 5 1SDC210015D0205 5 2 Wiring diagrams Information for reading Circuit breakers T1 T6 State of operation represented The diagram is shown in the following conditions plug in version circuit breaker open and racked in contactor for motor starting open circuits de energised trip units not tripped motor operator with springs charged Version The diagram shows a circuit breaker or switch disconnector in the plug in version only T2 T3 T4 and T5 or in the withdrawable version T6 The diagram is also valid for the fixed and withdrawable version circuit breakers or switch disconnectors With the fixed version circuit breakers or switch disconnectors the applications indicated in figures 26 27 28 29 30 31 and 32 cannot be provided Caption m Figure number of the diagram T See note indicated by the letter Al Circuit breaker applications A11 FDU interfacing unit front display A12 AUX E type signalling unit with auxiliary relays for electrical signalling of circuit breaker open and circuit breaker tripped A13 PRO21 K type signalling unit with auxiliary relays for electrical signalling of the protection functions of electronic trip unit A14 MOE E type actuation unit with auxiliary relays for carrying out the commands coming from the dialogue unit A15 PR212 CI type contactor control unit for motor starting A16 Solenoid operating mechanism A17 Unit for M motor electrica
77. 5 16 1SDC210015D0205 Wiring diagrams Electrical accessories for TT TO Shunt opening and undervoltage releases C F B F B C B F B 10004S0901 Odst LO TA j cl22 4 8r EY a D a elk von l l E x y 5 p 3 Glo Se rk He 9 2 Le mjel j ig za l l E L L Eni l LKE LI Le E o 2 0 gt UT wo a 5 Sl a N i e L 9 x 9 en L D I P n za a i l 12 EE e Le se ba J lo UE Lg m o aov oo oo D Las T R Kai X Z Z xxx lt EIxXIEZ r bb 4 i l ji a 7 a l I lela Sula CN o 2 Fa T as L Jl cq 10 za TE d lee EE E E E ENSA E T d L FS 1 L El o TE H E 5 DE a l Rdy e 2 o 6e T LU ia za x o 2 Di 12 N l ela S Sjal e l pue t o o e m TT H H SR T pj EH 2 89 12 5 g l sc ecl D Ql SN E e E ra E I t si io o a 1 p ud p j R g 12 x e EI sz elel Es Xx x xx Si X Residual current releases and remote controls
78. 600 550 R HR 500 450 400 350 T C zi o N o W Ei A o a Ei o Ei x Ei 1SDC210F01F0001 T6 630 and T6D 630 up to 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C Imax A Imax A T Imax A T Imax A Withdrawable EF 630 1 508 5 0 95 567 0 9 504 0 8 VR 630 1 630 1 508 5 0 95 567 0 9 HR 630 1 508 5 0 95 567 0 9 504 0 8 EF Front extended terminals HR Rear flat horizontal terminals VR Rear flat vertical terminals lu A 850 800 700 650 600 550 EF HR 500 450 400 350 1SDC210F02F0001 4 47 1SDC210015D0205 Temperature performances Circuit breakers with magnetic only or electronic trip units and switch disconnectors T6 800 and T6D 800 Fixed up to 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C Imax A l Imax A l Imax A l Imax A l 1 1 FC F 800 1 800 1 R VR 800 1 800 1 800 1 760 0 95 R HR 800 1 800 1 FC Front cables terminals F Front flat terminals R HR Rear terminals horizontal R VR Rear terminals vertical lu A 850 800 R VR 750 F FC 700 R HR 650 600 5
79. TMA TMG EF Front extended terminals FC CuAl Front terminals for CUu AI cables Rz Rear terminals terminals ES Front extended spread terminals terminals for CUu AI cables housed externally MC 4j Multi cable terminals VR Rear flat vertical terminals RS Rear spread terminals Rated N 50 Protection of uninterrupted N 100 the neutral current of the at 5096 or circuit breaker A at 10096 of that of the phases A Rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity A Rated short time withstand current for 1s Thermomagnetic MF trip unit with adjustable thermal and magnetic MA threshold Thermomagnetic trip unit for PR22_ generator protection PR23 PR33_ Fixed magnetic only trip units Adjustable magnetic only trip units Electronic trip units Electronic trip units Electronic trip units 1SDC210015D0205 Ordering codes Instructions for ordering Ordering Tmax circuit breakers fitted with the accessories indicated in the catalogue means that these must be indicated by means of the relative sales codes expressly associated with the circuit breaker code The following examples are of particular importance for correctly loading orders for Tmax circuit breakers fitted with accessories 1 Terminal Kit for fixed circuit breaker To fit the circuit breaker with different terminal accessories than those supplied on the basic circuit break
80. the T7 circuit breaker which completes the Tmax family up to 1600 A fitted with PR231 P PR232 P PR331 P and PR332 P electronic trip units The T7 circuit breaker is available in the two versions with manual operating mechanism or motorizable with stored energy operating mechanism The field of application in alternating current of the Tmax series varies from 1 A to 1600 A with volt ages up to 690 V The Tmax T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 and T6 circuit breakers equipped with TMF TMD and TMA thermomagnetic trip units can also be used in direct current plants with a range of application from 1 A to 800 A and a minimum operating voltage of 24 V DC according to the appropriate con nection diagrams The three pole T2 T3 and T4 circuit breakers can also be fitted with MF and MA adjustable magnetic only trip units both for applications in alternating current and in direct current in particular for motor protection see page 2 45 and following For all the circuit breakers in the series fitted with thermomagnetic and electronic trip units the single phase trip current is defined see page 4 57 For motorisation the T7 circuit breaker with stored energy operating mechanism must be ordered complete with geared motor for automatic spring charging opening coil and closing coil Interchangeability The Tmax T4 T5 and T6 circuit breakers can be equipped either with TMF TMD TMG or TMA thermomagnetic trip u
81. 35 6 65 Ee Lem UN ze i Y E m re g S R LL X48 E Y 4 POLES 1SDC210K36F0001 1SDC210K36F0001 1 1 Nm 1SDC210K34F0001 IV x 105 70 17 LM 45 N 1SDC210K35F0001 Drilling templates of the compartment door B 122 2 Y eo Third E Y 1SDC210K37F0001 6 65 1SDC210015D0205 Overall dimensions Accessories for Tmax T1 T2 T3 Fixed version Rotary handle operating mechanism on the compartment door Caption gt 3 570 60 143 2 A Transmission unit 70 30 7 3 Rotary handle operating zl mechanism on the com 2 partment door z L J Ger s I S Dr sic ek e L 5 E A B S 5 ay 2 E Heights for door with maximum distance 21 Ti T2 14 Ej 8 470 5 S 325 95 178 with IP54 eit T n T Drilling template of the compartment 143 lt 2 door 70 30 7 a 1 1 Nm I 34 jp DG EA LZ x E i i S 21 S P Ki 3 A 60 5 8 EE Minimum rotation radius Heights for door with minimum distance 2 T for door fulerum Captio
82. 4 2 1SDC210015D0205 Trip curves for power distribution Circuit breakers with thermomagnetic trip units T1 160 TMD 500A In 16 63 A t s T1 160 TMD 630A In 16 63 A t s 10 102 xh 1SDC210E04F0001 102 xh T1 160 TMD In 80 160 A t s T2 160 TMD In 1 62100 A t s 10 102 xh 1SDC210E05F0001 A o ae 102 xh 4 3 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210F63F0001 1SDC210E06F0001 Trip curves for power distribution Circuit breakers with thermomagnetic trip units T2 160 TMD T2 160 TMD In 2 125A In 160A t s tis 1SDC210E07F0001 E 107 1 10 5 2 104 1 10 10 T2 160 TMG T3 250 TMD In 68 250 A t s t s 104 1 10 102 102 xh xh 1SDC210E08F0001 3 E 1SDC210E09F0001 4 4 1SDC210015D0205 T3 250 TMG In 63 250 A t s T4 250 TMD In 20 50 A t s 101 1 10 10 S 104 1 10 102 xh 8 xh T4 250 320 TMA T5 400 630 TMA In 80 250 A In 320 500 A t s tls 2 104 1 10 m S er 1 10 r 4 5 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210E11F0001 1SDC210E13F0001 Trip curves for power distribution Circuit breakers with thermomagnetic trip units T5 400 630 TMG In 2 320 500 A t s 10 102 xh 1SDC210E14F0001 T6 630 TMA In 630A t s T6 800 TMA In 800A t s 4 6 1SDC2
83. 46 5 Y 1SDC210J02F0001 25 61 75 SEN 96 75 193 5 L O 139 5 3P _ Y T 250 125 d 186 4P 36 75 1SDC210J08F0001 49 25 1SDC210J04F0001 1SDC210J10F0001 1SDC210J09F0001 1SDC210J03F0001 Rear flat vertical 400 A VR 139 5 3P Y 912 b 9 Lo Z d oo o io amp CX x e L LO eg N e 8 E S 3 B S Y S S 186 4P B 46 5 46 5 46 5 15 5 2932 1L Tou aL i E E H n ri n e i Last N o a DST SS B Y 2 Rear flat vertical 630 A VR 139 5 3P l Y z i Ei C S b S E L 8 a S x ii L co 3 gt am DE i Y
84. 525 V AC 051350 054886 cabled version UVR C 24 30 V AC DC 051351 054887 UVR C 48 V AC DC 051352 054888 UVR C 60 V AC DC 052335 054889 UVR C 110 127 V AC 110 125 V DC 051353 054890 UVR C 220 240 V AC 220 250 V DC 051354 054891 UVR C 380 440 V AC 051355 054892 UVR C 480 525 V AC 051356 054893 Note For T7 T7M in withdrawable version sliding contact blocks for fixed and moving part are necessary See page 3 4 and 7 43 Compulsory with T4 T5 T6 in the withdrawable or motorized versions Shunt opening release with permanent operation PS SOR Type 1SDA R1 T4 T5 T6 uncabled version PS SOR 24 V AC DC 054876 PS SOR 110 120 V AC 054877 cabled version PS SOR C 24 V AC DC 054878 PS SOR C 110 120 V AC 054879 Connectors and socket plugs for electrical accessories Type 1SDA R1 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 Socket plug 12 poles 051362 051362 Socket plug 6 poles 051363 051363 Socket plug 3 poles 051364 051364 3 way connector for second SOR C 055273 Loose cables Type 1SDA R1 T1 T2 T3 Kit 12 cables L 2m for AUX 051365 Kit 6 cables L 2m for AUX 051366 Kit 2 cables L 2m for SOR UVR 051367 see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210148F0004 1SDC210N76F0001 Time delay device for undervoltage release UVD Type 1SDA R1 T1 T6 T7 T7M UVD 24 30 V AC DC 051357 038316 UVD 48 V AC DC 038317 S UVD 48 60 V
85. Fixing on DIN rail DIN EN 50022 DIN EN 50022 Mechanical life No operations 25000 25000 25000 No Hourly operations 240 240 240 Electrical life 415 V AC No operations 8000 8000 8000 No Hourly operations 120 120 120 Basic dimensions fixed version 3 poles W mm 25 4 1 pole 76 90 4 poles W mm 102 120 D mm 70 70 70 H mm 130 130 130 Weight fixed 3 4 poles kg 0 4 1 pole 0 9 1 2 1 1 1 5 plug in 3 4 poles kg 1 5 1 9 withdrawable 3 4 poles kg Es TERMINAL CAPTION FC Cu Front for copper cables VR Rear flat vertical P plug in circuit breakers F Front FC CuAI Front for copper aluminium cables HR VR Rear flat orientated W withdrawable circuit breakers EF Front extended R Rear orientated MC Multicable The breaking capacity for settings In 16 A ES Front extended spread 2 4 HR Rear flat horizontal F fixed circuit breakers and In 20 A is 16 kA 1SDC210015D0205 Tmax T3 Tmax T4 Tmax T5 Tmax T6 Tmax T7 250 250 320 400 630 630 800 1000 800 1000 1250 1600 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 690 690 690 690 690 500 750 750 750 8 8 8 8 8 800 1000 1000 1000 1000 3000 3500 3500 3500 3500 N S N S H L V N S H L V N S H L S H L ve 50 85 70 85 100 200 200 70 85 100 200 200 70 85 100 200 85 100 200 200 36 50 36 50 70 120 200 36 50 70 120 200 36 50 70 100 5
86. S x A d X E EC ats 8 e S S Cl Reger 2 186 4P 8 630A Drilling templates of the compartment door 115 107 Y Y LO Ue o S B X x X X 3 i B Kg yr E I E E Y E Y 2 With flange Without flange For front terminals 630 A For rear terminals 400 A 630 A 5 5 M5 Y j 5 5 M5 v lt lt 36 25 725 119 o H X X g I o l x g I H kill SI e 4 1 9 lt x lt x Y S Y E Z B D 2 3 POLES 4 POLES A B C D E Rear 400 A 92 5 1285 148 1725 64 5 Front and rear 630 A 61 8 139 142 185 5 69 5 6 41 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC21041FF0001 Overall dimensions Tmax T5 186
87. 10004 VR 950 900 850 EF HR 800 750 700 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 TPC T7 V 1000 up to 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C Imax A l Imax A L Imax A L Imax A L Withdrawable VR 1000 1 1000 7 00 913 0 91 816 0 82 EF HR 1000 1 1000 1 00 895 0 89 784 0 78 EF Extended front VR Rear flat vertical HR Rear flat horizontal lu A 1050 10004 950 VR 900 850 EF HR 800 750 700 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 T C 4 53 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210F53F0001 1SDC210F54F0001 Temperature performances Circuit breakers with magnetic only or electronic trip units and switch disconnectors T7 S H L 1250 and T7D 1250 VR up to 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C Imax A Imax IAU 1 1 Imax A 1 Imax A 1 1250 1 00 1250 1 00 1118 EF HR EF Extended front Fixed lu A 1300 1250 1 00 1118 0 89 980 VR Rear flat vertical HR Rear flat horizontal 12507 VR 1200 1150 1100 1050 EF HR 1000 950 900 850 800 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 TPC T7 V 1250 Fixed VR up to 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C Imax A 1 Imax A 1 Imax A I Imax A l 1 1201 0 96 1096 0 88 981 EF HR EF Extended front lu A 1300 1157 1056 0 85 945 VR Rear flat vertical H
88. 1SDC210247F0004 7 30 Ordering codes Circuit breakers for use up to 1150 V AC and 1000 V DC T5 400 Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals for copper cables FC Cu V Icu 1000 V AC 20 kA Thermomagnetic trip unit TMA Icu 1150 V AC 12 kA 320 1600 3200 063437 400 2000 4000 063438 V Icu 1000 V AC 20 kA Icu 1150 V AC 12 kA Thermomagnetic trip unit TMA Icu 1000 V DC 40 kA 320 1600 3200 054531 400 2000 4000 054532 see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210247F0004 T5 630 Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals for copper cables FC Cu 1SDA R1 L V Icu 1000 V AC 12 kA 20 kA Electronic trip unit Icu 1150 V AC 12 kA CO PR221DS LS I 630 054543 054547 PR221DS I 630 054544 054548 PR222DS P LSI 630 054545 054549 PR222DS P LSIG 630 054546 054550 1SDA R1 L V Icu 1000 V AC 12 kA 20 kA Electronic trip unit Icu 1150 V AC 12 kA PR221DS LS 630 063448 063452 PR221DS 630 063449 063453 PR222DS P LSI 630 063450 063454 PR222DS P LSIG 630 063451 063455 1SDA R1 V Icu 1000 V AC 20 kA Thermomagnetic trip unit TMA Icu 1150 V AC 12 kA 500 2500 5000 063439 mm V Icu 1000 V AC 20 kA Icu 1150 V AC 12 kA Thermomagnetic trip unit TMA Icu 1000 V DC 40 kA 500 2500 5000 054533 see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 31 1SDC210
89. 24 V when modules connected 5 A for 5 ms Rated power 24 V when modules connected 3 W PR330 V can give power supply to the trip unit when at least one line voltage is equal or higher to 85V RMS 1SDC210015D0205 Circuit breaker for zone selectivity Index Circuit breaker for zone selectivity Electrical characteristics General characteristics EFDP zone selectivity PR223EF ZS zone selectivity PR332 P 2 37 1SDC210015D0205 Circuit breaker for zone selectivity Electrical characteristics Zone selectivity T4 T5 T6 T7 Rated uninterrupted current A 250 320 400 630 630 800 1000 800 1000 1250 1600 Poles No 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 Rated service current Ue AC 50 60 Hz 690 690 690 690 DO 750 750 750 750 Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp k 8 8 8 8 Rated insulation voltage Ui 1000 1000 1000 1000 Test voltage at industrial frequency for 1 min 3500 3500 3500 3500 Rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity Icu L L L S H L vo AC 50 60 Hz 220 230 V kA 200 200 200 85 100 200 200 AC 50 60 Hz 380 415 V kA 120 120 100 50 70 120 150 AC 50 60 Hz 440 V kA 100 100 80 50 65 100 130 AC 50 60 Hz 500 V kA 85 85 65 40 50 85 100 AC 50 60 Hz 690 V kA 70 70 30 30 42 50 60 AC 50 60 Hz 1000 V kA 16 16 SS v asd Rated service short circuit
90. 3 poles in series kA Rated service short circuit breaking capacity Ics AC 50 60 Hz 220 230 V lcu 75 100 7596 75 100 100 100 100 AC 50 60 Hz 380 400 415 V lcu 100 100 75 100 100 100 75 70 kA AC 50 60 Hz 440 V lcu 100 75 50 100 100 100 75 AC 50 60 Hz 500 V lcu 100 75 50 100 100 100 75 AC 50 60 Hz 690 V lcu 100 75 50 100 100 100 75 Rated short circuit making capacity lem AC 50 60 Hz 220 230 V kA 52 5 525 84 105 143 187 220 264 AC 50 60 Hz 380 400 415 V kA 32 525 75 6 75 6 105 154 187 AC 50 60 Hz 440 V kA e 17 30 46 2 63 945 121 165 AC 50 60 Hz 500 V kA 13 6 17 30 525 63 75 6 105 AC 50 60 Hz 690 V kA 4 3 59 92 92 119 13 6 17 Opening time 415 V ms 7 7 6 5 3 3 3 3 Utilisation category IEC 60947 2 A A A Reference Standard IEC 60947 2 IEC 60947 2 IEC 60947 2 Isolation behaviour L LU B Trip units thermomagnetic T fixed M fixed TMF L T adjustable M fixed TMD B T adjustable M adjustable 5 10 x In TMA T adjustable M fixed 3 x In TMG e e mo T adjustable M adjustable 2 5 5 x In TMG magnetic only MA E MF up to In 12 5 A electronic PR221DS L PR221GP PR221MP n PR222DS PR223DS PR231 P e PR232 P e PR331 P e PR332 P e Interchangeability Versions F E F P Terminals fixed FC Cu FC Cu EF FC CuAI HR F FC Cu FC CuAl EF ES R plug in F FC Cu FC CuAI EF ES R withdrawable
91. 500 315 382 450 2500 1 5 3750 T5 400 630 TMG 320 500 A L 400 Hz l settings MIN 5xIn In MIN MED MAX L 50 Hz K 1 400 Hz T5N 320 201 244 288 800 1600 1 5 1200 2400 400 630 400 252 306 360 1000 2000 1 5 1500 3000 500 315 382 450 1250 2500 1 5 1875 3750 T6 630 800 TMA L 400 Hz l settings MIN 5xIn In MIN MED MAX L 50 Hz K 1 400 Hz T6N 630 630 397 482 567 3150 1 5 4725 T6N 800 800 504 602 720 4000 1 5 6000 Example Network data rated voltage 400 V AC rated frequency 400 Hz load current 240 A Ib current carrying capacity of cable 260 A Iz short circuit current 32 kA To decide which circuit breaker is suitable for this application the two fundamental conditions for correct use of the circuit breaker at 400 Hz must be remembered derating of the thermal protection equal to 10 increase in the magnetic threshold according to the Km coefficient Should the installation be at power frequency 50 60 Hz a TAN 250 TMA In 250 circuit breaker would be adequate based on the rated load current 240 A and on the installation short circuit current However since the circuit breaker must be sized for an application at 400 Hz it is necessary to consider the prescriptions listed above and in particular the derating of the thermal protection means a maximum adjustment of 250 10 250 S 225 A 1 max 400 Hz 1 00 As can be noted this value is less than
92. 6 11 Hur X c t 6 14 TMAX 6 17 WINN Te E 6 22 Uu ld 6 27 WMT RE 6 32 WIMAX TQ E 6 35 THA KE 6 38 WM AX KEE 6 41 Withdrawable circuit breaker and terminals WiMAX C m H BEERERET 6 44 Draper TY 6 53 Circuit breaker with RC221 222 residual current release eee 6 55 Accessories Triax Tl S72 E 6 63 WIMAX TAS EE 6 70 Ru a KEE 6 77 Ru I KEE 6 83 Distances to be respected ccccciisccccscaccssevcseisesesosesesccescesascsiseressvesosesrssetsccsa seers stsassessisersbinscencsd 6 88 6 1 1SDC210015D0205 Fixed circuit breaker 130 130 x T1 1P SINGLE POLE Caption Overall dimensions Tmax T1 and single pole Tmax T1 Fixing on sheet 83 78 70 8 p CA S e T Zu 8 8 79 0 lt 2 n 23 102 Without inserts 83 70 24 5 12x12 254 Ee 7Nm Y 4 5 E N N fa j to E x Z X Q Bes 8 Y B 1 1 Nm P 79 1 2 8 nO i al 102 E CD Depth of the switchboard in he case of circuit breaker with face not extending from he compartment door with or without flange 2 Depth of the switchboard in lange he case of ci
93. ECH 00042Er0LZOASL e a Gg 6i s T sc Ge S TS i i y SS E E E o E E e e 9 E E id N Q 5 E n gt E amp ie L 3 amp M i be P eo N Ut oO d Ir H x LO003SEf OL2OQS L K qe U a O amp gt L Of LO g x Grol DUZ Loooseerolzodst 8l gt Looosrerolzoas L E SL16 7 7 S 6 se Q br eg 6l Z x R a 9r i S T B L L ai sl T 8 jf u LC e S ees e F il ll i SIS 86 86 Ms gt 3 4 POLES 6 45 1SDC210015D0205 Overall dimensions Tmax T5 Withdrawable circuit breaker Fixing on sheet Ai lt li Q amp Q ne e m i S Ca GI 1SDC210J39F0001 18DC210J42F0001
94. Measurements Measurements With distributed N Without distributed N Effective current values lis doy dd La bil Effective voltage values Vis Vas Var Vans Maan Mai M ipi Vogi Mai Apparent powers Se 95 Sov So Sa Active powers Pig Pays P Pa Reactive powers Quy DH 0 Q Qu Power factors COS o COS Energies E Eu Phase peak factor L R Frequency f f The PR223DS trip unit with integrated ModBus RTU protocol based dialogue unit allows a wide range of information to be acquired and transmitted remotely and to carry out opening and closing commands The PR223DS trip unit can be associated with the AUX E auxiliary contacts to know the state of the circuit breaker open closed and with MOE E motor operator the AUX E are compulsory when MOE E is to be used to remotely control circuit breaker opening and closing as well If the PR223DS trip unit is inserted in a supervision system during the test and configuration with the PRO10 T unit communication is automatically abandoned and starts again on completion of these operations The unit is self supplied by means of current sensors housed in the electronic release Operation of the electronic release is also guaranteed when there is a single phase load and in correspondence with the minimum setting An external power supply must be connected to activate the dialogue function and the measurement functions Auxiliary power supply Electrical characteristics
95. PR231 P PR232 P PR331 P PR332 P type electronic trip unit with the follow ing protection functions L overload protection with inverse long time delay trip setting S short circuit protection with inverse or definite short time delay trip setting short circuit protection with instantaneous time delay trip setting I G earth fault protection with inverse short time delay trip setting Contacts of the PRO21 K signalling unit Zone selectivity input for protection G or reverse direction input for protection D only with Uaux and PR332 P trip unit K51 GZout DBout Zone selectivity output for protection G or reverse direction output for pro K51 SZin DFin tection D only with and PR332 P trip unit Zone selectivity input for protection S or direct input for protection D only with Uaux and PR332 P trip unit 1SDC210015D0205 K51 SZout DFout K51 YC K51 YO M Q Q 1 6 S383M 1 3 94 1 2 3 S43 S51 S51 P1 S75E 1 2 S75I 1 7 S75T 1 2 SC SO SOT SO2 SR SRTC SY TI L1 TVL2 TI L3 TO TU Uaux UI L1 UI L2 UI L3 UI N UI O Wi W2 X12 X15 XB1 XB7 XF XO XR1 XR2 XR5 XR13 XV XK5 YC YO YOT YO2 YR YU Zone selectivity output for protection S or direct output for protection D only with Uaux and PR332 P trip unit Closing control from PR332 P electronic trip unit with communication module PR
96. PR332 P LSIRc T7 063137 PR332 P LSIRc T7M 064190 Note Loose trip units for T7 T7M are supplied without rating Plug For T7 T7M in withdrawable version sliding contact blocks for fixed and moving part are necessary See page 3 4 and 7 43 To have the possibility to substitute PR231 with a different electronic trip unit key plug must be ordered Extra code for PR231 interchangeability 1SDA063140R1 must be specified RC protection can be obtained only with 1SDA063869R1 toroid see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 40 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210197F0004 Ordering codes Fixed parts conversion kit and accessories for fixed parts Plug in P Fixed part F Front terminals 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles T2 P FP F 051329 051330 T3 P FP Fe 051331 051332 For the circuit breaker in plug in version In max 144 A For the circuit breaker in plug in version In max 225 A EF Front extended terminals 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles T4 P FP EF 054737 054740 T5 400 P FP EF 054749 054752 T5 630 P FP EF 054762 054765 For the circuit breaker in plug in version In max 570 A VR Rear flat vertical terminals 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles T4 P FP VR 054738 054741 T5 400 P FP VR 054750 054753 T5 630 P FP VR 054763 054766 0 For the circuit breaker in plug in version In max 570 A HR Rear flat horizontal terminals 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles T
97. R1 3 poles 4 poles 20 kA 20 kA 062038 062039 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles 20 kA 20 kA 062042 062043 see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 35 1SDC210015D0205 7 36 Ordering codes Breaking units T4 250 F Front terminals 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles TAN 250 Breaking unit 054557 054562 T4S 250 Breaking unit 054558 054563 T4H 250 Breaking unit 054559 054564 TAL 250 Breaking unit 054560 054565 T4V 250 Breaking unit 054561 054566 T4 320 F Front terminals 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles TAN 320 Breaking unit 054567 054572 T4S 320 Breaking unit 054568 054573 T4H 320 Breaking unit 054569 054574 TAL 320 Breaking unit 054570 054575 TAV 320 Breaking unit 054571 054576 T5 400 F Front terminals 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles T5N 400 Breaking unit 054577 054582 T5S 400 Breaking unit 054578 054583 T5H 400 Breaking unit 054579 054584 T5L 400 Breaking unit 054580 054585 T5V 400 Breaking unit 054581 054586 T5 630 F Front terminals 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles T5N 630 Breaking unit 054587 054592 TRS 630 Breaking unit 054588 054593 T5H 630 Breaking unit 054589 054594 T5L 630 Breaking unit 054590 054595 T5V 630 Breaking unit 054591 054596 see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 1SDC210015D0205 T6 630 F Front terminals 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles T6N 630 Breaking unit 060327 06
98. Standards and comply with what is foreseen by the UL 489 Standard Positive operation The operating lever always indicates the precise position of the moving contacts of the circuit breaker thereby guaranteeing safe and reliable signals in compliance with the prescriptions of the IEC 60073 and IEC 60417 2 Standard I Closed O Open yellow green line Open due to protection trip The circuit breaker operating mechanism has free release regardless of the pressure on the lever and the speed of the operation Protection tripping automatically opens the moving contacts to close them again the operating mechanism must be reset by pushing the operating lever from the intermediate position into the lowest open position Isolation behaviour In the open position the circuit breaker guarantees circuit in compliance with the IEC 60947 2 Standard The oversized insulation distances guarantee there are no leakage currents and dielectric resistance to any overvoltages between input and output 1SDC210A19F0001 Degrees of protection The table indicates the degrees of protection guaranteed by the Tmax circuit breakers according to the prescriptions of the IEC 60529 Standard With Without Without With high With low With IP40 front front 9 terminal terminal terminal protection kit covers covers covers on the front A IP 40 IP 20 e B IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 40 IP 40 IP 40 G IP 40 IP 30 e After correct installation
99. Type 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles TC FP T4 054857 054858 TC FP T5 054859 054861 see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 44 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210204F0004 1SDC210N75F0001 1SDC210P07F0001 1SDC210N75F0001 T4 T5 T6 T7 Ordering codes Accessories Service releases Shunt opening release SOR Type 1SDA R1 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T7M uncabled version SOR 12 V DC 053000 054862 SOR 24 V AC DC 062065 SOR 24 30 V AC DC 051333 054863 SOR 30 V AC DC 062066 SOR 48 V AC DC 062067 SOR 48 60 V AC DC 051334 054864 SOR 60 V AC DC 062068 SOR 110 120 V AC DC 062069 SOR 110 127 V AC 110 125 V DC 051335 054865 SOR 120 127 V AC DC 063547 SOR 220 240 V AC DC 063548 SOR 220 240 V AC 220 250 V DC 051336 054866 SOR 240 250 V AC DC 062070 SOR 380 400 V AC 062071 SOR 380 440 V AC 051337 054867 SOR 415 440 V AC 062072 SOR 480 525 V AC 051338 054868 cabled version SOR C 12 V DC 053001 054869 SOR C 24 30 V AC DC 051339 054870 SOR C 48 60 VAC DC 051340 054871 SOR C 110 127 V AC 110 125 V DC 051341 054872 SOR C 220 240 V AC 220 250 V DC 051342 054873 SOR C 380 440 V AC 051343 054874 SOR C 480 525 V AC 051344 054875 Note For T7 T7M in withdrawable version sliding contact blocks for fixed and moving part are necessary See page 3 4 and 7 43 Com
100. Ut De S E z 8 S 8 a S E 5 E E Z EO Z S fh 6 15 1SDC210015D0205 Overall dimensions Tmax T5 1SDC210H92F0001 Terminals Caption Front extended spread ES e 202 Insulating barriers between 155 5 h 54 54 54 30 6 phases compulsory gi 57 75 57 75 3 75 40 gt CO 40 11 i l Y TT Y Y I L E Zz e H da FS o ER Q 4 00 H g S N e i eo 90 A 1 ec o E o f e Ki E xz Ke a ES B c 2 h 8 S d L amp H J B H ME F X x X X L Caption Fr
101. Zone selectivity This type of coordination a development of time coordination is made by means of logic connec tions between current measuring devices which once the set threshold having been exceeded is detected allow just the fault area to be identified and to have its power supply cut off By means of zone selectivity it is possible obtain selectivity considerably reducing the trip times and therefore the thermal stresses all the plant components are subjected to during the fault o OUT E IN o N Zone 2 EFDP Zone selectivity TAL T5L T6L with PR223EF By means of the new PR223EF electronic trip unit it is possible to realise EFDP zone selectivity be tween moulded case circuit breakers of the Tmax T4L T5L and T6L series obtaining total selectivity between these circuit breakers The PR223EF implements the new EF protection function capable of detecting the short circuit at its onset This is thanks to predicting the fault based on analysis of the trend of the current derivative in relation to the time di t dt vs i t If the EF protection is enabled it intervenes for faults of considerable size replacing the protection function against instantaneous short circuit when there is an auxiliary power supply Between PR223EF trip units EFDP zone selectivity is implemented simultaneously on functions S G and EF It is carried out by means of an interlocking protocol Interlocking IL
102. amp z E Y 8 Y 8 S S S 3 POLES 4 POLES Y 2 Y e 2 B 8 D 3 3 POLES 4 POLES A B C D E Rear 400 A 325 1285 143 1725 64 5 Front and rear 630 A 618 1389 142 185 5 69 5 6 46 1SDC210015D0205 Terminals Caption D Front terminals for copper cables 2 Front terminals for copper aluminium cables 3 Terminals with degree of protection IP40 Caption D Insulating barriers between phases compulsory Caption D Insulating barriers between phases compulsory Front extended 400 A E
103. available for the corresponding circuit breaker The RC222 residual current release in the fixed version can easily be converted into plug in and into withdrawable by adding the special conversion kit and applying a derating of the performances as indicated in the table on the next page A circuit breaker cannot have the residual current release and the motor operator mounted at the same time RC223 B type residual current release for T3 and T4 250 A The RC223 residual current trip unit of type B which can be combined with Tmax T3 and T4 250A four pole fixed plug in or withdrawable version circuit breakers only plug in and withdrawable for T4 The RC223 which can only be used in plants with 50 60 Hz frequency must be supplied from a pri mary line voltage between 110 V and 500 V Operation is guaranteed starting from 55 V phase neutral It features the same types of reference as the RC222 release type S and AE but can also claim conformity with type B operation which guarantees sensitivity to residual current faults with alternat ing alternating pulsating components and with direct current The reference Standards are IEC 60947 1 IEC 60947 2 Annex B and IEC TR 60755 Apart from the signals and adjustments typical of the RC222 residual current release by means of a three position 400 700 1000 Hz selector the RC223 also allows the maximum frequency band of the residual current fault read to be defined It is therefore possible t
104. various different versions of the circuit breakers including the terminals For 1000 V versions please ask ABB SACE m2 Ts me T ms 1SDC210L39F0001 6 88 1SDC210015D0205 Ordering codes Index General INOMMALION e rorait 7 2 Instructions TOF Orden E 7 3 Fower distribution circ it Dreak amp ts issscssccisazcessecsssensoccnscsassieacesaicesassesoasioacsaoneescsssiaceassinbansasceaoss 7 7 Circuit breakers for zone Selectii T 7 22 Motor protectioricireurt e esse e een ey EUR Ps EE EE oe va eo ce Rao Te ErE SPUR Ce EP AUS be SEE Rea dca 7 24 Circuit breakers for use up to 1150 V AC and 1000 V DC sese s eee 7 28 SWITCH GISCOMMECIONS REA 7 33 Bieakirigi ul CT 7 36 ll e 7 38 Fixed parts conversion kit and accessories for fixed Darts 7 41 eec 7 45 7A 1SDC210015D0205 7 2 Ordering codes General information Abbreviations used to describe the apparatus F Front terminals FC Cu Front termi nals for cop per cables RC CuAl Rear terminals for Cu Al cables HR for RC221 222 Rear flat horizontal terminals HR VR Rear flat terminals Magnetic trip current A of the thermomagnetic trip unit A Sa Rated current TMF Thermomagnetic trip unit with fixed thermal and magnetic threshold TMD Thermomagnetic trip unit with adjustable thermal and fixed magnetic threshold Icu Icw
105. which can be set at 6 x in the case where 320 A CTs are used for T4 and 630 A for T5 For all the CT sizes t 18s except with 320 A CT T4 630 A CT T5 and 1000 A CT T6 where t 10 5s For T4 In 320 A T5 In 630 A and T6 In 1000 A max 9 5 x In and max 9 5 x In For T6 In 800 A max 10 5 x In t s 104 108 102 107 102 T4L 250 320 T5L 400 630 T6L 630 800 1000 PR223EF Vaux OFF L S I Functions Note The dotted curve of function L corresponds to the maximum delay t which can be set at 6 x in the case where 320 A CTs are used for T4 and 630 A for T5 For all the CT sizes t 18s except with 320 A CT T4 630 A CT T5 and 1000 A CT T6 where t 10 5s For T4 In 320 A T5 In 630 A and T6 In 1000 A max 9 5 x In and lmax 9 5 x In For T6 In 800 A lmax 10 5 x In t s 104 103 10 102 G i i M T i e 1 GE i T4L 250 320 T5L 400 630 T6L 630 800 1000 PR223EF Vaux ON OFF G Function t s 107 1 10 LA 4 13 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210E25F0001 Trip curves for motor protection Circuit breakers with magnetic only trip units T2 160 MF T2 160 T3 250 MA l 2 13 x In I 6 12 x In t s t s 1 10 102 xin 1 10 102 xin 1SDC210E27F0001 1SDC210E28F0001 T4 250 MA I 6 14 x In t s 1 10 102 x In 1SDC210E29F0001 4 14 1SDC210015D0205
106. 051045 051089 100 1000 050958 051002 051046 051090 125 1250 050959 0510038 051047 051091 160 1600 050960 051004 051048 051092 1SDA R1 N S EA emeng mm Sh o 25 160 061867 061883 40 200 061868 061884 63 200 061869 061885 80 240 061870 061886 100 300 061871 061887 125 375 061872 061888 160 480 061873 061889 _ 1SDA R1 N S H L Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 36kA 50 kA 70 kA 85 kA PR221DS LS I 10 051123 051133 051143 051158 PR221DS LS 25 051124 051134 051144 051154 PR221DS LS I 63 051125 051135 051145 051155 PR221DS LS 100 051126 051136 051146 051156 PR221DS LS I 160 051127 051137 051147 051157 PR221DS 10 051163 051174 051184 051194 PR221DS 25 051164 051175 051185 051195 PR221DS 63 051165 051176 051186 051196 PR221DS 100 051166 051177 051187 051197 PR221DS 160 051168 051178 051188 051198 PR221GP 63 065352 065358 PR221GP 100 065353 065359 PR221GP __ 160 065354 065360 set F Note The trip coil of the T2 circuit breaker with PR221DS electronic trip unit is housed in the right slot For T2 with PR221DS the following groups of auxiliary contacts are available 1SDA053704R1 Aux C 1S51 1Q 1SY 1SDA055504R1 Aux C 2Q 1SY For availability please ask ABB SACE see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 8 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210303F0004
107. 054068 054092 054116 PR223DS 160 059492 059500 059508 059516 059524 PR223DS 250 059494 059502 059510 059518 059526 see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 12 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210305F0004 T4 320 Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 N S H L V Electronic trip unit Wd 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 120 kA 200 kA PR221DS LS I 320 054117 054125 054133 054141 054149 PR221DS I 320 054118 054126 054134 054142 054150 PR222DS P LS 320 054119 054127 054135 054143 054151 PR222DS P LSIG 320 054120 054128 054136 054144 054152 PR223DS 320 059495 059503 059511 059519 059527 T4 320 Fixed F 4 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 N S H L V Electronic trip unit GEN 36 kA 50 kA 70kA 120 kA 200 kA PR221DS LS 320 054121 054129 054137 054145 054153 PR221DS I 320 054122 054130 054138 054146 054154 PR222DS P LSI 320 054123 054131 054139 054147 054155 PR222DS P LSIG 320 054124 054132 054140 054148 054156 320 059496 059504 059512 059520 059528 PR223DS see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 13 1SDC210015D0205 Ordering codes Power distribution circuit breakers T5 400 Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 N S H
108. 062928 062960 062992 H To allow the interchangeability of PR231 T7 T7M circuit breakers must be ordered specifying extra codes for its interchangeability See page 7 60 RC protection can be obtained only with 1SDA063869R1 toroid T7 1600 M Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 S H L Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 50 KA 70 kA 120 kA PR231 P L 1600 063010 063042 063074 mm PR231 P I9 1600 063009 063041 063073 PR232 P LSI 1600 063011 063043 063075 PR331 P LSIG 1600 063012 063044 063076 PR332 P LI 1600 063013 063045 063077 PR332 P LSI 1600 063014 063046 063078 PR332 P LSIG 1600 063015 063047 063079 PR332 PLSIRc 1600 063016 063048 063080 H To allow the interchangeability of PR231 T7 T7M circuit breakers must be ordered specifying extra codes for its interchangeability See page 7 60 RC protection can be obtained only with 1SDA063869R1 toroid T7 1600 M Fixed F 4 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 S H L Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 50 kA 70 kA 120 kA PR231 P LS I 1600 063018 063050 063082 ES PR231 P I 1600 063017 063049 063081 PR232 P LSI 1600 063019 063051 063083 PR331 P LSIG 1600 063020 063052 063084 PR332 P LI 1600 063021 063053 063085 PR332 P LSI 1600 063022 063054 063086 PR332 P LSIG 1600 063023 063055 063087 PR332 P LSIRc 1600 063024 063056 063088 To
109. 1 5 12 x In 100 T6 630 800 1000 TMA 630 800 3150 8000 150 PR221DS 630 1000 1 10 x In 100 PR222DS P DE 630 1000 1 12 x In 0096 PR223DS 630 1000 1 5 12 x In 10096 T7 800 1000 1250 1600 PR231 P PR232 P 400 1600 1 5 12 x In 10096 PR331 P PR332 P 400 1600 1 5 15 x In 100 l instantaneous trip current TMF thermomagnetic release with fixed thermal and magnetic threshold TMD thermomagnetic release with adjustable thermal and fixed magnetic threshold TMA thermomagnetic release with adjustable thermal and magnetic threshold TMG thermomagnetic release for generator protection PR22 PR23 PR33 electronic releases Satisfies the requirements of the IEC 60947 2 Standard section 8 3 3 1 2 9 Only T1B and T1C 4 60 1SDC210015D0205 Special applications Use of apparatus at 16 2 3 Hz The series of thermomagnetic Tmax circuit breakers are suitable for operation at 16 2 3 Hz frequen cies an application mainly used in the railway sector The electrical performances are given below Breaking capacity Icu according to the voltage and the number of poles to be connected in series with reference to the connection diagrams T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 Icu kA Connection B C N N S H L N S N S H L V N S H L V N S H L diagram 250 V AC 2 poles in series A 16 25 36 36 50 70 85 36 50 36 50 70 100150 36 50 70 100150 36 50 70 100 250 V AC 3 poles in series B C 20 30 40 40 55 85 100 40 55 JE C DAL
110. 10 above 6 x In l 20 6 0 8 1 2 1 8 24 EAR 3 3 6 4 2 5 58 6 6 t 0 1 0 8s step 0 1s 74 82 9 10xIln Tolerance 15 up to 6 x In m t k Tolerance 7 up to 6 x In 20 above 6 x In 10 above 6 x In Against short circuit with 1 5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 D adjustable instantaneous 13 14 15 x In 230 ms m t k trip Tolerance 10 Against earth fault with 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 6 0 8 0 9 1 xin 4 47 xl 8 16xl 2 24 xl 1 58xI 4 4 4 4 4 short inverse time delay Tolerance 4796 t 2 0 1s t 2 02s t 04s t 0 80s m t ER trip and trip characteristic Tolerance 15 according to an inverse time curve I t k or with definite time l 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 6 0 8 0 9 1xIn t 0 1s t 02s t 0 4s t 0 80s a t k Tolerance 7 Tolerance min 10 40ms These tolerances hold in the following conditions For T7 In 1250 A 1600 A Imax 12 x In self powered trip unit at full power and or auxiliary supply amp t k P up to the current value indicated t k equating to the chosen setting two or three phase power supply beyond the current value indicated In conditions other than those considered the following tollerances hold EEN Trip threshold Trip time L Release between 1 05 and 1 25 x 20 S x 1096 x 2096 I x 1596 60ms G x 1596 x 2096 2 25 1SDC210015D0205 2 26 Circuit breakers for power distribution Electronic trip units User interface The user communica
111. 10004 VR 950 F EF HR 900 850 800 750 700 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 TPC T7 S H L 1000 and T7D 1000 Withdrawable VR up to 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C Imax A 1 Imax A 1 Imax A I 1 Imax A l F EF HR VR Rear flat vertical HR Rear flat horizontal lu A F Front flat terminals EF Extended front 1050 10004 VR 950 F EF HR 900 850 800 750 700 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 TPG 1SDC21034FF0001 4 52 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC21035FF0001 T7 V 1000 up to 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C Imax A L Imax A l Imax A L Imax A L Fixed VR 1000 1 1000 1 00 1000 1 00 894 0 89 EF HR 1000 1 1000 1 00 895 0 89 784 0 78 EF Extended front VR Rear flat vertical HR Rear flat horizontal Note For ratings below 1000 A Tmax T7 does not undergo any thermal derating lu A 1050
112. 12 x In for T2 and T3 and from 6 to 14 x In for T4 according to what is indicated in the table 2 49 1SDC210015D0205 Circuit breakers for motor protection Protection against short circuit Current sensors PR221DS I 800 1000 1250 1600 T2 160 T4 250 T4 320 T5 400 T5 630 T6 630 T6 800 PR231 P I T7 800 T7 1000 T7 1250 gt gt gt A KkIKkIKkIRIR T7 1600 A A A 1 A 10 100 25 250 603 630 100 1000 160 1600 250 2500 320 3200 400 4000 630 6300 800 8000 1000 10000 1250 12500 1600 16000 E Complete circuit breaker already coded A Circuit breaker to be assembled PR221DS I Protection function Trip threshold Excludability Relation t f I Against short circuit with 1 15 2 25 8 35 45 55 65 7 75 8 85 9 10xIn adjustable instantaneous trip Tolerance 2096 T2 x 10 T4 T5 T6 Note The tolerances are valid under the following hypotheses relay self supplied on running and or auxiliary power supply without start up two phase or three phase power supply In all the cases not foreseen by the above mentioned hypotheses the following tolerance values are valid Trip threshold Trip time U 20 40ms PR231P I Protection function Trip threshold Excludability Relation t f I Against short circuit with l 1 15 2 25 3 35 45 55 65 7 75 8 85 adjustable instantaneous trip 9 10xIn t k Tolerance
113. 1SDA R1 T7 T7M Extracode for PR231 interchangeability 063140 Note In order to replace the PR231 with another electronic trip unit the key plug must be ordered The extra code 1SDA063140R1 for the interchangeability of the PR231 trip unit must be specified Trip unit adapters for PR33x Type 1SDA R1 3 T7 T7M E Adapters for PR331 PR332 068441 T T d Adapters for PR33x 063142 Note Always provided with the circuit breaker CT for external neutral Type 1SDA R1 CT for external neutral T4 320 055055 CT for external neutral T4 250 055054 CT for external neutral T4 160 055053 CT for external neutral T4 100 055052 CT for external neutral T5 400 055057 CT for external neutral T5 320 055056 CT for external neutral T5 630 055058 CT for external neutral T6 630 060430 CT for external neutral T6 800 060431 CT for external neutral T6 1000 060610 Note Connector X4 is not included and must be ordered separately Current sensor for external neutral Type 1SDA R1 Current sensor for external neutral T7 T7M 400 1600 063159 Rating plug Type 1SDA R1 T7 T7M In 400A 063147 In 630 A 063148 In 800A 063149 In 1000 A 063150 In 1250 A 063151 In 1600 A 063152 S In 400 A for RC protection 063725 E In 630 A for RC protection 063726 3 In 800 A for RC protection 063727 In 1000 A for RC pr
114. 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210373F0004 1SDC210N87F0004 1SDC210210F0004 Wi 1SDC210169F0004 Mechanical compartment door lock Type 1SDA R1 T7 T7M Mechanical compartment door lock with cables for T7 T7 M 062159 Mechanical compartment door lock fixing to wall for T7 T7M F 063722 Mechanical compartment door lock fixing to floor for T7 T7M F 063723 Mechanical compartment door lock for T7 T7M W 063724 Note A circuit breaker equipped with mechanical compartment door lock can not be interlocked with another circuit breaker TH To be ordered with cables kit for interlock and plate for interlock consistent with the circuit breaker Front lever operating mechanism FLD Type 1SDA R1 T4 T5 T6 FLD for fixed and plug in 054944 060417 FLD for withdrawable 054945 060418 Mechanical interlock MIF Type 1SDA R1 T1 T2 T3 MIF front interlocking plate between 2 circuit breakers 051396 MIF front interlocking plate between 3 circuit breakers 052165 Mechanical interlock MIR Type 1SDA R1 T4 T5 MIR HB frame unit horizontal interlock 054946 MIR VB frame unit vertical interlock 054947 MIR P plate for interlock type A T4 F P W T4 F P W 054948 MIR P plate for interlock type B T4 F P W T5 400 F P W or T5 630 F 054949 MIR P plate for interlock type C T4 F P W T5 630 P W 054950 MIR P plate for interlock type D
115. 25 1SDC210J66F0001 61 75 a0 U lt 15 5 46 5 46 5 46 5 36 75 49 25 Rear flat vertical 400 A VR 1SDC210J68F0001 Rear flat vertical 630 A VR 139 5 3P Y KE e E n S x OH Tx EC bad le O e 3 2 Y amp 186 4P B HR 139 5 3P Y E WO N S g x j PX Sel S LO L s iln 3 Y S 186 4P 8 46 5 46 5 46 5 am qr 1SDC210J72F0001 Top view 84 44 1SDC210J73F0001 Y K i ES b E b i ES 1SDC210J75F0001 139 5 3P 209 104 5 Oca Y 186 4P 139 5 3P 250 125 m on
116. 250 054605 054617 PR221DS LS I 320 054627 054631 PR221DS 100 054606 054618 PR221DS 160 054607 054619 PR221DS 250 054608 054620 PR221DS 320 054628 054632 PR222DS P LS 100 054609 054621 PR222DS P LS 160 054610 054622 PR222DS P LS 250 054611 054623 PR222DS P LS 320 054629 054633 PR222DS P LSIG 100 054612 054624 PR222DS P LSIG 160 054613 054625 PR222DS P LSIG 250 054614 054626 PR222DS P LSIG 320 054630 054634 PR222DS PD LSI 100 054635 054641 PR222DS PD LSI 160 054636 054642 PR222DS PD LSI 250 054637 054643 PR222DS PD LSI 320 054647 054649 PR222DS PD LSIG 100 054638 054644 PR222DS PD LSIG 160 054639 054645 PR222DS PD LSIG 250 054640 054646 PR222DS PD LSIG 320 054648 054650 PR223DS 160 059561 059562 PR223DS 250 059563 059564 PR223DS 320 059565 059566 Electronic trip unit 1SDA R1 for motor protection 3 poles PR222MP 100 054688 PR222MP 160 054689 PR222MP 200 054690 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles Magnetic only trip unit MA N 50 N 100 MA 10 140 10 60 140 055077 055080 MA 25 350 25 150 350 055078 055081 MA 52 728 2 312 728 055079 055082 MA 80 1120 80 480 1120 054676 054682 MA 100 1400 100 600 1400 054677 054683 MA 125 1750 125 750 1750 054678 054684 MA 160 2240 160 960 2240 054679 054685 MA 200 2800 200 1200 2800 054680 054686 see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210189F0004
117. 30 phases compulsory with S out 1 p eo eo 762 SS H e n p xX 1 e de d T al 5 Y 2 Caption Rear horizontal R CO Low terminal covers with degree of protection IP40 Y Tes eT Pet lilii ETT 76 2 SCT IRE ee SE Seef E IO pes ic SEES ISTE LEE T oR EEE UE PE Y 30 30 30 18 8 EU Leal 8 25 ll S io Wi a tt Q d IA SERO ol IBN ew CAR zs EE EE S elei 6 34 1SDC210147F0001 1SDC210015D0205 Plug in Fixing on sheet circuit breaker a ses 105 3P 472 Caption 2 153 3 35 148 Qe Depth of the switchboard in Y the case of circuit breaker po TE with face not extending D O se 0 from the compartment eege s door with or without flange B c Depth of the switchboard in 762 om E the case of circuit breaker S with face extending from is E the compartment door E X4 A io without flange x E 3 Fixed part mM 4 Moving part with terminal 5 covers degree of protec au i E tion IP40 Es n S Y 2 a 70 140 S 149 e E O Flange for Drilling templates of the compartment door compartment door 142 22 k83 107 53 5 X 2 2 Y a Y R ei x x e g X x t ES y x 8 Y Y 8 Y 2 With flange and Without flange and Without flange and Without flange and circuit breaker face circuit br
118. 400 630 T6 630 800 1000 PR222DS PR222DS PD PR223DS G Function 107 1 10 102 In 1SDC210E22F0001 T7 800 1000 1250 1600 PR231 P L I Functions t s 104 1 10 10 10 x In kA 4 8 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210E21F0001 1SDC210F28F0001 T7 800 1000 1250 1600 PR231 P T7 800 1000 1250 1600 PR232 P L S Functions L S Functions t s t s T7 800 1000 1250 1600 PR331 P T7 800 1000 1250 1600 PR331 P L S I Functions G Function Note For T7 In 1250 A 1600 A l max 12 x In 102 1 kA 107 1 10 10 10 x In kA 18DC210F31F0001 S 3 1SDC210F32F0001 4 9 1SDC210015D0205 Trip curves for power distribution Circuit breakers with electronic trip units T7 800 1000 1250 1600 PR332 P L I Functions Note For T7 In 1250 A 1600 A max 12 x In 10 1 10 10 10 x In kA 1SDC210F34F0001 T7 800 1000 1250 1600 PR332 P L S I Functions Note For T7 In 1250 A 1600 A Imax 12 x In t s 107 1 10 10 10 x In kA T7 800 1000 1250 1600 PR332 P G Function t s 40 1 1 10 102 kA 1SDC210F36F0001 T7 800 1000 1250 1600 PR332 P Rc Function Ve ha 9 107 1 10 102 VIKA 4 10
119. 45 45 45 c e 5 30 Y g Ka K 5 N A 4L 0690 2 8 eo 5 e EM H S x we 1SDC210H63F0001 144 75 26 g 10 9 Nm 5 6 Nm i wo Nj wo ds co 26 6 E z E 2 S H D GC 1SDC210H64F0001 1SDC210015D0205 Caption e High terminal covers with degree of protection IPAO 2 Insulating barriers between phases compulsory without 1 Caption Low terminal covers with degree of protection IP40 Front extended EF 105 3P 1 1 Ed 35 35 35 NE 17 5 e ka 10 ee K N S Co J Rear horizontal R 104 5 209 x 52 5 140 4P 1SDC210H70F0001 1SDC210H72F0001 255 5 105 92 5 NY 42 5 55 1SDC210H74F0001 6 18 Nm S H CH amp N M S
120. 6 1 8 7 5 6 8 1 12 5 10 1 144 96 138 92 132 88 125 82 117 76 109 7 1 10 1 16 13 18 12 18 12 17 bR 16 10 15 10 14 9 13 20 16 23 15 22 15 21 14 20 13 19 12 17 11 16 25 20 29 19 28 18 26 18 25 16 23 15 22 14 20 32 26 37 25 35 24 34 22 32 21 30 19 28 18 26 40 32 46 31 44 29 42 28 40 26 37 24 35 23 32 50 40 57 39 55 37 53 35 50 33 4T 30 43 28 40 63 51 72 49 69 46 66 44 63 41 59 38 55 36 51 80 64 92 62 88 59 84 56 80 52 75 49 70 45 65 100 80 115 77 110 74 105 70 100 65 93 61 87 56 81 125 101 144 96 138 92 132 88 125 82 117 76 109 T1 101 IB 129 184 123 178 118 168 112 160 105 150 9 139 90 129 For CB in plug in version further 10 derating Tmax T3 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C ell MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX 63 51 72 49 69 46 66 44 63 41 59 38 55 35 51 80 64 92 62 88 59 84 56 80 52 75 48 69 45 64 100 80 115 ff 110 74 105 70 100 65 93 61 87 56 80 125 101 144 96 138 92 132 88 125 82 116 76 108 70 100 160 129 184 123 176 118 168 112 160 104 149 97 139 90 129 200 161 280 154 220 147 211 140 200 130 186 121 173 112 161 250 201 287 193 278 184 263 175 250 163 233 152 216 141 201 For CB in plug in version further 10 derating 4 57 1SDC210015D0205 Temperature performances Circuit breakers with thermomagnetic trip units Tmax TA 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C In A MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX 20 19 27
121. 6 2 14 6 2 7 5 S T7 1250 F 2 50 8 2x11 20 40 S T7 1600 F 2 50 10 2x11 20 40 S class 8 8 screws not supplied up to 1250 A Rear flat vertical terminals VR Allow connection of busbars or cable terminal at the rear They can only be installed vertically Type Version Pieces Busbars mm Cable terminal mm Tightening Nm Terminal covers Phase separators W D W A BY high low fixed part T7 1250 F 2 50 8 2x11 Es 20 40 S T7 1600 F 2 50 10 2x11 20 40 S class 8 8 screws not supplied up to 1250 A A Tightening the terminal onto the circuit breaker B Tightening the cable busbar onto the terminal H R On request S Standard Kai Pieces Number of busbars cables or cable terminals 3 13 1SDC210015D0205 Accessories Connection terminals Rear flat horizontal terminals for RC221 RC222 HR Allow connection of busbars or cable terminal at the rear with RC221 RC222 They can be installed horizontally 1SDC210C48F0001 Type T1 Rear term Allow connection of busbars or cable terminal at the rear They can be installed in 4 different positions to facilitate connection to c Version Pieces Busbars mm Tightening Nm Terminal covers W D o A B high low F 1 14 5 6 2 T 50 ID glass 8 8 screws not supplied inals R able busbars 1SDC210C49F0001 Phase separators Type Version Pieces Busbars mm
122. 630 A B 630A 800A A 1000A BO IEC 60947 2 IEC 60947 2 IEC 60947 2 IEC 60947 2 IEC 60947 2 a a a E E E up to 50 A i E up to 250 A E up to 500 A li up to 800 A s a W up to 500 A e z DW zx El a a S a El a a a a a a a a P F P F P W F P W F W F W F FC CuAI EF ES R RC F FC CuAl EF ES R RC F EF ES FC CuAI HR VR EF ES HR VR FC Cu FC CuAl F FC Cu FC Cu AI EF ES R F FC Cu FC CuAl EF ES R MC F FC Cu FC Cu AI EF ES R 9 EF ES HR VR FC Cu FC CuAI EF ES HR VR FC Cu FC CuAl EF ES HR VR FC Cu FC CuAl EF HR VR EF HR VR RS ES DIN EN 50022 25000 20000 20000 20000 10000 240 240 120 120 60 8000 8000 250 A 6000 320 A 7000 400 A 5000 630 A 7000 630A 5000 800A 4000 1000A 2000 S H L versions 3000 V version 120 120 60 60 60 105 105 140 210 210 140 140 186 280 280 70 103 5 103 5 103 5 154 manual 178 motorizable 150 205 205 268 268 1 5 2 2 35 3 05 3 25 4 15 9 5 12 9 7 12 5 manual 11 14 motorizable 2 7 3 7 3 6 4 65 5 15 6 65 3 85 4 9 5 4 6 9 12 1 15 1 29 7 39 6 manual 32 42 6 motorizable 75 for T5 630 lcw 7 6 kA 630 A 10 kA 800 A Notes In the plug in version of T2 T3 and T5 630 and in the withdrawable version H 5096 for T5 630 9 Only for T7 800 1000 1250 A 8 cw 2 5 kA ow 20 kA S H L versions 15 kA V version 4 W version
123. D Y S XR Y SINGLE POLE Y 25 25 107 E 18 1SDC210H18F0001 53 107 C 60 8 3 POLES 6 4 1SDC210H19F0001 04 5 M4 Y 4 POLES 1SDC210H20F0001 47 18 rel Without flange and circuit breaker face extending 4 POLES 1SDC210H17F0001 1SDC210015D0205 Fixed circuit breaker 130 65 Flange for the compartment door 33 5 78 1SDC210H24F0001 Caption e Depth of the switchboard O n the case of circuit break er with face not extend ing from the compartment door with or without flange Depth of the switchboard in the case of circuit breaker with face extending from the compartment door without lange Bracket for fixing onto rail Low terminal covers with degree of protection IP40 1SDC210H21F0001 Overall dimensions Tmax T2 Fixing on sheet 83 Fixing on DIN EN 50022 rail
124. Electronic setting Electronic setting inverse short time delay 0 2 1 x In step 0 1 x In t 0 1 0 8s step 0 01s trip and trip characteristic Tolerance 10 Tolerance 15 E t k e H with inverse time l t k These tolerances are valid under the following conditions 9 For T4 In 320 A and T5 In 630 A t 10 5s trip unit self supplied at full power and or auxiliary supply For T4 In 320 A T5 In 630 A and T6 In 1000 A I max 9 5 x In Imax 9 5 x In two or three phase power supply For T6 In 800 A max 10 5 x In S A 9 Active in auxiliary power supply 24 V DC In conditions other than those considered the following tollerances hold 9 For I lt 0 4 x In the neutral setting must be at 10096 of that of the phases Trip threshold Trip curves S 20 20 I 20 lt 50ms G 20 20 2 41 1SDC210015D0205 2 42 Circuit breaker for zone selectivity EFDP Zone selectivity PR223EF The information recorded when the protection release trips is Currents L1 L2 L8 N which caused opening Events States Alarms Trips Tripped protection Parameters of the tripped protection When there is an auxiliary power supply providing it is complete with the VM210 module the PR223EF enables you to see not only the currents but also the voltages in the system both locally via the FDU or HMIOSO and remotely via a supervisor system using the Modbus protocol In addition up to 20 trip e
125. F PR221DS LS 10 4p 051128 Kit P MP T2 4p 051412 AUX C 2Q 1SY 055504 socket plug connectors 6 pole 051363 b Tmax T2N 160 moving part of plug in circuit breakers with auxiliary contacts and opening coil 1SDA R1 T2N 160 F F TMD 10 4p 050970 Kit P MP T2 4p 051412 AUX 3Q 1SY 250 V AC DC 051369 SOR 220 240 V AC 220 250 V DC 051336 F socket plug connectors 6 pole 051363 socket plug connectors 3 pole 051364 7 3 1SDC210015D0205 7 4 Ordering codes Instructions for ordering 3 T4 T5 electrical accessories on moving part of plug in circuit breaker Fitting the moving parts of plug in T4 T5 circuit breakers with SOR UVR and AUX accessories always requires the appropriate plug sockets i e in the case of cabled electrical accessories SOR C UVR C AUX C MOE MOE E and AUE the ADP adapters indicated in the catalogue a Tmax T4H 250 moving part of plug in circuit breakers with auxiliary contacts 1SDA R1 T4L 250 F F P221DS LS I 100 4p 054081 Kit P MP T4 4p 054840 AUX 3Q 1SY 250 V AC DC 051369 socket plug connectors 12 pole 051362 b Tmax T4H 250 moving part of plug in circuit breakers with cabled auxiliary contacts 1SDA R1 TAL 250 F F P221DS LS 100 4p 054081 Kit P MP T4 4p 054840 AUX C 3Q 1SY 250 V AC DC 054911 ADP 12 pin adapter 054923 c Tmax T5H 630 moving part of plug in circuit breaker with SOR C MOE and AUX C 1SDA R1 T4L 250 F
126. FBP PDP22 standard Physical means RS485 Profibus DP or DeviceNet cable Speed maximum 19 2 kbps 115 kbps Measurement functions Phase currents oO E Neutral current Oo B Ground current E Voltage phase phase phase neutral residual opt opt Power active reactive apparent opt opt Power factor opt H Frequency and peak factor opt e Energy active reactive apparent opt H Harmonic analysis Signalling functions LED auxiliary power supply pre alarm alarm transmission reception D B Temperature a B Indication for L S G and other protection E L Available data Circuit breaker status open closed Oo Circuit breaker position racked in racked out L Mode local remote R R Protection parameters set Oo L Load control parameters E L Alarms Protections L S G Oo R Undervoltage overvoltage and residual voltage protection timing and trip opt opt Reverse power protection timing and trip opt opt Directional protection timing and trip Underfrequency overfrequency protection timing and trip opt opt Phases rotation Failed tripping under fault conditions L Maintenance Total number of operations L El Total number of trips Oo L Number of trip tests L Number of manual operations E E Number of separate trips for each protection function Oo L Contact wear 96 L Record data of last trip D Commands Circuit breaker open close D Alarms reset D R Setti
127. Fixed version Motor operator 5 1 1 Nm 140 Caption 55 55 191 5 Overall dimensions with cabled TI d auxiliary contacts mounted TT only 3Q 1SY I BOOST DET UPP Sieg 1SDC210L13F0001 1SDC210L14F0001 Flange for the Drilling template of the compartment door compartment door supplied as standard 142 152 Ee l x lt 142 7125 E jj i ij x 1SDC210L15F0001 1SDC210L16F0001 1SDC210L17F0001 Y y Y d R min 200 R min 200 With flange Without flange Drilling template for support sheet 5 5 M5 Ea _ 5 5 M5 f ei X Je 1185 118 5 237 x T x 237 L x ks 1SDC210L18F0001 1SDC210L19F0001 Y 3 POLES 4 POLES 6 79 1SDC210015D0205 Overall dimensions Accessories for Tmax T6
128. Furthermore the depth of 70 mm takes Tmax T3 to the same standard as the two smaller sizes making assembly of circuit breakers up to 250 A in standard switchboards even simpler In fact it is possible to prepare standardised support structures facilitating the design stage and construction of the switchboard metalwork Not available on the 1000 A version For uses at a voltage of 1000 V TAV250 and T5V400 in the fixed version and T4L250 and T5L400 in the plug in version must be supplied from above 1 11 1SDC210015D0205 Construction Characteristics Distinguishing features of the series Racking out with the door closed With Tmax T4 T5 T6 and T7 circuit breakers in the withdrawable version the circuit breaker can be racked in and out with the compartment door closed thereby increasing operator safety and allowing rationalisation of low voltage arc proof switchboards Racking out can only be carried out with the circuit breaker open for obvious safety reasons us ing a special racking out crank handle supplied with the conversion kit from fixed circuit breaker to moving part of withdrawable circuit breaker 1SDC210A35F0001 Range of accessories The completeness and installation rationality of the Tmax series is also achieved thanks to innovative Solutions in development of the accessories single range of accessories for T1 T2 and T3 one for T4 T5 and T6 and one for T7 charac terised by completeness a
129. General characteriStiGs noit rentre tinto sort trea en Hee iniiae End peru atra s Ea sees 2 6 Thermomagnetic trip uhits roti rte t tonne tease erstes ori npn ha tra iR Ease ran 2 8 Sens ehe 2 1 Circuit breaker for zone selectivity Electrical Characteristics rrr teret tetto enti tane repaua 2 38 General characteristics 2 notre rattraper eres aidsi IS Rosa rra tea dones 2 39 EFDP zone selectivity e EP nre in aeneo ea vectencseees 2 40 ZS zone selectivity Se eorr tror rrr etant ratito t rra thiet aser isossa asrasin 2 43 Tmax circuit breakers for motor protection Electrical characteristics eter rettet ione azrec seu vasa 2 46 General chiaracteriStics notte rit rion rerit tao rin tp esee ki in Eo EE as Pai ste va ira isn e 2 48 Protection against short circuit tetti retine tet tionen i tana ba EE pe Es en ea Sn 2 49 Integrated protection PR221MP retinent eint raisin ann 2 51 Integrated protection PR222MBP tinere tetro nto b etae a pati pe Ea en nasa 2 52 Tmax circuit breakers for use up to 1150 V AC and 1000 V DC Eelere E 2 60 Switch disconnectors Electrical Ee E 2 64 2 1 1SDC210015D0205 Circuit breakers for power distribution Index Tmax circuit breakers for power distribution Electrical chiaracteris
130. High terminal covers with degree of protection IP40 Insulating barriers between phases compulsory with out 1 1SDC210H34F0001 Caption Rear horizontal R Low terminal covers with degree of protection IP40 Kg dE r Sess B x KA d Mi 30 18 8 Iq T Wi S 0 BE la BN eo Iji d R N l S T jel pes 86s crx Bc 5 E IIR i 6 7 1SDC210015D0205 Overall dimensions Tmax T3 Fixed circuit breaker
131. I F EF HR VR Rear flat vertical HR Rear flat horizontal lu A 850 F Front flat terminals EF Extended front 800 VR F EF HR 700 650 600 550 500 450 400 350 10 20 30 40 50 70 TPC T7 V 800 Withdrawable VR up to 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C Imax A Imax A 1 Imax A L Imax A I F EF HR VR Rear flat vertical HR Rear flat horizontal lu A F Front flat terminals EF Extended front 850 8007 VR 750 700 F EF HR 650 600 550 500 450 400 350 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 TEC 4 51 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC21032FF0001 1SDC21033FF0001 Temperature performances Circuit breakers with magnetic only or electronic trip units and switch disconnectors T7 S H L 1000 and T7D 1000 Fixed VR p to 40 C u 50 C 60 C 70 C Imax A I Imax A 1 Imax A I 1 Imax A l F EF HR VR Rear flat vertical HR Rear flat horizontal lu A F Front flat terminals EF Extended front 1050
132. In I A 800 1600 1000 2000 1250 2500 D Neutral A 100 800 1600 1000 2000 1250 2500 I 2 5 5 x In TMA T6 In A 630 800 I9 Neutral A 10096 630 800 1 20 7 1 x In Neutral A 50 400 500 I A 3150 6300 4000 8000 D Neutral A 100 3150 6300 4000 8000 1 5 10 x In Neutral A 50 2000 4000 2500 5000 Notes In identifies the setting current for protection of the phases L1 L2 and L3 and of the neutral The TMA and TMG thermomagnetic trip units which equip the Tmax T4 T5 and T6circuit breakers have the thermal element with adjustable threshold 0 7 1 xIn The set current value whichis obtained using the special selector is intended at 40 C The magnetic element has adjustable trip threshold 5 10 x In for TMA and 2 5 5 x In for TMG with a tolerance of 20 according to what is indicated in the IEC 60947 2 par 8 3 3 1 2 Standard The trip thresholds of the magnetic protection are a function of the setting used both by the phase and neutral protection 2 10 1SDC210015D0205 Current sensors Circuit breakers for power distribution Electronic trip units The Tmax T2 T4 T5 T6 and T7 circuit breakers for use in alternating current can be equipped with overcurrent releases constructed using electronic technology This allows protection functions to be obtained which guarantee high reliability tripping precision and insensitivity to temperature a
133. L V Thermomagnetic trip unit TMA MIB 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 120 kA 200 kA 320 1600 3200 054436 054440 054444 054448 054452 400 2000 4000 054437 054441 054445 054449 054453 B S 1SDA R1 8 N s H L V a z Electronic trip unit ey 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 120 kA 200 kA PR221DS LS 320 054316 054332 054348 054364 054380 PR221DS LS 400 054317 054333 054349 054365 054381 PR221DS I 320 054318 054334 054350 054366 054382 PR221DS I 400 054319 054335 054351 054367 054383 PR222DS P LSI 220 054320 054336 054352 054368 054384 PR222DS P LSI 400 054321 054337 054353 054369 054385 PR222DS P LSIG 320 054322 054338 054354 054370 054386 PR222DS P LSIG 400 054323 054339 054355 054371 054387 PR223DS 320 059529 059535 059541 059547 059553 PR223DS 400 059531 059537 059543 059549 059555 T5 400 Fixed F 4 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 N S H L V Thermomagnetic trip unit TMA ue 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 120 kA 200 kA N 50 320 1600 3200 054438 054442 054446 054450 054454 N 50 400 2000 4000 054439 054443 054447 054451 054455 N 100 320 1600 3200 054477 054479 054481 054483 054485 N 100 400 2000 4000 054478 054480 054482 054484 054486 1SDA R1 N S H L V Electronic trip unit HB 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 120 kA 200 kA PR221DS LS 320 054324 054340 054356 054372 054388 PR221DS LS 400 054325 054341 054357 054373 054389 PR221DS I 320 054326 054342 054358 054374 054390 PR221DS I 400 054327 054343 054359 054375 054391 PR222DS P LSI 320 054328 054344 054360
134. N E i VI 3 x xS X x x a C 8 5 M8 5 S 8 5 M8 E bd M 214 9 107 284 3 POLES 4 POLES 1SDC210J82F0001 6 49 1SDC210015D0205 Overall dimensions Tmax T6 630A T6 800A Terminals Front extended EF 70 70 70 31 23 Hs 10 Y 14 4 o LE 7 7 LO in ar OG VE L e Ve 8 E E d y S x A px 3 2 L4 Y 2 Rear flat horizontal HR 80 5 23 gc d 0 0 0 ere g i R ib Y 0 14 l pc ad 5 2 a e o E S i a s C E 3 yd S EDES 2 E i 8 I d B 2 d xg Pies pa 2 2 4 Y 9 3 4 POLES Rear flat vertical VR 80 5 23 JL 20 3 3 KEE 2 ERD B eH x 3 6 50 1SDC210J89F0001 3 4 POLES 1SDC210J90F0001 1SDC210015D0205 Withdrawable circuit breaker Fixing on sheet
135. P 1 24 9 5 8 8 5 8 R R R T4 F 1 25 9 5 8 8 5 18 R R R T5 F 1 35 11 100 10 5 28 H R R T6 630 F 2 40 12 5 2x7 9 R R H T6 800 E 2 50 12 5 2X0 9 R R H T7 1250 F 2 50 20 8 2x11 18 R R T7 1600 F 2 50 20 10 2x11 18 R H minimum 5 mm up to 1250A E dei e Front extended terminals EF Allow connection of busbars or cables terminated with cable terminal B Type Version Pieces Busbars mm Cable terminal mm Tightening Nm Terminal covers Phase separators W D W G A Bn high low fixed part T1 E 1 15 5 8 5 15 8 5 T 9 R S T2 F P 1 20 4 8 5 20 8 5 6 9 H S TS F P 1 20 6 10 20 10 8 18 R S T4 F 1 20 10 10 20 10 18 18 R S P W 1 20 10 8 20 8 9 R R TB E 2 30 4 11 30 11 28 18 R S P W 2 30 15 10 30 10 18 R RO T6 630 F W 2 40 5 119 40 119 9 18 R R R R T6 800 F W 2 50 5 14 50 14 9 30 R R R T6 1000 E 2 50 6 14 50 14 9 30 T7 12509 F W 2 50 8 4x11 189 40 R S T7 1600 F W 2 50 10 4x11 189 40 ENDE S S ID class 4 8 screws not supplied 9 upto 1250A 12 Nm onto fixed part of withdrawable circuit breaker H 14 mm for W only use two holes diagonally D class 8 8 screws not supplied Standard for T5 630 1SDC210C30F0001 1SDC210C31F0001 A Tightening the terminal onto the circuit breaker B Tightening the cable busbar onto the terminal H R On request S Standard Bai Pieces Number of busbars cables or cable terminals 3 10 1SDC210015D0205 Front extende
136. Plug in circuit breaker Caption E Depth of the switchboard in he case of circuit breaker with face not extending rom the compartment door with or without flange Depth of the switchboard in he case of circuit breaker with face extending from he compartment door without flange Fixed part Moving part with terminal covers degree of protec tion IP40 Flange for compartment door 88 2 Y 78 335 1SDC210136F0001 Overall dimensions Tmax T2 Fixing on sheet 120 172 90 3P 153 148 d j e E B X77 XT o 3 E j 8 1 B E S 70 lt 2 140 8 gt 3 ws O m Drilling templates of the compartment door 83 e 82 k 92 ke 12 EIE zz 46 ire S Y co Y e M E Y A 4 y 4 b gx e x s x 7 X y 4X X MN yXi x NM NN hehe hehe Cy AS Y Y Y Y With flange and Without flange and Without flange and Without flange and circuit breaker face flush with door 8 4 POLES Drilling templates for support sheet For front terminals 60 30 15 SS an L r wo wo iG u wt Ut 5 X X 5 x le A Le 45 M4 45 M Y 3 POLES 4 POLES 6 32 1SDC210138F00
137. S externa F 2 95 120 18 31 S R T6 630 standard F 2 120 240 5 31 21 5 R R T6 800 externa F 3 70 185 9 43 19 S T6 1000 external E 4 70 150 9 43 19 S T7 630 standard F 2 185 240 18 43 21 5 S R T7 1250 external F 4 70 240 18 43 21 5 S 0 up to 1250 A Multi cable terminals MC Allow connection of cables directly to the circuit breaker B Type Version Pieces Cable mm Tightening Nm Terminal covers Phase separators max flexible rigid A B high low fixed part T4 F 6 2 52 25 2 65 89 18 7 S es T5 F 6 16 50 18 5 S e 3 12 1SDC210C45F0001 A Tightening the terminal onto the circuit breaker B Tightening the cable busbar onto the terminal R On request S Standard Pieces Number of busbars cables or cable terminals 1SDC210015D0205 Rear terminals for copper aluminium cables RC CuAl Allow connection of bare copper or aluminium cables directly to the circuit breaker O S S 2 oG S Seis Type Version Pieces Tightening Nm mm Terminal covers rigid A B high low T6 630 F 2 150 240 9 43 21 S T6 800 F 3 70 185 9 31 17 5 S Rear flat horizontal terminals HR Allow connection of busbars or cable terminal at the rear They can only be installed horizontally e Xy 1SDC210C47F0001 T1 Type Version Pieces Busbars mm Cable terminal mm Tightening Nm Terminal covers Phase separators W D W A B high low T1 F 1 14 5
138. S B N o a El 5 30 1SDC210015D0205 ATSO10 device for the automatic transfer switch of two T4 T5 T6 circuit breakers without safety auxiliary voltage supply K2 K1 40 15 2 2 k h C A CB N O CB N C CB E O CB E C ATS 010 n n 12 12 gt z zv V 1SDC210G23F0001 5 31 1SDC210015D0205 5 32 Wiring diagrams Automatic transfer switch ATSO10 for T4 T5 T6 ATSO010 device for the automatic transfer switch of two T4 T5 T6 circuit breakers with safety auxiliary voltage supply in alternating current AC 40 15 CB N O CB N C CB E O CB E C A cc o 5 E T 41 42 43 44 14 13 12 11 XA8 5 3 4 2 XA8 5 3 4 p SS NS mms SSS pe mile a erii LE i i i XV l i XV T fi i i i A17 i A17 l i i I i i i i i i i i i sity l i 1G l i i l i L i Ly l IIT E i 4 IT 1 i i Q2 i i i I 4 CM i M YC i M YC i A i P i i i i i i E i 3 amp xv xv i i i i TENES ENEN PEE E EE ee j mac x XA8 1 XA8 1 1SDC210G24F0001 1SDC210015D0205 ATS010 device for the automatic transfer switch of two T4 T5 T6 circuit breakers with safety auxiliary voltage supp
139. Standard 1SDC210015D0205 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 160 250 250 320 400 630 630 800 1000 800 1000 1250 1600 1 6 160 63 250 20 320 320 630 630 1000 200 1600 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 690 690 690 690 690 690 500 500 750 750 750 36 36 36 36 36 50 50 50 50 50 50 70 70 70 70 70 85 120 120 100 120 200 200 150 T4 T5 T6 T7 250 320 400 630 630 800 1000 800 1000 1250 1600 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 690 1000 690 1000 690 690 E E E TTT Sg T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 17 160 250 250 320 400 630 800 800 1000 1250 3 3 3 3 3 3 690 690 690 690 690 690 S P P P H D o E E a E T4 T5 T6 250 400 630 630 800 3 4 3 4 3 4 20 20 12 12 12 40 40 40 T3D T4D T5D T6D T7D 250 250 320 400 630 630 800 1000 1000 1250 1600 200 250 320 400 630 630 800 1000 1000 1250 1600 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 690 690 690 690 690 500 750 750 750 750 5 3 5 8 11 30 52 2 3 6 3 6 6 15 20 1 3 1SDC210015D0205 1 4 Rated uninterrupted current A General Tmax family is now available as a complete range of moulded case circuit breakers up to 1600 A All the circuit breakers both three pole and four pole are available in the fixed version the sizes T2 T3 T4 and T5 in the plug in version and T4 T5 T6 and T7 in the withdrawable one as well With the same frame size the circuit breakers in the Tmax family are available with different breaking capacities and different rated uninterrup
140. Tightening Nm Terminal covers Phase separators W D A Bn high low T2 F P 1 20 4 8 5 6 9 S TS F P 1 20 6 8 5 6 9 S T4 F 1 20 10 8 5 6 9 S TB F 2 30 7 11 18 18 S T6 630 F 2 40 5 14 18 30 S T6 800 F 2 50 5 14 18 30 S T6 1000 F 2 50 6 14 18 30 S T7 1250 F 2 50 8 2x11 20 40 S T7 1600 E 2 50 10 2x11 20 40 S class 8 8 screws not supplied up to 1250A 1SDC210C50F0001 Rear spreaded terminals RS Allow connection of busbars and cable terminal at the rear Type T7 i 3 14 Version Pieces Busbars mm Tightening Nm Terminal covers W D A B high low fixed part W 2 60 10 2x11 18 40 A Tightening the terminal onto the circuit breaker B Tightening the cable busbar onto the terminal R On request S Standard Pieces Number of busbars cables or cable terminals Phase separators 1SDC210015D0205 Rear flat horizontal and vertical terminals for fixed parts HR VR These allow connection of busbars or cable terminals at the rear N S There are rear horizontal or vertical terminals A A 1SDC210C51F0001 Type Version Pieces Busbars mm Cable terminal mm Tightening Nm Terminal covers Phase W D W A BO high low fixed part separators T4 P W 1 20 10 10 20 10 6 18 T5 400 P W 1 25 10 12 25 12 9 18 T5 630 P W 2 40 15 11 40 11 18 T6 630 W 2 40 5 14 40 14 30 T6 800 W 2 50
141. Tmax T7M Withdrawable circuit breaker Front extended EF r e e a Y 6 n a 9 1 gps e 3 ge 18 f E aa T a I i Gi ub A Us 8 BEC lT x p 9 Ho K amp xH 8 dl 5 ail j Si e lp Li 8 Sai at 09 i b 5 j e z f i G 47 42 2 5 Z 49 2 lt 2 8 E 8 5 154 64 5 8 249 E E B L Hus 2 L E Caption D Compartment door steel sheet drilling for flange Rear flat vertical VR Rear flat horizontal HR e Rear segregation for rear ter minals 8 Flange for the compartment door 1SDC210L56F0001 4 Flange fixing screws Tightening torque 1 5 Nm Key lock optional Padlock optional 9 Tightening torque 21 Nm Front terminal d Rear horizontal terminal 1SDC210L56F0001
142. Zl RIP R f Ve d x ZI 29 2 R Rp 2 Rl j x x RI 9 Ka o i ud 5 Go 8 9 ig Slo RI i x Ke g l c o IS o SI I i OO uM OTe ERT 5 s E gt Ie EE 11 L J i gt i bg L i 1 bg g gt Q i i 6 o i bd g Is i i a l oO II l I l xe ic L e EN Ka s Fg Fg D i Fg i St T i iG P St i i i X ic al v F o 2 NN L a j L Di EE No I a jJ I GE N Pi R I N y fo 22 Z NG fa Sas 2 E E E F cc o l E E E P d A E y Wiring diagrams Electrical accessories for T1 1T6 PR222DS P PR222DS PD PR223DS or PR223EF electronic trip unit connected with the FDU front display unit A D E SE E EE EE EE l l x x K51 A11 i l l l AA X l U Laes i am 1 l l TI L1 XA m D i Le i WE i i Ei l l TI N s cdd EE x3 D i l i xs 81 ji xol 8 1 i S51 S i I Yo i xoT2 s I PR222DS P i PR222DS PD i PR223DS i PR223EF i l l Ld i B 2 S E N o a 9 PR222DS PD PR223DS or PR223EF electronic trip unit connected with the PRO21 K signalling unit
143. all Modbus RTU devices It can be used during system startup or to troubleshoot an installed network SD TestBus2 automatically scans the RS 485 bus detects all connected devices and checks their communication settings All possible combination of device address parity and baud rate are checked A click on scan is enough to spot devices which are not responding wrong addresses misconfig ured parity bits and so on This function is not limited to ABB SACE is devices all standard Modbus RTU devices are detected and their configuration is displayed After the scan the software displays warning messages about potential problems and configuration errors allowing complete diagnosis of a field bus network When ABB SACE s circuit breakers are detected additional functions can be used to check wirings send open close reset commands and retrieve diagnostic information This user friendly tool makes commissioning of Modbus networks a breeze SD TestBus2 can also communicate though a Bluetooth adapter widcomm compatible with all the ABB SACE devices equipped with BTO3O wireless communication unit SD TestBus is freeware and can be downloaded from ABB SACE s website http www abb com D a a i d ge Sep Peig L i H i M i i i i i f na A 9 3 55 1SDC210015D0205 Characteristic curves and technical information Index Characteristic curves Examples of curve reQCOUt i
144. allow the interchangeability of PR231 T7 T7M circuit breakers must be ordered specifying extra codes for its interchangeability See page 7 60 9 RC protection can be obtained only with 1SDA063869R1 toroid see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 21 1SDC210015D0205 Ordering codes Circuit breakers for zone selectivity TAL 250 Fixed F Front terminals F 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 120 kA 120 kA PR223EF 160 059477 059478 PR223EF 250 059479 059480 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 16 kA 16 kA PR223EF 160 064270 064271 PR223EF 250 064272 064273 T4L 320 Fixed F Front terminals F 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 120 kA 120 kA PR223EF 320 059481 059482 T5L 400 Fixed F Front terminals F 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 120 kA 120 kA PR223EF 320 059483 059484 PR223EF 400 059485 059486 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 16 kA 16 kA PR223EF 320 064274 064275 PR223EF 400 064276 064277 T5L 630 Fixed F Front terminals F 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 120 kA 120 kA PR223EF 630 059487 059488 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 16 kA 16 kA 7 PR223EF 630 064278 064279 see Abbreviation caption pa
145. an external power supply In the standard supply the unit includes the following SACE PRO10 T test unit complete with rechargeable batteries SACETTI test unit 100 240 V AC 12 V DC external power supply connection cables between the unit and the multi pin connector on the range of trip units which equip the Tmax SACE Isomax S and SACE Emax series connection cable between the unit and the PC RS232 serial power supply cable instruction manual and diskette with application SW plastic container SACE TT1 test unit This allows tripping of all the electronic trip units which equip the Tmax family of circuit breakers in the various versions except for PR33x to be checked and the trip test of the trip coil CTC The device supplied with power by means of a replaceable 12 V battery is provided with a two pole polarised connector housed at the back of the box which allows connection of the device to the test input bushings located on the front of the electronic trip unit The compact dimensions of the accessory make it practically pocket size 1SDC210015D0205 Accessories Automatic transfer switch ATSO10 Automatic transfer switch ATSO10 The switching unit ATSO10 Automatic Transfer Switch is the new network group switching device offered by ABB SACE It is based on microprocessor technology in compliance with the leading electromagnetic compatibility and environmental standards EN
146. and auxiliary contacts 1SDA R1 POS1 T7S 1000 PR231 P LS I In 1000A 3p F F 062738 Kit MP T7 T7M W 3p 062162 SOR 240 250 V AC DC Opening coil 062070 AUX 1Q 1SY Auxiliary contacts 062104 Right PM sliding block 062166 POS2 Fixed part for withdrawable T7 062045 Right PF sliding block 062169 b T7S 1250 PR332 P with lever operating mechanism in withdrawable version and undervoltage release 1SDA R1 POS1 T7S 1250 PR332 P LSIG In 1250A 3p F F 062871 Kit MP T7 T7M W 3p 062162 UVR 240 250 V AC DC Undervoltage release 062092 Right PM sliding block 062166 Central PM sliding block 062165 POS2 Fixed part for withdrawable T7 062045 Right PF sliding block 062169 Central PF sliding block 062168 10 Interchangeability of the PR231 P trip unit for Tmax T7 Interchangeable T7S 800 PR231 P with lever operating mechanism 1SDA R1 T7S 800 PR231 P LS I Inz800 A 4p F F 061973 Extra code for PR231 P interchangeability 063140 11 Motorisation for Tmax T7 For Tmax T7 motorisation the circuit breaker in T7M version which can be motorised must be fitted with spring charging geared motor opening coil and closing coil Motorised T7S 1000 PR232 P 1SDA R1 T7S 1000 M PR232 P LSI In 1000 A 4p F F 062763 220 250 V AC DC Spring charging geared motor 062116 SOR 240 250 V AC DC Opening coil 062070 SCR 240 250 V AC DC Closing coil 062081 7 6 1SDC210015D0205 Ordering codes Po
147. arc extinction time to be reduced All three sizes are fitted with adjustment of the thermal threshold as standard and have new three pole and four pole residual P CH W TMAX T1 THE LITTLE ONE THAT S REALLY BIG Thanks to its extremely compact dimensions Tmax T1 is a unique circuit breaker in its category Compared with any other circuit breaker with the same performance 160 A up to 36 kA at 415 V AC the overall dimensions of the apparatus are nota bly smaller TMAX T2 INTELLIGENCE AND HIGH PERFORMANCE IN THE PALM OF YOUR HAND Tmax T2 is the only 160 A circuit breaker available with such high per formances in such very limited overall dimensions A breaking capacity of 85 kA at 415 V AC can be achieved Tmax T2 can be fitted with a latest generation elec tronic trip unit TMAX T3 250 A IN A DEPTH OF 70 MM FOR THE FIRST TIME Tmax T3 is the first circuit breaker which carries 250 A in con siderably limited overall dimensions compared with any other similar apparatus a really large step forward for this type of equipment Tmax T3 allows coordinations for motor protection to be made up to a power of 90 kW at 415 V AC TMAX T4 To AND T6 BE FREE TO CHOOSE UP TO 1000 A Tmax T4 T5 and T6 are the moulded case circuit breakers with the best performance size ratio on the market Their application possibilities are practically unlimited thanks to their dedicated and specific ran
148. be assessed by comparing at the same symmetrical short circuit current value the corresponding peak value at the prospective Short circuit current curve A with the limited peak value curve B The T2S 160 circuit breaker with thermomagnetic trip unit In 160 A at a voltage of 400 V limits the short circuit current to 16 2 kA for a fault current of 40 kA with a reduction of about 68 kA compared with the peak value of the 84 kA prospective short circuit current i 1 2 3 10 20 40 50 100 200 Jee KA 1SDC210E02F0001 Exam ple 3 T3S 250 ES Specific let through energy curves 10 An example of reading the graph of the specific let through energy curve of the T3S 250 In 160 A circuit breaker at a voltage of 400 V is given below io The prospective symmetrical short circuit current is indicated on the abscissa of the diagram whereas the ordinates show the specific let through energy values expressed in A s 117 In correspondence with a short circuit current of 20 KA the circuit breaker lets through a value of Pt equal to 1 17 10 A s 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 las KA 1SDC210E03F0001 Abbreviations used In rated current of the thermomagnetic or electronic trip unit set trip current for overload trip current for short circuit lms Prospective symmetrical short circuit current 1
149. behaviour a E Reference Standard IEC 60947 2 IEC 60947 2 Protection against short circuit Magnetic only trip unit MA W MF up to In 12 5 A a Electronic trip unit PR221DS I B PR231 P I Integrated protection IEC 60947 4 1 Electronic trip unit PR221MP a PR222MP Interchangeability Versions F P F P Terminals fixed F FC Cu FC CuAI EF ES R F FC Cu FC CuAl EF ES R plug in F FC Cu FC CuAI EF ES R F FC Cu FC CuAl EF ES R withdrawable Fixing on DIN rail DIN EN 50022 DIN EN 50022 Mechanical life No operations 25000 25000 No Hourly operations 240 240 Electrical life 415 V AC No operations 8000 8000 No Hourly operations 120 120 Basic fixed version dimensions W mm 90 105 D mm 70 70 H mm 130 150 Weight fixed kg 1 1 1 5 plug in kg withdrawable kg 1 5 2 7 TERMINAL CAPTION FC CuAl Front for CuAl cables Im 75 for T5 630 Note in the plug in version of T2 T3 and T5 630 E Front MC Multicable 5096 for T5 630 andin the withdrawable version of T5 630 EF Front extended HR Rear flat horizontal 9 low 5 kA the maximum rated current is derated by ES Front extended spread VR Rear flat vertical 9 lcw lt 10 kA 1096 at 40 C FC Cu Front for copper cables HR VR Rear flat orientated cw 20 kA S H L versions 15 kA V version R Rear orientated 2 46 1SDC210015D0205
150. case of a malfunction an alarm message appears directly on the display The Alarm is high lighted by the Alarm LED as well Residual Current Different solutions are available for integrated residual current protection The basic choice is PR332 P LSIRc which has all the characteristics of PR332 P LSI and residual current protection as well When additional features are required the solution is PR332 P LSIG with an additional PR830 V module see next paragraph Using this configuration residual current protection is added to a powerful unit having the features of PR332 P LSI and all the add ons described for the PR330 V module such as voltage protection and advanced measurement functions Residual current protection acts by measuring the current by means the external dedicated toroid 2 29 1SDC210015D0205 2 30 Circuit breakers for power distribution Electronic trip units Test Functions Once enabled from the menu the Info Test pushbutton on the front of the trip unit allows correct operation of the chain consisting of the microprocessor trip coil and circuit breaker tripping mecha nism to be checked The control menu also includes the option of testing correct operation of the display signalling LEDs By means of the front multi pin connector it is possible to apply a SACE PRO10 T Test unit which allows the functions of the PR222DS P PR222DS PD PR223DS PR223EF PR232 P PR331 P and PR332 P ranges of trip units
151. communication unit Socket for TT1 test unit LED signalling alarm of the circuit breaker LED signalling the status of the circuit breaker Push button for operation mode selection local remote diagnosis system and on board 8 8 2 PR223EF Protection functions and parameterisations e s E u Relation EFDP zone 1 Protection functions Trip threshold Trip curves Excludability t f selectivity Against overload with Electronic setting Electronic setting long Inverse time delay 0 18 1 xIn step 0 01 sin at 6x t 3 18s step 0 5s trip and trip characteristic l according to an inverse Trip between 1 1 1 8 xl Tolerance 10 7 iagi 7 time curva Pt k according IEC 60947 2 i to the IEC 60947 2 Standard Against short circuit with Electronic setting Electronic setting short inverse time delay 0 60 10 x In step 0 1 xIn at8xInt 0 05 0 5s step 0 01s E t k 8 trip and trip characteristic Tolerance 10 Tolerance 10 with inverse time l t k or with definite time Electronic setting Electronic setting 0 60 10 x In step 0 1 xIn t 0 05 0 5s step 0 01s P tek n Tolerance 1096 Tolerance 1096 Against short circuit with ultra rapid trip H tek Against short circuit with Electronic setting instantaneous trip with 7 1 5 12 x In step 0 1 x In adjustable threshold Tolerance 10 A instantaneous a t k Against earth fault with
152. connected to earth the installation method mus be such as to make the probability of a second earth fault nil 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210F14F0001 1SDC210F15F0001 1SDC210F16F0001 The following table shows which connection diagram to use according to the number of poles to be connected in series to obtain the required breaking capacity in relation to the type of distribution network Distribution system Voltage Ti T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 viii Earthed polarity Earthed midpoint lt 250 V DC D A B SR Fo A B Fo 500 V DC E B C E F 8 A B Fo lt 750 V DC E g B C E F lt 1000 V DC E 8 E F D F The likelihood of a double earth fault is assumed to be nil Assuming a negative earthed polarity 9 Consult ABB on the use of three pole breakers General note The suitability of the wiring of the poles must be assessed in the light of the short circuit current value and the breaking power specified for the various circuit breakers The pole connecting methods C and D are used to achieve a protective function not to disconnect the earthed polarity In the following table the correction value to be used for the protection thresholds against short circuit is indicated for each circuit breaker the thermal threshold does not undergo any alteration Circuit breaker Diagram A Diagram B Diagram C Diagram D Diagram E Diagram F T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 4 69 1SDC210015D0205 Special appli
153. corresponding to the combined circuit breaker Sealable thermal adjustment lock This is applied to the circuit breaker cover near the thermal element regulator of the TMD thermomag netic trip unit for T1 T2 and T3 and prevents it being tampered with Overview of the available locks T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 FDL Front for lever operating mechanism E E E PLL_ Padlock for operating lever L D L KLC Key lock on the circuit breaker L D El RHL Keylock for rotary handle operating mechanism B R KLF D and KLF S Key lock for front for lever and rotary handle MOL D and MOL S Key lock in open position for MOE and MOE E E E MOL M_ Key lock against manual operation for MOE and MOE_E E B KLF FP and PLL FP_ Locks in open position for fixed part B Mechanical lock on compartment door H Sealable lock of thermal adjustment El R 3 33 1SDC210015D0205 T1 T2 T3 T3 T4 T5 T6 1SDC210C88F0001 1SDC210C89F0001 1SDC210D26F0001 1SDC210D27F0001 3 34 Accessories Operating mechanism and locks Mechanical interlock T1 T2 TS The mechanical MIF interlock can be applied on the front of two T1 T2 or T3 circuit breakers mounted side by side in either the three pole or four pole fixed version and prevents simultaneous closing of the two circuit breakers Fixing is carried out directly on the back plate of the switchboard The front interlocking plate allows inst
154. current Kit for conversion of fixed part of plug in into fixed part of withdrawable For Tmax T4 and T5 is available a conversion kit which is made up by a guide to prepare the fixed part of the circuit breaker in the plug in version in the fixed part of the circuit breaker in the withdrawable version a racking out crank handle and by the flange for the compartment door to replace the one supplied with the fixed or plug in circuit breaker version Racking out crank handle This allows racking out and racking in of the circuit breaker in the withdrawable version into the fixed part with the door closed The crank handle is the same for the whole range of circuit breakers and is automatically supplied with the fixed part of withdrawable circuit breakers or with the conversion kit for fixed part of plug in into fixed part of withdrawable Sliding contacts blocks The sliding contacts blocks are required for Tmax T7 in withdrawable version equipped with electrical accessories or with an electronic trip unit Their function is to realize the electrical connections of the secondary circuits between the mobile part and the fixed part and these blocks work in pairs one block is to be mounted on the mobile part and the respective one on the fixed part The following table combines the types of sliding contacts blocks and the electrical accessories Left block Central block Right block Spring charging motor PR331 Auxiliary contacts Q
155. entire switching procedure even in the event of a microprocessor fault by working electromechanically on the control relays l General specifications Rated supply voltage 24 V DC 2096 galvanically insulated from earth 48 V DC 1096 maximum ripple 5 Maximum absorbed power 5W Q 24 V DC 10W Q 48 V DC Rated power mains present and circuit breakers not controlled 1 8 W Q 24 V DC 4 5 W Q 48 V DC Operating temperature 25 C 70 C Maximum humidity 90 without condensation Storage temperature 25 C 80 C Protection rating IP54 front panel Dimensions mm 144 x 144 x 85 Weight kg 0 8 3 47 1SDC210015D0205 Accessories Automatic transfer switch ATSO10 Setting range for thresholds and times Minimum voltage Un Min 5 30 Un Maximum voltage Un Max 5 30 Un Fixed frequency thresholds 10 10 fn t opening delay of the normal line circuit breaker due to network error CB N 0 32s t generator start up delay due to network error 0 32s t stopping delay of the generator 0 254s t switching delay due to network stop 0 254s t closing delay of the emergency line circuit breaker CB E after detecting the generator voltage 0 32s Operating sequence VN ok ee Lot T CB N on m l 1 l TE l l t l GE start it 3 L S resi ean VE ok l JES
156. external terminal 064186 064187 064188 064189 Ki FC CuAl T1 95mm COR external terminal 051446 051447 051444 051445 FC CuAl T2 95mm 051458 051459 051456 051457 FC CuAl T2 2x95mm external terminal 055153 055154 055151 055152 FC CuAI T2 185mm external terminal 051462 051463 051460 051461 FC CuAI T3 2x150mm external terminal 055157 055158 055155 055156 FC CuAI T3 185mm 051486 051487 051484 051485 FC CuAl T3 150 240mm external terminal 051940 051941 051942 051943 FC CuAl T4 1x50mm 054984 054985 054982 054983 FC CuAl T4 2x150mm external terminal 054992 054993 054990 054991 FC CuAl T4 1x185mm 054988 054989 054986 054987 FC CuAl T4 1x240mm external terminal 064549 064550 064551 064552 FC CuAl T5 400 2x120mm external terminal 055028 055029 055026 055027 FC CuAl T5 400 1x240mm 055020 055021 055018 055019 FC CuAl T5 400 1x300mm 055024 055025 055022 055023 FC CuAI T5 2x240mm external terminal 055032 055033 055030 055031 FC CuAl T6 630 2x240mm 023380 023390 013922 013923 FC CuAI T6 800 3x185mm external terminal 023384 023394 013956 013957 FC CuAl T6 1000 4x150mm external terminal 060687 060688 060689 060690 FC CuAI T7 1250 T7M 630 2x240mm external terminal 063865 063866 063867 063868 FC CuAI T7 1250 T7M 1250 4x240mnmr external terminal 063112 063113 063114 063115 Front terminals F L Type 1SDA R1 palle 3 pieces 4 pieces 6 pieces 8 pieces Ka K F T2 Plugs with screws 051450 051451 051448 051449
157. fully integrated on board the circuit breaker guarantee complete protection of the motor In fact it is not necessary to provide the help of an external thermal relay for protection against overloads as on the other hand occurs with the standard solution The PR222MP can be connected to a contactor for the basic protection function NORMAL mode of the motor the circuit breaker can control contactor opening in the case of a fault excluding short circuit by means of the SACE PR212 Cl accessory control unit In fact a contactor has breaking capacities at high currents which are less efficient than the circuit breaker but a high number of possible operations consistently higher than those of the circuit breaker about 1 000 000 The combination of the two devices therefore optimises motor protection and control In Heavy operation mode and for currents below the set magnetic trip threshold the PR222MP trip unit allows control of the circuit breaker opening and not of the contactor In this operating mode the circuit breaker is therefore called on to protect the plant under any overcurrent conditions assigning just motor control operations turning on and turning off to the contactor PR222MP electronic trip unit Current sensors Tmax T4 T5 T6 In A 100 160 200 320 400 630 T4 250 a a E T5 400 a a T6 800 E E Complete circuit breaker already coded In any case the PRO10 T unit for testing the trip unit and checking the
158. guaranteed by a couple of shielded twisted pair cables for modbus RS485 which connect the circuit breakers equipped with the PR223EF ask ABB for further information about cable type In the case of a short circuit the circuit breaker immediately to the supply side sends a lock signal to the hierarchically higher level protection by means of the bus and before trippping checks that a similar lock signal has not come from the load side protection System integrity is controlled by a monitoring function in the case of a short circuit if a fault is found in the interlocking system the EF protection function trips with trip times in the order of tens of ms but zone selectivity is not guaranteed Furthermore if the load side circuit breaker does not manage to trip it asks the supply side circuit breaker for help and the latter opens even if it does not detect the fault SOS function A 24 V DC auxiliary power supply is required for operation of the EF protection and zone selectivity All the protection functions can be programmed remotely exploiting the dialogue function on the trip unit or locally by means of the PRO10 T which can be connected to a serial port on the front of the PR223EF One of the main advantages in using zone selectivity between MCCBs is the reduction in size of the circuit breakers it makes possible In fact in looking for selectivity between moulded case circuit breakers with the classic techniques it is often nec
159. is not available on T6 1000 A 8 For availability please ask ABB SACE of T5 630 the maximum rated current available is derated by 10 at 40 C 2 5 1SDC210015D0205 Circuit breakers for power distribution General characteristics The series of Tmax moulded case circuit breakers complying with the IEC 60947 2 Standard is divided into seven basic sizes with an application range from 1 A to 1600 A and breaking capacities from 16 kA to 200 kA at 380 415 V AC For protection of alternating current networks the following are available T1B 1p circuit breaker equipped with TMF thermomagnetic trip units with fixed thermal and magnetic threshold 10 x In T1 T2 T3 and T4 up to 50 A circuit breakers equipped with TMD thermomagnetic trip units with adjustable thermal threshold 0 7 1 x In and fixed magnetic threshold 10 x In T2 T3 and T5 circuit breakers fitted with TMG trip units for long cables and generator protection with adjustable thermal threshold l 0 7 1 x In and fixed magnetic threshold l 3 x In for T2 and T3 and adjustable magnetic threshold l 2 5 5 x In for T5 T4 T5 and T6 circuit breakers with TMA thermomagnetic trip units with adjustable thermal threshold I O 7 1 x In and adjustable magnetic threshold 5 10 x In T2 with PR221DS electronic trip unit T4 T5 and T6 with PR221DS PR222DS P PR222DS PD and PR223DS electronic trip units
160. lock KLF 12 Early auxiliary contact AUE 13 Transmitted rotary handle RHE 14 Front terminal for copper cable FC Cu 15 Front extended terminal EF 16 Multi cable terminal only for T4 MC 17 Front terminal for copper aluminium FC CuAI 18 Front extended spread terminal ES 19 Rear orientated terminal R 20 Conversion kit for plug in withdrawable versions 21 Guide of fixed part in the withdrawable version 22 Fixed part FP 23 Auxiliary position contact AUP 24 Phase separators 25 PRO10T 26 TT1 27 Racking out crank handle 28 Residual current release OONOARWN gt 1SDC210A16F0001 1 7 1SDC210015D0205 1 8 1SDC210A17F0001 1SDC210A18F0001 1SDC210A20F0001 Construction characteristics Distinguishing features of the series Double insulation Tmax has double insulation between the live power parts excluding the terminals and the front parts of the apparatus where the operator works during normal operation of the installation The seat of each electrical accessory is completely segregated from the power circuit thereby preventing any risk of contact with live parts and in particular the operating mechanism is completely insulated in relation to the powered circuits Furthermore the circuit breaker has oversized insulation both between the live internal parts and in the area of the connection terminals In fact the distances exceed those required by the IEC
161. of PR330 D M in an industrial communication system are available on the ABB Web page BTO80is a device to be connected to the Test connector of PR222DS P PR222DS PD PR223DS PR223EF PR232 P PR331 P and PR332 P trip units It allows Bluetooth communication between the trip unit and a PDA or a Notebook with a Bluetooth port This device is dedicated to use with the SD Pocket or SD TestBus2 application It can provide the auxiliary supply needed to energize the protection trip unit by means of rechargeable batteries EPO10 FBP PDP22 is the Fieldbus Plug interface allows connection of ABB SACE trip units with Modbus communication to a Profibus DeviceNet or AS I field bus network Furthermore a new generation of software dedicated to installation configuration supervision and control of protection trip units and circuit breakers is now available SD View 2000 SD Pocket SD TestBus2 All information required for simple integration of PR330 D M in an industrial communication system are available on the ABB Web page http www abb com 1SDC210015D0205 Measurement signalling and available data functions Details about functions available on PR332 P trip units with PR330 D M and EPO10 FBP PDP22 are listed in the table below Communication functions PR332 P PR332 P PR330 D M PR330 D M and EP010 Protocol Modbus RTU
162. of function L to be signalled which is activated when 90 of the set trip threshold is reached The yellow flashing LED every 3s indicates the normal operation PR232 P Alarm and Pre alarm LED Protection Colour Pre alarm Alarm Last trip Red L m B rs mm z Following circuit breaker opening it is possible to know which protection function made the release trip by connecting the PROS3O B battery unit onto the front of the release This is also possible thanks to the PRO10 T test and configuration unit By means of the BT030 wireless communication unit the PR232 P can be connected to a PDA or to a personal computer extending the range of information available for the user Infact by means of the ABB SACE s SD Pocket communication software it is possible to read the values of the currents flowing through the circuit breaker the value of the last 20 interrupted currents and the protection settings 1SDC210015D0205 PR331 P LED signalling Alarm and prealarm for protection function L Protection L Against overload Dip switch for neutral setting Dip switch for network frequency Rating Plug Socket for connection of SACE PRO10 T BTO30 and PRO30 B LED signalling Alarm for protection function S PR331 P Protection functions and parameterisations PR331 P The PR881 P available for Tmax T7 in the PR331 P LSIG version with its complete range of protec tion functions together with the w
163. ole LO Pe E iD 2 x 10 2 18 to Ea 5 g x d 18 1SDC210I79F0001 1SDC210I76F0001 1SDC210015D0205 Overall dimensions Tmax T5 Plug in circuit breaker Fixing on sheet 1395 3P 162 5 69 75 153 5 46 5 46 5 1 2 Y UO ek d D d a4 105 ei E 27 PG 5 5 G Ga K Wiesen n s 5 H E Y E 157 lt 2 186 E gt 3 189 400A Caption Flange for D Fixed pat compartment door 23 Moving part with terminal cov ers degree of protection IP40 Overall dimensions with cabled accessories mounted SOR C UVR C RC221 222 Overall dimensions with cabled auxiliary contacts mounted only 3Q 1SY e r za an L J e M 8 X Drilling templates for support sheet For front terminals 400 A 1SDC210188F0001 125 9j 5 5 M5 y 4 E 3 x x e a Y 3 POLES 5 5 M5 Y 119 N 130 LO e N 36 25 Po 1SDC210189F0001 Y 4 POLES 1SDC210185F0001 139 5 3P 69 75 46 5 46 5 46 5 i T al T w Kei S 27 T E 105 27 TU 5 5 B d
164. or SY Sping charged contact AUX SC PR332 Shunt opening release Ready to close contact AUX RTC Shunt closing release Early auxiliary contacts AUE Under voltage release Contact for signalling trip coil release trip AUX SA Trip reset If at least one of the electrical accessories listed in the previous table is fitted on the circuit breaker the respective pair of blocks must be mounted on the mobile part and on the fixed part 1SDC210015D0205 T4 T5 LK ei Ze A a Jm 1SDC210C09F0001 1SDC210C08F0001 1SDC210D17F0001 1SDC210C10F0001 Kit for conversion into moving part of plug in for T2 T3 T4 T5 Allows the fixed circuit breaker with front terminals to be converted into the moving part of a plug in circuit breaker The kit consists of isolating contacts anti racking out safety device assembly screws and nuts low terminal covers for the moving part The fixed part for plug in version is necessary to complete the circuit breaker Kit for conversion into moving part of withdrawable for T4 T5 T6 T7 Allows the fixed circuit breaker with front terminals to be converted into the moving part of a with drawable circuit breaker The kit consists of isolating contacts frame assembly screws and nuts low terminal covers for the moving part The circuit breakers in the withdrawable version must always be completed either with the front for lever
165. plug in version the maxi mum setting is derated by 10 at 40 C F F Front flat terminals lu A 260 255 250 245 240 235 230 225 220 215 210 205 200 40 up to 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C Imax A Imax A Imax A Imax A 250 250 227 204 45 50 55 60 65 70 T C T3D 250 Plug in Note in the plug in version the maxi mum setting is derated by 10 at 40 C F up to 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C Imax A Imax A Imax A Imax A EF ES FC Cu FC CuAl F Front flat terminals FC Cu Front terminals for copper cables FC CuAI Front terminals for CuAI cables lu A 240 EF Front extended terminals ES Front extended spread terminals 220 200 180 160 140 120 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 TPC 4 41 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210E91F0001 1SDC210E91F0001 Temperature performances Circuit breakers with magnetic only or electronic trip units and switch disconnectors T4 250 and T4D 250 up to 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C Imax A l Imax A L Imax A L Imax A l Fixed FC 250 1 250 1 250 1 220 0 88 F 250 1 250 1 250 1 220 0 88 R HR 250 1 250 1 250 1 220 0 88 R VR 250 1 250 1 250 1 230 0 92 FC Front cables terminals F Front flat terminals R HR Rear terminals horizontal R VR Rear terminals
166. position which prevents any command either locally or remotely The connectors once inserted in the special slot on the left hand side of the circuit breaker extend in relation to the outline of the circuit breaker itself and are only compatible with pre wired electrical accessories A selector allows passage from automatic to manual operation and it is also available a block supplied as standard for the operating mode of the motor The motor operator can be fitted both with a key lock in the open position with the same MOL S keys for groups of circuit breakers or different MOL D keys and with an MOL M key lock against manual operation in the former case the lock in the open position is both of electrical and mechanical type in the latter case only of mechanical type i e only closing from the front of the circuit breaker remote closing is allowed In the case of interlocked circuit breakers for safety reasons the key lock against manual operation is required The motor operator is always fitted with a contact to signal auto or manual not on changeover On request it can also be fitted with an AUX MO auxiliary contact on changeover which provides a signal of its state of service auto remote control of the circuit breaker or manual If the circuit breaker is fitted with the PR222DS PD and PR223DS electronic trip unit instead of the MOE motor operator it is possible to use the MOE E motor operator for its
167. pre cabled version depending on the size of the circuit breaker fitted with free ca bles 1 m long with a connector with 1 m long cables The pre cabled version is mandatory on the T4 T5 and T6 circuit breakers in the withdrawable version The auxiliary contacts for T7 are always fitted with three terminals to be mounted in the terminal board to carry out the cabling The auxiliary contacts are available for use both in direct and alternating current at various voltages The signals are reset when the circuit breaker is reset T1 T7 AUX Available both in the pre cabled and uncabled version they supply the following electrical signalling open closed indicates the position of the circuit breaker contacts Q release trip signals circuit breaker opening due to overcurrent release trip for overload or short circuit trip of the residual current release of the opening coil or of the undervoltage release of the emergency opening pushbutton of the motor operator or two to operation of the test pushbutton SY contact for signalling electronic trip unit tripped signals intervention of one of the protection func tions of the electronic trip unit S51 The auxiliary contacts for T7 are always fitted with terminals to be mounted in the terminal box to carry out wiring T4 T5 T6 and T7 with electronic trip units AUX SA There is a contact for signalling electronic trip units tripped only available in the pre cabled version fo
168. same key for different groups of circuit breakers N 20007 062137 062144 KLC S same key for different groups of circuit breakers N 20008 062138 062145 KLC R arrangement for Ronis key lock 062139 062146 KLC P arrangement for Profalux key lock 062140 062146 3 Key lock for rotary handle RHL 8 Type 1SDA R1 2 T1 T2 T3 u RHL different keys for each circuit breaker in open position 051389 RHL same key for different groups of circuit breakers N 20005 051390 RHL same key for different groups of circuit breakers N 20006 060147 RHL same key for different groups of circuit breakers N 20007 060148 RHL same key for different groups of circuit breakers N 20008 060149 RHL different keys for each circuit breaker in open closed position 052021 see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 51 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210N85F0004 8 z amp 9 a 9 7 52 Ordering codes Accessories Key lock for front rotary handle KLF Type 1SDA R1 T4 T5 T6 T7 KLF D different key 054939 060658 063555 KLF S same key for different groups of circuit breakers N 20005 054940 060659 063556 KLF S same key for different groups of circuit breakers N 20006 054941 060660 063557 KLF S same key for different groups of circuit breakers N 20007 054942 060661 063558 KLF S same key for different groups of circuit brea
169. series for one polarity with neutral earthed L o o l N xX X X t t t T Load Diagram E Interruption with three poles in series for one polarity and one pole for the other polarity and inter ruption with two poles in series for each polarity N F 0 0 o o E Lx oo OO oo L 1 i SISISIN HLL LL Load Load Note Without neutral connected to earth the installation method must be such as to make the probability of a second earth fault negligible 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210F08F0001 1SDC210F09F0001 1SDC210F10F0001 Trip thresholds The thermal threshold of the circuit breaker is the same as the normal version For the magnetic threshold a correction coefficient must be used to be made on the protection thresholds as indicated in the table Circuit breaker Diagram A Diagram B C Diagram D CHEN T2 0 9 0 9 0 9 T3 0 9 0 9 T4 0 9 0 9 0 9 T5 0 9 0 9 0 9 Setting adjustment of the magnetic threshold The correction factor takes into consideration the phenomena that with frequencies differing from 50 60 Hz modifies the tripping value of protection threshold against short circuit The value that must be set on the trip unit is therefore the real wanted tripping value divided by the correction factor Example
170. side by side Caption T1 CO Circuit breaker face 101 2 83 1 extending 105 2 Circuit breaker face flush 70 with door 3 Low terminal covers with L GS degree of protection IP40 E l E 2 X x g X i X 9 z is ray 8 am 3 5 gt 3 JI J lt 2 B 2 Aen 1 S A 79 2 2 Drilling templates for fixing sheet Drilling templates of the compartment door B 2538 1 65 S Q 45 M4 EE 122 2 y 3 I Y 2 S E T S X bh ala m G 9 pX X P S Y 8 Y 8 3 POLES 25 25 381 65 Q 45 M4 Y A B N e Hi 79 161 3 Br x RS 71 1613 S B 790 161 3 3 g 71 1863 B Y 4 POLES 6 64 1SDC210015D0205 Caption e Circuit breaker face extending 2 Circuit breaker face flush with door 3 Low terminal covers with degree of protection IPAO 79 EL 79 71 161 3 161 3 161 3 198 2 Solenoid operator side by side T2 120 ge 762 y 90 30 30 30 E d a Se ees al l IS a7 ll L A 7 Drilling templates for fixing sheet 1 1 Nm 45 M4 30 35 6 65 E 5 Y x K i e Le S 4x L x8 4 dX Y 3 POLES 45 M4 30 30
171. supply to the ATSO10 device also use the Q61 2 two pole rather than four pole auxiliary protection circuit breaker Caption A Device type ATSO10 for the automatic transfer switch of two circuit breakers A17 Unit for M motor electrical latching K1 Auxiliary contactor type VB6 30 01 for the emergency supply voltage presence K2 Auxiliary contactor type VB6 30 01 for the normal supply voltage presence K51 Q1 Overcurrent release for emergency supply line K51 Q2 Overcurrent release for normal supply line KC1 KC2 Auxiliary contactors type BC6 30 for circuit breaker closing KO1 KO2 Auxiliary contactors type BC6 30 for circuit breaker opening M Motor with series energization for the circuit breaker opening and closing Q 1 Circuit breaker auxiliary contact Q1 Circuit breaker for emergency supply line Q2 Circuit breaker for normal supply line Q61 1 2 Miniature circuit breakers for auxiliary circuits protection 81 S2 Position contact operated by a cam of the operating mechanism S3 Key lock contact operated by the remote opening trip unit or the operating mecha nism 11 516 Contacts for the ATSO10 device inputs S75I 1 Contact signalling circuit breaker in withdrawable version connected SY Contact signalling circuit breaker tripped through trip units operation tripped posi tion H Current trasformers feeding the overcurrent relay X2 Connector for the circuit breaker auxiliary circuits X
172. terminals XV connectors X12 X13 X14 X15 are not supplied With this version the applications indicated in figure 31A cannot be provided Withdrawable version The control circuits are fitted between the poles of connectors X12 X13 X14 X15 terminal box XV is not supplied Version without overcurrent release With this version the applications indicated in figures 18A 14A 41A 42A 43A 44A 45A 62A can not be provided Version with PR231 P or PR232 P electronic trip unit With this version the applications indicated in figures 41A 42A 43A 44A 45A 62A cannot be pro vided Version with PR331 P electronic trip unit With this version the applications indicated in figures 42A 43A 44A 45A cannot be provided Version with PR332 P electronic trip unit With this version the applications indicated in Caption A1 AS A4 A13 A19 AY K51 K51 1 8 K51 GZin DBin fi igure 41A cannot be provided Circuit diagram figure number See note indicated by letter Circuit breaker accessories Accessories applied to the fixed part of the circuit breaker for withdrawable version only Example switchgear and connections for control and signalling outside the circuit breaker PRO21 K signalling unit outside the circuit breaker PR830 R actuation unit SOR TEST UNIT Test monitoring Unit see note R Electronic time delay device of the undervoltage release outside the circuit breaker
173. the above hypotheses the following tolerance values are valid Trip threshold Trip time s x 2096 x 2096 I x 2096 40ms 2 16 1SDC210015D0205 PR222DS P The PR222DS P trip unit available for T4 T5 and T6 has protection functions against overload L delayed S and instantaneous short circuit version PR222DS P LSI Alternatively as well as the functions L S I it also has protection against earth fault G version PR222DS P LSIG Setting of the PR222DS trip unit can be carried out by means of dip switches on the front of the circuit breaker or electronically using the PRO10 T programming and control unit see page 3 46 or the BTO30 wireless communication unit see page 3 42 There is a single setting for the phases and neutral for which one can decide whether to set the threshold of the protection functions to OFF to 5096 or to 10096 that of the phases by means of two dedicated dip switches Furthermore on the front of the PR222DS P or PR222DS PD trip units signalling of pre alarm and alarm of protection L is available The pre alarm threshold value signalled by the red LED fixed is equal to 0 9 x 11 It is also possible to transmit remotely the alarm of protection L simply connecting connector X3 to the dedicated contact PR222DS PD Apart from the protection functions available for the PR222DS P trip unit for the settings see page 2 20 the PR222DS PD trip unit available for T4 T5 and T6 also h
174. to be tested and checked User interface The human machine interface HMI of the device is made up of a wide graphic display LEDs and browsing pushbuttons The interface is designed to provide maximum simplicity The language can be selected from among five available options Italian English German French and Spanish As in the previous generation of trip units a password system is used to manage the Read or Edit modes The default password 0001 can be modified by the user The protection parameters curves and trip thresholds can be set directly via the HMI of the device The parameters can only be changed when the trip unit is operating in Edit mode but the informa tion available and the parameter settings can be checked at any time in Read mode When a communication device internal PR830 D M module or external BTO3O device is connected itis possible to set parameters simply by downloading them into the unit over the network for PR330 D M by using the SD Pocket software and a PDA or a notebook for BTO30 Parameterisation can then be carried out quickly and automatically in an error free way by transferring data directly from DocWin Indicator LEDs LEDs on the front panel of the trip unit are used to indicate all the pre alarms WARNING and alarms ALARM A message on the display always explicitly indicates the type of event concerned Example of events indicated by the WARNING LED unbalance between ph
175. type AC the tripping is ensured for residual sinusoidal alternating currents type A the tripping is ensured for residual sinusoidal alternating currents in the presence of speci fied residual pulsating direct currents type B like the type A and also in presence of residual direct currents type AC ald D 4 D D K d t H X type A Ald gt t type B ald N WW e px Y IO px I r1 S PA gW T 1 4 3 1 1 Log kg Aar du t V4 ud y 1 EE X 4 VW Fee d Nur x bom In presence of electrical apparatuses with electronic components computers photocopiers fax etc the earth fault current might assume a non sinusoidal shape but a type of a pulsating unidirectional dc shape In these cases it is necessary to use a residual current trip unit classified as type A In presence of rectifying circuits i e single phase connection with capacitive load causing smooth direct current three pulse star connection or six pulse bridge connection two pulse connection line to line the earth fault current might assume a unidirectional DC shape In these case it is necessary to use a residual current trip unit classifield as type B 4 73 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210F18F0001 1SDC210F19F0001 1SDC210F20F0001 Special applications Use of direct current apparatus Standard EN 50178 Electronic equipment for use in power installations shows several example of electronic circuits w
176. units Trip units for T6 B 1SDA R1 3 3 poles 4 poles 3 Thermomagnetic trip unit TMA N 50 N 100 T TMA 630 6300 630 3150 6300 060347 060348 060472 TMA 800 8000 800 4000 8000 060349 060350 060473 1SDA R1 Electronic trip unit 3 poles 4 poles PR221DS LS I 630 060351 060357 PR221DS LS I 800 060363 060369 PR221DS LS I 1000 060596 060602 PR221DS 630 060352 060358 PR221DS 800 060364 060370 PR221DS 1000 060597 060603 PR222DS P LSI 630 060353 060359 PR222DS P LSI 800 060365 060371 PR222DS P LSI 1000 060598 060604 PR222DS P LSIG 630 060354 060360 PR222DS P LSIG 800 060366 060372 PR222DS P LSIG 1000 060599 060605 PR222DS PD LSI 630 060355 060361 PR222DS PD LSI 800 060367 060373 PR222DS PD LSI 1000 060600 060606 PR222DS PD LSIG 630 060356 060362 PR222DS PD LSIG 800 060368 060374 PR222DS PD LSIG 1000 060601 060607 PR223DS 630 060376 060377 PR223DS 800 060378 060379 PR223DS 1000 060608 060609 Electronic trip unit 1SDA R1 for motor protection 3 poles PR222MP 630 060375 Note The releases for the T6 1000 A necessarily have to be fitted with the following types of terminal EF ES FC CuAl R B Trip units for T7 T7M S 1SDA R1 8 d Electronic trip unit l PR231 P LS 3p 063128 PR231 P I 3p 063129 PR231 P LS I 4p 064179 PR231 P I 4p 064180 PR232 P LS 063130 PR331 P LSIG 063133 PR332 P LI 063134 PR332 P LS 063135 PR332 P LSIG 063136
177. up to five auxiliary contacts can be mounted on the fixed part of T6 in all the combinations for T4 and T5 in the withdrawable version only one contact for signalling circuit breaker racked out can be housed in the compartment closest to the bottom terminals The auxiliary contacts for T7 are inserted in a single block consisting of two contacts for signalling racked in two for isolated test and two for racked out Trip reset Available on T7 in the version with possibility of motorisation this is a coil which allows remote circuit breaker resetting following a trip of the overcurrent releases It is available with two power supply voltages 24 30 V AC DC 110 130 V AC DC and 200 240 V AC DC Mechanical operation counter Available on T7 motorizable it is connected to the operating mechanism by means of a simple lever mechanism It indicates the number of circuit breaker mechanical operations The indication is visible from the outside on the front of the circuit breaker 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210C71F0001 1SDC210C72F0001 Accessories Remote control Solenoid operator for T1 T2 and T3 MOS Allows remote circuit breaker opening and closing control and is particularly recommended for use in electric network supervision and control systems A selector allows passage from automatic to manual operation and it is also available a block supplied as standard for the operating mode of the motor It is always prov
178. xoT2 PR222DS P PR222DS PD TI N PR223DS PR223EF J I I XV 1 x4 l X11 ai 8 E d E oO i Q 8 Plug in or withdrawable version three pole circuit breaker with current transformer on neutral conductor external to circuit breaker for 1 4 T5 and T6 5 14 1SDC210015D0205 Wiring diagrams Wiring diagram of the T7 circuit breakers State of operation PE N D a3 PE DL L3 N l l 1 l ENE K51 Q XR1 d me 1 TI L1 n2 9 UI O m c x TI L2 T22 lt 12 T31 13 Ste n 40 801 3 nAS A In 100 2504 2 E i xo T 1 pn PLI al L 1 113 T E Fes T We d UNI H UA K T4 2 3 YO o xg i 1 T23 3 m d Ie i UI L2 XO T24 4 gt Bee l T33 5 A T mu dg l l S EE urs C T34 6 l l l Se pd II l u PR231 P pd i l PR232 P N gt p l MEN e I5 me 143 L Se ege a Dr oi L dme e Es 5 B To X13 xv p S La Nep i oU 8 lee m proe E L ae Be B Y PR332 P lt le xg Three pole circuit breaker with PR231 P PR232 P PR331 P PR332 P electronic trip unit
179. 0 35 ye Y 4 POLES 1SDC210105F0001 62 25 107 1SDC210103F0001 Without flange 3 4 POLES 6 17 1SDC210015D0205 Overall dimensions Tmax TO Fixed circuit breaker Drilling templates for support sheet For rear terminals for copper aluminium cables RC CuAl 140 EE DE 35 5 5 M5 5 5 M5 3 Y Y eae eX Satz Te n T de 8 3 XT 4 x 2 2 Xi x IL ge ot B E R18 Y S R18 168 8 LL 168 2 630 A 3 POLES 630 A 4 POLES ECH m 5 5 55 MS Ey 5 5 M5 a T l AH i te ive EE SE l be T sl el i SIM X bo x Sit E Wem 85 75 R21 5 S ins 8 E 5 2415 800 A 3 POLES 800 A 4 POLES For rear terminals R 70 140 35 35 5 5 M5 Y 5 5 M5 Y 120 5 118 5 120 5 241 x lt I gt x lt 237 241 1SDC210L76F0001 35 70 70 Y 70 6 18 1SDC210L77F0001 1SDC210107F0001 1SDC210109F0001 1SDC210015D0205 Terminals Front F MAX 40 SE 28 MINS MAX10 6 5 9 Nm Y gt le 18 MIN 4SDC210110F 0001 120 5 4SDC210111F0001 MAX 12 Ka 1 gt x lt x
180. 0 6 10xIn step 0 1xIn at 10x In inverse time delay trip and trip Tolerance 7 up to 6 x In 0 05 0 8s step 0 01s S characteristic with inverse time 10 above 6 x In Tolerance 15 up to 6 x In m hae B D Pt k or with definite time 20 over 6 x In 0 6 10xIn step 0 1 x In 0 05 0 8s step 0 01s Tolerance 7 up to 6 x In Sel 0 04 0 28 step 0 01s E t k L 10 above 6 x In olerance min 10 40ms Against short circuit with L 15 15xln step 0 1 x In adjustable instantaneous trip Tolerance 10 lt 30 ms a t k Against earth fault with short 0 2 1 xin step 0 02 x In 0 1 1s step 0 05s i i i i D LKE i inverse time delay trip and trip Tolerance 7 Tolerance 15 characteristic according to an inverse time curve Pt k or with 202 1xln step 0 02xIn t 0 1 1s step 0 05s definite time Tolerance 7 Sel 0 04 0 28 step 0 05s H t k S m Tolerance min 42 1096 40ms Against residual current fault with A 3 5 7 10 20 30 A A 0 06 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 R definite time delay trip Tolerance 0 20 0 8s m t k olerance 20 Against overtemperature of the trip Trip unit temperature over 85 C et unit with instantaneous trip instantaneous 8 temp k 8 8 Against unbalanced phase with 2 90 xl step 1 x t 0 5 60 s step 0 5s H definite time delay trip Tolerance 10 Tolerance min 20 100ms E t k PR332 P with PR330 V Advanced prot
181. 0 70 120 150 25 40 30 40 65 100 180 30 40 65 100 180 30 45 50 80 50 65 100 130 20 30 25 30 50 85 150 25 30 50 85 150 25 35 50 65 40 50 85 100 5 8 20 25 40 70 80 20 25 40 70 80 20 22 25 30 30 42 50 60 36 50 36 50 70 100 150 36 50 70 100 150 36 50 70 100 40 55 25 36 50 70 100 25 36 50 70 100 20 35 50 65 36 50 16 25 36 50 70 16 25 36 50 70 16 20 36 50 7596 5096 10096 100 10096 10096 100 10096 100 100 10096 10096 10096 10096 10096 7596 100 10096 10096 10096 7596 5096 27 kA 10096 100 10096 10096 100 100 100 10096 100 10096 10096 10096 10096 7596 10096 10096 10096 10096 7596 5096 10096 10096 10096 10096 100 10096 100 100 100 10096 10096 10096 10096 7596 10096 10096 10096 100 7596 5096 100 100 10096 10096 100 10096 10096 10096 10096010096 100 10096 100 75 100 10096 7596 100 7596 5096 100 100 10096 10096 100 100 10096 100 10096 100969 75 75 7596 7596 10096 7596 7596 7596 105 187 154 187 220 440 660 154 187 220 440 660 154 187 220 440 187 220 440 440 75 6 105 75 6 105 154 264 440 75 6 105 154 264 440 75 6 105 154 220 105 154 264 330 52 5 84 63 84 143 220 396 63 84 143 220 396 63 94 5 105 176 105 143 220 286 40 63 52 5 63 105 187 330 52 5 63 105 187 330 52 5 73 5 105 143 84 105 187 220 T 13 6 40 52 5 84 154 176 40 525 84 154 176 40 46 52 5 63 63 88 2 105 132 6 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 10 9 8 7 15 10 8 8 A A B 400 A A
182. 0 A gt gt gt gt gt gt gt K 9 Interchangeability of PR231 P can be requested by means of the dedicated ordering code 1SDA063140R1 Leld Lat H gt E a 2 7 1SDC210015D0205 Circuit breakers for power distribution Thermomagnetic trip units The Tmax T1 1p T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 and T6 circuit breakers can be fitted with thermomagnetic trip units and are used in protection of alternating and direct current networks with a range of use from 1 6 Ato 800 A They allow the protection against overload with a thermal device with fixed threshold for T1 1p and adjustable threshold for T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 and T6 realised using the bimetal technique and protection against short circuit with a magnetic device with fixed threshold for T1 T2 and T3 and T4 up to 50 A and adjustable threshold for T4 T5 and T6 The four pole circuit breakers are always supplied with the neutral protected by the trip unit and with protection of the neutral at 10096 of the phase setting for settings up to 100 A For higher settings the protection of the neutral is at 5096 of the phase setting unless the protection of the neutral at 10096 of the phase setting is required Thermomagnetic trip units TMD e TMG for T1 T2 and T3 Thermal threshold Adjustable from 0 7 to 1 x In 1SDC210B02F0001 Thermal threshold Adjustable from 0 7 to 1 x In 1SDC210B03F0001 TMD thermomagnetic trip unit with adjustable thermal threshol
183. 0 V Circuit breakers for use at 1000 V DC Tmax T4 Tmax T5 Tmax T6 Rated uninterrupted current A 250 400 630 630 800 Poles 4 4 4 Rated service voltage Ue M 1000 1000 1000 Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kv 8 8 8 Rated insulation voltage Ui M 1150 1150 1000 Test voltage at power frequency for 1 min M 3500 3500 3500 Rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity Icu ve vo Le DC 4 poles in serie KA 40 40 40 Rated service short circuit breaking capacity lcs DC 4 poles in serie kA 20 20 Category of use IEC 60947 2 A B 400 A A 630 A B Behaviour on isolation E E Reference Standards IEC 60947 2 IEC 60947 2 IEC 60947 2 Thermomagnetic releases TMD TMA L Terminals FC Cu FC Cu F FC CuAI R Interchangeability E ei Versions F F Fe Mechanical life No operations 20000 20000 20000 No hourly operations 240 120 120 Basic fixed dimensions 4 poles W mm 140 184 280 D mm 103 5 103 5 103 5 H mm 205 205 268 Weight fixed 4 poles kg 3 05 4 15 12 TERMINAL CAPTION See the wiring diagrams on page 4 65 diagram D F Front 9 Power supply only from above FC Cu Front for copper cables 8 lcw 5 kA FC CuAI Front for copper cables CuAl 9 cw 7 6 kA 630 A 10 kA 800 A R Rear 9 For T6 in the withdrawable version please ask ABB SACE F Fixed circuit breakers Thermomagnetic trip unit for use up to
184. 00 T6 800 PR222MP L Function hot trip with 1 or 2 phases supplied t s 10 1 1105 10 102 x In T4 250 T5 400 T6 800 PR222MP R U Functions t s 7 U function BR function 107 4h59 10 102 xh 1SDC210E35F0001 T4 250 T5 400 T6 800 PR222MP Function 102 1 kA 4 18 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210E34F0001 1SDC210E36F0001 Specific let through energy curves T1 160 T2 160 230 V 230 V Pt 10 A s DHA 10 1 10 1 1 102 103 4 107 10 e B 102 g 106 1 10 402 100 B 102 10 1 1 10 102 108 104 105 len KA 17 ee kA g 230V 230V Pt 10 A2s Pt 10 A2s 10 10 1 1 107 10 1 B 10 s fe 102 1 10 102 10 1 10 102 103 Ims KA Ims kA S 2 4 19 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210E38F0001 1SDC210E40F0001 Specific let through energy curves
185. 01 circuit breaker face flush with door 3 4 POLES For rear terminals circuit breaker face extending 8 POLES circuit breaker face extending 4 POLES 45 M4 Y O45 Pine T D S 30 ie E e zz Ka eo Ce SE 30 30 Kai 9 M t CL 1 Y POR POOR 22 22 Y Y 3 POLES 4 POLES 1SDC210137F0001 1SDC210139F0001 1SDC210015D0205 Terminals Front F MAX 20 v Lu TT Tri 65 ff D L MV ro N E LI X Caption Front extended terminals Front terminals for cables 185 mm CuAI Insulating courtse plate compulsory High terminal covers with degree of protection IPAO OO Drilling templates for sup port sheet Caption Insulating barriers between phases compulsory Front for copper cables 1SDC210140F0001 FC Cu 73 25 1SDC210141F0001
186. 01 Testing extension for motor operators Available for circuit breakers Tmax T4 T5 and T6 this allows the motor operator to be connected to the relative power supply circuit with the circuit breaker in the removed position With the circuit breaker in a safe position i e isolated in relation to the power circuits it is possible to carry out blank tests of the circuit breaker functions Spring charging motor for T7 motorizable Only available on Tmax T7 in the motorizable version it automatically charges the circuit breaker operating mechanism springs This operation is carried out automatically immediately after closure of the circuit breaker When there is no power supply or during maintenance work the closing springs can in any case be charged manually by means of the special operating mechanism lever It is always fitted with limit contact The spring charging motor can be fitted with a terminal to be mounted in the terminal board to carry out the cabling Spring charging motor Tmax T7 Rated voltage Un AC V DC M 24 30 24 30 48 60 48 60 100 130 100 130 220 250 220 250 380 415 Opering voltage 96 Un 85 110 85 110 Power consumption lt 100 VA lt 100 W Charging time s 8 10 8 10 Note To allow a complete remote control with T7 motorizable the circuit breaker must be fitted with shunt opening release shunt closing release spring char
187. 015D0205 Ordering codes Circuit breakers for use up to 1150 V AC and 1000 V DC T6 630 Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 L Electronic trip unit Icu 1000 V AC 12kA PR221DS LS I 630 060319 mm ED RC PR221DS I 630 060320 PR222DS P LSI 630 060321 PR222DS P LSIG 630 060322 _ O O O S 3 k T6 630 Fixed F 4 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 L Icu 1000 VAC 12kA Thermomagnetic trip unit TMA Icu 1000 VDC 40kA RS 3988 7 T6 800 Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 L Electronic trip unit Icu 1000 V AC 12 kA PR221DS LS I 800 060323 mm Gees PR221DS 800 060324 PR222DS P LSI 800 060325 PR222DS P SIG 800 060326 BEES T6 800 Fixed F 4 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 L Icu 1000 V AC 12 kA Thermomagnetic trip unit TMA Icu 1000 V DC 40 kA 800 4000 8000 060317 mm m see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 32 1SDC210015D0205 Ordering codes Switch disconnectors T1D 160 Fixed F Front terminals for copper cables FC Cu 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles lcw 2 kA 2 kA 051325 051326 8 T3D 250 Fixed F Front terminals F 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles lcw 3 6 kA 3 6 kA 051327 051328 8 E 8 T4D 250 Fixed F Front terminals F 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles lcw 3 6 kA 3 6 kA 057172 05717
188. 023381 023391 013924 013925 RC CuAI T6 800 3x185mm 023385 023395 013958 013959 Note For ordering methods please ask ABB SACE Front multi cable terminals MC Type 1SDA R1 3 pieces 4 pieces 6 pieces 8 pieces MC CuAI T4 6x35mm 054996 054997 054994 054995 MC CuAI T5 6x50mm 064182 064183 064184 064185 Rear terminals Type 1SDA R1 3 pieces 4 pieces 6 pieces 8 pieces RT2 051474 051475 051472 051473 R TS 051498 051499 051496 051497 RT4 055008 055009 055006 055007 RT5 055044 055045 055042 055043 RT6 060425 060426 060427 060428 RT7 063116 063117 063118 063119 Rear flat horizontal terminals HR Type 1SDA R1 3 pieces 4 pieces 6 pieces 8 pieces HR T7 T7M 063120 063121 063122 063123 Rear flat vertical terminals VR Type 1SDA R1 3 pieces 4 pieces 6 pieces 8 pieces VR T7 T7M 063124 063125 063126 063127 Rear flat horizontal terminals HR Type 1SDA R1 3 pieces 4 pieces 6 pieces 8 pieces HR T1 053865 053866 053867 053868 HR RC221 222 T1 053987 see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210N93F0004 1SDC210N95F0004 1SDC210N97F0004 Kit for taking up voltage for auxiliares Type 1SDA R1 3 pieces 4 pieces AuxV T2 FC Cu 051500 051501 AuxV T3 FC Cu 051502 051503 AuxV T4 FC Cu 055046 055047 AuxV T4 T5 F 055048 055049 Note Only available for fixed version circuit breaker Front display unit FDU Type 1SDA R1 FDU display unit with PR222 or PR223 055051
189. 0265 mere 9 060235 060245 060255 060266 T6 800 Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 N S H L Thermomagnetic trip unit TMA Icu 415 V 36kA 50 kA 70 kA 100 kA 800 4000 8000 060214 060216 060218 060220 1SDA R1 N S H L Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 100 kA PR221DS LS 800 060268 060278 060289 060299 PR221DS 800 060269 060279 060290 060300 PR222DS P LSI 800 060270 060280 060291 060301 PR222DS P LSIG 800 060271 060281 060292 060302 mes mo 060272 060282 060293 060909 see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 16 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210A13F0001 T6 800 Fixed F 4 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 N S H L Thermomagnetic trip unit TMA Icu 415 V 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 100 kA N 5096 800 4000 8000 060215 060217 060219 060221 N 10096 800 4000 8000 060222 060223 060224 060225 1SDA R1 N S H L Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 100 kA PR221DS LS I 800 060273 060283 060294 060305 PR221DS 800 060274 060284 060295 060306 PR222DS P LSI 800 060275 060285 060296 060307 PR222DS P LSIG 800 060276 060286 060297 060308 PR223DS 800 060277 060287 060298 060309 T6 1000 Fixed F 3 Poles 1SDA R1 N S H L Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 100 kA PR221DS LS l 1000 060537 060547 060561 060574 PR221DS 1000 060538 060548 060562 060575 PR222DS P LSI 1000 06
190. 0331 T6S 630 Breaking unit 060328 060332 T6H 630 Breaking unit 060329 060333 T6L 630 Breaking unit 060330 060334 T6 800 F Front terminals 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles TON 800 Breaking unit 060335 060339 TOS 800 Breaking unit 060336 060340 T6H 800 Breaking unit 060337 060341 T6L 800 Breaking unit 060338 060342 T6 1000 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles T6N 1000 Breaking unit 060586 060590 T6S 1000 Breaking unit 060587 060591 T6H 1000 Breaking unit 060588 060592 T6L 1000 Breaking unit 060589 060593 Note A type of terminal among ES FC CuAl R must necessarly be mounted on the 1000 A circuit breaker see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 37 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210189F0004 7 38 Ordering codes Trip units Trip units for T4 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles Thermomagnetic trip unit TMD and TMA N 50 N 100 TMD 20 200 20 320 054651 054660 TMD 32 320 32 320 054652 054661 TMD 50 500 50 500 054653 054662 TMA 80 800 80 400 800 054654 054663 TMA 100 1000 100 500 1000 054655 054664 TMA 125 1250 125 625 1250 054656 054665 054671 TMA 160 1600 160 800 1600 054657 054666 054672 TMA 200 2000 200 1000 2000 054658 054667 054673 1SDA R1 Electronic trip unit 3 poles 4 poles PR221DS LS I 100 054603 054615 PR221DS LS I 160 054604 054616 PR221DS LS
191. 0539 060552 060563 060576 PR222DS P LSIG 1000 060540 060554 060564 060577 PR223DS 1000 060541 060555 060565 060578 Note A type of terminal among ES FC CuAl R must necessarly be mounted on the T6 1000 A circuit breaker T6 1000 Fixed F 4 Poles 1SDA R1 N S H L Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 100 kA PR221DS LS I 1000 060542 060556 060566 060580 PR221DS I 1000 060543 060557 060567 060581 PR222DS P LSI 1000 060544 060558 060568 060582 PR222DS P LSIG 1000 060545 060559 060569 060583 PR223DS 1000 060546 060560 060573 060584 Note A type of terminal among EF ES FC CuAl R must necessarly be mounted on the T6 1000 A circuit breaker If the T6 1000 will be ordered without one of the previous terminal kits the EF terminals are supplied by default see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 17 1SDC210015D0205 Ordering codes Power distribution circuit breakers T7 800 Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 S H L V Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 50kA 70 kA 120 kA 150 kA PR231 P LS 800 061963 062642 062674 062706 PR231 P 800 061962 062641 062673 062705 PR232 P LSI 800 061964 062643 062675 062707 PR331 P LSIG 800 061965 062644 062676 062708 PR332 P LI 800 061966 062645 062677 062709 S PR332 P LSI 800 061967 062646 062678 062710 s PR332 P LSIG 800 061968 062647 062679 062711 9 PR332 P
192. 054376 054392 PR222DS P LSI 400 054329 054345 054361 054377 054393 PR222DS P LSIG 320 054330 054346 054362 054378 054394 PR222DS P LSIG 400 054331 054347 054363 054379 054395 PR223DS 320 059530 059536 059542 059548 059554 PR223DS 400 059532 059538 059544 059550 059556 see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 14 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210306F0004 MZ 143 5 mum rj Mili ER T5 630 Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals F Thermomagnetic trip unit TMA 500 2500 5000 Electronic trip unit PR221DS LS I 630 PR221DS I 630 PR222DS P LSI 630 PR222DS P LSIG 630 630 PR223DS T5 630 Fixed F 4 Poles Front terminals F Thermomagnetic trip unit TMA N 50 500 2500 5000 N 100 500 2500 5000 1SDA R1 N S H L V lcu 415 V 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 120 kA 200 kA 054456 054461 054465 054469 054473 1SDA R1 N S H L V lcu 415 V 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 120 kA 200 kA 054396 054404 054412 054420 054428 054397 054405 054413 054421 054429 054398 054406 054414 054422 054430 054399 054407 054415 054423 054431 059533 059539 059545 059551 059557 1SDA R1 N S H L V lcu 415 V 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 120 kA 200 kA 054459 054463 054467 054471 054475 054487 054489 054491 054493 054495 1SDA R1 N S H L V lcu 415 V 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 120 kA 200 kA 054400 054408 054416 054424 054432 054401 054409 054417
193. 054425 054433 054402 054410 054418 054426 054434 054403 054411 054419 054427 054435 059534 059540 059546 059552 059558 Electronic trip unit PR221DS LS I 630 PR221DS I 630 PR222DS P LSI 630 PR222DS P LSIG 630 PR223DS 630 see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 15 1SDC210015D0205 Ordering codes Power distribution circuit breakers T6 630 Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 N S H L Thermomagnetic trip unit TMA Icu 415 V 36kA 50 kA 70 kA 100 kA e 3150 6300 060202 060204 060206 060208 1SDA R1 N S H L KR Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 36kA 50 kA 70 kA 100 kA Z PR221DS LS I 630 060226 060236 060246 060256 E PR221DS 630 060227 060237 060247 060257 8 PR222DS P LSI 630 060228 060238 060248 060258 PR222DS P LSIG 630 060229 060239 060249 060259 mes e 60280 060240 060250 0260 T6 630 Fixed F 4 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 N S H L Thermomagnetic trip unit TMA Icu 415 V 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 100 kA N 5096 630 3150 6300 060203 060205 060207 060209 N 10096 630 3150 6300 060210 060211 060212 060213 1SDA R1 N S H L Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 100 kA PR221DS LS I 630 060231 060241 060251 060262 PR221DS 630 060232 060242 060252 060263 PR222DS P LSI 630 060233 060243 060253 060264 PR222DS P LSIG 630 060234 060244 060254 06
194. 060429 1SDC210326F0004 Automatic transfer switch ATSO10 Type 1SDA R1 ATSO10 for T4 T5 T6 T7 and T7M 052927 HMIO030 interface on the front of switchgear Type 1SDA R1 T4 T7 T7M HMIO80 interface on the front of switchgear 063143 Note It can be used with circuit breaker equipped with PR222DS PD PR223EF PR223DS PR331 P and PR332 P trip units Modules for PR33x electronic trip unit E Type 1SDA R1 2 T T7M E PR330 V internal voltage socket 063144 063574 PR330 V external voltage socket 069126 069127 PR330 D M communication module Modbus RTU 063145 063145 B PR330 R actuator module 063146 063146 BTO30 external wireless communication module 058259 058259 2 PRO3O0B power supply unit 058258 058258 7 Arrangement for internal voltage socket for PR332 P with PR330 V module 063573 063573 Extracode for external voltage socket for PR332 P LSIRC 069128 069128 Can be ordered only mounted on the circuit breakers See page 3 42 1SDC210N98F0004 Dialogue unit PR222DS PD Type 1SDA R1 T4 T5 T6 LSI 055066 LSIG 055067 Note To be specified only in addition to the code of the automatic circuit breaker with analogous overcurrent release PR222DS P To order the trip unit separately see pag 7 38 see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 59 1SDC210015D0205 Ordering codes Accessories Extracode for PR231 interchangeability Type
195. 1 Plug in FC 320 1 294 0 92 268 0 84 242 076 Withdrawable F 320 1 204 0 02 268 084 242 0 76 HR 320 1 294 0 92 268 0 84 242 0 76 VR 320 1 307 0 96 282 0 88 256 0 80 FC Front cables terminals F Front flat terminals HR Rear flat horizontal terminals VR Rear flat vertical terminals lu A 330 320 310 R VR 300 290 FC F R HR 280 270 260 250 240 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 TPC 1SDC210E95F0001 4 43 1SDC210015D0205 Temperature performances Circuit breakers with magnetic only or electronic trip units and switch disconnectors T4 320 and T4D 320 up to 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C Plug in Imax A L Imax A L Imax A L Imax A l FC 282 0 88 262 0 82 230 0 72 212 0 66 Withdrawable F 282 0 88 262 0 82 230 0 72 212 0 66 with RC222 HR 282 0 88 262 0 82 280 072 212 0 00 VR 282 0 88 269 0 82 250 0 78 224 0 70 FC Front cables terminals F Front flat terminals HR Rear flat horizontal terminals VR Rear flat vertical terminals lu A 290 280 270 VR 260 250 240 230 220 210 200
196. 10 Note The tolerances are valid under the following hypotheses relay self supplied on running and or auxiliary power supply without start up two phase or three phase power supply In all the cases not foreseen by the above mentioned hypotheses the following tolerance values are valid Trip threshold Trip time U 15 60ms 2 50 1SDC210015D0205 Circuit breakers for motor protection Integrated protection PR221MP The PR221MP electronic release is dedicated to protection of motors with powers up to 55 kW The L protection function protects the motor from overloads according to the indications and classes defined by the IEC 60947 4 1 Standard The function can be adjusted manually 0 65 1 x In by means of the dip switches on the front of the release Then the start up class of the motor must be selected which determines the trip time for overload in accordance with the IEC 60947 4 1 Amend 2 Table 2 Standards Class SE corresponds to a trip time of t 2 77s Class 5E t 4 16s Class 10E t 8 33s and Class 20E t 11 1s at 7 2 x The protection against short circuit allows adjustment of the trip threshold up to 17 5 times the rated current 2 5 17 5 x In As for Tmax T2 PR221DS it is necessary to house the opening solenoid SA in the right hand slot of the circuit breaker Tmax T2 PR221MP can be fitted with the same electrical accessories avail able with PR221DS PR221
197. 1000 A 70 mm for Tmax T1 T2 and T3 and 103 5 mm for Tmax T4 T5 and T6 For T7 the depth varies according to the type of operating mechanism with lever or spring charging motor standard front in groups of circuit breakers 45 mm for Tmax T1 T2 and T3 and 105 mm for T4 and T5 140 mm for T6 and 280 mm for T7 flange for compartment door possibility of assembly on back plate or on DIN rail with T1 T2 and T3 with the help of the special accessory see page 3 50 thermomagnetic on Tmax T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 and T6 or electronic on Tmax T2 T4 T5 T6 and T7 trip units standard FC Cu type terminals front for copper cables for T1 and F type front on all the Tmax 1SDC210C02F0001 family sizes Deeg Plug in 1 red The PLUG IN version of the circuit breaker Tmax T2 T3 T4 and T5 consists of A fixed part to be installed directly on the back plate of the unit Rad moving part obtained from the fixed circuit breaker with addition of the isolating contacts near the Ap rd connection terminals of the rear frame for fixing to the fixed part and of the terminal covers The circuit breaker is racked out by unscrewing the top and bottom fixing screws A special lock prevents circuit breaker racking in and racking out with the contacts in the closed position In the case where the circuit breaker has electrical accessories mounted SOR UVR MOS MOE MOE E AUX AUX E AUE RC222 the socket plug connecto
198. 10015D0205 PR223DS Apart from the traditional L S and G protection functions the PR223DS release available on T4 T5 and T6 also offers the possibility of measuring the main electrical values In fact using the accessory VM210 and without using any voltage transformers the user has access not only to the current values but also to the voltage power and energy values both locally directly on the front of the circuit breaker with the front display unit FDU or on the interface for the front of the switchboard HMIO3O and remotely via a supervisor and control system Setting the PR223DS release can only be carried out electronically using the PRO10 T test unit setting in local mode or the dialogue setting in remote mode For the protection function adjust ments see page 2 20 For the neutral it is possible to set the protection threshold of the functions to OFF to 5096 and to 100 of that of the phases for protection L settings below 0 4 x In it is obligatory to set the neutral to 10099 The pre alarm and alarm signalling of protection L are also available by means of a dedicated LED on the front of the release The pre alarm threshold value is equal to 0 9 x Still on the front of the release the LEDs signalling the following information are available state of the connection to the opening solenoid use of the default parameters mode local or remote presence of auxiliary power supply and setting the neutral PR223DS
199. 10E16F0001 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210E15F0001 Trip curves for power distribution Circuit breakers with electronic trip units T2 160 PR221DS T2 160 PR221DS L I Functions L S Functions t s t s 1SDC210E17F0001 S 3 1SDC210E18F0001 x In I A T2 160 PR221GP T4 250 320 T5 400 630 T6 630 800 1000 L S I Functions PR221DS L I Functions Note For T4 In 320 A T5 In 680 A and T6 In 1000 A Imax 9 5xIn t s t s 10 1 10 xin kA 1SDC210F72F0001 S 1SDC210E19F0001 4 7 1SDC210015D0205 Trip curves for power distribution Circuit breakers with electronic trip units T4 250 320 T5 400 630 T6 630 800 1000 PR221DS L S Functions Note For T4 In 320 A T5 In 630 A and T6 In 1000 A I max 9 5 x In tls 10 xin kA 1SDC210E20F0001 T4 250 320 T5 400 630 T6 630 800 1000 PR222DS PR222DS PD PR223DS L S Functions Note Thedottedcurveoffunction L corresponds to the maximum delay t which can be set at 6xI inthe case where 320 A CTs are used for T4 and 630 A for TS For all the CT sizes t 18s except with 320 A CT T4 630 A CT T5 and 1000 A CT T6 where t 10 5s For T4 In 320A T5 In 630 A and T6 In 1000 A I max 9 5 x In Imax 9 5 x In For T6 In 800 A max 10 5 x In For PR223DS the L pro ifs tection function can be set to I 0 18 1 x In 10 x In 1 kA T4 250 320 T5
200. 1150 V AC and 1000 V DC TMD and TMA In A 32 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 400 500 630 800 Neutral A 100 32 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 400 500 630 800 T4 250 E a a a a a E LE E 1 0 7 1xIn T5 630 m T6 630 DL T6 800 L Le 10x In A 320 l 25 10xln 400 800 500 1000 625 1250 800 1600 1000 2000 1250 2500 1600 3200 2000 4000 2500 5000 3150 6300 4000 8000 L 10xIn 1 5 10xIn 2 61 1SDC210015D0205 Ei JEg ENS Switch disconnectors Index Switch disconnectors Electrical characteristics 2 63 1SDC210015D0205 Switch disconnectors Electrical characteristics The Tmax switch disconnectors derive from the corresponding circuit breakers of which they keep the overall dimensions versions fixing systems and the possibility of mounting accessories unchanged This version only differs from the circuit breakers in the absence of the protection trip units They are characterised by a rated voltage of 690 V in alternating current and 750 V in direct current Switch disconnectors Tmax T1D Conventional thermal current Ith A 160 Rated service current in category AC22 le A 160 Rated service current in category AC23 le A 125 Poles No 3 4 Rated service voltage Ue AC 50 60 Hz V 690 DO V 500 Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp k
201. 120 kA 150 kA PR231 P 800 061962 062641 062673 062705 T7 1000 Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 S H L V Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 50kA 70 kA 120 kA 150 kA PR231 P I 1000 062737 062769 062801 062833 T7 1250 Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 S H L V Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 50kA 70 kA 120 kA 150 kA PR231 P 1250 062865 062897 062929 062961 T7 1600 Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 S H L Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 50kA 70 kA 120 kA PR231 P 1600 062993 063025 063057 T7 800 M Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 S H L V Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 50kA 70 kA 120 kA 150 kA PR231 P I 800 061980 062657 062689 062721 T7 1000 M Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 S H L V Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 50kA 70 kA 120 kA 150 kA PR231 P I 1000 062753 062785 062817 062849 T7 1250 M Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 S H L V Electronic trip unit Icu 415V 50kA 70 kA 120 kA 150 kA PR231 P 1250 062851 062913 062945 062977 T7 1600 M Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 S H L Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 50kA 70 kA 120 kA PR231 P 1600 063009 063041 063073 Note T2 T4 T5 and T6 in the three pole version equipped with PR221DS I electronic trip units and T7 in the three pole version equipped with PR231 P I electronic trip units can be used for motor prote
202. 1218 051226 051234 80 480 960 051210 051219 051227 051235 100 600 1200 051211 051220 051228 051236 1SDA R1 N S H L Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 85 kA PR221DS I 10 051163 051174 051184 051194 PR221DS I 25 051164 051175 051185 051195 PR221DS I 63 051165 051176 051186 051196 PR221DS I 100 051166 051177 051187 051197 PR221DS I 160 051168 051178 051188 051198 PR221MP 40 065340 065343 065346 065349 PR221MP 63 065341 065344 065347 065350 PR221MP 100 065342 065345 065348 065351 Note The trip coil of the T2 circuit breaker with PR221DS electronic trip unit is housed in the right slot For T2 with PR 221DS the following groups of auxiliary contacts are available 1SDA053704R1 Aux C 1S51 1Q 1SY 1SDA055504R1 Aux C 2Q 1SY T3 250 Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 N S Magnetic only trip unit MA Icu 415 V 36 kA 50 kA 100 600 1200 051315 051320 mm 125 750 1500 051316 051321 160 960 1920 051317 051322 200 1200 2400 051318 051323 Note T2 T4 T5 and T6 in the three pole version equipped with PR221DS I electronic trip units and T7 in the three pole version equipped with PR231 P I electronic trip units can be used for motor protection see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 24 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210305F0004 T4 250 Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals F
203. 1250 062865 062897 062929 062961 PR232 P LSI 1250 062867 062899 062931 062963 PR331 P LSIG 1250 062868 062900 062932 062964 PR332 P LI 1250 062869 062901 062933 062965 PR332 P LSI 1250 062870 062902 062934 062966 PR332 P LSIG 1250 062871 062903 062935 062967 PR332 P LSIRc 1250 062872 062904 062936 062968 To allow the interchangeability of PR231 T7 T7M circuit breakers must be ordered specifying extra codes for its interchangeability See page 7 60 9 RC protection can be obtained only with 1SDA063869R1 toroid T7 1250 Fixed F 4 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 S H L V Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 50 kA 70 kA 120 kA 150 kA PR231 P LS I 1250 062874 062906 062938 062970 PR231 P I 1250 062873 062905 062937 062969 PR232 P LSI 1250 062875 062907 062939 062971 PR331 P LSIG 1250 062876 062908 062940 062972 PR332 P LI 1250 062877 062909 062941 062973 PR332 P LSI 1250 062878 062910 062942 062974 PR332 P LSIG 1250 062879 062911 062943 062975 PR332 P LSIRc 1250 062880 062912 062944 062976 To allow the interchangeability of PR231 T7 T7M circuit breakers must be ordered specifying extra codes for its interchangeability See page 7 60 RC protection can be obtained only with 1SDA063869R1 toroid T7 1600 Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 S H L Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 50kA
204. 160 PR221DS LS I 100 051131 051141 051151 051161 PR221DS LS I 160 N 5096 051132 051142 051152 051162 PR221DS LS I 160 N 100 051613 051614 051615 051616 PR221DS 10 051169 051179 051189 051199 PR221DS 25 051170 051180 051190 051200 PR221DS 63 051171 051181 051191 051201 PR221DS 100 051172 051182 051192 051202 PR221DS 160 N 5096 051173 051183 051193 051203 PR221DS 160 N 100 051617 051618 051619 051620 PR221GP 63 065355 065361 PR221GP 100 065356 065362 PR221GP 160 065357 065363 Note The trip coil of the T2 circuit breaker with PR221DS electronic trip unit is housed in the right slot For T2 with PR221DS the following groups of auxiliary contacts are available 1SDA053704R1 Aux C 1S51 1Q 1SY 1SDA055504R1 Aux C 2Q 1SY For availability please ask ABB SACE see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 9 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210304F0004 7 10 Ordering codes Power distribution circuit breakers T3 250 Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals F Thermomagnetic trip unit TMD 63 630 80 800 100 1000 125 1250 160 1600 200 2000 250 2500 Thermomagnetic trip unit for generator protection TMG 63 400 80 400 100 400 125 400 160 480 200 600 250 750 T3 250 Fixed F 4 Poles Front terminals F Thermomagnetic trip unit TMD
205. 18 24 16 23 13 20 12 17 10 15 8 13 32 26 43 24 39 22 36 20 32 16 27 14 24 1A 21 50 37 62 35 58 33 54 32 50 27 46 25 42 22 39 80 59 98 55 92 52 86 50 80 44 74 40 66 32 58 100 83 118 80 113 74 106 70 100 66 95 59 85 49 75 125 103 145 100 140 94 134 88 125 80 115 73 105 63 95 160 130 185 124 176 118 168 112 160 106 150 100 140 90 130 200 162 230 155 220 147 210 140 200 188 190 122 175 107 160 250 200 285 193 275 183 262 175 250 168 240 160 230 150 220 Tmax T5 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C In A MIN MAX MN MAX MN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX 320 260 368 245 350 234 335 224 320 212 305 200 285 182 263 400 325 465 310 442 295 420 280 400 265 380 250 355 230 325 500 435 620 405 580 380 540 350 500 315 450 280 400 240 345 Tmax T6 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C In A MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX 630 520 740 493 705 462 660 441 630 405 580 380 540 350 500 800 685 965 640 905 605 855 560 800 520 740 470 670 420 610 4 58 1SDC210015D0205 Power Power losses In A T1 T1 1P T2 T3 T4 T7 S H L T7V W pole F F P F P F PW F PW F W F w F W TMD 1 15 17 SERGE m TMA 1 6 21 25 TMG 2 25 29 MF 25 26 8 MA 3 2 29 34 4 26 8 5 29 35 6 3 35 44 8 27 3 2 10 31 36 12 5 11 13 16 1 5 14 16 20 18 17 2 36 36 25 2 23 28 32 2 1 27 32 37 87 40 2 6 39 46 50 3 7 43 5
206. 200 SY min 200 Y B x R min 20 a 6 83 1SDC210015D0205 Overall dimensions Accessories for Tmax T7 Rotary handle operating mechanism on the compartment door 120 487 7 ul H Po e e D e 39 105 5 20 75 V E ay ku Olio DE UT do is Y 82 474 P He 107 474 e i ii l Caption D Transmission mechanism for rotary handle operating mechanism I X 2 Grip with key lock in open posi tion max n 3 padlocks _7 mm not included in the supply R min 200 V 32 Y 20 75 Drilling template for compart ment door 50 Tightening torque 2 5 Nm Accessory for IP54 degree of protection available on request EEN 1SDC210L97F0001 in max distance from the ront of the door Min max distance from the front of the door with ac cessory with IP54 degree of protect
207. 209 054227 054245 80 400 800 054174 054192 054210 054228 054246 100 500 1000 054175 054193 054211 054229 054247 125 625 1250 054176 054194 054212 054230 054248 160 800 1600 054177 054195 054213 054231 054249 200 1000 2000 054178 054196 054214 054232 054250 250 1250 2500 054170 054197 Ob4215 84283 054251 1SDA R1 N S H L V Electronic trip unit i 36 kA 50 kA 70kA 120 kA 200 kA PR221DS LSI 100 053997 054021 054045 054069 054093 PR221DS LS 160 053998 054022 054046 054070 054094 PR221DS LS 250 053999 054023 054047 054071 054095 PR221DS I 100 054000 054024 054048 054072 054096 PR221DS I 160 054001 054025 054049 054073 054097 PR221DS I 250 054002 054026 054050 054074 054098 PR 22DS PAS 100 054003 054027 054051 054075 054099 PR22DS PAS 160 054004 054028 054052 054076 054100 PR22DS PAS 750 054005 054029 054053 054077 054101 PR222DS P LSIG 100 054006 054030 054054 054078 054102 PR222DS P LSIG 160 054007 054031 054055 054079 054103 PR222DS P LSIG 750 054008 054032 054056 054080 054104 PR223DS 160 059491 059499 059507 059515 059523 PR223DS 250 059493 059501 059509 059517 059525 see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 1 1SDC210015D0205 Ordering codes Power distribution circuit breakers T4 250 Fixed F 4 Poles Front terminals F
208. 21 PRO10 T Test and configuration unit for PR222DS P PR222DS PD PR223DS PR222MP electronic trip units 048964 PRO10 T Test and configurator unit for PR33x and PR232 electronic trip unit 048964 PRO21 K Signalling unit for PR222DS PD PR223DS PR223EF PR222MP PR223EF PR331 or PR332 electronic trip units 059146 PR212 CI Contactor control unit for PR222MP 050708 EP010 Interface module for PR222 PD 059469 EP010 Interface module for PR332 P electronic trip unit 060198 EP010 Interface module for PR223 DS 063166 EP010 Interface module for PR223EF 064515 VM210 measurement module for PR223DS and PR223EF 059602 SW210 Bus Switch for PR223EF 064269 Note For the use of X3 and X4 connectors see page 3 44 Available also for T2 see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 61 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210P06F0004 7 62 Ordering codes Accessories Spare parts Flanges for compartment door Type 1SDA R1 Flange for compartment door for T1 T2 T3 051509 Flange for compartment door for MOS or RHD T1 T2 T3 051510 Flange for compartment door T1 with RC221 or RC222 3p 051511 Flange for compartment door T2 with RC221 or RC222 3p 051512 Flange for compartment door T3 with RC221 or RC222 3p 051513 Flange for compartment door T1 T2 T3 with RC221 or RC222 4p 051514 Flange for compartment door for T4 T5 fixe
209. 210155F0004 1SDC210154F0004 Mechanical signals Mechanical operation counter Type 1SDA R1 T7M Mechanical operation counter 062160 Motor operator Solenoid operator MOS Type 1SDA R1 T1 T2 T3 MOS 5 cables superimposed 48 60 V DC 059596 MOS 5 cables superimposed 110 250 V AC DC 059597 Note It is always fitted with crimped cables MOS 5 cables T1 T2 side by side 48 60 V DC 059598 MOS 5 cables T1 T2 side by side 110 250 V AC DC 059599 Note It is always fitted with socket plug connector Stored energy motor operator MOE Type 1SDA R1 T4 T5 T6 MOE 24 V DC 054894 060395 MOE 48 60 V DC 054895 060396 MOE 110 125 V AC DC 054896 060397 MOE 220 250 V AC DC 054897 060398 MOE 380 V AC 054898 060399 Stored energy motor operator with electronics MOE E Type 1SDA R1 T4 T5 T6 MOE E 24 V DC 054899 060400 MOE E 48 60 V DC 054900 060401 MOE E 110 125 V AC DC 054901 060402 MOE E 220 250 V AC DC 054902 060403 MOE E 380 V AC 054903 060404 Note Always supplyed complete with the AUX E C electronic auxiliary contact Spring charging motor Type 1SDA R1 T7M Spring charging motor 24 30 V AC DC 062113 Spring charging motor 48 60 V AC DC 062114 Spring charging motor 100 130 V AC DC 062115 Spring charging motor 220 250 V AC DC 062116 Spring charging motor 380 415 V AC 062117 Note For T7 T7M in withdrawable version sliding c
210. 223DS l 5 PR223EF i S 2 ALA d EE E 1 5 S Du o a 2 PR222DS PD PR223DS or PR223EF electronic trip unit connected with the AUX E auxiliary contacts mi Q DUUM Um A TTT q l I ot st l A12 l l l vam X71 XA7 1 K51 H saf a a E A Ces xv 12 X7 9 XA7 SI a E E A D a CS XV e 95 x usi i Leg _ sY xv 98 X7 KAT 41 l AUX E x l l l i TT x3 21 mo l DEA E al l l az x l dee ee x3 31 NEC 1L d l i J Wi i a xs 84 l l YO S51 I S I xoT2 l x l l l PR222DS PD l 24V _ B l PR223DS ZS l l PR223EF l 5 L LL i 8 ewm uc J N o El 3 5 21 1SDC210015D0205 Wiring diagrams Electrical accessories for T1 1T6 PR222DS PD PR223DS or PR223EF electronic trip unit connected with the AUX E auxiliary contacts and the MOE E actuation unit las EE EE EE ERE NECARE EE EE Kee ME ENE WE M EDI E EE A i i i i K5 A12 l i X7 1 XA7 1
211. 22DS PD PR223DS and PR223EF L alarm signal PR222DS P PR222DS PD PR223DS and PR223EF Auxiliary supply PR222DS PD PR223DS PR223EF and PR222MP Connection to load side PR223EF circuit breaker EP 010 PR222DS PD PR223DS and PR223EF X4 External neutral PR222DS P PR222DS PD PR223DS and PR223EF VM210 PR223DS and PR223EF PR212 Cl PR222MP PTC generic contact 0 1 PR222MP Connection to supply side PR223EF circuit breaker SW210 Bus Switch The SW210 Switch module was created to be used in combination with the EFDP zone selectivity System for plant applications where the possibility of carrying out zone selectivity with open ring railway tunnels underground railways etc and distribution plants where a high level of service continuity is required Following a fault with ring distribution a part of the plant can be isolated and the electric network re supplied from another direction The SW210 module allows the up link and down link signals to be inverted for a pair of circuit breakers fitted with PR223EF electronic release re ordering the hierarchy between the circuit breakers when the flow of power is inverted The state of the contacts after the changeover is indicated by a yellow LED coming on The module is controlled by a status signal of 24 V DC 2096 and is available in a housing to be mounted on a DIN rail one module 1SDC210015D0205 Accessories for trip units
212. 2742 062774 062806 062838 PR332 P LSIG 1000 062743 062775 062807 062839 PR332 P LSIRc 1000 062744 062776 062808 062840 To allow the interchangeability of PR231 T7 T7M circuit breakers must be ordered specifying extra codes for its interchangeability See page 7 60 RC protection can be obtained only with 1SDA063869R1 toroid T7 1000 Fixed F 4 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 S H L V Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 50kA 70 kA 120 kA 150 kA PR231 P LS I 1000 062746 062778 062810 062842 PR231 P 1000 062745 062777 062809 062841 PR232 P LSI 1000 062747 062779 062811 062843 PR331 P LSIG 1000 062748 062780 062812 062844 PR332 P LI 1000 062749 062781 062813 062845 PR332 P LSI 1000 062750 062782 062814 062846 PR332 P LSIG 1000 062751 062783 062815 062847 PR332 P LSIRc 1000 062752 062784 062816 062848 H To allow the interchangeability of PR231 T7 T7M circuit breakers must be ordered specifying extra codes for its interchangeability See page 7 60 RC protection can be obtained only with 1SDA063869R1 toroid see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 8 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210PO08F0001 T7 1250 Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 S H L V Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 50 kA 70 kA 120 kA 150 kA PR231 P LS I 1250 062866 062898 062930 062062 PR231 P I
213. 2DS PD PR222MP and PR223EF electronic trip units see the dedicated section on page 2 37 The dimensions of these circuit breakers are the same as the standard one The Tmax circuit breakers for these applications are available in the fixed plug in and withdrawable version for which the use of the 1000 V fixed parts supplied only by upper terminals is mandatory and they are compatible with all the accessories except for the residual current release T4 T5 circuit breakers for use up to 1150 V AC and T6 circuit breakers for use up to 1000 V AC Tmax T4 Tmax T5 Tmax T6 Rated uninterrupted current A 250 400 630 630 800 Poles 3 4 3 4 3 4 Rated service voltage Ue AC 50 60 Hz M 1000 1150 1000 1150 1000 Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 8 8 8 Rated insulation voltage Ui M 1000 1150 1000 1150 1000 Test voltage at power frequency for 1 min M 3500 3500 3500 Rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity Icu L vo L vo Lo AC 50 60 Hz 1000 V kA 12 20 12 20 12 AC 50 60 Hz 1150 V kA 12 12 Rated service short circuit breaking capacity Ics AC 50 60 Hz 1000 V kA 12 12 10 10 6 AC 50 60 Hz 1150 V kA 6 6 Rated short circuit making capacity lem AC 50 60 Hz 1000 V kA 24 40 24 40 24 AC 50 60 Hz 1150 V kA 24 24 Category of use IEC 60947 2 A B 400 A A 630 A D Behaviour on isolation ei Reference S
214. 3 T4D 320 Fixed F Front terminals F 3 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles S lcw 3 6 kA 3 6 kA 054597 054598 T5D 400 Fixed F Front terminals F 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles lcw 6kA 6 kA 054599 054600 T5D 630 Fixed F Front terminals F E 1SDA R1 S 3 poles 4 poles S Icw 6 kA 6 kA d 054601 054602 7 see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 33 1SDC210015D0205 Ordering codes Switch disconnectors T6D 630 Fixed F Front terminals F 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles lcw 15 kA 15 kA 060343 060344 T6D 800 Fixed F Front terminals F S 1SDA R1 2 3 poles 4 poles lcw 15 kA 15 kA 060345 060346 T6D 1000 Fixed F 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles lcw 15 kA 15 kA 060594 060595 Note A type of terminal among ES FC CuAl R must necessarly be mounted on the 1000 A circuit breaker T7D 1000 Fixed F Front terminals F 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles low 20 kA 20 kA 062032 062033 E i T7D 1250 Fixed F Front terminals F 2 1SDA R1 7 3 poles 4 poles Icw 20 kA 20 k 062036 062037 T7D 1600 Fixed F Front terminals F 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles Icw 20 kA 20 k 062040 062041 see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 34 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210P09F0001 T7D 1000 M Fixed F Front terminals F 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles 20 kA 20 kA 062034 062035 1SDA
215. 3 063531 050928 630 050884 050906 40 500 063524 063532 050929 630 050885 050907 50 500 063525 063533 050930 630 050886 050908 63 630 050887 050909 050931 80 800 050888 050910 050932 100 1000 050889 050911 050933 125 1250 050890 050912 050934 N 50 160 1600 050891 050913 050935 N 100 160 1600 050936 050937 050938 see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 7 1SDC210015D0205 Ordering codes Power distribution circuit breakers T2 160 Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals F N S H L Thermomagnetic trip unit TMD Icu 415 V 36kA 50 kA 70 kA 85 kA 1 6 16 050940 050984 051028 051072 E 2 20 050941 050985 051029 051073 8 2 5 25 050942 050986 051030 051074 5 3 2 32 050943 050987 051031 051075 2 4 40 050944 050988 051032 051076 5 50 050945 050989 051033 051077 6 3 63 050946 050990 051034 051078 8 80 050947 050991 051035 051079 10 100 050948 050992 051036 051080 12 5 125 050949 050993 051037 051081 16 500 050950 050994 051038 051082 20 500 050951 050995 051039 051083 25 500 050952 050996 051040 051084 32 500 050953 050997 051041 051085 40 500 050954 050998 051042 051086 50 500 050955 050999 051043 051087 63 630 050956 051000 051044 051088 80 800 050957 051001
216. 3 8 10 125 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 Neutral A 10096 16 2 25 32 4 5 63 8 10 125 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 Neutral A 5096 nutu uen cm diee cue cum uei Eee uA XE EE oues cx Mir Es cce BD DO Al 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 500 500 500 500 500 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 Neutral A 100 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 500 500 500 500 500 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 Neutral A 5096 S So eS 3 Xm cR de Ue Se 4 XL UR GENTE LX m xs BID O00 In A 25 40 63 80 100 125 160 Neutral A 10096 25 40 63 80 100 125 160 1 Al 160 200 200 240 300 375 480 Neutral A 100 160 200 200 240 300 375 480 In A 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 Neutral A 100 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 I A 400 400 400 400 480 600 750 Neutral A 100 400 400 400 400 480 600 750 9 only T1B and T1C TIN A 500 T1B C available also the version with I A 500 n identifies the setting current for protection of the phases L1 L2 and L3 and of the neutral The TMD and TMA thermomagnetic trip units have the thermal element with adjustable threshold I 0 7 1 x In The value of the thermal element adjustment which is obtained by acting on the special selector is intended at 40 C The magnetic element has fixed trip threshold with 20 tolerance according to what is indicated by the IEC 60947 2 pos 8 3 3 1 2 Standard The trip thresholds of the magnetic protection are a function of the setting used both by the p
217. 30 interface on the front of switchgear This accessory which can be used with all the protection trip units fitted with dialogue is designed for installation on the front of the switchgear It consists of a graphic display where all the trip unit measurements and alarms events are displayed The user can navigate in a simple and intuitive way among the measurements by using the navigation pushbuttons The device can replace the traditional multimeters without the need for current voltage transformers The HMIOSO is connected directly to the protection trip unit by means of a serial line and requires a 24 V DC power supply Optional modules The PR332 P trip unit for T7 can be enriched with additional internal modules thereby increasing the capacity of the trip units and making these units highly versatile PR330 V voltage measuring module The PR330 V module measures and processes the phase and neutral voltages transferring these data to the protection trip unit so that a series of protection and measurement functions can be implemented The module has two different positions which can be selected using the special selector the Con nected position where the protection and measurement functions are active and the Insulating Test position where the module is disconnected from the busbars The PR830 V module is available in two different configurations 1 Module with internal voltage sockets with connection directly to the top termi
218. 330 D M and PR330 R actuation unit Opening control from PR332 P electronic trip unit with communication module PR330 D M and PR330 R actuation unit Motor for charging the closing springs Circuit breaker Circuit breaker auxiliary contacts Limit contacts for spring charging motor Contacts activated by the rotary handle of the circuit breaker only for circuit breakers with manual control See note C Switch for setting remote local control Contact for electrical signalling of circuit breaker open due to tripping of the overcurrent trip unit The circuit breaker may be closed only after pressing the reset pushbutton or after energizing the coil for electrical reset if available Programmable contact as default it signals overload present start Contacts for electrical signalling of circuit breaker in racked out position only with withdrawable circuit breakers Contacts for electrical signalling of circuit breaker in racked in position only with withdrawable circuit breakers Contacts for electrical signalling of circuit breaker in test isolated position only with withdrawable circuit breakers Pushbutton or contact for closing the circuit breaker Pushbutton or contact for opening the circuit breaker Pushbutton or contact for opening the circuit breaker with delayed trip Pushbutton or contact for opening the circuit breaker with instantaneous trip Pushbutton or contact for elect
219. 332 P trip units Connector for power circuits of PR332 P trip unit Delivery terminal box for the auxiliary circuits of the fixed circuit breaker Connectors for the auxiliary circuits of the PR332 trip unit Shunt closing release Shunt opening release Overcurrent shunt opening release trip coil Second shunt opening release See note Q Coil to electrically reset the circuit breaker Undervoltage release See notes B C and Q 5 7 1SDC210015D0205 5 8 Wiring diagrams Information for reading Circuit breakers T7 Description of figures Fig 1A Motor circuit to charge the closing springs Fig 2A Circuit of shunt closing release Fig 4A Shunt opening release Fig GA Instantaneous undervoltage release see notes B C and Q Fig 7A Undervoltage release with electronic time delay device outside the circuit breaker see notes B and Q Fig BA Second shunt opening release see note Q Fig 11A Contact for electrical signalling of springs charged or discharged Fig 12A Contact for electrical signalling of circuit breaker open with springs charged and ready to close Fig 18A Contact for electrical signalling of circuit breaker open due to tripping of the overcurrent release The circuit breaker may be closed only after pressing the reset pushbutton or after energizing the coil for electronic reset if available Fig 14A Electrical reset control Fig 15A Cont
220. 36 50 70 120 200 36 50 70 100 36 50 70 100 36 50 70 100 36 50 70 100 36 50 70 100 36 50 70 100 50 70 120 150 50 70 120 150 50 70 120 50 70 120 150 50 70 120 Be ENE te yy E Se ye ae HIMEN WENT Protection Each switch disconnector must be protected on the supply side by a coordinated device which safeguards it against short circuits The coordination table below indicates the Tmax circuit breaker which can carry out the protection function for each switch disconnector These are always pieces of apparatus of a size corresponding to or smaller than that of the switch disconnector Making capacity The making capacity lcm is a performance of notable importance since a switch disconnector must be able to withstand the dynamic thermal and current stresses which can occur during closure without being destroyed up to the short circuit closing conditions 2 65 1SDC210015D0205 Accessories Index Versions ANG types coo ert entero ent ses tnetsasaressedeccesaabersns testedoecenisenaeeseses 3 2 Connection ce 3 7 SIME M 3 16 Electrical SiQnalS sci seccissccssenncceccctsasses satearesesesecsensscecasaenaseessaciasuessateasccasccaasetessntastenacceniscneasiis 3 20 Remote CONTIOL 3 25 Operating Mechanisms And lOCKS scissors asesan tisis 3 30 Residual Current releases wiciciccccciccsscsssseciecnsesevssriscec
221. 39 44 63 43 5 1 6 43 54 80 4 8 61 72 48 58 46 5 100 7 85 10 56 68 52 58 125 10 7 12 147 66 79 62 72 160 15 17 20 79 95 74 9 200 132 158 99 124 250 178 214 18 176 320 13 6 209 400 195 31 500 28 8 36 7 630 306 39 800 31 39 6 PR22 10 05 06 PR23 25 1 12 PR33 63 35 4 100 8 92 17 23 160 17 20 44 6 250 107 146 320 176 24 106 179 400 165 28 5 9 8 12 630 41 536 30 385 12 22 20 30 800 32 416 193 353 32 48 1000 50 30 55 50 75 1250 47 86 783 1173 1600 77 14 4 59 1SDC210015D0205 Magnetic trip values Single phase trip Release In A LIA current L 1 T1 1p 160 TMF 16 160 500 1600 T1 160 TMD 16 50 500 15096 16 50 630 9 20096 63 160 630 1600 20096 T2 160 TMD 1 6 25 16 500 20096 32 50 500 18096 63 160 630 1600 15096 MF MA 1 20 13 240 20096 32 52 192 624 18096 80 100 480 1200 15096 PR221 10 160 1 10 x In 10096 T3 250 TMG 63 250 400 750 15096 TMD 63 250 630 2500 15096 MA 100 200 600 2400 15096 T4 250 320 TMD 20 50 320 500 15096 TMA 80 250 400 2500 15096 MA 10 200 60 2800 15096 PR221DS 100 320 1 10 x In 10096 PR222DS P 4 baee ii 100 320 1 12 xIn 00 PR223DS 100 320 1 5 12 x In 10096 T5 400 630 TMG 320 500 1600 2500 15096 TMA 320 500 3200 5000 15096 PR221DS 320 630 1 40 xn 10096 PR222DS P j GE 320 630 1 12x1n 00 PR223DS 320 630
222. 3DS 630 1000 T7 800 1000 1250 1600 PR231 P PR232 P 400 1600 PR331 P PR332 P 400 1600 DC T1 1p 160 TMF 16 160 T1 160 TMD 16 160 T2 160 TMD 1 6 160 MF MA 1 100 MF T3 250 TMD TMG 63 250 MA MA 100 200 TMF T4 250 320 TMD 20 50 TMD TMA 80 250 MA 10 200 TMA T5 400 630 TMA TMG 320 500 Gs T6 630 800 1000 TMA 630 800 MA Thanks to their simplicity of assembly the end customer can change the type of trip unit ex tremely rapidly according to their own requirements and needs in this case correct assembly is the customer s responsibility Above all this means into increased flexibility of use of the circuit breakers with considerable savings in terms of costs thanks to better rationalisation of stock management PR221DS PR222DS P PR222DS PD PR223DS PR231 P PR232 P PR331 P PR332 P magnetic only trip unit with fixed magnetic thresholds magnetic only trip unit with adjustable magnetic thresholds thermomagnetic trip unit with fixe thermal and magnetic thresholds thermomagnetic trip unit with adjustable thermal and fixedmagnetic thresholds thermomagnetic trip unit with adjustable thermal and magnetic thresholds thermomagnetic trip unit for generator protection PR22_ PR23_ PR33_ electronic trip units 10 25 52 80 100 125 160 200 100 160 250 320 400 630 800 1000 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600 A A A A A A A A A A A n m L A A Bi H PR223DS minimum In 16
223. 4 l Ee 31 E AS l as 1 n EE 83 Jit b3 Fg Sa Spe L KEN Fg fel EE 3 n l E e Te m E den 3 0 CIT ace GH I I i EE I x13 TT T q72 T qn T T NE qn TT T T XV en en Deg LAE en n 7 15 en en eT XE u d L5 D lt p p u G L3 D l LE A n EECH Geer R wait xeTs wats eat XR5TI XRSGS sta eat wait weaitz T5 eat Al K51 K51 K51 MEASURING MODULE PR33 U V PR332 P MEASURING MODULE PR330 V PRI32 P MEASURING MODULE PR33 V PR332 P XV X13 A4 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210G32F0001 1SDC21039FF0001 PRO21 K signalling unit for PR331 P and PR332 P 62A K51 Al PR331 P PR332 P Rz x12 x13 x5 e w 2 lt z g 2 E XV K LS ows ows x13 m lo bus bu Y l I l deen E Ib nl II I kA R TE i mW ups a A l q e FAN T ctt mp pec cx l i i l N i l m l rd i i I i i N i i i i l je Vai i l i i l i i i i i i l i A4 l i 1 3 hs Qm fe 2 23 Tas 1 2 7 8 aiz KENN FEI E FEI E Fa E ker 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PRO21 K 12 nu he ha J Je 24 Jos 10 T R 1SDC210G26F0001 5 29 1SDC210015D0205 EMERGENCY SUPPLY Q Wiring diagrams Automatic transfer switch ATSO10 for T4 T5 T6 ATS010 device for the automatic transfer switch of two T4 T5 T6 circuit breakers without safety auxiliary voltage supply NORMAL SUPPLY
224. 4 Zei 4 1 gie 2 e 11 02 is o 4 2 x 8 M N Q2 Z G Q61 1 i 1 nA 2 11 01 S i 3 ZR 4 N Q1 a rT 7 Fo 5 a G N X A A 4 A Anen K51 Q1 K51 Q2 e q x AJ 21 22 24 26 28 30 ma Tu T L2 T L2 SU x 8 TI L3 TI L3 34 33 32 51 ATS 010 TI N TI N tua tia ane a t T 24Vdc OR 48Vdc POWER SUPPLY WITH BACKUP BATTERY i S LOAD 8 E 2 3 g 5 ES 3 S S EI e amp E x x E 3 S E E ES S RI D S D S amp S E 8 5 G x gt Q S c 5 S e Ei 5 S N 5 x S S 3 1 2 50 51 49 52 54 53 uu Y A gt GEN START ALARM LOGIC ON LOAD DISC e amp x gt e y K 3 amp x x a Lo x d x I x Q Q E i Lo LO Ka 20 19 18 17 35 36 37 38 8 4 5 6 7 46 47 48 ATS 010 EAR CA Q REACHES QE oci Qin E LE eT oe PAU OH WH S aal xis p 96 XV 14 XV 696 xF 9142 XV 14 XV 96 XF 142 i I i j i x X L j Geh CG j j ae f ou ssf gy ou ssif gy o si2 sis s14 sis s16 l D l l n l l l l l men xv o5 xri men xv o5 xri j l j X2 x595 l j X24 X15 Bos l RE EE EE __ a a ae ee a ete DT Q1 Q2 e 2 2 gt E Es z 4 bei x Ka E E i E 8 N 3 3 S amp S x S 8 os B S E 3 3 amp 8 S 3 Ei p amp x 5 S Id d amp S e G S Bm gt 8 g 5 3 S o a 9 5 34 1SDC210015D0205 10004 501zOdst
225. 4 622 24 32 34 96 98 XV 12 weii 96 98 9 2 14 622 24 XV 06 08 08 N ke N N t oO o N LO co N N o ive e N N M M o o Las vw o o y N N e eo eo Ou Q 2 Q 3 Ou Q 1 Q 2 Al sv Al sv A sav ssiv 4 N 5 38 g E 38 XV eu 2 3 95 XV 1 95 en 21 XV 05 05 x2 l Ts l2 1 x7 l l2 l Up x6 L XA2 UE Us l2 d7 XA7 di d2 di L2 XA6 UE UE A4 A4 A4 Position contacts 26 27 28 29 SO 31 A4 XV 94 67 ii 2 94 2 2 4 ei 4 All 5751 1 Oe 5751 3 S75S 1 S75S 2 5755 3 XV e e ei E ei i A4 S g 8 S 2 5 5 18 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210G07F0001 5 19 1SDC210015D0205 2001469001cOQSI 1000402501 ZOdst 239 PR223DS electronic trip unit connected with the VM210 voltage measuring device 0 o D o gt o T S 0 I Ld E n z E a Es II z EZ L4 P ed oo L z z o S 8 e z N lt b ud i Le D c Le E 5 5 j o o amp GJE o a T o H 3 H dj E ch H H Y DEER E T BEER L i 5 ES at set OPOP Pop et 1 Q ECH VS oPep CH EN OH EEN Pep spoT Te 1 2 2 2 2 X x Zl
226. 4 P FP HR 054739 054742 T5 400 P FP HR 054751 054754 T5 630 P FP HR 054764 054767 For the circuit breaker in plug in version In max 570 A Fixed parts for T4 250 T5 400 circuit breakers at 1000 V AC FC Cu Front terminals for copper cables 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles T4 250 P FP 1000 V AC 063458 063459 T5 400 P FP 1000 V AC 063462 063463 see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 41 1SDC210015D0205 z 8 E E 5 S o D 8 1SDC210N69F0001 7 42 Ordering codes Fixed parts conversion kit and accessories for fixed parts Withdrawable W Fixed part EF lt Front extended terminals 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles T4 W FP EF 054743 054746 T5 400 W FP EF 054755 054758 T5 630 W FP EF 054768 054771 T6 630 800 W FP EF 060384 060387 T7 T7M W FP EF 062045 062049 0 For the circuit breaker in the withdrawable version In max 570 A VR Rear flat vertical terminals 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles uwen mu eu T5 400 W FP VR 054756 054759 T5 630 W FP VR 054769 054772 T6 630 800 W FP VR 060386 060389 For the circuit breaker in the withdrawable version In max 570 A HR Rear flat horizontal terminals 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles T4 W FP HR 054745 054748 T5 400 W FP HR 054757 054761 T5 630 W FP HR 054770 054774 T6 630 800 W FP HR 060385 060388 For the circuit breaker in the withdrawable version In max 570 A HR VR Rear flat termin
227. 440 V Ft 10 A s Ht 105 A s 10 1 107 1 102 103 10 104 105 S 108 M m ra um 12 102 107 10 102 109 104 105 ken h i Inns kA T3 250 T4 250 320 400 440 V 400 440 V It 109 A s t 10 A2s 10 10 1 1 20725A CH 107 104 8 m 1 10 102 1 E a 10 102 108 lms KA Z Ims KA 4 21 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210E44F0001 1SDC210E46F0001 Specific let through energy curves 4 22 T5 400 630 T6 630 800 1000 400 440 V 400 440 V Pt 10 A2s Pt 105 A s 10 10 10 1 10 1 B T a E US 1 10 10 10 1 10 10 be Wi gt lms KA T7 800 1000 1250 1600 400 440 V Pt 10 A2s 10 10 10 1 104 8 ie 18 LA 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210E48F0001 T1 160 T2 160 500 V 500 V Pt 10 A2s Pt 10 A2s 10 6 3 E 102 107 1 S S 1 10 102 10 102 108 108 les KA Ims KA 1SDC210E50F0001 T3 250 500 V Pt 10 A2s 10 1071 102 101 1
228. 465 6930 800 480 800 4000 8000 4 70 1SDC210015D0205 Setting adjustment of the magnetic threshold The correction factor takes into consideration the phenomena that with direct current applications modifies the tripping value of the protection threshold against short circuit The value that must be set on the trip unit is therefore the real and wanted trip value divided by the correction factor Example Service current lb 550 A Circuit breaker T6 630 In 680 A Desired magnetic protection 5500 A Magnetic threshold value to be set according to diagram A therefore in this specific case setting of the adjustment value for the magnetic threshold is Set 5500 5000A roughly equal to 8 In tal 4 71 1SDC210015D0205 4 72 Special applications Use of direct current apparatus The residual current trio units are associated with the circuit breaker in order to obtain two main functions in a single device protection against overloads and short circuits protection against indirect contacts presence of voltage on exposed conductive parts due to loss of insulation Besides they can guarantee an additional protection against the risk of fire deriving from the evolu tion of small fault or leakage currents which are not detected by the standard protections against overload Residual current devices having a rated residual current not exceeding 30 mA are also used as
229. 4P Y Terminals Front extended 400 A EF Front extended 630 A F 46 5 46 5 46 5 46 5 46 5 465 3 17 5 G10 Dei Y A 17 5 10 25 KEE 1 PR Y d Wo d F T N e S g e S L x HK x EL 69 75 E 6975 B 139 5 3P 8 139 5 3P 186 4P 3 186 4P B Caption Front for copper cables FC Cu or for copper aluminium cables FC CuAI e Front terminals for cables Cu 13995 3P 69 75 Front terminals for cables 46 5 46 5 46 5 Cu AI Y 3 High terminal covers with lt 4 WI l degree of protection IP40 ae a 8S x a L SS E S TUH E E 3 i BOR E Caption Front extended spread 630 A ES e Insulating barriers between 155 5 202 phases compulsory 57 75 57 75 94 j 94 94 375 40 40 3 eljeti ES I N P UN a e e E i Li G v S i MS E lo 8 S 5 2 2 E N gm m M 2 8 S8 8 xj x 8 x FA x 8 x 8 6 42 1SDC210l95F0001 1SDC210015D0205 Terminals Rear flat horizontal 400 A HR 209 104 5 Y 139 5 3P X 74 25 Rear flat horizontal 630 A HR Y 186 4P in 46 5 46 5
230. 4x1x10 25 28 R R S R standard F P W 2 16 150 25 28 R R R external F 2 120 240 18 25 Be S A Tightening the terminal onto the circuit breaker B Tightening the cable busbar onto the terminal H R On request S Standard ht Pieces Number of busbars cables or cable terminals 3 11 1SDC210015D0205 Accessories Connection terminals Front terminals for copper aluminium cables FC CuAl Allow connection of bare copper or aluminium cables directly to the B C gt B S circuit breaker solid aluminium cables cannot be used e E E 8 e x 5 S 8 E 9 T2 T5 nm 7 Standard External Type Assembly Version Pieces Cable mm Tightening Nm mm Terminal covers Phase separators rigid A B high low fixed part T1 external F 1 2 5 50 7 5 6 9 9 S T1 external F 1 35 95 7 13 5 14 S S T2 standard F P 1 1 95 7 14 R R external F P 1 70 185 6 25 18 S S B external F P 2 35 95 6 12 16 S S T3 standard F P 1 70 185 16 18 R R external F P 1 150 240 8 40 24 S S external F P 2 35 150 8 16 18 S S T4 standard F P W 1 6 185 9 31 18 R R S R external F 2 35 150 18 16 18 S S EG externa F 1 150 240 18 40 24 S standard E 1 2 5 50 9 5 6 9 9 R R R R T5 external F P W 1 120 240 18 43 21 5 R R R S standard F P W 1 185 300 18 43 24 5 H R S R externa E 2 95 240 18 31 24 5 S
231. 5 TE T6 220 250 Delay which can be set s 0 25 0 5 0 75 1 1 25 2 2 5 3 Trip time tolerance 15 Circuit breaker Power supply voltage V AC DC T7 24 30 T7 48 T7 60 T 110 125 T7 220 250 Delay which can be set s 0 5 1 15 2 3 Testing extension for service releases Available for Tmax T4 T5 and T6 this allows the service releases to be supplied with the circuit breaker in the removed position With the circuit breaker in safe conditions i isolated in relation to the power circuits this makes it possible to carry out blank tests of the circuit breaker functionality A eg 1SDC210C60F0001 1SDC210C61F0001 3 19 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210C62F0001 AUX 250 V AC DC 1SDC210C63F0001 AUX C 250 V AC DC oF 1SDC210D19F0001 3 20 Accessories Electrical signals These allow information on the operating state of the circuit breaker to be taken outside Installation of these accessories is carried out directly from the front of the circuit breaker in special slots placed on the right hand side of the circuit breaker completely segregated from the live parts all to the benefit of user safety The auxiliary contacts can be supplied depending on the type either in the version with cabling to be carried out by the customer by means of connection to the terminals integrated in the auxiliary contacts or with cabling directly on the circuit breaker terminal board or in the
232. 5 14 50 14 30 T7 125099 W 2 50 8 2x11 12 40 B T7 1600 W 2 50 10 2x11 12 40 class 4 8 screws not supplied up to 1250 A 99 for vertical assembly directly in the factory use extra code 18DA063571 Rt A Tightening the terminal onto the circuit breaker B Tightening the cable busbar onto the terminal H R On request S Standard go Pieces Number of busbars cables or cable terminals 3 15 1SDC210015D0205 Accessories Service releases The Tmax family of circuit breakers can be fitted with service releases shunt opening release shunt closing release and undervoltage release These are available in the pre cabled version depending on the size of the circuit breaker fitted with 1 m long free cables with a connector with 1 m cables or with a simple pin connector and two terminals to be mounted in the terminal board or in the uncabled version with cabling to be carried out by the customer Assembly is carried out for all the releases by pressing into the special seat in the left part of the circuit breaker right for T7 and fixing with the screw provided The releases are always alternative to each other for T1 T2 T3 both for the three pole and four pole version whereas for T4 T5 and T6 in the four pole version the shunt opening release not possible with PS SOR and the undervoltage release can be housed at the same time as long as they are in the wired version and with the shunt
233. 5 mm 050543 Toroid which can be opened diameter 110 mm 037396 Toroid which can be opened diameter 180 mm 037397 Toroid which can be opened diameter 230 mm 037398 Note Opening coil and undervoltage coil to be ordered separately Installation accessories Bracket for fixing onto DIN rail Type 1SDA R1 T1 T2 T3 DIN50022 T1 T2 051437 DIN50022 T3 051439 i DIN 50022 T1 T2 for RC221 RC222 051937 R DIN 50022 T3 for RC221 RC222 051938 B DIN 50022 T1 T2 for MOS side by side 051939 DIN 50022 T1 for RC222 mod 200 mm 053940 Connections terminals High insulating terminal covers HTC Type 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles HTC T1 051415 051416 HTC T2 051417 051418 HTC T3 051419 051420 HTC T4 054958 054959 B HTC T5 054960 054961 E HTC T6 014040 014041 B HTC T7 T7M 063091 063092 Protection for high insulating terminal covers HTC P Type 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles HTC P T4 054962 054963 HTC P T5 054964 054965 U see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 55 1SDC210015D0205 Ordering codes Accessories Low insulating terminal covers LTC Type 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles LTC T1 051421 051422 LTC T2 051423 051424 LTC T3 051425 051426 LTC T4 054966 054967 8 LTC T5 054968 054969 LTC T6 014038 014039 B LTC T7 T7M F 063093 063094 IP40 front protections for screw terminals STC T
234. 50 500 450 400 350 Tre T6 800 and T6D 800 Withdrawable up to 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C Imax A Imax A 1 Imax A Imax A 1 EF goo 1 760 09 720 09 60 O08 VR 800 1 800 1 760 0 95 720 0 9 HR 800 1 EF Front extended terminals HR Rear flat horizontal terminals VR Rear flat vertical terminals lu A 850 8007 VR 750 700 EF HR 650 600 550 500 400 350 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 T C 4 48 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210FO3F0001 1SDC210F04F0001 T6 1000 and up to 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C T6D 1000 Imax A l Imax A L Imax A l Imax A L FC 1000 1 960 0 96 877 0 88 784 0 78 Fixed R HR 1000 1 926 0 93 845 0 85 756 0 76 R VR 1000 1 1000 1 913 0 91 817 0 82 ES 1000 1 900 0 90 820 0 82 720 0 72 FC Front cables terminals R HR Rear terminals horizontal R VR Rear terminals vertical ES Front extended spread terminals lu A 1100 1000 FC R VR 900 R HR 800 ES 700 600 500 E 400 5 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 5 T C 3 4 49 1SDC210015D0205 Tempe
235. 50 V Phase Neutral 55 V for RC223 The values of power consumption can be inferior at lower supply voltage Tolerance 45 66 Hz RC222 RC223 T4 T5 Maximum withstand current Performances Fixed Plug in Withdrawable T3 250 A T4 250 250A 250A T4 320 320A 280A T5 400 400 A 400A T5 630 500A D 225 A with RC223 9 Available only with RC222 Homopolar toroid for residual current protection The electronic PR332 P LSIRc and PR332 P LSIG with PR330 V and rating plug RO trip units can be used combined with the homopolar toroid for residual current protection which allows activation of the residual current protection If used with PR332 LSIG the G protection is no longer available This accessory must be mounted on the busbars and is available in a single size up to 1600 A This accessory is alternative to the homopolar sensor The PR332 P LSIRc electronic trip unit can be used combined with this accessory which allow the activation of the residual current protection 1SDC210D29F0001 3 38 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210D30F0001 1SDC210C94F0001 Homopolar sensor for the main power supply earthing conductor star centre of the transformer SACE PR332 P electronic trip units can be used in combination with an external sensor located on the conductor which connects the star centre of the MV LV transformer homopolar transformer to earth In this case the earth protection is defined as Source Ground Return Thr
236. 50178 EN 50081 2 EN 50082 2 IEC 60068 2 1 IEC 60068 2 2 and IEC 60068 2 3 The device is able to manage the entire switching procedure between the normal line and emergency line circuit breakers automatically allowing great flexibility of settings In case of an error in the normal line voltage in accordance with the delays set the normal line circuit breaker is opened the genera tor started and the emergency line circuit breaker closed Similarly when the normal line returns to range the reverse switching procedure is automatically controlled It is especially suited for use in all emergency power supply systems requiring a solution that is ready to install easy to use and reliable Some of the main applications include power supply for UPS Uninterrupted Power Supply units operating rooms and primary hospital services emergency power supply for civilian buildings airports hotels data banks and telecommunications systems power supply of industrial lines for continuous processes The switching system consists of the ATSO10 unit connected to two motor driven and mechanically interlocked circuit breakers 1SDC210D05F0001 The Tmax T4 T5 T6 and T7 circuit breakers and the switch disconnectors of the respective sizes can be used for T3 please ask ABB SACE The built in mains sensor of the SACE ATSO10 device makes it possible to detect errors in the mains voltage The three inputs may be directly connected to the three ph
237. 54846 Kit W MP T5 630 054849 054850 Kit W MP T6 630 800 060390 060391 amp Kit W MP T7 T7M 062162 062163 A gt Note The withdrawable version must be composed as follows a Fixed circuit breaker b Conversion kit from fixed into moving part of withdrawable C Fixed part of withdrawable d Front for lever operating mechanism or rotary handle or motor operator only T4 T5 and T6 e Sliding contacts blocks if the circuit breaker is automatic or fitted with electrical accessories only for T7 D For the circuit breakers in withdrawable version In max 570 A Sliding contacts blocks for T7 Type 1SDA R1 ay gm Lef block MP T7 T7M 062164 Central block MP T7 T7M 062165 Right block MP T7 T7M 062166 Left block FP T7 063572 Left block FP T7M 062167 Central block FP T7 T7M 062168 Right block FP T7 T7M 062169 Note Moving part of a circuit breaker fitted with electronic accessories or PR331 P and PR332 P electronic trip units is supplied as standard with blocks for the connection while blocks for fixed part must always be ordered Conversion kit from fixed into plug in for RC222 and RC223 Type 1SDA R1 4 poles Kit P MP RC T4 054851 Kit P MP RC T5 400 054852 see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 48 1SDC210015D0205 Ordering codes Fixed parts conversion kit and accessories for fixed parts Conversion kit from plug in into withdrawable fo
238. 54938 054938 see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210N84F0004 Operating mechanism and locks Padlock lever lock PLL Type 1SDA R1 T1 T2 T3 T7 T7M S PLL plug in in open position 051393 2 PLL for T1 1p plug in in open position 060199 8 PLL plate in open closed position 051394 u PLL plate in open position 060534 PLL padlock in open position 062150 062151 Note On T7 the padlock is an alternative to the key lock 1SDC210N83F0004 4 Ronis key lock in open position on the circuit breaker KLC Type 1SDA R1 T1 T2 T3 1SDC210163F0004 standard version KLC same key T1 053528 KLC same key T2 053529 KLC same key T3 053530 version with key removable in both positions KLC S same key T1 051395 KLC S same key T2 052015 KLC S same key T3 052016 0 t cannot be mounted when there is a front operationg mechanism a rotary handle operating mechanism motor operator or RC221 RC222 residual current device and only in the case of three pole circuit breakers with the service releases UVR SOR Key lock in open position on the circuit breaker KLC Type 1SDA R1 T7 T7M KLC D different key 062134 062141 KLC S same key for different groups of circuit breakers N 20005 062135 062142 KLC S same key for different groups of circuit breakers N 20006 062136 062143 KLC S
239. 5D0205 3 54 Accessories Communication devices and systems Men Be 073 pe 61 m weng mmm Stam aes i m Em iid mm EE mE ram m ke rre rier CM 7 WERE m m mesi dESNAHENES A Jus IBe R JR m LE FE UP ee In addition SD View 2000 can acquire current voltage and power measurements in real time from the MTME 485 multimeters with Modbus communication Furthermore it is possible to interface any air or molded case circuit breaker or switch disconnec tor not fitted with a communication module with the SD View 2000 supervision system by means of a PLC type ABB AC31 For the circuit breakers or switch disconnectors connected in this way SD View 2000 shows the status of the apparatus open closed tripped racket in or racket out in real time and allows it to be operated remotely All the characteristics of the above mentioned devices are preconfigured in the SD View 2000 system The user doesn t have to carry out any detailed configuration neither to insert tables with the data shown for each trip unit nor to draw specific graphic pages It is enough to insert in the system the list of the connected devices Technical characteristics Serial ports up to 4 ABB SACE devices for each serial port up to 31 9600 or 19200 Baud Protocol Modbus RTU Personal computer requirements Pentium 1 GHz 512 MB RAM 100 GB hard disk Windows 2000 XP Internet Explorer 6 Ethe
240. 6 5 46 5 27 5 isolating distance H Y TI d SS EN e 166 g D 95 x SE lx Q i ek e S zm el E 283 B OS E Flange for the Drilling templates for the compartment compartment door door and fitting flange supplied as standard 165 96 61 25 27 14 Y Y LI E l oo e Dt S X x s ZI Lx 5 D e o 8 ei Y S Y 8 TB Z Rmin 200 E 6 75 1SDC210015D0205 Withdrawable version Caption q Padlock device for open posi tion maximum 3 padlocks to be provided by the user 2 Lock for compartment door Dimension with AUE connector early making contact 6 76 Overall dimensions Accessories for Tmax T4 T5 Rotary handle operating mechanism on the circuit breakers lt D Det A 1SDC210K97F0001 27 5 isolating distance 55 WS eg me e a x lt 00000 F 105 5 190 5 ff lt 2 E 196 23 Z T 232 75 8 24 5 Flange for the Drilling template for compartment compartment door door and fitting flange Drilling for detail A 165 96 61 25 27 14 Y Y L 1 3 LO 2 LX X tx 3X2 3 ES SR 8 e Y E Y 116
241. 630 A Be B9 n n a a IEC 60947 2 IEC 60947 4 IEC 60947 2 IEC 60947 4 IEC 60947 2 IEC 60947 4 IEC 60947 2 E E n E E E a L E n R F P W F P W F W F W F FC Cu FC CuAl EF ES R F FC Cu FC CuAl EF ES F FC CuAl EF ES R RC F EF ES FC CuAl HR VR MC HR VR R HR VR EF ES R FC Cu FC CuAl EF ES R FC Cu FC CuAl HR VR HR VR EF ES FC Cu FC CuAl EF ES FC Cu FC CuAl EF HR VR EF HR VR ES RS 20000 20000 20000 10000 240 120 120 60 8000 7000 5000 2000 S H L versions 3000 V version 120 60 60 60 105 140 210 210 103 5 103 5 103 5 154 manual 178 motorizable 205 205 268 268 2 35 3 25 9 5 12 9 7 12 5 manual 11 14 motorizable 3 6 5 15 3 85 5 4 12 1 15 1 29 7 39 6 manual 32 42 6 motorizable 2 47 1SDC210015D0205 2 48 Circuit breakers for motor protection General characteristics Starting switching and protection of three phase asynchronous motors are basic operations for their correct use ABB SACE proposes two different solutions for this type of application a traditional system which foresees a circuit breaker for protection against short circuit a thermal relay for protection against overload and missing or unbalanced phase and a contactor for motor switching a system of integrated protection thanks to the PR222MP trip unit which ensures both pro tection against short circuit and against overload as
242. 70 kA 120 kA PR231 P LS 1600 062994 063026 063058 mm PR231 P I 1600 062993 063025 063057 PR232 P LSI 1600 062995 063027 063059 PR331 P LSIG 1600 062996 063028 063060 PR332 P LI 1600 062997 063029 063061 PR332 P LSI 1600 062998 063030 063062 PR332 P LSIG 1600 062999 063031 063063 PR332 P LSIRc 1600 063000 063032 063064 H To allow the interchangeability of PR231 T7 T7M circuit breakers must be ordered specifying extra codes for its interchangeability See page 7 60 RC protection can be obtained only with 1SDA063869R1 toroid T7 1600 Fixed F 4 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 S H L Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 50kA 70 kA 120 kA PR231 P LS I 1600 063002 063034 063066 mE PR231 P I 1600 063001 063033 063065 PR232 P LSI 1600 063003 063035 063067 PR331 P LSIG 1600 063004 063036 063068 PR332 P LI 1600 063005 063037 063069 PR332 P LSI 1600 063006 063038 063070 PR332 P LSIG 1600 063007 063039 063071 PR332 P LSIRc 1600 063008 063040 063072 To allow the interchangeability of PR231 T7 T7M circuit breakers must be ordered specifying extra codes for its interchangeability See page 7 60 9 RC protection can be obtained only with 1SDA063869R1 toroid see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 19 1SDC210015D0205 Ordering codes Power distribution circuit breakers T7 800 M Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals F
243. 79 0 76 R VR 630 1 605 0 96 554 0 88 504 0 80 FC Front cables terminals F Front flat terminals R HR Rear terminals horizontal R VR Rear terminals vertical lu A 640 630 620 610 600 590 580 R HR FC F 570 560 550 540 530 520 510 500 490 480 470 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 TG 1SDC210E98F0001 T5 630 and T5D 630 up to 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C Imax A Imax A 1 Imax A 1 Imax A 1 Plug in EF 567 09 502 0 80 458 0 72 409 0 64 Withd rawable HR 567 0 9 502 0 80 458 0 72 409 0 64 VR 567 0 9 526 0 82 480 0 76 429 0 68 EF Front extended terminals HR Rear flat horizontal terminals VR Rear flat vertical terminals lu A 600 550 500 EF HR 450 400 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 TPC 1SDC210E99F0001 4 46 1SDC210015D0205 T6 630 and T6D 630 up to 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C Imax A I Imax A l Imax A L Imax A I Fixed FC F 630 1 630 1 508 5 0 95 567 0 9 R VR 680 1 630 1 630 1 598 5 0 95 1 R HR 630 1 630 567 0 9 504 0 8 FC Front cables terminals F Front flat terminals R HR Rear terminals horizontal R VR Rear terminals vertical lu A 850 800 750 700 650 RVR 4
244. 8 128 0 8 FC Cu 160 1 153 6 0 96 140 8 0 88 128 0 8 FC CuAl 160 1 153 6 0 96 140 8 0 88 128 0 8 R 160 1 153 6 0 96 1408 0 88 128 0 8 F Front flat terminals FC Cu Front terminals for copper cables EF Front extended terminals FC CuAl Front terminals for CuAl cables ES Front extended spread terminals R Rear terminals Note in the plug in version the maxi mum setting is derated by 10 at 40 C F Front flat terminals FC Cu Front terminals for copper cables lu A 150 EF Front extended terminals FC CuAl Front terminals for CuAl cables Note in the plug in version the maxi WA mum setting is derated by 10 at 40 C 165 160 155 150 145 140 135 130 125 120 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 T C T2 160 up to 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C Imax A L Imax A L Imax A L Imax A L Plug in F 144 0 9 138 0 84 126 0 80 112 Oe EF 144 0 9 138 0 84 126 0 80 T2 0 68 ES 144 0 9 138 0 84 126 0 80 112 0 68 FC Cu 144 0 9 138 0 84 126 0 80 112 0 68 FC CuAl 144 0 9 138 0 84 126 0 80 112 0 68 R 144 0 9 138 0 84 126 0 80 112 0 68 ES Front extended spread terminals R Rear terminals 145 140 135 130 125 120 115 110 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 TPC 4 40 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210E90F0001 1SDC210F62F0001 T3D 250 Note in the
245. 8 8 230V 230V Ip kA p kA 103 102 102 10 10 1 10 102 mm e 1 10 102 108 E kee kA JE Inns kA 18 g 9 4 29 1SDC210015D0205 Limitation curves T5 400 630 T6 630 800 1000 230 V 230 V Ip kA Ip kA 102 10 10 10 T 10 402 E ES E 1 0 10 d 8 T7 800 1000 1250 1600 230 V Ip kA 10 e g 10 1 8 10 10 1 LW 8 4 30 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210E68F0001 T1 160 T2 160
246. 9 Also for front for lever operating mechanism and direct rotary handle During installation of the electrical accessories Only for T1 T6 The fixed parts are always preset with IP20 degree of protection IP54 degree of protection can be obtained with the circuit breaker installed in a switchboard fitted with a rotary handle operating mechanism transmitted on the compartment door and special kit RHE IP54 1SDC210015D0205 Operating temperature The Tmax circuit breakers can be used in ambient conditions where the surrounding air temperature varies between 25 C and 70 C and stored in ambients with temperatures between 40 C and 70 C The circuit breakers fitted with thermomagnetic trip units have their thermal element set for a refer ence temperature of 40 C For temperatures other than 40 C with the same setting there is a thermal trip threshold variation as shown in the table on page 4 50 and following The electronic trip units do not undergo any variations in performance as the temperature varies but in the case of temperatures exceeding 40 C the maximum setting for protection against overloads L must be reduced as indicated in the derating graph on page 4 37 and following to take into account the heating phenomena which occur in the copper parts of the circuit breaker passed through by the phase current For temperatures above 70 C the circuit breaker performances are not guaranteed To ensure ser
247. A 42A 45A 43A 44A 46A 1SDC210015D0205 Notes A B aio The circuit breaker is only fitted with the applications specified in the ABB SACE order con firmation To make out the order please consult this catalogue The undervoltage release is supplied for operation using a power supply branched on the supply side of the circuit breaker or from an independent source The circuit breaker can only close when the release is energized there is a mechanical lock on closing In conformity with the Standards governing machine tools contacts S4 shown in Fig 15A can be used to open the Yu undervoltage release circuit Fig 6A when the circuit breaker is open and close it again upon a manual closing command from the rotary handle For the EIA RS485 serial interface connection see document RH0298 regarding MODBUS communication The auxiliary voltage Vaux allows actuation of all operations of the PR331 P PR332 P and trip units Having requested a Vaux insulated from earth one must use galvanically separated convert ers in compliance with IEC 60950 UL 1950 or equivalent standards that ensure a com mon mode current or leakage current see IEC 478 1 CEI 22 3 not greater than 3 5 mA IEC 60364 41 and CEI 64 8 Earth fault protection is available with the PR332 P trip unit by means of a current sensor located on the conductor connecting to earth the star centre of the MV LV transformer The connections between termi
248. A B E w2 w2 a 5 27 1SDC210015D0205 Wiring diagrams Electrical accessories for T7 PR332 P electronic trip units connected to PR330 R actuation unit and PR330 D M dialogue unit Ai 45A ry I HER EE 1 4 Lt A v 17 Ve MEL 1 L x12 i qos TE X13 qe Te Te Ta Toz qe Tess XV PIS DS 15 ek ek Ae 985 62 LES 5 8 n 9 a ka R S x E S amp Q 5 Q 6 S33M 3 xg7 T7 wes A19 z 2 o i 3 E aert xe G2 xmuTs xe2 0 XRI2T2 K51 YO K51 YC UNIT PR330 R K51 K51 K51 K51 S51 P1 LLL xr7 Ls xr7 1 0 K51 SZin OFin SZout DFout GZim DBin GZout DBout Le A A E N COMMUNICATION MODULE 4A 2A PRI30 0 M PR332 P LU xmsdbli millo xe4 T ITI 3 i E YO YC s751 7 U PD 2 xe3 l2 E amp 2 a e 2 5 8 5 g XV ews ews ect LEM 955 ew LE ecu eco c LS 3 lus bw le bo loss lw lw S Y Y H Y Y Y Y l o Los o c2 Ale v v YU v a gto ST ES N P A4 i i A B A B xE w2 Wi 43A 44A 46A N Li L2 L3 TU E N A Od a A ia toa eae l EE 3 eil o di aa ED E Bay E JL Je leo EE MEN 1 1 B2 3t b2 i E Fg A
249. A m E Complete circuit breaker already coded A Circuit breaker to be assembled When only PR223 are used it is possible to invert the selectivity chain hierarchy by means of the SW 210 interlock module For further information on zone selectivity please consult the section Characteristic curves and technical information on page 4 73 2 39 1SDC210015D0205 2 40 Circuit breaker for zone selectivity EFDP Zone selectivity PR223EF The PR223EF electronic trip unit available on T4 T5 and T6 in the L version 120 kA 380 415 V for use in alternating current is able to isolate a fault present in extremely rapid times This performance is made possible thanks to the EFDP Early Fault Detection and Prevention al gorithm which is able to detect the short circuit at its onset exploiting analysis of the trend of the shunted current in relation to the current The PR223EF trip unit therefore offers two performances simultaneously which until today were antithetic selectivity and trip rapidity Thanks to extremely rapid detection and quenching of the short circuit the MCCB equipped with this trip unit are totally selective up to over 100 kA and are not subject to any limits regarding the number of hierarchical levels of the installation Trip rapidity together with just as rapid transmission of the order to wait allow a high number of circuit breakers to be interlocked making a global selectivity chain in th
250. AC DC 051358 2 UVD 60 V AC DC 038318 8 UVD 110 125 V AC DC 051360 038319 a UVD 220 250 V AC DC 051361 038320 Electrical signals Auxiliary contacts AUX Type 1SDA R1 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T7M uncabled version 1 N H AUX 1Q 1SY 250 V AC DC 051368 051368 i AUX 3Q 1SY 250 V AC DC 051369 051369 AUX 1Q 1SY 400 V AC 062104 1 AUX 2Q 400 V AC 062102 062102 AUX 1Q 1SY 24 V DC 068797 062103 8 AUX 3Q 1SY 24 V DC 054914 054914 i 8 i AUX 2Q 24 V DC 062101 062101 3 cabled version with 1 m long i3 cables T1 T2 T3 AUX C 1Q 1SY 250 V AC DC 051370 054910 AUX C 3Q 1SY 250 V AC DC 051371 054911 AUX C 1Q 1SY 400 V AC 054912 AUX C 2Q 400 V AC 054913 AUX C 1Q 1SY 24 V DC 066075 AUX C 3Q 1SY 24 V DC 055361 054915 cabled version for T2 with PR221 DS trip unit AUX C 1 S51 1Q SY 053704 AUX C 2Q 1SY 055504 cabled contact for signalling trip coil release trip e AUX SA 1 S51 T4 T5 NO 055050 AUX SA 1 S51 T4 T5 NC 064518 AUX SA 1 S51 T6 060393 AUX SA 1 S51 T7 T7M 24 V 066099 066100 AUX SA 1 S51 T7 T7M 250 V 062105 063553 cabled contact for signalling manual remote operation AUX MO C 054917 cabled contact circuit breaker ready to close AUX RTC 24 V DC 062108 AUX RTC 250 V AC DC 062109 cabled contact signalling spring charged AUX MC 24 V DC 062106 AUX MC 250 V AC DC 062107 cabled contacts in electronic version AUX E C 1Q 1SY T4
251. ACE international patent which by simulating the copper and iron over temperatures inside the motor allows precise safeguarding of the motor The protection intervenes when the established over temperature is reached The trip time is fixed by selecting the trip class defined in the above mentioned Standard The function is temperature compensated and sensitive to a missing unbalanced phase according to the IEC 60947 4 1 Standard In the case of an auxiliary power supply the thermal memory function is guaranteed which allows the trip unit to continue to calculate the motor temperature even following an opening Function L which cannot be excluded can be set manually to 0 4 1 x In with 60 thresholds which can be set by means of the dip switches on the front of the trip unit or electronically by means of the SACE PRO10T test and configuration unit The starting class of the motor must then be selected which determines the trip time for overload according to the IEC 60947 4 1 5 7 3 Table Il Standards class 10 A corresponds to a trip time t 4s class 10 to t 8s class 20 to t 16s and class 30 to t 24s at 7 2 x In Setting this trip time can also be carried out electronically with the PRO1OT the electronic steps are equal to 1s Tripping of this protection leads to contactor opening with the PR212 CI unit Any anomaly of the contactor would make the circuit breaker open thanks to the BACK UP function For protection L there is th
252. D 1 2 4 16 18 20 22 24 2 10 i 3 8 iL vb Re i S x4 6 e T x4 71 2 EA To T t s l KN ses EA i R222MP l d xa bLs da EA sos E7 D 5 3 K LS a aa AX x 97 95 5 gel i N 7 S A15 o 98 96 S M 6 Se Milaan RIHO E NIU d m K i 2 As an alternative to generic contact 0 1 5 23 1SDC210015D0205 5 24 Wiring diagrams Electrical accessories for T1 T6 PR222MP electronic trip unit connected with the PRO21 K signalling unit with the PR212 CI contactor control unit and with a contactor d u L2 L5 A13 11 13 1 17 19 21 23 2 H 4 li 5 i K51 RSI E RSI F i RSI Kai Ka E H EARN DN S SN ae 7 D 5 L D 8 LI i 7 Il 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 6 2 1 mg rT LI 6 A INI t ootd se3E I 5 3 97 95 24V 7 s e a S T S us 8 Z 98 96 6 4 ig OFF_N Al oN 5 we ER Q9 8 Bas RIH 9 at A GON 2 As an alternative to generic contact 0 1 1SDC210G17F0001 1SDC210015D0205 PR222MP electronic trip unit with auxiliary power supply and PR212 CI contactor control unit
253. D KE E K D x 5 X KE j A E E 103 5 E 103 5 i o 3 Ww Y m 5 6 13 1SDC210015D0205 Fixed circuit breaker Caption Overall dimensions with cabled accessories mounted SOR C UVR C RC222 23 Overall dimensions with cabled auxiliary contacts mounted only 3Q 1SY Overall dimensions Tmax T5 Fixing on sheet 112 5 103 5 2Nm 115 139 5 3P 69 75 46 5 46 5 46 5 Y H L BY lepo 6 0 6 Ue SI 105 2 7 mI M 55 S xf x KE ef Po 6 p o 64 8 LIE LI 3 3 L3 1 5 Y 186 ui 2 Flange for compartment door ite GEES e ts pe st 8 SI X X 8 X Y 2 Lech Y 1SDC210H78F0001 With flange 3 4 POLES Drilling templates for support sheet For front terminals 46 5 T a 3 POLES 6 14 1SDC210H80F0001 176 93 55 M5 R 5 5 M5 y V C D Y LJ Del re ES N N S 46 5 g g g x SI x SIE XE x4 B E S C C 5 a FTN ha E OD S LOD NUN 5 35 Y E 35 Y 46 5 46 5 8 46 5 46 5 46 5 4 POLES 3 POLES 4 POLES For rear terminals 1SDC210H76F0001 60 5 107 Drilling templates of t
254. D0205 Overall dimensions Circuit breaker with RC221 222 residual current release Tmax T1 T2 T8 Drilling templates of the compartment door Without flange Without flange With flange face extending face not extending face not extending 3 POLES T1 T2 T3 T1 T1 T2 TS B 108 2 F Y Y Y lt e l H m X es X E E Es X H X 3 39 1 8 41 5 Y Y P T2 T3 ED X 32 78 2 Sc n WX L X E 4 POLES Y T1 T2 TS T1 T2 T8 T1 T2 T8 c G c H 32 78 2 37 83 y x zz um B B T i lt UU E cal i 1 x SM S T d x Bo ed 7 Y Y Y A B C D E F G H 1 18 108 2 94 1 23 5 113 78 1 39 1 122 106 76 23 5 120 90 46 13 5 i920 mes E835 19 127 4 102 5 53 5 ov E 6 58 1SDC210J99F0001 1SDC210015D0205 Overall dimensions Circuit breaker with RC228 residual current release Tmax T3 Fixed version Caption Front terminals with residual current CO Front terminals for bars con nection 111 8 2 Fixing on sheet steel 3 Compartment door sheet steel arilling 4 Tightening torque 1 1 Nm Tightening torque 2 Nm 6 Tightening torque 8 Nm L P L p T 1 i E 8 R E B 2 14 9 83 8 ap an Ab m bi QUT Y T rb AP 1 d
255. DA063140R1 Protection S Against short circuit with delayed trip Dip switch for neutral setting Protection Against short circuit with instantaneous trip 1SDC210B54F0001 self powered trip unit at full power two or three phase power supply Protection functions Trip threshold Trip curves Excludability Relation t f I Against overload with long inverse time 0 40 1 x In step 0 04 xIn at6 xl at6xl delay trip and trip characteristic according Trip between 1 1 1 3 xl t 23 12s to an inverse time curve Pt k according to i Tolerance 10 t kl IEC 60947 2 Standard Against short circuit with long inverse time l 1 1 5 2 2 5 3 3 5 4 5 5 5 at 10xIn at10 xin delay trip and trip characteristic with inverse 6 5 7 7 5 8 8 5 9 10xIn t 0 1 0 25s time Pt k selectable as an alternative to Tolerance 10 Tolerance 10 L t k P protection function I Against short circuit with istantaneous trip I 1 1 5 2 2 5 3 3 5 4 5 selectable as an alternative to protection 5 6 5 7 7 5 8 8 5 9 function S 10 xIn instantaneous t k These tolerances hold in the following conditions In conditions other than those considered the following tollerances hold Tolerance 10 Trip threshold Trip time s x 1096 x 2096 I 15 lt 60ms 2 22 1SDC210015D0205 PR232 P The PR232 P release available for T7 provides protection functions against overload L delayed short circ
256. ES 3 186 4P E ES 9 9 46 5 46 5 46 5 Y S 3 8 Y 2 6 43 1SDC210015D0205 Withdrawable circuit breaker Caption WO 6 44 Fixed part Moving part Lock for compartment door available on request Overall dimensions with cabled accessories mounted SOR C UVR C RC222 223 Overall dimensions Tmax TA Fixing on sheet 275 isolating distance 105 3P gt 3 52 5 2 3 35 35 35 Y u JL B E z 105 o E 27 SE D o 166 S ER CN d 1 Deh Z y S TS e G en a O 1 UO LT D B Ss S N s S B g ZI Y s 2 190 5 o D j 3 196 R 140 4P 8 a Flange for compartment door 165 96 61 25 27 lk Y Y Lf wo e Lei CO X Xz X x e 8 S J 3 cu S e 2 Y 8 Y E us R min 200 8 Drilling templates for support sheet For front terminals For rear terminals 5 5 M 55 M5 Q55 M5 lt 1 E b Y 97 Q 5 5 M5 Y Y E E B g 30 5 61 30 5 S o Hin ol eu 96 ol X X E Si X X9 Sg X x B 8 S E E e B e 8 e e 2 1 Y a Y 2 5i E N 3 POLES 4 POLES Y 3 Y B 48 5 97 8 ii 132 3 POLES 4 POLES Drilli
257. F Terminals yO004E9601Z0d0S1 000429601 ZOdS L xL L0004vZIOLCOQS LO004EZIOLZOASL Lle e 116 gt d re 9 leo E 3 POLES 45 1000 A Front extended spread ES oor VEL 100042210 Zods Insulating barriers between phases compulsory Caption 4 POLES ggm vel 1SDC210015D0205 6 20 Rear for copper aluminium cables RC CuAI 00049Z10LZOAS L 630 A 00048ZI0LZOASL 100042210 Z00S ae T5 05 E lg T 7 9 9 S DI o I d Hie 4 ou e W Be D dk 4 Y 800A Rear horizontal R 10004 LEIOLZOAS L Y 3 4 POLES 100030 I0LCOQS L 00046Z10LZOAS x lt 280 4P 210 3P m LOOOSEEIOLZOGSL LI 70 S 70 aa
258. F Front extended 630 A EF 46 5 46 5 46 5 46 5 46 5 46 5 9 e 10 5 425 3 175 y EA 54425 17 5 y f Isl fol Ui t W zu E L g Ne So E E S 3 SI BUS I x X H X co H 69 75 8 x8 x H B 7 139 5 3P E ECH B 186 4P 3 139 5 3P 186 4P 2 Front for copper cables FC Cu or for copper aluminium cables FC CuAl 400 A 139 5 3P 69 75 46 5 46 5 46 5 Y 3 l E 8 K Gab o SET T UJ EN e D m O B g n 2 Y 8 186 4P 8 Front extended spread 400 A ES 155 5 57 75 57 75 8 40 40 m i E E o WI 5 5 B ve 3 g E S 2 8 7 E E xii xi 2 8 E g Front extended spread 630 A ES 155 5 57 75 57 75 40 Y e eo N e i 5 uw 5 5 gS S B 6 47 1SDC210015D0205 Rear flat horizontal 400 A HR K e Ba 19 e eo E x 8 2E B he E S 10 g E za B 74 25 61 75 g12 d B K Ce SP Ceci d Y SA 8 E iu W y 9 y CR z E 36 75 49 25 8 Rear flat horizontal 630 A 64 44 D 1SDC210J69F0001 18DC210J71F0001 6 48 Overall dimensions Tmax T5 912 74
259. F P221DS LS I 100 4p 054081 Kit P MP T4 4p 054840 SOR C 220 240 V AC 220 250V DC 054873 MOE T4 T5 220 250 V AC DC 054897 ADP 10 pin adapter 054924 AU C 1Q 1SY 250 V AC DC 054910 ADP 6 pin adapter 054922 4 T4 T5 electrical accessories on moving part of withdrawable circuit breaker Fitting the moving parts of T4 T5 withdrawable circuit breakers can only take place using electrical accessories in the cabled version i e SOR C UVR C AUX C MOE MOE E and AUE with ADP adapter a Tmax T5V 630 moving part of withdrawable circuit breaker with UVR C and MOE 1SDA R1 T5V 630 E F TMA 500 4p N 100 054495 Kit W MP T5 630 4p 054850 UVR C 24 30 V AC DC 054887 MOE T4 T5 24 V DC 054894 ADP 10 pin adapter 054924 b Tmax T4S 250 moving part of withdrawable circuit breaker SOR C RHE and AUE 1SDA R1 T4S 250 PR221DS LS I 100 4p F F 054033 KIT W MP T4 4p 054842 RHE normal for withdrawable circuit breaker 054933 AUE 2 early contacts 054925 SOR C 220 240 V AC 220 250 V DC 054873 ADP 10 pin adapter 054924 1SDC210015D0205 5 Rear mechanical interlock T3 The rear MIR interlock for T3 allows all the accessories to be used To be able to take the circuit breakers and or the fixed parts mounted directly on the interlocking plate it is necessary to use code 1SDA050093R1 to be specified regarding the second circuit breaker or fixed part to be interlocked Horizontal mechanical interlo
260. F0001 T1 T2 T3 UVR Electrical characteristics UVR T7 Characteristics Power supply Un 24 V AC DC 240 250 V AC DC 30 V AC DC 380 400 V AC 48 V AC DC 415 440 V AC 60 V AC DC 110 120 V AC DC 120 127 V AC DC 220 240 V AC DC Operating limits IEC EN 60947 2 Standards Inrush power Ps DC 300 W Inrush time 100 ms AC 300 VA Continuous power Pc DC 3 5 W AC 3 5 VA Opening time UVR 30 ms Insulation voltage 2500 V 50 Hz for 1 min 3 18 1SDC210015D0205 Time delay device for undervoltage release UVD The undervoltage release UVR can be combined with an external electronic power supply time delay device which allows circuit breaker opening to be delayed in the case of a drop or failure in the power supply voltage of the release itself according to preset and adjustable delays in order to prevent unwarranted trips caused by temporary malfunctions The delay device must be combined with an undervoltage release with the same corresponding voltage Two time delay devices with the same characteristics are available For T1 T6 a time delay device which can be combined also on the Isomax S3 S4 S5 circuit breakers is available The time delay device for Tmax T7 is the one already available on the Emax ranges 1SDC210C59F0001 UVD Circuit breaker Power supply voltage V AC DC T1 T6 24 30 T1 T6 48 60 T1 T6 110 12
261. For circuit breakers For residual current e E An release Y 2 Y With flange Without flange 1SDC210K04F0001 1SDC210K08F0001 1SDC210015D0205 Drilling templates for support sheet TA TB 70 93 5 5 M5 mmi ee Y PK b 23 25 S 17 5 g x x x wo N LO te ed N Ps N 8 E re E A Y E ks 0 8 E XLI 0 X D X 0 n a N zi 2 Q S 8 LU uL 39 J T e E rm Gef iD 1SDC210K11F0001 A B With flange 2 5 Without flange v 1SDC210K10F0001 Ss 23255 465 465 465 amp 1 2 WIN N 5 6 E tx ro n ai M N N EN En ei 121 T ep Y D E 64 5 68 5 60 55 545 1SDC210K12F0001 6 61 1SDC210015D0205 Overall dimensions Circuit breaker with RC222 residual current release
262. HE MOST ADVANCED TECHNOLOGY It is thanks to this technology that T Generation offers you performances which were out of the question until now in circuit breakers with these dimensions And there are some exclusive technical solutions which only ABB SACE can offer you such as the brand new electronic trip units designed for the new Tmax T7 or the new rapid accessory fitting system FREEDOM OF TOTALLY SAFE SELECTION The safety of knowing that behind Tmax there s ABB SACE s strong and constant commitment to continually search for excellence of quality at the base of each prod uct and service ABB quality TMAX T1 T2 AND T3 ALL SOLUTIONS PERFECTLY COORDINATED UP TO 250 A d A Tmax T1 T2 and T3 the three little ones of the Tmax fam current releases designed and constructed to optimise space in ily were thought up from the beginning to work together You the switchboard and simplify coupling with the circuit breaker can select functions and performances which until now couldn t Tmax T1 T2 and T3 have a completely standardised range of be found in circuit breakers with these dimensions Perfect up to accessories 250 A There are so many characteristics common to the three sizes The single depth 70 mm of the three pieces of apparatus mak ing installation truly simpler the new arcing chambers produced with a gasifying material and an innovative construction system allowing the
263. IO OI OO Interlock Type A T4 F P W T4 F P W B T4 F P W T5 400 F P W o T5 630 F C TA F P W T5 630 P W D T5 400 F P W 0 T5 630 F T5 400 F P W o T5 630 F E T5 400 F P W o T5 630 F T5 630 P W F T5 630 P W T5 630 P W There are no limitations on the versions to be interlocked therefore for example a fixed circuit breaker can be interlocked with a withdrawable version switch disconnector Since this is a rear interlock all the front accessories which are compatible with the circuit breakers installed can be used In the vertical interlock the bottom terminals of the upper circuit breaker and the top terminals of the lower circuit breaker must be of rear type To be able to receive the circuit breakers mounted directly on the interlocking plate code 1SDA050093R1 must be specified as the accessory of the second circuit breaker or fixed part you want to interlock The following interlocking combinations can be made IO OI OO T7 This mechanism makes the mechanical interlock between two T7 circuit breakers by means of flex ible cables which are connected on a plate mounted on the side of the circuit breaker preventing simultaneous closing of the two circuit breakers The plates to be mounted on the circuit breaker differ according to whether the circuit breaker is in the fixed or withdrawable version The interlock is available both for the manual operati
264. LSIRc 800 061969 062648 062680 062712 To allow the interchangeability of PR231 T7 T7M circuit breakers must be ordered specifying extra codes for its interchangeability See page 7 60 RC protection can be obtained only with 1SDA063869R1 toroid T7 800 Fixed F 4 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 S H L V Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 50kA 70 kA 120 kA 150 kA PR231 P LS I 800 061973 062650 062682 062714 PR231 P 800 061972 062649 062681 062713 PR232 P LSI 800 061974 062651 062683 062715 PR331 P LSIG 800 061975 062652 062684 062716 PR332 P LI 800 061976 062653 062685 062717 PR332 P LSI 800 061977 062654 062686 062718 PR332 P LSIG 800 061978 062655 062687 062719 PR332 P LSIRc 800 061979 062656 062688 062720 9 To allow the interchangeability of PR231 T7 T7M circuit breakers must be ordered specifying extra codes for its interchangeability See page 7 60 RC protection can be obtained only with 1SDA063869R1 toroid T7 1000 Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 S H L V Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 50 kA 70 kA 120 kA 150 kA PR231 P LS I 1000 062738 062770 062802 062834 PR231 P I 1000 062737 062769 062801 062833 PR232 P LSI 1000 062739 062771 062803 062835 PR331 P LSIG 1000 062740 062772 062804 062836 PR332 P LI 1000 062741 062773 062805 062837 PR332 P LSI 1000 06
265. MP Protection L Against overload PR221MP Protection and parameterisation functions Socket for TT1 test unit Protection Against short circuit with instantaneous trip 1SDC210B60F0001 Protection function Trip threshold Trip curves Excludability ps ird Against overload with long 1 2 0 65 1 xIn Trip classes inverse time delay trip and step 0 05 x In SE 5E 10E 20E trip characteristic according Protection for unbalanced phase to an inverse time curve not available Pt constant according to IEC 60947 2 Standard Against short circuit with 2 5 17 5 x In instantaneous trip with step 1 x In adjustable threshold Tolerance 2096 T2 mstantaneous z tak The tolerances are valid with these hypotheses self supplied release at full power and or auxiliary power supply without start up two phase or three phase power supply For all the cases not foreseen in the above hypotheses the following tolerance values are valid Trip threshold Trip time I x 2096 40ms 2 51 1SDC210015D0205 2 52 1SDC210B14F0001 Circuit breakers for motor protection Integrated protection PR222MP In the three pole version the Tmax T4 T5 and T6 circuit breakers are fitted with PR222MP electronic trip units This makes it possible to obtain functions which guarantee high trip precision extreme reli ability and immunity to variations in the external temperature The PR222MP trip units
266. N O 6 A 250 V AC 50 60 Hz Remote opening control N O contact Trip time 15 ms Connection to the toroidal transformer By means of 4 twisted conductors Maximum length 5 m Dimensions W x Hx D mm 96 x 96 x 181 5 Drilling for assembly on door mm 92x92 Degree of protection on the front IP41 Degree of protection on the rear IP30 3 39 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210C95F0001 1SDC210C96F0001 3 40 Accessories Accessories for electronic trip units Front display unit FDU The front display is a display unit of the setting currents alarms and parameters of the PR222DS P PR222DS PD PR223DS and PR223EF electronic trip units of T4 T5 and T6 The display unit can operate correctly with self supply with 0 35 x In on at least one phase If the display is used in combination with the PR222DS PD PR223DS or PR223EF trip units and therefore with an auxiliary power supply it is also possible to detect the protection which has caused the release trip and the fault current Connection of the display to the PR223DS and PR223EF trip units must compulsorily pass through the AUX E auxiliary contacts in electronic version whereas with the PR222DS P trip unit it can be made directly It is not compatible with the front accessories rotary handle operating mechanism motor operator and front for lever operating mechanism When combined with PR223DS trip unit with VM210 device the FDU is able to display a wide range
267. R Rear flat horizontal 1250 1200 1150 VR 1100 1050 EF HR 1000 950 900 850 800 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 Tc 4 54 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210F55F0001 1SDC210F56F0001 T7 S H L 1250 up to 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C and T7D 1250 Imax A L Imax A imax A L imax A VR 1250 1 1250 1 00 1141 0 91 1021 0 82 Withdrawable EFHR 1280 1 1250 7 07 1118 0 99 980 0 78 EF Extended front VR Rear flat vertical HR Rear flat horizontal lu A 1300 12507 1200 VR 1150 1100 EF HR 1050 1000 950 900 850 800 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 TPC 1SDC210F57F0001 T7 V 1250 up to 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C Imax A Imax A Imax b i Imax A Withdrawable VR 1250 1 1157 093 1056 0 85 045 0 79 EF HR 1250 1 1000 0 50 913 078 816 0 65 EF Extended front VR Rear flat vertical HR Rear flat horizontal lu A 13007 1250 1200 11507 1100 VR 1050 1000 950 EF HR
268. RTU Modbus RTU standard standard Physical medium EIA RS485 EIA RS485 Speed maximum 19 2 kbps 19 2 kbps Measurement functions Phase currents m E E Neutral current mo B Ground current mo L Voltages phase to phase phase to earth mo Powers active reactive apparent mo Power factors mo Energies mo Peak factor E Frequency mo Signalling functions L pre alarm and alarm LED mo m E L alarm output contact E R E Available data Circuit breaker status open closed E E Mode local remote E Oo Protection parameters set m R E Alarms Protections L S G WI R S Failed tripping under fault conditions Wi R Maintenance Total number of operations B H Total number of trips B Number of trip tests D Number of manual operations D Number of trips for each individual protection function D Record of last trip data WI L Kl Commande Circuit breaker opening closing with motor operator B E Alarm reset m L L Circuit breaker reset with motor operator B Setting the curves and protection thresholds mo Oo o Safety function Automatic opening in the case of failed Trip command fail with motor operator L Events Changes in circuit breaker state in the protections and all the alarms n L With PRO10 T unit or BTO30 unit Typical contact MOS photo Vmax 48 V DC 30 V AC Rmax 35 ohm Available with AUX E electronic auxiliary contacts The motor operator must be in electronic version MOE E and elec
269. SDC210E51F0001 T4 250 320 500 V Pt 10 A s 10 108 Ims KA 4 23 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210E52F0001 Specific let through energy curves T5 400 630 T6 630 800 1000 500 V 500 V Pt 109 A2s Pt 10 A2s 10 10 10 1 1 8 ps 10 102 108 197 1 10 102 lms kA 8 Ims kA 9 T7 800 1000 1250 1600 500 V Pt 10 A2s 10 102 10 1 107 S 10 102 10 Le KA 5 4 24 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210E54F0001 T1 160 690 V Pet 108 A2s T2 160 690 V Pt 10 A s
270. T5 054916 AUX E C 1Q 1SY Ton 064161 Note For T7 T7M in withdrawable version sliding contact blocks for fixed and moving part are necessary See page 3 4 and 7 43 9 These cannot be combined with T2 circuit breaker fitted with PR221DS electronic trip unit Available only mounted on the circuit breaker 9 For T4 T5 and T6 in plug in withdrawable version it is necessary to order a socket plug connector 3 poles 1SDA051364R1 Only with circuit breakers equipped with PR222DS PD and PR223DS trip units see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 47 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210152F0004 1SDC210N77F0001 1SDC210206F0004 1SDC210125F0004 1SDC210N78F0001 7 48 Ordering codes Accessories Auxiliary position contacts AUP Type 1SDA R1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T7M AUP T2 T3 1 contact signalling circuit breakers racked in 051372 AUP I T4 T5 24 V DC 1 contact signalling circuit breakers racked in 054920 AUP I T4 T5 400 V AC DC 1 contact for signalling circuit breakers racked in 054918 AUP R T4 T5 24 V DC 1 contact for signal ling circuit breakers racked out 054921 AUP R T4 T5 400 V AC DC 1 contact for signalling circuit breakers racked out 054919 AUP T7 T7M 24 V DC 062110 AUP T7 T7M 250 V AC 062111 Note For T4 T5 T6 in withdrawable version contacts signaling circuit breaker racked in For T4 T5 T6 in plug in version contacts sig
271. T5 400 F P W or T5 630 F T5 400 F P W or T5 630 F 054951 MIR P plate for interlock type E T5 400 F P W or T5 630 F T5 630 P W 054952 MIR P plate for interlock type F T5 630 P W T5 630 P W 054953 Note To interlock two circuit breakers you have to order a frame unit interlock and a plate for type A or B or C or D or E or F interlock Mechanical interlock MIR Type 1SDA R1 TS T6 Horizontal interlock 063324 060685 Vertical interlock 063325 060686 see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 53 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210N89F0004 8 ge 5 S S 8 ge S 8 o 1SDC210170F0004 1SDC210212F0004 o 1SDC210213F0004 1SDC210214F0004 7 54 Ordering codes Accessories Mechanical interlock with cables between two circuit breakers Type 1SDA R1 T7 T7M Cables kit for interlock 062127 Plate for fixed unit floor fixed 062130 Wiring kit for interlock with Emax 064568 Plate for fixed unit wall fixed 062129 Plate for withdrawable cb 062131 Shoulders for fixing to floor 063856 Note To interlock two circuit breakers you have to order a cables kit and two plates in function of the version of the circuit breaker Floor fixing plate Type 1SDA R1 T7 T7M Floor fixing plate for fixed unit 063856 Sealable lock of thermal adjustment Type 1SDA R1 T1 T2 T3 TMD release anti adjustment seal 051397 Transparen
272. T7 1000 M Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 S H L V Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 50 kA 70 kA 120 kA 150 kA PR231 P LS I 1000 062754 062786 062818 062850 PR231 P I 1000 062753 062785 062817 062849 PR232 P LSI 1000 062755 062787 062819 062851 PR331 P LSIG 1000 062756 062788 062820 062852 PR332 P LI 1000 062757 062789 062821 062853 PR332 P LSI 1000 062758 062790 062822 062854 PR332 P LSIG 1000 062759 062791 062823 062855 PR332 P LSIRc 1000 062760 062792 062824 062856 To allow the interchangeability of PR231 T7 T7M circuit breakers must be ordered specifying extra codes for its interchangeability See page 7 60 RC protection can be obtained only with 1SDA063869R1 toroid T7 1000 M Fixed F 4 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 S H L V Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 50kA 70 kA 120 kA 150 kA PR231 P LS I 1000 062762 062794 062826 062858 PR231 P I 1000 062761 062793 062825 062857 PR232 P LSI 1000 062763 062795 062827 062859 PR331 P LSIG 1000 062764 062796 062828 062860 PR332 P LI 1000 062765 062797 062829 062861 PR332 P LSI 1000 062766 062798 062830 062862 PR332 P LSIG 1000 062767 062799 062831 062863 PR332 P LSIRc 1000 062768 062800 062832 062864 H To allow the interchangeability of PR231 T7 T7M circuit breakers must be ordered specifying extra codes for its interchangeability S
273. TC temperature probe inserted in the motor to be protected PR222MP Protection functions and parameterisation Trip curves Manual setting Trip classes 10 A 10 20 30 IEC 60497 4 1 he class selected Protection Against short circuit with instantaneous trip Protection U Against phase current unbalance or loss of phase Setting the work methods Man Elt Release parametrisation methods Setting the reset following trip manual automatic 1SDC210B21F0001 Setting the back up time Thermal Excludability t f P t 4 8 16 24s where t1 is the trip ime at 7 2 x cold depending on Electronic setting 0 4 1 xIn step 0 01 x In olerance 15 Electronic setting 74 24s step 1s Tolerance 15 Against rotor block with Manual setting Manual setting two or three phase power supply e 0 4 0 9 x OFF Tolerance 15 self powered trip unit at full power and or auxiliary supply without start up In conditions other than those considered the following tollerances hold t 1 10s step 0 5s Tolerance 10 delayed trip and trip OFF 3 10 x1 step 1 x In 57 1 4 7 10s characteristic with definite Tolerance 15 Tolerance 10 time E t KIS 2 Electronic setting Electronic setting OFF 83 10 xl step 0 1 xl 5 1 10s step 0 5s Tolerance 15 Tolerance 10 Against short circuit with Ma
274. TU B g 8 A 8 ki e Ld Ld e e p 5 36 1SDC210015D0205 Automatic transfer switch ATSO10 for the automatic transfer switch of the two T7 circuit breakers with safety auxiliary voltage supply in direct current DC 7 e a e e e 1 1 1 KO2 KC2 KOI KEN 2 2 2 2 40 us 3 3 3 3 3 o KO2 KC2 KOI KCN CB N O CB N C CB E O CB E C ay 7 K 4 4 4 4 o x 41 42 43 144 14 h3 12 11 5 5 5 5 KO2 KC2 KOI KEN 6 6 6 6 AA Xi2 ci X18 Aur Xi2heu _x12he1__ X15 hut i i i i j xveci xv ec NV RU j xvecu xv eci YV RUT i S33M l S3 i d Toe d i 1 i Q2 i UI i Ai Al Ai Al i j j j KO2 KC2 kO KC YO YG M YO YC v A2 A2 A2 A2 xv ci2 xv C2 xv u2 vue xv C2 xveu2 NEE eee G ZW eee eee LN Xi2Yciz Dea T X5 Ur XZY TKZ yT XiBYUP E 5 E pA 8 8 2 4 A A A A A A A A A 2 5 37 1SDC210015D0205 Overall dimensions Index Fixed circuit breaker and terminals Tmax T1 and single pole TMAX Tl ccscscceccsssccscecsostcsaccasceessscrsecesscnsssisaitscssedacsecsassacstasatsrscersecese 6 2 lut el r O PELO T 6 5 Dur d cee 6 8 Tmax
275. Technical catalogue Edition 2010 Tmax T Generation Low voltage moulded case circuit breakers up to 1600 A Power and productivity for a better world Main characteristics The ranges Accessories Characteristic curves and technical information Wiring diagrams Overall dimensions Ordering codes 1SDC210015D0205 COMPLETE FREEDOM Tmax is freedom Freedom now reaching up to 1600 A with the new Imax T7 circuit breaker There s a bound less and highly diversified world of differing types of installations requirements needs and problems from 0 to 1600 A With T Generation everything becomes sim ple and rational seven sizes to find the solutions you re looking for BE FREE TO SIZE ANY TYPE OF INSTALLATION IN AN IDEAL WAY AT ALL TIMES Thanks to the seven sizes and a complete series of mag netic only thermomagnetic and electronic trip units And also a wide range of accessories and the possibility of selecting dedicated ranges for all market applications even the most specific and advanced ones BE FREE TO INSTALL ALL THE SIZES WITHOUT ANY DIFFICULTY T Generation is undeniably the family of moulded case circuit breakers with the top performance size ratio avail able on the market so can you imagine how much more space there is for cabling and how simply you ll be able to carry it out And further what about the reduced dimensions of the switchboard BE FREE TO RIDE T
276. Trip curves for motor protection Circuit breakers with PR221DS PR231 P and PR221MP electronic trip unit T2 160 PR221DS I Function t s 10 x In 1 kA 1SDC210E30F0001 T4 250 320 T5 400 630 T6 630 800 PR221DS I Function t s T7 800 1000 1250 PR231 P I Function 10 xin kA 1SDC21037FF0001 T2 100 PR221MP L I Functions 4 15 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210E31F0001 1SDC210F73F0001 4 16 Trip curves for motor protection Use of the trip curves of circuit breakers with PR222MP electronic trip unit For correct parameter setting of the SACE PR222MP electronic trip unit it may be useful to compare the overall circuit breaker curve with the motor starting curve For this purpose with the protection function graphics shown on the following pages it is possible to draw the overall curve required for the circuit breaker fitted with SACE PR222MP trip unit simply and immediately N B For function L as for all the other functions make sure you place a glossy tracing sheet over the curve so that the times on the axis of the co ordinates coincide Function L cannot be excluded Protection against overload To protect the motor against any overloads as a first step it is necessary to adjust function L to a current I higher than or equal to the rated current of the motor le le For example if le 135 A an T4 250 circuit breaker can be se
277. V Terminal boards of the accessories 1SDC210015D0205 Wiring diagrams Information for reading ATSO10 for T7 State of operation represented The circuit diagrams are for the following conditions Gircuit breakers open and connected circuits de energized closing springs discharged overcurrent relays not tripped ATSO010 not powered generator in automatic mode not started transfer switch enabled generator not in alarm logic enabling command on terminal 47 The present diagram shows withdrawable circuit breakers but is also valid for fixed circuit breakers circuit breaker auxiliary circuits are not connected to X12 X15 connectors but to the XV terminal board furthermore connect terminal 17 to 20 and terminal 35 to 38 on the ATSO10 device The present diagram shows circuit breakers with overcurrent trip unit but is also valid for circuit breakers with thermomagnetic trip unit and to circuit breakers with out relay switch disconnec tors connect terminal 18 to 20 and terminal 35 to 37 of the ATSO10 device The present diagram shows four pole circuit breakers but is also valid for two pole circuit break ers use only terminals 26 and 24 phase and neutral for the voltage connection of the normal power supply to the ATSO10 device also use the Q61 2 two pole rather than four pole auxiliary protection circuit breaker Caption A Device type ATSO10 for the automatic tran
278. V 8 Rated insulation voltage Ui V 800 Test voltage at industrial frequency for 1 minute V 3000 Rated short circuit making capacity lcm min switch disconnector only kA 2 8 max with circuit breaker on supply side kA 187 Rated short time withstand current for 1s lew kA 2 Reference Standard IEC 60947 3 Versions F Terminals FC Cu EF FC CuAl Mechanical life No operations 25000 No Hourly operations 120 Basic dimensions fixed 3 poles W mm 76 4 poles W mm 102 D mm 70 H mm 130 Weight fixed 3 4 poles kg 0 9 1 2 plug in 3 4 poles kg withdrawable 3 4 poles kg Switch disconnector coordination 380 415 V AC T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 400 B C N N S H L N S N S H L V N S H L V Icu kA 16 25 36 36 50 70 85 36 50 36 50 70 120 200 36 50 70 120 200 T1D 160 16 25 36 36 50 70 85 T3D 250 36 50 36 50 70 120 200 T4D 320 36 50 70 120 200 T5D 400 36 50 70 120 200 T5D 630 T6D 630 T6D 800 T6D 1000 T7D 1000 T7D 1250 T7D1600 eee Applications They can be used as general circuit breakers in sub switchboards as switching and isolation parts for lines busbars or groups of apparatus or as bus ties They can be part of general isolation devices of groups of machines or of complexes for motor switching and protection Isolation The main function carried out by this apparatus consists of isolation of the circuit they are inserted in Once the contacts are open they are at a distance which prevents an arc from striking in accordance with
279. X g B d 1095 S I4 L e gt 103 O Kal 5 Y S s K D 2 E 8 6 54 1SDC210L65F0001 Standard 290 287 II 160 206 219 Ronis 298 291 Caption eo eoo o 5 Drilling a hole in the sheet metal door to the compart ment with the flange for the RS VR HR EF ES terminals Rear segregation for rear terminals Flange fixing screws Tightening torque 1 5 Nm Drilling template for fixing onto support sheet Front terminal Rear segregation for front terminals Flange for compartment door Clamp for auxiliary contacts Insulating protection Spread terminals IV 230 276 289 Profalux Kirk Castell 306 NO NO 299 298 328 1SDC210015D0205 Fixed version Caption 4 Depth of the switchboard with circuit breaker face extending Depth of the switchboard with circuit breaker face flush with door 3 Terminal covers with degree of protection IP40 Overall dimensions Circuit breaker with RC221 222 residual current release Tmax T1 with RC222 for 200 mm module Front terminals F 155 5 Drilling templates of the compartment door For A 71 without flange For A 79 without flange 116 1 54 7812 116 1 gt lt 39 1 Y ka T As N t B l Y CA HH 1SDC210J92F0001 1SDC210J92F0001 Fixing on sheet 104 102 A 79 2 1SDC210J91F0001 Drilling templates for support sheet
280. ZZ c 500 V AC 2 poles in series A c 1 c Tc 25 986 50 70 100 25 36 50 70 100 20 35 50 70 500 V AC 3 poles in series B C 16 25 36 36 50 70 85 36 50 DLE ZZ JE ZZ T0100 c 750 V AC 3 poles in series B C c Tc 16 25 36 50 70 16 25 36 50 70 16 20 36 50 750 V AC 4 poles in series D c 50 E DAMM S IZ DAMEN ZZ ZZ To m n 1000 V AC 4 poles in series D c DELL E A0 A0 40 DI Circuit breakers with neutral at 100 Use 1000 V DC version circuit breakers Connection diagrams Diagram A Interruption with one pole for polarity L N o D 8 t B Load a Note Without neutral connected to earth the installation method must be such as to make the probability of a second earth fault nil Diagram B Interruption with two poles in series for one polarity and one pole for the other polarity oo Q E 8 i 2 5 Load 5 3 2 Note Without neutral connected to earth the installation method must be such as to make the probability of a second earth fault nil 4 61 1SDC210015D0205 4 62 Special applications Use of apparatus at 16 2 3 Hz Diagram C Interruption with three poles in series for one polarity with neutral earthed LL 4 n N o o o X Y 2 sid Load Diagram D Interruption with four poles in
281. a means for additional protection against direct contact in case of failure of the relevant protective means Their logic is based on the detection of the vectorial sum of the line currents through an internal or external toroid This sum is zero under service conditions or equal to the earth fault current IA in case of earth fault When the trip unit detects a residual current different from zero it opens the circuit breaker through an opening solenoid As we can see in the picture the protection conductor or the equipotential conductor have to be installed outside the eventual external toroid Distribution system IT TT TN L1 L2 L3 Circuit breaker The operating principle of the residual current release makes it suitable for TT IT distribution systems although with particular attention to the latter and TN S but not for the TN C systems In fact in these systems the neutral is also used as a protection conductor and therefore determination of the residual current would not be possible even if the neutral called PEN in these distribution systems passed through the toroid since the vectorial sum of the currents would always be equal to zero One of the main characteristics of a residual current protection is its minimum rated current lAn This represents the sensitivity of the release 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210F17F0001 According to their sensitivity to the fault current the RCDs are classified as
282. act operated by the circuit breaker rotary handle for circuit breakers with manual control only see note C Fig 24A Circuit breaker auxiliary contacts for circuit breakers with manual control only Fig 22A Circuit breaker auxiliary contacts for circuit breakers with motor control only Fig 31A First set of contacts for electrical signalling of circuit breaker in racked in test isolated racked out position Fig 41A Auxiliary circuits of PR331 P trip unit see note F Fig 42A Auxiliary circuits of PR332 P trip units see notes F and N Fig 483A Circuits of the measuring module PR330 V of the PR332 P trip units internally connected to the circuit breaker optional Fig 44A Circuits of the measuring module PR330 V of the PR332 P trip units externally con nected to the circuit breaker optional see note O Fig 45A Circuits of the PR332 P trip unit with communication module PR330 D M connected to PR330 V actuation unit see notes E F and N Fig 46A Circuits of the PR332 P trip unit PR330 V measuring module connected internally to the three pole circuit breaker with external neutral conductor optional Fig 61A SOR TEST UNIT Test monitoring unit see note R Fig 62A Circuits of the PRO21 K signalling module outside the circuit breaker Incompatibilities The circuits indicated in the following figures cannot be supplied simultaneously on the same circuit breaker 6A 7A 8A 21A 22A 41
283. aker open thanks to the BACK UP function Parameterisation of the PR222MP trip unit Man Elt by means of a dip switch located on the front the trip unit can be provided for manual parameterisation Man of the thresholds and times acting directly on the dip switches located on the front of the trip unit or with electronic parameterisation Elt by means of the PRO10T Reset Mode Auto Man this function AUTO allows the state of activation of the PR212 CI to be automatically reset following contactor trip for L function after a fixed time of 15s The AUTO reset is only possible when there is an auxiliary voltage Setting the working modes Normal the Normal mode foresees the use of a circuit breaker and a contactor this configuration makes intervention towards the contactor possible through the PR212 CI unit when the PR222MP considers this appropriate Heavy the heavy mode foresees circuit breaker opening for all overcurrent conditions and the contactor is assigned just the motor operation function BACK UP Function This protection is conceived to manage the possibility that an opening command sent to the contac tor might not have a positive outcome i e that the contactor does not intervene In this case after having waiting for the time defined using the dip switch k time min 80ms or max 160ms the PR222MP sends a trip signal to the circuit breaker By introducing a time delay between the command sent to the contact
284. al voltages and to process them in order to achieve a series of features in terms of protection and measurement PR330 V module when is ordered mounted on the circuit breaker does not require any external connection or voltage transformers since it is connected internally to the upper terminals of Tmax T7 selector in INT position through the internal voltage sockets When necessary the connection of voltage pick ups can be moved to any other point i e lower terminals by using the alternative connection located in the terminal box and switching the selector to the EXT position For the dielectric test of the circuit breaker the selector must be switched to the Insulating TEST position PR880 V is able to energize the PR332 P while line voltage input is above 85 V The use of Voltage Transformers is mandatory for rated voltages higher than 690 V Voltage transformers shall have burdens between 5 VA and 10 VA and accuracy class 0 5 or better Additional Protections with PR330 V Undervoltage UV protection Overvoltage OV protection Residual voltage RV protection Reversal of power RP protection Underfrequency UF protection Overfrequency OF protection All the above indicated protections can be excluded although it is possible to leave only the alarm active when required in this case the trip unit will indicate the AL ARM status With the circuit breaker closed these protections also operate when
285. ala d ns 5 m ET ES ER 4 d i e 9 o ec P T x S eT Lo x m e ou Q E hee g E P PE a T 3 a eene et 4 d SI l pay ei o a HATE ON IE i 0 t 4 F4 yo isu 9 E x Se gyiv4 LSU E G cM nee en t 2 12 ex FEE SI A Aar kt Lots e Sg ou 9 ET Er i 4 E Gi S lo amp x Ka o o D SIS u 9 e elm 1 i gt T e 5 m a 20 gt EET d a B 1 i U x x l R G 12 x CN E gt EN x lt Ex lt x x lt ls a SIE EE LLE eT DS elm 4 in a gt 5 zn i l x x I P 2 p E x Do 2 x lt Ex s x x lt Signalling contacts C 1000462501 ZOast ES 5 EIR gb e ales LL Ve EH rl gt 35 p SIS m om gt 19 v 89 Y Ke 55 o 5 e 9 Lesch 1S ve 8G A wn x Sex Sl x lt g x x SS lt z i E es E lal cmto Ole ose VE HB i S j LU 42 P E 5 8 o T zz als Kto m ale 86 S 8 D in El L esche o 96 m x x SPD exu x s EE be be x x x A 85 D 2 remps P 8 Lesch 8v o hs LAE S S 2 Les L E ov a x lt 8 8 D e 8 5 remp e Lesch ae g 8 E e g KS Mag a 9 m bai D m S ui x Oo gt 2 lt x amp lt x Ze lt
286. allation of a padlock in order to fix the position possibility of locking in the O O position as well It is also possible to interlock three circuit breakers side by side using the proper plate thereby making the following interlock combinations IOO OIOOO OOO It is incompatible with the front accessories solenoid operator rotary handle operating mechanism and with the residual current releases TS For T3 in the three pole or four pole fixed or plug in version the MIR mechanical interlock is available This rear interlock available in the horizontal MIR H and vertical MIR V version is compatible with all the front accessories and with the residual current release only MIR H The following interlocking combinations can be made IO OI OO T4 T5 T6 The mechanical interlock for T4 T5 and T6 allows installation of two circuit breakers on a single sup port and by means of special lever mechanisms makes them mechanically interdependent For Tmax T4 and T5 this is a rear interlock consisting of a vertical or horizontal frame group MIR HR or MIR VR and of a pair of metal plates for fixing the circuit breakers MIR P The frame group is made up of metal frame and of the lever mechanism interlock The metal plates are of different type according to the sizes of circuit breakers to be interlocked For Tmax T6 this is a rear interlock consisting of a vertical or horizontal support The following interlocking combinations can be made
287. alling of circuit breaker open due to YO YO1 YO2 and YU thermomagnetic trip unit intervention tripped position One changeover contact for electrical signalling of circuit breaker open or closed and a changeover contact for electrical signalling of circuit breaker open due to YO YO1 YO2 or YU the thermomagnetic trip unit intervention tripped position Two changeover contacts for electrical signalling of circuit breaker open or closed One changeover contact for electrical signalling of circuit breaker open due to overcurrent release trip T2 One contact for electrical signalling of circuit breaker open due to overcurrent release trip T4 T5 T6 First position of circuit breaker changeover contact for electrical signalling of racked in Second position of circuit breaker changeover contact for electrical signalling of racked in Third position of circuit breaker changeover contact for electrical signalling of racked in First position of circuit breaker changeover contact for electrical signalling of isolated Second position of circuit breaker changeover contact for electrical signalling of isolated Third position of circuit breaker changeover contact for electrical signalling of isolated Circuit of the current transformer on neutral conductor outside the circuit breaker for plug in and withdrawable version circuit breaker Auxiliary circuits of the PR223DS trip units connected to VM210 voltage measuring unit Auxiliary circuits o
288. als 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles T7 T7M W FP HR 062044 062048 Nota Fixed parts of T7 T7M circuit breaker with rear terminals are supplied as standard with terminals mounted horizontally To order the terminals mounted vertically the extra code 1SDA063571R1 must be specified Fixed parts for T4 250 T5 400 circuit breakers at 1000V AC FC Cu Front terminals for copper cables 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles T4 250 W FP 1000 V AC 063460 063461 T5 400 W FP 1000 V AC 063464 063465 see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210200F0004 1SDC210N70F0001 1SDC210N71F0001 Conversion of the version Conversion kit from fixed into moving part of plug in T2 T5 299 md Type 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles Kit P MP T2 051411 051412 Kit P MP T39 051413 051414 Kit P MP T4 054839 054840 Kit P MP T5 400 054843 054844 8 E Kit P MP T5 630 054847 054848 B or Note The plug in version must be composed as follows o Fr 8 Fixed circuit breaker b Conversion kit from fixed into moving part of plug in C Fixed part of plug in For the circuit breaker in plug in version In max 144 A For the circuit breaker in plug in version In max 225 A 9 For the circuit breaker in plug in version In max 570 A Conversion kit from fixed into moving part of withdrawable T4 T7 Type 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles Kit W MP T4 054841 054842 Kit W MP T5 400 054845 0
289. arting SD Switch disconnector of the power supply of the RC221 or RC222 type residual current release SO Pushbutton or contact for opening the circuit breaker SO1 SO2 Pushbuttons or contacts for the circuit breaker opening see Resetting instructions for circuit breaker tripped by trip units SOS3 Pushbutton for stopping the motor SQ Contact for electrical signalling of circuit breaker open SY Contact for electrical signalling of circuit breaker open due to YO YO1 YO2 or YU thermomagnetic trip unit intervention tripped position TI Toroidal current transformer TI L1 Current transformer placed on phase L1 TI L2 Current transformer placed on phase L2 TVL3 Current transformer placed on phase L3 TI N Current transformer placed on the neutral WI Serial interface with the control system EIA RS485 interface See note D W2 Interface to upstream circuit breaker for zone selectivity interlocking for PR223EF trip unit only W3 Interface to downstream circuit breaker for zone selectivity interlocking for PR223EF trip unit only X1 X2 X5 X9 Connectors for the circuit breaker auxiliary circuits in the case of circuit breakers in plug in version removal of the connectors takes place simultaneously with that of the circuit breaker See note E X11 Back up terminal box X3 X4 Connectors for the circuits of the electronic trip unit in the case of circuit breakers in the plug in version removal of the conn
290. as the dialogue unit integrated with Modbus RTU protocol The Modbus RTU protocol has been known and used worldwide for many years and is now a mar ket standard thanks to its simplicity of installation configuration and to its integration in the various different supervision control and automation systems as well as good level performances The PR222DS PD trip units allow the Tmax T4 T5 and T6 circuit breakers to be integrated in a com munication network based on the Modbus RTU protocol Modbus RTU provides a Master Slave System architecture where a Master PLC PC cyclically interrogates several Slaves field devices The devices use the EIA RS485 standard as the physical means for data transmission at a maximum transmission speed of 19 2 kbps Again for this trip unit the power supply needed for correct operation of the protection functions is supplied directly by the current transformers of the trip unit and tripping is always guaranteed even under conditions of single phase load down Nevertheless communication is only possible with an auxiliary power supply of 24 V DC PR222DS PD Electrical characteristics Auxiliary power supply galvanically insulated 24 V DC 20 Maximum ripple 5 Inrush current 24 V 1 A for 30 ms Rated current 24 V 100 mA Rated power 24 V 2 5W The PR222DS PD release with integrated communication and control functions allows a wide range of information to be acquired and trans
291. asaenascessactassessteesccancseasetessnsastenascerisevsasess Accessories for electronic trip units Test and configuration accessor ies etti ner enean ti rnt inrita Automatic transfer switch ATS010 s aiia ccecuict iron iter cue tit ipact obediens 3 47 Installation accessories and spare parts esee enne eene etnn tnnt tnn niunt 3 50 Compatibility of internal accessories ennt tne att toss debe Epi q esi 3 51 Communication devices and systems ctc guest iot asiasia 3 52 3 1 1SDC210015D0205 Accessories Versions and types Starting from the fixed version with front terminals the Tmax circuit breakers can be converted into the various versions plug in for T2 T3 T4 and T5 withdrawable for T4 T5 T6 and T7 using the conversion kits This makes management of the product its versions and stocks as a whole very flexible In any case it is always possible to request the circuit breaker in the desired version completely preset in the factory by ordering on the same line the fixed circuit breaker and the conversion kit to which must be added the fixed part T7 is available in two different versions the lever operating mechanism version similar to the other Sizes in the Tmax family and the new motorizable version Fixed The Tmax FIXED three pole or four pole version circuit breakers foresee Gircuit breakers characterised by just two depths up to
292. ases pre alarm for overload L1 gt 90 x first temperature threshold exceeded 70 C contact wear beyond 80 phase rotation reversed with optional PR330 V Example of events indicated by the ALARM LED timing of function L timing of function S timing of function G second temperature threshold exceeded 85 C contact wear 100 timing of Reverse Power flow protection with optional PR330 V Data logger By default PR332 P is provided with the Data Logger function that automatically records in a wide memory buffer the instantaneous values of all the currents and voltages Data can be easily down loaded from the unit by means of SD Pocket or SD TestBus2 applications and can be transferred to any personal computer for elaboration The function freezes the recording whenever a trip occurs or in case of other events so that a detailed analysis of faults can be easily performed SD Pocket and SD TestBus2 allow also reading and downloading of all the others trip information e Number of analog channels 8 e Maximum sampling rate 4800 Hz e Maximum sampling time 27 s sampling rate 600 Hz e 64 events tracking 1SDC210015D0205 Trip information and opening data In case a trip occurs PR332 P store all the needed information Protection tripped Opening data current Time stamp guaranteed with auxiliary supply or self supply with power failure no longer t
293. ases of the normal power supply line for networks with rated voltage up to 500 V AC Networks with a higher voltage require the insertion of voltage transformers TV setting a rated voltage for the device that matches their secondary voltage typically 100 V Two change over contacts for each circuit breaker connect directly to the motor operator The circuit breaker connection is completed by wiring the status contacts Open Closed Relay tripped Racked in for draw out plug in circuit breakers That is why on every circuit breaker connected to the ATSO10 unit the following are included in ad dition to the mechanical interlock accessories motor operator from 24 V to 110 V DC or up to 250 V AC key lock only against manual operation for motor operator open closed contact and contact for tripped racked in contact in the case of withdrawable The ATSO10 device is designed to ensure extremely high reliability for the system it controls It contains various safety systems intrinsically related to software and hardware operation For software safety a special logic prevents unwarranted operations while a constantly opera tive watchdog system points out any microprocessor malfunctions via a LED on the front of the device Hardware safety allows integration of an electrical interlock via power relay so that there is no need to use an external electrical interlock system The manual selector on the front of the device can also control the
294. bled 1 relay tripped contact a a a 3 22 only with PR222DS PD and PR223DS 1SDC210C60F0001 e Testing extension for auxiliary contacts X Available for Tmax T4 T5 and T6 circuit breakers this allows the auxiliary contacts to be connected to the relative power supply circuit with the circuit breaker in the removed position With the circuit breaker in a safe position i e isolated in relation to the power circuits it is possible to carry out blank function tests of the circuit breaker 1SDC210C65F0001 1SDC210015D0205 T7 1SDC210C68F0001 1SDC210D20F0001 1SDC210C66F0001 Early auxiliary contacts AUE Normally open contacts advanced in relation to closing 2 contacts for all the sizes except for T7 where there are 3 They allow the undervoltage release to be supplied in advance in relation to closing of the main contacts in compliance with the IEC 60204 1 and VDE 0113 Standards They are mounted inside the direct and transmitted rotary handle operating mechanism whereas on T7 with lever operating mechanism they are mounted directly on the circuit breaker The early contacts are only supplied in the cabled version with 1 m long cables complete with socket plug with 6 poles for T1 T2 and T3 or with socket plug connectors with 1 m cables for T4 T5 and T6 It is neces sary to bear in mind that the connectors for T4 T5 an
295. breaking capacity Ics AC 50 60 Hz 220 230 V lcu 100 100 75 100 100 100 100 AC 50 60 Hz 380 415 V lcu 100 100 75 100 100 100 100 AC 50 60 Hz 440 V lcu 100 100 75 100 100 100 100 AC 50 60 Hz 500 V lcu 100 100969 7596 10096 10096 7596 10096 AC 50 60 Hz 690 V lcu 100 100969 7596 10096 75 75 75 AC 50 60 Hz 1000 V lcu 50 25 Rated short circuit making capacity Ilem AC 50 60 Hz 220 230 V kA 440 440 440 187 220 440 440 AC 50 60 Hz 380 415 V kA 264 264 220 105 154 264 330 AC 50 60 Hz 440 V kA 220 220 176 105 148 220 286 AC 50 60 Hz 500 V kA 187 187 143 84 105 187 220 AC 50 60 Hz 690 V kA 154 154 63 63 88 2 105 132 AC 50 60 Hz 1000 V kA 32 32 5 Utilisation category IEC 60947 2 A B 400A B 630A 800A B A 630A A 1000A Isolation behaviour L a L E Reference Standard IEC 60947 2 IEC 60947 2 IEC 60947 2 IEC 60947 2 Trip unit electronic PR223EF E B a PR332 P Ge m Versions F P W F P Wo F W F W Terminals fixed F FC Cu FC GOAL F FC Cu FC CuAI F FC CuAl F EF ES FC CuAI EF ES R MC EF ES R EF ES R RC HR VR plug in EF ES HR VR FC EF ES HR VR FC 8 H Cu FC CuAI Cu FC CuAl withdrawable EF ES HR VR FC EF ES HR VR FC EF HR VR EF HR VR ES RS Cu FC CuAI Cu FC CuAI Mechanical life No operations 20000 20000 20000 10000 No Hourly operations 240 120 120 60 Electrical life 415 V AC No operations 8000 250A 7000 6304 7000 630A 2000 S H L version
296. can be installed on fixed plug in or withdrawable Tmax T4 T5 and T6 circuit breakers In the case of withdrawable circuit breakers installed in a switchboard it allows the IP40 degree of protec tion to be maintained for the whole isolation run of the circuit breaker It is always fitted with a padlock in the open position 6 mm stem up to three padlocks not supplied which prevents closing of the circuit breaker and of the compartment door and with compartment door lock On request it can be fitted with a key lock in the open position It is available in the following versions for fixed or plug in circuit breaker for withdrawable circuit breaker The front for lever operating mechanism is always an alternative to the motor operator and to the rotary handle and to the display FDU The same flange for the compartment door already supplied with the circuit breaker or the one sup plied with the conversion kit for withdrawable version can be used Padlock for operating lever PLL This is applied to the T1 T2 T3 circuit breaker cover to prevent the lever closing or opening op eration It allows installation up to a maximum of three padlocks 7 mm stem not supplied It is available in the following versions plug in locking device only of the closing operation locking plate on the closing and opening operation according to the assembly position The lock on the opening operation does not prevent release of th
297. cations Use of direct current apparatus Example of setting the trip thresholds in DC Diagram A Setting T1 160 T2 160 T3 250 T4 250 ZP 1 0 7 1xIn L i0xIn 1 20 7z1xln L 10xIn 120 7z1xln L i0xIn 1 0 7 1xin 1 10xin 1 6 1 1221 6 20 8 2 1 422 26 2 5 1 75 2 5 32 5 3 2 2 24 3 2 41 6 4 2 844 52 5 3 545 65 6 3 4 41 6 3 81 9 8 5 6 8 104 10 7210 130 12 5 8 75 12 5 162 5 16 11 2216 650 11 2216 650 20 14 20 650 14 20 650 14 20 416 25 17 5225 650 17 5225 650 32 22 4 32 650 22 4 32 650 22 4 32 416 40 28 40 650 28 40 650 50 35 50 650 35 50 650 35 50 650 63 44 163 819 44 1 63 819 44 1 63 819 80 56 80 1040 56 80 1040 56 80 1040 56 80 5200 1040 100 70 100 1300 70 100 1300 70 100 1300 70 100 650 1300 125 87 5125 1625 87 5 125 1625 87 5 125 1625 87 524125 812 5 1625 160 112 160 2080 112 160 2080 1122160 2080 1122160 1040 2080 200 140 200 260 140 200 4 1300 2600 250 1752250 325 1752 250 1625 3250 dee T4 320 T5 400 T5 630 T6 630 T6 800 TP 20 721xln l 5 10xin 1 0 7 1xln l 5 10xin l 0 7 1xin l 5 10xin 1 0 7 1xln 1 5 10xin 1l 0 7 1xin 1 5 10xin 20 14 20 416 25 32 22 4 32 416 40 50 35 50 650 63 80 56 80 5200 1040 100 70 100 650 1300 125 87 524125 812 5 1625 160 1122160 10402080 200 140 200 1300 2600 250 175 250 1625 3250 320 224 320 1760 3520 400 280 400 2200 4400 500 350 500 2750 5500 630 441 630 3
298. ccordance with the European EN 45011 Standard by the Italian certification organisation ACAE Association for Certification of Electrical Apparatus member of the European organization LOVAG Low Voltage Agreement Group and by the Swedish certification organization SEMKO The Test Room at ABB SACE is accredited by SINAL certificate No 062 The Tmax series also has a range which has undergone certification according to the severe American UL 489 and CSA C22 2 Standards Furthermore the Tmax series is certified by the Russian GOST Russia Certificate of Conformity certification organisation The pieces of apparatus comply with the prescriptions for on board shipping installations and are approved by the major Naval Registers Lloyd s Register of Shipping Germanischer Lloyd Bureau Veritas Rina Det Norske Veritas Russian Maritime Register of Shipping and ABS please ask ABB SACE for confirmation about the versions available ABB SACE s Quality System complies with the international ISO 9001 2000 Standard model for quality assurance in design development construction installation and service assistance and with the equivalent European EN ISO 9001 and Italian UNI EN ISO 9001 Standaras The third certifying Organisation is RINA QUACER ABB SACE received the first certification in 1990 with three year validity and this has now reached its fifth confirmation The new Tmax series has a hologram on the front obtained using special anti imitation te
299. chanism for T1 T2 and T3 RHL This allows the mechanical closing operation of the circuit breaker to be locked The following versions are available lock with different key for each circuit breaker lock with the same key for groups of circuit breakers The circuit breaker in the open position ensures isolation of the circuit in accordance with the IEC 60947 2 Standard It is also available in the version which allows the lock both in the open and closed position The lock in the closed position does not prevent release of the mechanism following a fault or remote control Key lock for T4 T5 T6 and T7 KLF D and KLF S This allows mechanical operation of the circuit breaker to be locked This lock can be used with the direct or transmitted rotary handle operating mechanism mounted on the base for circuit breaker or with the front for lever operating mechanism The lock of the circuit breaker in the open position ensures isolation of the circuit in accordance with the IEC 60947 2 Standard For T4 T5 T6 and T7 in the lever operating mechanism version key locks in the open position are available either with different keys KLF D or with the same keys KLF S in this case up to four different key numbering codes are available n 2005 2006 2007 2008 Lock in the racked out position for fixed part T4 T5 and T6 For T4 T5 and T6 withdrawable circuit breakers key or padlocks locks are available to be applied onto the rail of t
300. chniques a guarantee of the quality and genuineness of the circuit breaker as an ABB SACE product Attention to protection of the environment is another priority commitment for ABB SACE and as confirmation of this the environmental management system has been certified by RINA ABB SACE the first industry in the electromechanical sector in Italy to obtain this recognition thanks to a revision of the production process with an eye to ecology has been able to reduce the consumption of raw materials and waste from processing by 2096 ABB SACE s commitment to safeguarding the environ ment is also shown in a concrete way by Life Cycle Assessments LCA of the products carried out directly by ABB SACE s Research and Development in collaboration with the ABB Research Centre Selection of materials processes and packing materials is made optimising the true environmental impact of the product also foreseeing the possibility of its being recycled Furthermore in 1997 ABB SACE developed its Environmental Management system and got it certified in conformity with the international ISO14001 Standard integrating it in 1999 with the Management System for Health and Safety in the workplace according to OHSAS 18001 Swedish National Test ing and Research Institute 1 43 1SDC210015D0205 The ranges Index Tmax circuit breakers for power distribution Electrical characteristics tee retinent tiennent pner rtr dana sate 2 4
301. circuit breaker Front F Caption O Front terminal for flat connec tion Busbars Flange for the compartment door 134 147 5 118 5 Flange fixing screws Drilling template for fixing onto support sheet 268 x lt x 237 Tightening torque 18 Nm Ow Key lock optional Padlock optional Tightening torque 2 5 Nm l e Ien WO OS Compartment door with flange Ki to Y to sheet drilling 280 Compartment door without flange sheet drilling 00000 00 ew 1SDC210L46F0001 02 Terminal for auxiliary contacts 1SDC210L63F0001 With flange Without flange IA 125 164 170 Standard Ronis Profalux Kirk Castell Be 208 216 224 no no II IV 70 140 Flange for the Drilling templates for Drilling templates of the compartment door support sheet compartment door supplied as standard Q4 n 7 HOLES
302. circuit breaker by means of SCR is 50 ms Thanks to the anti surge system the closure of the circuit breaker is not possible before the open ing operation has entirely been performed Thus a delay of at least 30 ms between the opening and closing command is required 3 17 1SDC210015D0205 Accessories Service releases Undervoltage release UVR Opens the circuit breaker due to lack of release power supply voltage or to drops to values under 0 7 x Un with a trip range from 0 7 to 0 35 x Un After tripping the circuit breaker can be closed again starting from a voltage higher than 0 85 x Un With the undervoltage release de energised it is not possible to close the circuit breaker or the main contacts Ss UVR Electrical characteristics UVR T1 T6 Power consumption during permanent operation Tmax T1 T2 T3 Tmax T4 T5 T6 Version AC VA DC W AC VA DC W 24 V AC DC T1 T2 T3 24 30 V AC DC 1 5 1 5 6 3 30 V AC DC 48 V AC DC 1 1 6 3 60 V AC DC 1 1 6 3 uA 110 120 V AC DC 120 127 V AC DC i 110 127 V AC 110 125 V DC 2 2 6 3 8 220 240 V AC DC 9 220 240 V AC 220 250 V DC 2 5 2 5 6 3 240 250 V AC DC T4 T5 T6 380 400 V AC 380 440 V AC 3 6 415 440 V AC 480 525 V AC 4 6 Opening times ms 15 15 x25 x25 1SDC210D18F0001 EET xm Es ANN JT S AS 1SDC210C58F0001 1SDC210C55
303. ck made between two T3S 250 1SDA R1 POS1 T3S 250 TMD 200 4p FF 051305 MIR H rear mechanical interlock for T3 063324 POS2 T3S 250 TMD 160 4p FF 051304 Extra code for circuit breaker fixed part mounted on the interlock 050093 6 T4 T5 mechanical interlock The rear interlock for T4 and T5 consisting of the MIR HB or MIR VB frame unit and the MIR P plates allows use of all the front accessories compatible with the circuit breakers used To be able to receive the circuit breakers mounted directly on the interlock plate code 1SDA050093R1 must be specified regarding the second circuit breaker or fixed part which is to be interlocked Horizontal mechanical interlock made between T4H 320 and T5L 630 1SDA R1 POS1 T4H 320 PR221DS LS I 320 4p F F 054137 MIR HB horizontal interlock frame unit 054946 MIR P plates for type C interlock 054950 POS2 TBL 630 PR221DS LS I 630 4p F F 054424 Code for circuit breakers mounted on the plate 050093 7 PR222DS PD T4 T5 The T4 and T5 circuit breakers can be fitted with the PR222DS PD electronic trip unit with commu nication and integrated control functions using the special extracodes indicated in the catalogue The circuit breakers fitted with the PR222DS PD trip unit can only have the AUX E electronic version of auxiliary contacts mounted to communicate the state of the circuit breaker to the PR222DS PD and the MOE E dedicated stored energy operating mechanism to remotely c
304. complete with atrip coil to be housed in the area of the third pole complete with an auxiliary contact signalling residual current release trip dedicated flange A changeover contact for signalling residual current protection trip is always supplied for Tmax circuit breakers combined with the RC221 and RC222 residual current releases Two changeover contacts for signalling pre alarm and alarm are also available with the RC222 release The opening solenoid for the RC221 RC222 and RC223 residual current releases is available as a spare part A circuit breaker cannot have the residual current release and the rotary handle or the motor operator mounted at the same time except for MOS in the side by side version for T1 and T2 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210C90F0001 1SDC210C91F0001 T1 T2 T3 1SDC210C92F0001 1SDC210C93F0001 RC221 and RC222 residual current releases for T1 T2 and T3 The RC221 and RC222 residual current releases for T1 T2 and T3 circuit breakers are available both with three pole and four pole circuit breakers in the fixed version The configuration foresees insertion of the circuit breaker on the structure of the corresponding re sidual current release making access to the adjustments on the left hand side of the circuit breaker available whilst the toroid is in the underneath position A distinguishing characteristic is provided by the type of cable connection which is made direct
305. ction see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 27 1SDC210015D0205 E3tEOUDI 1SDC210244F0004 7 28 Ordering codes Circuit breakers for use up to 1150 V AC and 1000 V DC T4 250 Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals for copper cables FC Cu Electronic trip unit Electronic trip unit PR221DS LS 100 PR221DS 100 PR222DS P LSI 100 PR222DS P LSIG 100 PR221DS LS 250 PR221DS 250 PR222DS P LSI 250 PR222DS P LSIG 250 PR222MP 100 PR222MP 160 PR222MP 200 Icu 1000 V AC Icu 1150 V AC L V 12kA 20 kA EI eg a 054505 054513 054506 054514 054507 054515 054508 054516 054509 054517 054510 054518 054511 054519 054512 054520 063434 063435 063436 R222DS P LSIG PR221DS LS 100 PR221DS 100 PR222DS P LSI 100 PR222DS P LSIG 100 PR221DS LS 250 PR221DS 250 PR222DS P LSI 250 P 250 Icu 1000 V AC Icu 1150 V AC L V 12 kA 20 kA nA HTC PN 063418 063426 063419 063427 063420 063428 063421 063429 063422 063430 063423 063431 063424 063432 063425 063433 Thermomagnetic trip unit TMD and TMA 32 320 50 500 400 800 500 1000 1250 1600 2000 Icu 1000 V AC Icu 1150 V AC V 20 kA 12 kA 063410 063411 063412 063413 063414 063415 063416
306. ctronic trip unit Trip coil of the RC221 RC222 or RC223 type residual current release Shunt opening release of the solenoid operator Undervoltage release see note B Description of figures Fig 1 cGooo Fig 2 Fig 3 Fig 4 1 exu Ko 10 11 12 21 JC PI caca Fig 22 Fig 23 Fig 24 Fig 25 Fig 26 Fig 27 Fig 28 ig 29 ig 31 ig 32 Fig 39 Fig 40 Fig 41 Fig 42 Fig 43 Fig 44 Fig Fig 30 Fig Fig Opening release Permanent opening release Instantaneous undervoltage release See note B and F Undervoltage release with electronic time delay device outside the circuit breaker see note B Instantaneous undervoltage release in version for machine tools with one contact in series see note B C and F Instantaneous undervoltage release in version for machine tools with two contacts in series See note B C and F One changeover contact for electrical signalling of circuit breaker open due to RC221 RC222 or RC2293 type residual current release trip RC222 or RC223 type residual current release circuits Two electrical signalling contacts for RC222 or RC223 type residual current release pre alarm and alarm Solenoid operator Stored energy motor operator Local remote auxiliary contact for stored energy motor operating mechanism Three changeover contacts for electrical signalling of circuit breaker open or closed and one changeover contact for electrical sign
307. cuit with delayed trip Dip switch for neutral setting only for T4 T5 and T6 Protection L Against overload Socket for TT1 test unit Protection Against short circuit with instantaneous trip 1SDC210B05F0001 PR221DS Protection functions and parameterisations Protection functions Trip threshold Trip curves Excludability Relation t f I Against overload with long l 20 40 1xln step OO04xln at6xl inverse time delay trip and Trip between 1 1 1 30 x I T4 T5 T6 t 3 6 only for T2 12s only for T4 T5 T6 trip characteristic according Tib between 7 08 1 30 x1 T2 Tolerance 10 up to 6 x In T4 T5 T6 to an inverse time curve 10 up to 2 x In T2 t KP EECH 20 above 6x In T4 T5 T6 IEC 60947 2 Standard 20 above 2 x In T2 Against short circuit with l 1 1 5 2 2 5 3 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 at 8 x In inverse short time delay 7 7 5 8 8 5 9 10 x In t 0 1 0 25s trip anid tip Gere EDO Tolerance 10 T4 T5 T6 Tolerance 10 up to 6 x In T4 T5 T6 with inverse time Pt K 10 up to 2 x In T2 20 above 6x In T4 T5 T6 t selectable as an alternative 20 above 2 x In T2 20 T2 to protection function Against short circuit with I 1 1 5 2 2 5 3 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 instantaneous trip selectable 7 7 5 8 8 5 9 10 x In D as an alternative to Tolerance 10 T4 T5 T6 instantaneous t k protection function S 20 T2 D These tolerances hold in the
308. cuit inside it allows power supply to the unit for about 3 hours continuously to carry out just the data reading and configuration operations The life of the battery decreases if the SACE PRO30 B is also used to carry out the Trip test and the Auto test Trip unit adapter In order to allow all the connections between the electronic trip unit type PR33x and the terminal board on the circuit breaker the circuit breaker it self must be fitted with a trip unit adapter Two different trip unit adapters are available one is suitable with T7 level operating mechanism the other with T7 motorizable Rating plug Available on the electronic trip units which can be mounted on T7 it must be applied on the front of the trip unit itself and provides information about the current sensor settings It is therefore no longer necessary to change the circuit breaker current sensors but is sufficient just to replace the rating plug to obtain modification of the rated current of the circuit breaker Type of Rated In A circuit breaker current lu 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600 T7 800 1000 nu E 1250 B n R a R 1600 B a E B El R EP010 FBP It is the E plug interface which can connect T4 T5 and T6 equipped with the PR222DS PD electronic trip unit to the field bus plug system allowing user to choose among several field bus system ASI Device Net Profibus This must be connected to the PR222DS PD trip unit by means of the s
309. cy with the circuit breaker closed The release settings and nameplate data remain accessible to the user The transmitted rotary handle operating mechanisms can be ordered by building up the following three devices rotary handle on the compartment door transmission rod 500 mm base for circuit breaker or alternatively by using the code of the ready configured version Type of RH operating mechanism T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 TT E E RHD Direct D E E E E B E E E E RHD_EM Emergency direct B E LI E E L E E RHE Transmitted with adjustable distance E L E L m L R L R L RHE EM Emergency transmitted with adjustable distance m B a Oo D B B RHE B Base for circuit breaker E D B D a B B B RHE S Rod for transmitted adjustable hadle E L E m mH RHE H Handle for transmitted RH with adjustable distance El L E B L E L RHE H EM Emergency handle for transmitted RH with adjustable distance B a B m B L B E B L 3 30 1SDC210C79F0001 T4 T6 1SDC210015D0205 T1 T3 1SDC210C82F0001 1SDC210C81F0001 1SDC210C83F0001 1SDC210C80F0001 IP54 protection for rotary handle Allows IP54 degree of protection to be obtained It is available for the transmitted rotary handle operating mechanism on the compartment door RHE for all the Tmax circuit breakers Front for lever operating mechanism FLD This
310. d 0 7 1 x In and fixed magnetic threshold 10 x In TMG thermomagnetic trip unit with adjustable thermal threshold I 0 7 1 x In and fixed magnetic threshold 3 x In 2 8 1SDC210015D0205 Furthermore for Tmax T2 T3 and T5 the TMG thermomagnetic trip units with low magnetic trip threshold are available For T2 and T3 the trip unit has adjustable thermal threshold l 0 7 1 x In and fixed magnetic threshold 1 3 x In whereas for T5 the trip unit has adjustable thermal thresh old l 0 7 1 x In and adjustable magnetic threshold 2 5 5 x In The thermomagnetic trip units can be used to protect long cables and for generator protection both in direct current and in alternating current TMD T1 and T3 1 20 7 1 x In T1 160 T3 250 1 10 x In TMD T2 1 20 7 1 x In Le 10 x In TMG T2 1 20 7 1 x In I 3xIn TMG T3 1 20 7 1 x In I 23xIn Notes only T1B In A 160 200 250 32 40 50 e 80 100 125 125 4160 200 250 Neutral A 10096 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 Neutral A 5096 i E s 80 100 125 160 mn M nn NH N NH BH NH HN m n_e NH NM NM NM HN LIA 6809 6309 6309 630 6309 630 630 800 1000 1250 1250 1600 2000 2500 Neutral A 10096 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 800 1000 1250 1250 1600 2000 2500 Neutral A 50 300 100 1250 1600 n A 16 2 25 82 4 5 6
311. d F BE 4 70 LOO04ZEI0LZO0SL e Low terminal covers with de gree of protection IP40 Caption 3 4 POLES 6 21 1SDC210015D0205 Fixed circuit breaker Caption CO Front terminals for flat connec tion Busbars Flange for the compartment door Flange fixing screws Drilling template for fixing onto support sheet Tightening torque 18 Nm Key lock optional Padlock optional Tightening torque 2 5 Nm Sheet drilling for compartment door with flange Sheet drilling for compartment door for front 206 x 204 Terminal for auxiliary contacts SIS ei OOOO 99 e Reduce flange for the compart ment door optional Sheet drilling for compartment door with reduced flange Sheet drilling for compartment door for front 190 x 105 Flange for the compartment door supplied as standard 268 E L 3 3 Kai 3 x e Y G 203 j 44 Y Lee 5 oX i Uer 8 e g H o S al 2 je e 8 Y 2 6 22 Overall dimensions Tmax T7 Front F
312. d T6 once inserted in the special slot on the left hand side of the circuit breaker extend in relation to the outline of the circuit breaker itself The early auxiliary contacts for T7 are always fitted with 3 terminals to be mounted in the terminal board to carry out the cabling 1SDC210C67F0001 Auxiliary position contacts AUP With Tmax circuit breakers auxiliary position contacts which provide electrical signalling of the circuit breaker position in relation to the fixed part are available The following auxiliary position contacts are available T2 T3 contacts signalling circuit breaker racked in T4 T5 T6 circuit breaker racked in signalling contacts for plug in and withdrawable versions circuit breaker racked out signalling contacts only for withdrawable version circuit breaker racked in signalling contacts for plug in and withdrawable versions 24 V DC circuit breaker racked out signalling contacts only for withdrawable version 24 V DC T7 contacts for signalling circuit breaker racked in contacts for signalling circuit breaker in isolated test contacts for signalling circuit breaker racked out 1SDC210C69F0001 1SDC210C70F0001 3 23 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210D22F0001 1SDC210N78F0001 3 24 Accessories Electrical signals A maximum of three contacts can be installed on the fixed part of T2 T3 T4 and T5 whereas
313. d changeover contact Always provided with the overlaid solenoid operator 3 29 1SDC210015D0205 T4 T6 1SDC210C77F0001 1SDC210C78F0001 Accessories Operating mechanism and locks Rotary handle operating mechanism RHD RHE Thanks to its ergonomic grip the rotary handle facilitates the circuit breaker closing and opening operations It is always fitted with a padlock lock in the open position which prevents circuit breaker closing The opening in the padlock lock can take up to 3 padlocks 7 mm stem not supplied It is always fitted with a compartment door lock and on request it can be supplied with a key lock in the open position Application of the rotary handle operating mechanism is an alternative to the motor operator and to the front interlocking plate MIF for T1 T2 and T3 or to the motor operator and to the front for lever operating mechanism for T4 T5 and T6 The rotary handle operating mechanism is available in either the direct version or in the transmitted version on the compartment door and the rotary handle operating mechanism in the emergency version complete with red on yellow background handle suitable for controlling machine tools is available in both the versions The rotary handle operating mechanism is available on T7 with lever operating mechanism and only for the direct version is characterised by an articulated grip which allows the switchgear door to be opened in case of an emergen
314. d connector housed on the bottom of the box which allows the device to be connected to the test connector on the front of PR331 P trip units The PR331 P electronic trip unit can be tested by using the SACE PRO10 T test and configuration unit by connecting it to the TEST connector Power supply The unit does not require an external power supply either for protection functions or for alarm signal ling functions It is self supplied by means of the current sensors installed on the circuit breaker For operation it is required for the three phases to be passed through by a current of 70 A An ex ternal power supply can be connected in order to activate additional features and in particular for connection to external devices HMIO30 and PRO21 K PR331 P Electrical characteristics Auxiliary power supply galvanically insulated 24 V DC 2096 Maximum ripple 596 Inrush current 24 V 3 Afor 5 ms Rated power Q 24 V 1W Communication By means of the BTO30 wireless communication unit PR331 P can be connected to a PDA or to a personal computer extending the range of information available for the user In fact by means of ABB SACE s SD Pocket communication software it is possible to read the values of the currents flowing through the circuit breaker the value of the last 20 interrupted currents and the protection settings PR331 P can also be connected to the optional external PRO21 K signalling unit for the remote signalling of p
315. d or plug in 055094 Flange for compartment door for T4 T5 withdrawable 055095 Flange for compartment door for RC222 for T4 T5 055096 Flange for the T6 compartment door 060432 Flange for the withdrawable T6 compartment door 060433 Flange for the fixed T6 compartment door with MOE MOE E RHD and FLD 060434 Flange for compartment door for T7 T7M fixed 063160 Flange for compartment door for T7 T7M withdrawable 063161 Flange for compartment door for T7 fixed with rotary handle 063162 Solenoid operator for residual current device Type 1SDA R1 RC221 RC222 for T1 051506 RC221 RC222 for T2 051507 RC221 RC222 for T3 051508 RC223 for T3 064548 RC222 RC223 for T4 T5 055097 Connecting terminals for electrical accessories Type 1SDA R1 T7 T7M Single terminal 062170 Note To have a complete overview of the spare parts available for the Tmax family of circuit breakers please consult the Spare Parts Catalogue SD View 2000 software Type SD View 2000 software 1SDA R1 060549 SD View 2000 software 5000 tags license 060550 SD View 2000 software 10000 tags license 060551 SD View 2000 software 20000 tags license 064106 see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210015D0205
316. d spread terminals ES Allow connection of busbars or cables terminated with cable terminal iA B Type Version Pieces Busbars mm Cable terminal mm Tightening Nm Terminal covers Phase separators WwW P W A B high low fixed part T2 F P 1 30 4 10 5 30 10 5 6 18 S TS F P 1 30 4 10 5 30 10 5 8 18 S T4 E 1 30 6 10 5 30 10 5 18 18 S T5 F P Wwe 1 40 10 11 11 43 28 18 S T6 F 1 80 5 3x13 3x45 13 9 30 T7 F 2 50 10 3x13 4x45 13 18 40 S EE UE 80 DEO EE L I3 SE EE en class 4 8 screws not supplied H for T5 630 only e A 4 1SDC210C34F0001 1SDC210C33F0001 Front terminals for copper cables FC Cu Allow connection of bare copper cables directly to the circuit breaker 1SDC210C35F0001 Type Assembly Version Pieces Cable mm Flexible busbars Tightening Nm mm Terminal covers Phase rigid flexible Wx S x NO A B high low fixedpart _ Separators T1 T1 1p standard F 1 2 5 4 0 2 5 5 50 9x0 8x6 7 12 R R R standard F 2 2 5 35 7 12 R R R T2 standard F P 1 14 95 1 70 13x0 5x10 7 14 R R R R standard F P 2 1 50 7 14 R R R R T3 standard F P 1 6 185 6 150 15 5x0 8x10 10 18 R R R R standard F P 2 6 70 B 10 18 R R R R T4 standard F P W 1 25 185 25 4120 15 5x0 8x10 10 18 R R S H standard F P W 2 2 5 95 10 18 R R S R T5 standard F P W 1 16 300 16 240 2
317. dard switchboards The bracket for fixing on DIN rail is also available for Tmax circuit breakers combined with RC221 and RC222 residual current releases or with the solenoid operator of the side by side type Flange for compartment door This is always supplied with the Tmax circuit breakers All the flanges in the Tmax series are of new design and do not require the use of screws for installation fixing is greatly simplified by just a simple coupling operation When a rotary handle operating mechanism or residual current releases is used a dedicated flange is supplied to be used instead of the one supplied with the circuit breaker For T4 T5 T6 and T7 withdrawable circuit breakers the flange supplied with the fixed part must be used instead of the one supplied with the fixed circuit breaker 1SDC210D10F0001 Spare parts A wide range of spare parts is available for the Tmax family of circuit breakers For further details about the complete range of spare parts available please ask for the Spare Parts Catalogue from the Service Division of ABB SACE 1SDC210015D0205 Accessories Compatibility of internal accessories Compatibility An overview of the assembly compatibility of internal accessories with the Tmax Series circuit break ers can be found in this section Possible combination among the internal accessories The drawing represents the internal slot of the circuit breakers A C and F are housed in the slots on t
318. door with acces sory 4 D Dimension with AUE connector early making contact Caption d Rotary handle operating mech anism on circuit breaker 2 Padlock device for open posi tion maximum 3 padlocks to be provided by the user 8 Dimension with AUE connector early making contact 4 Compartment door lock Overall dimensions Accessories for Tmax T4 T5 Rotary handle operating mechanism on the compartment door 5 5 105 ES D0000 59 5 t dE 24 25 3 R 200 MIN Minimum rotation radius for door fulcrum 20 110 500 103 5 85 500 51 S 84 474 59 474 105 5 1SDC210K53F0001 E 177 RG To 25 50 1SDC210K55F0001 Drilling of compartment door 24 25 45 R 31 5 S a x 20 1SDC210K56F0001 Rotary handle operating mechanism on circuit breaker 5 5 105 5 24 25 lt 1SDC210K57F0001 183 33 5 146 103 5 1SDC210K58F0001 Drilling template of the compartment door 27 14 Y E N EM x 64 5
319. ds by means of a dip switch or with steps of 0 5s by means of PRO10T Tripping of this protection leads to contactor opening with the PR212 Cl unit any anomaly of the contactor would make the circuit breaker open thanks to the BACK UP function I Protection against short circuit This protection function intervenes in the case of a short circuit between phases It is sufficient for just a single phase to exceed the set threshold to cause immediate opening of the circuit breaker protection cannot be excluded The PR222MP trip unit is able to recognise whether the motor to be protected is in the start up hase or if there is a short circuit this has the aim of allowing completely safe start up conditions It cannot be excluded 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210B19F0001 1SDC210B20F0001 U Protection against missing phase and or unbalanced Function U can be used in those cases where a particularly precise control is needed regarding phase missing unbalanced This protection can be excluded and intervenes if the effective value of one or two currents drops below the level equal to 0 4 of the current set for protection L and remains there for longer than 4 seconds This protection can be set electronically with the PRO1OT from 0 4 to 0 9 x with time adjustable between 1 and 10s steps of 0 5s Tripping of this protection leads to contactor opening with the PR212 CI unit any anomaly of the contactor would make the circuit bre
320. dth and thereby saving space assembly material installation time and relative cabling operations The combination of circuit breaker contactor allows an extremely compact protected starter to be made 1SDC210015D0205 Typical operating characteristic of an asynchronous motor 1SDC210B15F0001 L unction L trip current unction trip curren unction R trip current function R trip time function U trip current function U trip time rated service current of the motor motor starting current peak value of the sub transient starting current motor starting time duration of the sub transient starting phase typical motor starting curve c example of trip curve of a motor protection circuit breaker with electronic release The different curves of the functions with numerous threshold and time settings allow an overall trip curve to be drawn which is really close to the motor starting curve thereby optimising its protection E ow get T taut Li 2 53 1SDC210015D0205 as me DOGO WEL Ert 2 54 imara jn 1SDC210B16F0001 1SDC210B17F0001 1SDC210B18F0001 Circuit breakers for motor protection Integrated protection PR222MP Protection functions L Protection against overload Function L protects the motor against overloads according to the indications and classes defined by the IEC 60947 4 1 Standard The protection is based on a pre defined model ABB S
321. dual current release to allow racking out of the circuit breaker and of the residual current release with the switchgear door closed This kit can also be mounted on the fixed version circuit breaker when there is the front for locks or the direct rotary handle operating mechanism therefore widening the range of use of the residual current releases 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210C11F0001 8 P N 8 o a I Accessories Connection terminals The basic version circuit breaker is supplied with front terminals for copper cables FC Cu for the Tmax T1 circuit breaker front terminals F for all the other Tmax family sizes Different types of terminals which can be combined together in different ways are also available top of one type bottom of a different type thereby allowing the circuit breaker to be connected to the plant in the most suitable way in relation to installation requirements The following can be distinguished front terminals which allow connection of cables or busbars working directly from the front of the circuit breaker orientated rear terminals which allow installation of the circuit breakers in switchboards with rear access to both the cable and busbar connections Terminals are available for direct connection of bare copper or aluminium cables and terminals for connection of busbars or cables with cable lugs On page 3 9 and following the information needed to make the con
322. e circuit breaker Tmax T2 PR221GP can be fitted with the same electrical accessories avail able with PR221DS The functions present on this release allow the requirements imposed by the major naval registers Such as LLRRS ABS and RINA to be satisfied PR221GP Protection S Against short circuit with delayed trip Socket for TT1 test unit Protection Against short circuit with instantaneous trip Protection L Against overload 1SDC210B59F0001 PR221GP Protection and parameterisation functions Protection function Trip threshold Trip curves Excludability Gs SC Against overload with long 1 0 40 1xIn at 6 x I inverse time delay trip and trip step 0 04 x In t 0 7 1 4 2 8 5 5 s characteristic according to an Tolerance 10 up to 2 x In inverse time curve Pt constant Es 2096 over 2 x In B according to IEC 60947 2 H Standard Against short circuit with inverse I 1 2 5 x In at 5 x In short time delay trip and trip step 0 5 x In t 0 07 0 175 s characteristic with inverse time Tolerance 10 Tolerance 10 up to 2 x In t k l Pt constant Against short circuit with in l 4 x l fixed stantaneous trip with adjustable 3 D threshold Tolerance 20 instantaneous E t k The tolerances are valid with these hypotheses self supplied release at full power and or auxiliary power supply without start up two phase or three phase power supply For all the cases not foreseen in
323. e circuit breaker by means of the shunt opening and closing releases by remote control It is suitable for the PR332 P and must be compulsory ordered with the PR330 D M communication module BTOSO wireless communication unit BTO3O is a device to be connected to the Test connector of PR222DS PR223DS PR223EF PR232 P PR831 P and PR832 P It allows Bluetooth communication between the protection trip unit and a hand held or laptop PC with a Bluetooth port BTOS3O can also be used with Emax circuit breakers fitted with PR121 P PR122 P and PR123 P This device is dedicated to use with the SD Pocket und SD TestBus2 application BTOSO can provide the power supply needed for self supply and for the protection release by means of a rechargeable Li ion battery 3 41 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210D01F0001 1SDC210D34F0001 1SDC210C99F0001 1SDC210D35F0001 1SDC210D36F0001 3 42 Accessories Accessories for electronic trip units PROSO B power supply unit With this accessory which is always supplied with the PR332 P range of trip units it is possible to read and configure the parameters of the unit whatever the state of the circuit breaker is open closed in the isolated for test position or racked in with without auxiliary power supply PROSO B is needed for readout of the data relative to trips if the trip occurred more than 48 hours previously and the trip unit was no longer supplied An electronic cir
324. e compulsory 1A 2A 4A 13A only if the overcurrent release is supplied 22A 31A only for withdrawable version circuit breakers 5 11 1SDC210015D0205 ry Vs 5 12 Thermal effect Electromagnetic effect Delay Mechanical connection link Manually operated control general case Operated by turning Operated by pushing Operated by key Operated by cam Hearth groung general symbol Converter with galvanic separator Conductors in a screened cable two conductors shown Twisted conductors two conductors shown Wiring diagrams Graphic symbols IEC 60617 and CEI 3 14 3 26 Standards Connection of conductors Terminal Plug and socket male and female Resistor general symbol Temperature dependent resistor Motor general symbol Induction motor three phase squirrel cage Current transformer Current transformer with four threaded winding and with one permanent wind ing with one tapping Make contact Break contact Change over break before make contact Position switch limit switch make contact A r CA e q
325. e installation by using the PR223EF no limitation in topological terms is introduced with distances between interlocked circuit breakers reaching up to 1 Km thereby making the protection System highly flexible EFDP zone selectivity is carried out by means of a logic interlocking protocol Interlocking IL The connection is made by means of a simple screened twisted pair cable cable which connects the circuit breakers fitted with the PR223EF In the case of a fault the circuit breaker immediately to the Supply side sends a locking signal to the hierarchically higher circuit breaker by means of the bus and before intervening checks that a similar locking signal has not been reached by the circuit breakers on the load side The soundness of the system is controlled by a monitoring function of the interlock channel guar anteeing the system a very high level of safety All the protection functions can be programmed remotely using the dialogue function present on the trip unit or locally by means of the PRO10 T which can be connected to a serial port on the front of the PR223EF The trip unit can be supplied from a 24 V DC auxiliary source or directly through the current trans formers self supply The electronic trip unit operation is guaranteed even in the case of single phase load up to 0 18 x In In the presence of an auxiliary power supply e the device implements the L S EF and G protection functions if the EF is disabled b
326. e mechanism following a fault or remote control command locking plate just for the closing operation It is incompatible with the front accessories solenoid operator rotary handle operating mechanism and mechanic interlock The padlock is also available for T7 and it is directly mounted on the circuit breaker cover 1SDC210C84F0001 T1 T3 3 31 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210C85F0001 1SDC210C86F0001 1SDC210D24F0001 3 32 Accessories Operating mechanism and locks Key lock on the circuit breaker for T1 T2 T3 and T7 KLC This allows the mechanical closing operation of the circuit breaker to be locked and is installed directly on the front in the slot in correspondence with the left pole This cannot be installed when the front operating mechanism rotary handle operating mechanism motor operator and RC221 RC222 residual current releases are present or on the three pole circuit breakers equipped with service releases UVR SOR The key lock is the Ronis 622 type and is available in two versions standard type with key only removable with the circuit breaker locked special type with key removable in both positions On T7 the key lock in the open position is mounted directly on the circuit breaker cover both in the version with different keys and with the same keys Presetting for Ronis and Profalux key locks are also available Key lock for rotary handle operating me
327. e set threshold having been exceeded is detected allow just the fault area to be identified and to have its power supply cut off By means of zone selectivity it is possible obtain selectivity considerably reducing the trip times and therefore the thermal stresses all the plant components are subjected to during the fault Making the protection is done by connecting all the zone selectivity outputs of the trip units belong ing to the same zone to each other and taking this signal to the zone selectivity input of the trip unit immediately to the supply side By means of a simple shielded twisted pairwire maximum length of 200 m each circuit breaker which detects a fault communicates this to the one on the supply side sending a timed locking signal The circuit breaker which does not receive any communication from those on the load side sends the opening command within the set selectivity time Zone selectivity can be activated for Tmax circuit breakers in the case where there is a source of 24 V auxiliary power supply the Tmax T4 T5 or T6 circuit breaker is equipped with the PR223EF trip unit EFDP zone selectiv ity or Tmax T7 equipped with the PR332 P trip unit ZS zone selectivity Current sensors In A 160 250 320 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600 PR223EF T4 250 a D T4 320 E T5 400 a D TB 630 L T6 630 D T6 800 a T6 1000 E PR332 P T7 800 A A T7 1000 A A A A A A T7 1250 T7 1600 e A A A A
328. e thermal component In decreases as the frequency increases due to the reduced conductivity of the materials and to the increase in associated thermal phenomena In general derating of this performance is equal to 10 Vice versa the magnetic threshold I increases as the frequency increases for this reason use of a 5 In version is recommended In these tables Km is the multiplication factor of due to the induced magnetic fields T1 160 TMD 16 80 A 1 400 Hz L In MIN MED MAX 1 50 Hz K L 400 Hz T1B 160 16 10 12 14 500 2 1000 T1C 160 20 12 15 18 500 2 1000 TiN 160 25 16 19 22 500 2 1000 32 20 24 5 29 500 2 1000 40 25 30 5 36 500 2 1000 50 31 38 45 500 2 1000 63 39 48 57 630 2 1260 Se Ee 1 1 08 BM o _ 100 _ T2 160 TMD 1 6280 A 1 400 Hz L In MIN MED MAX 1 50 Hz K L 400 Hz T2N 160 1 6 1 1 2 14 16 1 7 27 2 2 12 1 5 1 8 20 1 7 34 25 1 5 1 9 2 2 25 1 7 42 5 3 2 2 2 5 2 9 32 1 7 54 4 4 2 5 3 3 6 40 1 7 68 5 3 3 8 4 5 50 17 85 6 8 4 4 8 5 7 63 1 7 107 1 8 5 6 1 7 2 80 1 7 136 10 6 3 7 6 9 100 1 170 12 5 7 8 9 5 11 2 125 1 7 212 5 16 10 12 14 500 1 7 850 20 12 15 18 500 1 7 850 25 16 19 22 500 1z 850 32 20 24 5 29 500 1 7 850 40 25 30 5 36 500 jw 850 50 31 38 45 500 1 7 850 63 39 48 57 630 1 7 1071 80 50 61 72 800 1 7 1360 1SDC210015D0205 T2 160 TMG 16 160A
329. e trip signals of the protections remain active during the timing phase and even after the trip unit is tripped A reset pushbutton allows the state of all the signals to be reset The unit also has ten LEDs to visually signal the following information PW WD auxiliary power supply present and W D TX RX flashing synchronised with dialogue with the serial Bus and several warning indications eight LEDs associated with the internal contacts The table indicates the characteristics of the signalling relays available in the SACE PRO21 K unit Power contacts electrical characteristics Maximum changeover power resistive load 100W 1250 VA resistive load Maximum changeover voltage 130 V DC 250 V AC Maximum changeover current 5A Breaking capacity resistive load 9 30 V DC 3 3 A Breaking capacity resistive load 250 V AC 5A Contact coil insulation 2000 V rms 1 min 50 Hz Note the PRO21 K unit is an alternative to any supervision and control systems Available signals K51 PR222MP 1 Protection L alarm 2 Protection R alarm 3 Protection alarm 4 Protection U alarm Welded conctactor alarm contacts 5 Bus K O 6 PTC alarm temperature sensor on motor Generic input 0 1 r Release trip 8 Protection L pre alarm Back up protection alarm alternatively by means of dip switch K51 PR222DS PR223DS PR223EF Protection L alarm P
330. e trip unit ask ABB for information can be used The shield should only be earthed on the trip unit of the circuit breaker on the supply side The maximum length of the cabling for zone selectivity between two units is 200 meters The maximum number of the circuit breakers which can be connected to the outputs Z out of a trip unit is 16 The ZS of selectivity is identical to that which can be obtained through the trip units type PR333 P for Emax X1 and PR122 P PR123 P for Emax Tmax T7 circuit breaker equipped with PR332 P can be connected directly without external accessories on the load side of a zone selectivity chain created through the other devices PR333 P PR122 P and PR123 P For example Zone 2 Zone 1 Zone 3 1SDC210F25F0001 2 43 1SDC210015D0205 2 ET S i U T F N N ear L Leer ER a tsli Eh K d a D 7 l Circuit breakers for motor protection Index Circuit breakers for motor protection Electrical chiaracteristies css ssssssicciscaisarcdecccnsatasesniceedecsiavesiecestdssvadeussesatecaarecect General CharacteniStiCS sc sicccicsssecsiscctenesisrsentsrecevaiaveveceisaasssccstdssvadatdes sete esa recur Protection against short circuit Integrated protection PR221MP Integrated protection PR222MP 2 45 1SDC210015D0205 Circuit breakers for motor protection Electrical characteristics
331. eaker face circuit breaker face circuit breaker face flush with door flush with door extending 8 POLES extending 4 POLES 3 4 POLES Drilling templates for support sheet For front terminals For rear terminals 70 45 45 Mi 35 L Q 45 M 45 M4 Y NS oy Ka d Ka E s 8 1 p B ty g S tx x S D R N z 3 z le 3 Y Y 7 25 5 3 POLES 4 POLES 9 3 POLES 4 POLES 6 35 Overall dimensions Tmax T3 1SDC210015D0205 Overall dimensions Tmax T3 Terminals Front F Front for copper cables FC Cu Front for copper aluminium cables FC CuAl 185 mm 19 18 19 18x18 86 1SDC210154F0001 1SDC210155F0001 1SDC210156F0001 Caption Front for copper aluminium cables FC CuAl 240 mm Front extended terminals Front terminals for cables
332. ection functions and parameterisations gig Relation Thermal Zone 1 Fi Advanced protection functions Trip threshold Trip curves Excludability t f l memory selectivity Against undervoltage with U 0 5 0 95 x Un step 0 01 x Un t 0 1 5s step 0 1s adjustable constant time Tolerance 5 olerance min 42096 100ms m k E E Against overvoltage with adjustable U 1 05 1 2x Un step 0 01 x Un t 0 1 5s step 0 1s constant time Tolerance 5 olerance min 42096 100ms e k i Against residual voltage with U 0 1 0 4xUn step 20 01 xUn t 0 5 30s step 0 5s adjustable constant time Tolerance 5 olerance min 10 100ms m k i Against reversal of power with P 0 3 0 1 xPn step 0 02xPn t 0 5 25s step 0 1s adjustable constant time Tolerance 10 Tolerance min 10 100ms m k i 7 Against underfrequency with f 0 90 0 99xfn step 0 01 xfn t 0 5 38 step 0 1s adjustable constant time Tolerance 5 Tolerance min 10 100ms m k T Against overfrequency with f 1 01 1 10xfn step 0 01xfn t 0 5 38 step 0 18 adjustable constant time Tolerance 5 Tolerance min 10 100ms m k z 0 These tolerances are valid under the following conditions Trip threshold Trip time Active with 24V auxiliary power supply trip unit self supplied at full power and or auxiliary supply P p 3 4 two or th
333. ectors takes place simultaneously with that of the circuit breaker XA Interfacing connector of the PR222DS P PR222DS PD PR223D8 or PR223EF trip unit XA1 Three way connector for YO YU see note E XA10 Six way connector for solenoid operator XA2 Twelve way connector for auxiliary contacts see note E XA5 Three way connector for contact of electrical signalling of circuit breaker open due to trip of the RC221 RC222 or RC223 type residual current release see note E XA6 Three way connector for contact of electrical signalling of circuit breaker open due to trip of the overcurrent release see note E XAT Six way connector for auxiliary contacts see note E XA8 Six way connector for contacts operated by the rotary handle or for the motor operator see note E XA9 Six way connector for the electrical signalling of RC222 or RC223 type residual current release pre alarm and alarm and for opening by means of the release itself see note E XB XC XE Interfacing connectors of the AUX E unit XD Interfacing connector of the FDU unit 5 3 1SDC210015D0205 5 4 Wiring diagrams Information for reading Circuit breakers T1 T6 XF XO X01 XV YC YO YO1 YO2 YOS YU Interfacing connector of the MOE E unit Connector for the YO1 trip coil Connector for the YO2 trip coil Terminal boxes of the applications Closing release of the motor operating mechanism Opening release Trip coil of the ele
334. ed with the compartment door closed to the great advantage of operator safety The handle can only be inserted with the circuit breaker open Once removed or racked out the circuit breaker can be operated in open closed and by means of special connection extensions blank tests can be carried out of the auxiliary control circuit functions 1 e o 1SDC210C04F0001 he T4 T5 and T6 circuit breakers in the withdrawable version can only be fitted with pre wired ectrical accessories provided with the appropriate ADP adapters for isolation of the relative auxiliary ircuits see page 3 28 Motorizable The T7 circuit breaker in the motorizable version can be equipped with the spring charging motor To allow a complete remote control with T7 motorizable the circuit breaker must be fitted with shunt opening release shunt closing release spring charging motor 1SDC210D15F0001 Versions available T 8888888815 0 o Plug in Withdrawable T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T7M Not available on the 1000 A version 3 3 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210C05F0001 1SDC210C06F0001 W 1SDC210D16F0001 3 4 Accessories Versions and types Fixed part FP The fixed part available for all the sizes of the Tmax family starting from T2 allows the circuit breaker to be made in the plug in or withdrawable version Different positions of the circuit breaker are p
335. ee 8 GET VS x aS x AN E 1 b i 3 i mis Y 2 Y 18 8 148 5 E 7122 3 R min 200 5 Mechanical interlock M et H I e x Y l l 103 5 65 ka r P 295 27 5 isolating distance 1SDC210L95F0001 1SDC210L96F0001 1SDC210015D0205 Fixed circuit breaker Caption 000 ee eg si Rotary handle operating mech anism for circuit breaker Compartment door interlock Flange for the compartment door Flange fixing screws Support sheet drilling tem plate Key lock optional Tightening torque 2 5 Nm Compartment door with flange sheet drilling Compartment door sheet drill ing for front 206 x 204 Terminal for auxiliary contacts Reduced flange of the rotary handle for the compartment door optional Compartment door sheet drill ing for rotary handle Compartment door sheet drill ing without the rotary handle flange Overall dimensions Accessories for Tmax T7 Rotary handle operating mechanism on the circuit breaker 268
336. ee page 7 60 RC protection can be obtained only with 1SDA063869R1 toroid see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 20 1SDC210015D0205 T7 1250 M Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 S H L V Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 50kA 70 kA 120 kA 150 kA PR231 P LS 1250 062882 062914 062946 062978 PR231 P I 1250 062881 062913 062945 062977 PR232 P LSI 1250 062883 062915 062947 062979 PR331 P LSIG 1250 062884 062916 062948 062980 3 PR332 P LI 1250 062885 062917 062949 062981 E PR332 P LSI 1250 062886 062918 062950 062982 8 PR332 P LSIG 1250 062887 062919 062951 062983 T PR332 P LSIRc 1250 062888 062920 062952 062984 To allow the interchangeability of PR231 T7 T7M circuit breakers must be ordered specifying extra codes for its interchangeability See page 7 60 RC protection can be obtained only with 1SDA063869R1 toroid T7 1250 M Fixed F 4 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 S H L V Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 50kA 70 kA 120 kA 150 kA PR231 P LG 1250 062890 062922 062954 062986 PR231 P I 1250 062889 062921 062953 062985 PR232 P LSI 1250 062891 062923 062955 062987 PR331 P LSIG 1250 062892 062924 062956 062988 PR332 P LI 1250 062893 062925 062957 062989 PR332 P LSI 1250 062894 062926 062958 062990 PR332 P LSIG 1250 062895 062927 062959 062991 PR332 P LSIRc 1250 062896
337. en a pre alarm and an alarm LED the pre alarm threshold value is fixed and equal to 0 9 x and the LED is permanently lit whereas it flashes in case of alarm gt 1 05 x I It is also possible to transmit remotely the alarm of protection L simply connecting connector X to the dedicated contact R Protection against rotor block Function R protects the motor against possible rotor block during operation Protection R has the characteristic of protecting the motor in two different ways according to whether the fault is present at start up or whether it is present during normal service of an already active plant In the former case protection R is linked to protection L for time selection as well in the presence of a fault during start up protection R is inhibited for a time equal to the time set with the trip class Once this time is exceeded protection R becomes active leading to a trip after a fixed set t time In the latter case protection R is already active and the protection tripping time will be equal to t The protection intervenes when at least one of the phase currents exceeds the established value and remains over that threshold for time t Function R can be set manually 3 10 x with 8 thresholds which can be set by means of the dip switches on the front of the trip unit or with 70 thresholds by means of the SACE PRO10T test and configuration unit steps of 0 1 x 1 The trip time t can be set to 1 4 7 or 10 secon
338. ent opening closing electric power The main parameters relative to the solenoid operator are indicated in the table Rated voltage Un AC IV 110 250 DC IV 48 60 110 250 Operating voltage 85 110 Un nrush power consumption during operation 1800 VA 1000 W Power on stand by lt 100 mW Time opening s lt 0 1 closing s 0 1 Mechanical life No operations 25000 No operations h 240 T1 and T2 120 T3 Degree of protection on the front IP30 Minimum control impulse time on opening and closing ms gt 100 The unit is permanently supplied on stand by a control is applied by means of an external contact relay opto insulator in a low power circuit Contact characteristics V AC DC 24 V AC DC 50 mA 1SDC210C73F0001 1SDC210C74F0001 3 25 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210C75F0001 3 26 Accessories Remote control Stored energy motor operator for T4 T5 and T6 MOE and MOE E With the stored energy motor operator it is possible to control both opening and closing of the circuit breaker on which it is installed During opening of the circuit breaker the spring system is recharged automatically the stored energy is exploited in this way to close the circuit breaker The motor operator is always supplied with socket plug connectors with 1 m long cables and is always fitted with a padlock in the open
339. er it is possible to ask for complete kits 6 or 8 pieces or half kits 3 or 4 pieces For conversion of a complete circuit breaker it is necessary to specify the complete terminal kit In the case of a mixed solution the first code specified indicates the terminals to be mounted at the top the second indicates the terminals to be mounted at the bottom On the other hand when only 3 or 4 pieces are requested it is important to specify expressly whether the half kit is to be mounted at the top 7 rather than at the bottom C a Tmax T3N 250 with top FC Cu and bottom F terminals 1SDA R1 T3N 250 TMD 63 3p E F 051241 1 2 KIT FC Cu T3 3p 051482 c Tmax T3N 250 with top F and bottom FC Cu terminals 1SDA R1 T3N 250 TMD 63 3p E F 051241 1 2 KIT FC Cu T3 3p 051482 d Tmax T3N 250 with FC Cu top and bottom terminals 1SDA R1 T3N 250 TMD 63 3p F F 051241 1 KIT FC Cu T3 3p 051480 e Tmax T3N 250 with top ES and FC Cu bottom terminals 1SDA R1 T3N 250 TMD 63 3p F F 051241 1 2 KIT ES T3 3p 051494 1 2 KIT FC Cu T3 3p 051482 2 T2 T3 electrical accessories on moving part of plug in circuit breaker Fitting the moving parts of plug in T2 T3 circuit breakers with SOR UVR and AUX and with SOR C UVR C and AUX C accessories always requires the appropriate plug socket indicated in the cata logue a Tmax T2N 160 moving part of plug in circuit breakers with auxiliary contacts 1SDA R1 T2N 160 F
340. es terminals terminals terminals nr E PR E E E T2 Fe F F F F F F T3 Fe F F F F F F T4 Fe F F F F F F F T5 Fe F F F F F F T6 630 Fe F F F F F T6 800 Fe F F F F F T6 1000 Foo FO Fa Fa T EE IEEE L BE EE Housed externally Standard supply 8 A type of terminal among those indicated in the table must necessarily be mounted on the T6 1000 A circuit breaker complete circuit breaker breaking part and loose protection trip unit F Fixed Fixed part F EF ES FC Cu FC CuAl FC CuAl R RS HR VR HR VR Front Front Front Front Front Front Rear Rear Rear Rear Rear terminals extended extended terminals terminals terminals horizontal spreaded flat flat flat terminals spread for copper for CuAI for CuAl terminals terminals horizontal vertical terminals terminals cables cables cables terminals terminals T2 po P P P P P P T3 pe P P P P P P T4 P W P W P W P W P W T5 P W pa we P W P W P W P W T6 W W W T LH Housed externally Standard supply For T5 630 only P Plug in W Withdrawable 3 9 1SDC210015D0205 Accessories Connection terminals Front terminals F Allow connection of busbars or cables terminated with cable terminal ZO E G E i Type Version Pieces Busbars cable terminal mm Tightening Nm Terminal covers Phase separators W H D high low fixed part T2 F P 1 20 7 5 5 6 5 6 R R R T3 F
341. essary to increase the size of the supply side circuit breakers to obtain selectivity limits congruous with the short circuit current of the installation By means of suitably cabled PR223EF releases it is possible to obtain total selectivity even between two circuit breakers of the same size An example is given below of how by means of zone selectivity between moulded case circuit breakers a reduction in sizes and a considerable reduction in the peak current and specific energy let through by the circuit breakers is possible whilst still maintaining total selectivity 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210F22F0001 The main parameters characteristic of the trip unit are Trip delayed Enabling this parameter introduces a trip delay in the case when on the load side of a trip unit Tmax or modular circuit breakers are installed The aim of this parameter is to obtain selectivity with the other devices on the load side not equipped with PR223EF This parameter is only enabled in the circuit breakers which have the device outside the zone selectivity chain on the load side EF enable disable Enabling disabling protection EF If protection EF is enabled the presence of Vaux leads to automatic exclusion of function and enabling of protection EF the lack of Vaux leads to exclusion of protection EF and to the return of function if enabled 16 Maximum number of trip units which can be connected to the BUS of a level 1 kilometer Maximum
342. f the PR223EF trip units connected to VM210 voltage measuring unit Auxiliary circuits of the PR222DS P PR222DS PD PR228DS or PR223EF electronic trip unit connected with FDU front display unit Auxiliary circuits of the PR222DS PD PR223DS or PR223EF electronic trip unit connected with PRO21 K type signalling unit Auxiliary circuits of the PR222DS PD PR223DS or PR223EF electronic trip unit connected with FDU front display unit and with PRO21 K type signalling unit uxiliary circuits of the PR222DS PD PR223DS or PR223EF electronic trip unit connected with the AUX E auxiliary contacts uxiliary circuits of the PR222DS PD PR223DS or PR223EF electronic trip unit connected with the auxiliary contacts AUX E and with MOE E type actuation unit Auxiliary circuits of the PR222DS PD PR223DS or PR223EF electronic trip unit connected with FDU front display unit and with the AUX E auxiliary contacts 1SDC210015D0205 Fig 47 Auxiliary circuits of the PR222MP electronic trip unit connected with PRO21 K signalling unit see note Fig 48 Auxiliary circuits of the PR222MP electronic trip unit connected with PRO21 K signalling unit and with PR212 CI type contactor control unit for motor starting see note Fig 49 Auxiliary circuits of the PR222MP electronic trip unit connected with PRO21 K signalling unit and with PR212 CI type contactor control unit and an ABB series AF contactor see note Fi
343. following conditions 9 For TA In 320 A T5 In 630 A and T6 In 1000 A gt Imax 9 5 x In self powered trip unit at full power without start up Imax 9 5 x In two or three phase power supply The setting at 10 x In corresponds to 9 5 x In In conditions other than those considered the following tollerances hold Trip threshold Trip time S x 2096 x 2096 U 20 40ms 2 15 1SDC210015D0205 Circuit breakers for power distribution Electronic trip units PR221GP The PR221GP electronic release only available on Tmax T2 is specific for protection of generators with the following rated currents In 63 A In 100 A In 160 A It allows wide adjustment of the protection against overload L I 0 4 1 x In and above all provides the possibility of selecting four trip curves Generator protection typically requires low trip thresholds with regard to protection against short circuit Thanks to the PR221GP protection with time delay adjustable up to 2 5 times the rated current 1 2 5 x In is guaranteed with the possibility of selecting between two trip curves It is also possible to set an instantaneous protection again short circuit I fixed at 4 times the trip threshold of the protection against delayed short circuit S The S and protection functions are not alternative to each other As for Tmax T2 PR221DS it is necessary to house the opening solenoid SA in the right hand slot of th
344. g 51 Auxiliary circuit of the PR222MP trip unit connected to SACE PR212 CI motor starting contactor control unit and 24 V DC auxiliary supply see note 1 Incompatibility The circuits indicated by the following figures cannot be supplied at the same time on the same circuit breaker 1 2 8 4 5 6 5 6 11 10 11 10 12 21 22 24 25 26 32 39 40 45 23 44 45 46 41 42 48 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 Notes A B The circuit breaker is only fitted with the applications specified in the ABB SACE order con firmation To make out the order please consult this catalogue The undervoltage release is supplied for power supply branched on the supply side of the circuit breaker or from an independent source circuit breaker closing is only allowed with the release energised the lock on closing is made mechanically The S4 1 and 84 2 contacts shown in figures 5 6 open the circuit with the circuit breaker open and close it again when a manual closing command is given by means of the rotary handle in accordance with the Standards regarding machine tools in any case closing does not take place if the undervoltage release is not supplied Connectors XA1 XA2 XA5 XAG XA7 XA8 and XA9 are supplied on request They are always supplied with T2 and T3 circuit breakers in the plug in version and with T4 and T5 circuit breakers in the plug in version equipped with unwired electronic accessories Connector
345. g Lli E bb n CES P T SD E Three pole circuit breaker with Three pole or four pole circuit breaker with PR222MP electronic trip unit RC221 RC222 or RC223 residual current trip unit 5 13 1SDC210015D0205 Wiring diagrams Wiring diagram of the T1 T6 circuit breakers State of operation N L1 L2 L3 TTT 4 l x a a 9 K51 RA TU l xol T A2 l YO1 TI L3 SOU TI N T d PR221DS SEET EES cts es PR222DS P PR222DS PD A K87 TI d d sol Hgo 4 Yo2 A en X9 2 le RC222 1 RC223 H i td ES Three pole or four pole circuit breaker with PR221DS PR222DS P or PR222DS PD electronic trip unit and RC221 RC222 or RC223 residual cur rent trip unit for T4 T5 and T6 four pole only PE TI N kal K51 Ziel X cd lei Ai PR222DS P PR222DS PD PR223DS xol X012 PR223EF 1SDC210G04F0001 Fixed version three pole circuit breaker with current trans former on neutral conductor external to circuit breaker for T4 T5 and T6 32 PE N L1 L2 L3 x11 2 ES Fo gd X4 I K51 XV 4 2 De A TI L1 xol TI L2 YU Al Ls S75I 1 TI L3
346. ge 7 2 7 22 1SDC210015D0205 T6L 630 Fixed F Front terminals F 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 100 kA 100 kA PR223EF 630 060261 060267 T6L 800 Fixed F Front terminals F 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 100 kA 100 kA PR223EF 800 060304 060310 T6L 1000 Fixed F 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles Electronic trip unit Icu 415 V 100 kA 100 kA PR223EF 1000 060579 060585 Note A type of terminal among ES FC CuAl R must be mounted on the T6 1000 A circuit breaker 7 23 1SDC210015D0205 Ordering codes Motor protection circuit breakers T2 160 Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals F 1SDA R1 N S H L Magnetic only trip unit MF and MA Icu 415 V 36kA 50 kA 70 kA 85 kA 1 13 053110 053121 053132 053143 E 1 6 21 053111 053122 053133 053144 8 2 26 053112 053123 053134 053145 5 2 5 33 053113 053124 053135 053146 2 3 2 42 053114 053125 053136 053147 4 52 053115 053126 053137 053148 5 65 053116 053127 053138 053149 6 5 84 053117 053128 053139 053150 8 5 110 053118 053129 053140 053151 11 145 053119 053130 053141 053152 12 5 163 053120 053131 053142 053153 20 120 240 051207 051216 051224 051232 32 192 384 051208 051217 051225 051233 52 312 624 051209 05
347. ges advanced electronics as well as a complete and standardised range of accessories The top quality materials and innovative construction techniques used by ABB SACE mean Tmax circuit breakers can guarantee truly exceptional performances with a really high rated current volume ratio For example T4 and T5 guarantee a breaking capacity up to 200 kA at 415 V AC and an extraordinary 80 kA at 690 V AC Moreover they complete the range of applications up to 1150 V in alternating current and 1000 V in direct current The series of electronic trip units equipped with latest genera tion technology offers solutions exclusive to ABB T4 T5 and T6 have the same depth simplifying their position ing in the switchboard compartments and also have a complete standardised and unified range of accessories avail able simplifying selection making them flexible to use and reducing stocks e DUE o DUM ULLAM NEW PR223EF TRIP UNIT THIS IS WHERE THE EXCLUSIVE INNOVATION IS TO BE FOUND The new PR223EF trip unit with the EFDP system offers two characteristics which until now were antithetic selectivity and rapid tripping With the new PR223EE a new range up to 1000 A has been conceived for specific needs requiring high selectivity values rapid detection of the fault and no limit to the number of hierarchical levels of the distri bution plant With the EFDP system the size of the apparatus inside the installation ca
348. ging motor 3 27 1SDC210015D0205 3 28 Accessories Remote control Adapters ADP For the SOR PS SOR UVR AUX MOE or MOE E and AUE pre wired electrical accessories used with Tmax T4 T5 and T6 in the plug in or withdrawable version it is necessary to use the adapters to be coupled with the plug which will than be connected to the socket on the fixed part for the moving parts According to the electrical accessories required one or two adapters will be needed to be mounted on the left and or right side of the moving part There are four types adapters available 5 way adapters 6 way adapters 10 way adapters 12 way adapters The table below indicates the adapters which have to be used for the various possible combinations of electrical accessories Adapters ADP for T4 T5 and T6 wired accessories 5 way 6 way 10 way 12 way left side SOR UVR SA for residual current release RC222 SOR or UVR SA for residual current release RC222 MOE MOE E MOE MOE E SOR or UVR MOE MOE E SOR or UVR SA for residual current release RC222 AUE AUE SOR or UVR AUE SOR or UVR SA for residual current release RC222 right side AUX 1Q 1SY 1 open closed changeover contact 1 trip unit tripped changeover contact AUX 2Q 2 open closed changeover contacts D AUX 3Q 1SY 3 open closed changeover contacts 1 trip unit tripped changeover contact For Tma
349. gree of protection for fixed circuit breakers with rear terminals and for moving parts of plug in and withdrawable circuit breakers high terminal covers HTC these guarantee IP40 degree of protection for fixed circuit breakers with front front extended front for cables terminals With Tmax T2 and T3 the fixed parts of plug in circuit breakers can use the same terminal covers as the corresponding fixed circuit breakers For fixed parts of T4 and T5 the proper terminal covers TC FP are available The degrees of protection indicated at page 1 8 are valid for the circuit breaker installed in a switch board 3 7 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210C14F0001 1SDC210C15F0001 1SDC210C13F0001 3 8 Accessories Connection terminals Phase separators These allow the insulation characteristics between the phases at the connections to be increased They are mounted from the front even with the circuit breaker already installed inserting them into the corresponding slots and they are available in two versions 100 mm high 200 mm high The H 100 mm phase separators are supplied as compulsory with front extended type terminals EF whereas the ones with height H 200 mm are compulsory with front extended spread type terminals ES The phase separating partitions are incompatible with both the high and low insulating terminal covers The fixed parts can use the same phase separating partitions a
350. han 48h By pushing the Info Test pushbutton the trip unit shows all these data directly on display No auxiliary power supply is needed The information is available to user for 48 hours with the circuit breaker open or without current flowing The information of the latest 20 trips are stored in memory If the information can be furthermore retrieved more than 48 hours later it is sufficient to connect a PRO30 B battery unit or a BTO30 wireless communication unit Load control Load control makes it possible to engage disengage individual loads on the load side before the overload protection L is tripped thereby avoiding unnecessary trips of the circuit breaker on the supply side This is done by means of contactors or switch disconnectors externally wired to the trip unit controlled by the PR332 P through PRO21 K unit Two different Load Control schemes can be implemented disconnection of two separate loads with different current thresholds connection and disconnection of a load with hysteresis Current thresholds and trip times are smaller than those available for selection with protection L so that load control can be used to prevent overload tripping External PRO21 K accessory unit is required for Load Control The function is only active when an auxiliary power supply is available PR330 V Measurement Module This optional internal module installed in PR332 P allows the trip unit to measure the phase and neutr
351. hase and neutral protection 2 9 1SDC210015D0205 Circuit breakers for power distribution Thermomagnetic trip units Thermomagnetic trip units TMD TMA and TMG for T4 T5 and T6 Thermal threshold Adjustable Thermal threshold Adjustable from 0 7 to 1 x In 8 TMA thermomagnetic trip unit with adjustable thermal threshold I 0 7 1 x In and adjustable magnetic threshold l 5 10 x In i TMG for T5 thermomagnetic trip unit with adjustable thermal threshold I 0 7 1 x In and adjustable magnetic threshold 2 5 5 x In TMD TMA T4 In A 20 32 50 80 100 125 160 200 250 Im Neutral A 10096 20 32 50 80 100 125 160 200 250 1 0 7 1 x In Neutral A 50 80 100 125 160 10 x In A EE 320 500 D 5 10 x In A 400 800 500 1000 625 1250 800 1600 1000 2000 1250 2500 1 10 x In Neutral A 10096 320 320 500 400 800 500 1000 625 1250 800 1600 1000 2000 1250 2500 25 10xIn Neutral A 5096 400 800 500 1000 625 1250 800 1600 TMA T5 In A 320 400 500 IB Neutral A 10096 320 400 500 1 20 7 1 x In Neutral A 50 200 250 320 I A 1600 3200 2000 4000 2500 5000 n Neutral A 10096 1600 3200 2000 4000 2500 5000 1 5 10 xIn Neutral A 50 1000 2000 1250 2500 1600 3200 TMG T5 In A 320 400 500 JC Neutral A 100 320 400 500 1 20 7 1 x
352. he compartment door Without flange 3 4 POLES 1SDC210H79F0001 1SDC210H83F0001 1SDC210015D0205 Terminals Front F MAX 35 n 20 MAX 10 MIN 5 195 28 Nm Y 10 5 ot r3 oe A Jg g S jx 8 8 Front for copper cables FC Cu Front for copper cables FC Cu 2x240 mm 20 24x24 26 75 Y 25 Nm E I E E e 2 az S S 2 g x 7 cS Z l S 5 i F E Y Front for copper aluminum cables FC CuAI 2x120 mm Front for copper aluminum cables FC CuAI 1x240 mm 48 75 E 26 76 amp l S 26 7 E z E 9208 y 2 z oo v Y H K L o9 Qo HE Sfo SIE 3 3 2 8 4 p L u ae ka S E 8 el E E 3 1 S lyti 2 xE PEE x i Y Caption Front for copper aluminium cables Front for copper aluminium cables FC CuAI 2x240 mm FC CuAl 300 mm e High terminal covers with 103 5 degree of protection IPAO 26 54 Y E Ka OJ amp 8 2 N
353. he fixed part to prevent racking in of the plug in part Selection can be made among the following key lock with different keys KLF D FP key lock with the same keys for groups of circuit breakers KLF S FP Ronis type key lock KLF D Ronis FP padlock which can take up to three padlocks with 6 mm stem not supplied PLL FP 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210D24F0001 1SDC210D25F0001 1SDC210C87F0001 Lock in racked in isolated racked out position for fixed part of T7 This device allows the moving part of a withdrawable version T7 circuit breaker to be locked in the racked in isolated test or racked out position in the relative fixed part Thanks to mounting an ad ditional accessory the lock can be limited just to the racked out position The fixed part can be equipped with 1 or 2 of these key locks Mechanical lock of compartment door Available on T7 both for the lever operating mechanism and for the motorizable version It does not allow the compartment door to be opened with the circuit breaker closed and circuit breaker racked in for circuit breakers in the withdrawable version and locks the circuit breaker closing with the compartment door open Two versions are available a door lock made by means of cables and a second type fixed directly on the side of the circuit breaker or of the relative fixed part The cable door lock must also be fitted with the interlock cable kit and the interlocking plate
354. he left of the operating lever while B D E and G in the right one LE E A C A2 C d A C ICH GC T1 T2 TMD T3 T1 T2 TMD T3 TA T2 PR221DS T2 PR221DS T4 T5 T6 3 poles T5 T6 4 poles 3 poles 4 poles T7 3 4 poles T7M 3 4 poles only for T1 T2 T3 only SOR C for T4 T5 T6 Order also the 3 way connector for second SOR C 1SDA055273R1 3 position for assembly of the SOR position for assembly of the UVR Shunt opening release SOR or Undervoltage release UVR Auxiliary contacts Trip coil of the residual current Trip coil of the electronic trip unit PR221DS Auxiliary contacts for T2 with electronic trip unit PR221DS Spring charging motor Shunt closing release SCR G nmootu Hou Ww ow woud ul 3 51 1SDC210015D0205 3 52 Accessories Communication devices and systems SD View 2000 SD View 2000 is a ready to use system consisting of software for personal computers which allows complete supervision of the low voltage electrical installation Putting the SD View 2000 System into operation is quick and easy In fact the software itself guides the user in recognizing and configuring the protection units The user only needs knowledge of the installation such as how many circuit breakers are installed and how they are connected to each other No engineering work on the supervision system is required since all the pages displayed are already configured in the system ready to be used Usage of t
355. he software is intuitive and easy to learn for the operator SD View 2000 has graphic pages based on Internet Explorer which make the system as simple to manage as surfing on the Internet System architecture System architecture is based on the latest developments in personal computer and industrial com munication network technology SD View 2000 is able to manage up to 8 serial lines with a maximum of 31 devices each System architecture Maximum number of serial ports RS485 4 Maximum number of devices for each serial port 31 9600 19200 Baud Protocol Modbus RTU SD View 2000 Modbus RTU on RS 485 Converter RS232 RS485 Tmax T1 T3 Tmax T4 T5 T6 Emax X1 AC31 PR222DS PD PR332 or PR333 or PR223DS PR330 D M or PR223EF 1SDC210015D0205 Complete supervision of the installation SD View 2000 is the ideal tool available to system managers in order to have the situation of the instal lation under control at all times and to be able to supervision all the functions easily and in real time p NI SS res fin E L RRR R R iii n di mm du am ua 8 ri md Lg Wlan Kapa en birmi Ss ad ST i wem m SD View 2000 allows information from the installation to be received and send commands to the circuit breakers and the relative trip units In particular it is possible to send opening and closing commands to the circuit breakers read the electrical installation values current voltage power fac
356. here it is correct to use a type B RCD A relevant example of the using of the type B RCD RC223 is a network supplying a three phase bridge rectifier Ald 1 1 1 H L2 IW I pM px 1 I 0g SS A L3 rir 1 1 1 Fg oy 3 oy va 3 gj t U vJ Li VI Yd Ny X M N H Wi 4s 4s IN Yo Sane aa Senet 0v In fact in the case of an earth fault occurring in the plant section with direct current supply a fault current with marked direct characteristics shall practically flow through the section with alternate current The RCD both A as well as AC type could be not sensitive to this current and consequently not able to trip the circuit by disconnecting the fault On the contrary the type B RCD results to be suitable to detect the residual currents with continuous components and thus able to interrupt the circuit in case of earth fault The following table shows the main characteristics of ABB SACE residual current devices they can be mounted both on circuit breakers as well as on switch disconnectors in case of fault currents to earth lower than the apparatus breaking capacity are type A devices and they do not need auxiliary supply since they are self supplied RC221 RC222 RC223 Suitable for circuit breaker T1 T2 T3 11 T2 T3 T4 T5 T4 type switch disconnectors T1D T3D T1D T3D T4D T5D T4D Primary service voltage M 85 500 85 500 85 500 85 500 110 500 Rated service curren
357. ide combination of thresholds and trip times offered is it suitable for protecting a wide range of alternating current installations In addition to protection functions the unit is provided with multifunction LED indicators Furthermore PR331 P allows connection to external devices enhancing its advanced characteristics like remote signalling and monitoring or interface from front of HMIOS3O panel Protection S Protection I Against short circuit with delayed trip Against short circuit with instantaneous trip LED signalling Alarm for protection function I LED signalling Alarm for protection function G Protection G Against earth fault T d i Info test push button af bn 1SDC210B56F0001 Protection functions Trip threshold Trip curves Excludability Relation t f I Against overload with long 0 40 1xIn step 0 025 x In at3xl inverse time delay trip and Trip between 1 05 1 2 x t 3 12 24 36 48 72 trip characteristic according k 108 144s 8 t KP to an inverse time curva Tolerance 10 up to 6 x In Pt k according to the IEC 20 above 6 x In 60947 2 Standard Against short circuit with l 0 6 0 8 1 2 1 8 24 at 10 x In short inverse time delay trip 3 3 6 4 2 5 5 8 6 6 t 0 1 0 8s step 0 1s and trip characteristic with 7 4 8 2 9 10xIn Tolerance min amp 1096 40ms E t k 2 inverse time l t k or with Tolerance 7 up to 6 x In Sene
358. ided with a padlock in the open position which prevents any command either locally or remotely It operates both circuit breaker opening and closing working directly on the circuit breaker lever It is offered in two versions one side by side with the circuit breaker with T1 and T2 for installation on a panel or DIN EN 50022 rail the other on the front with T1 T2 and T3 suitable for installation directly on the front of the circuit breaker The latter is complete with operating handle The front version can also be used with plug in circuit breakers Coupling with the residual current release is only allowed for a circuit breaker with solenoid operator side by side to allow access to the user interface of the residual current release from the front of the switchgear In fact using the solenoid operator superimposed would imply the circuit breaker position on the rear of the door and its residual current release and the interface would no longer be accessible This combination can only be installed directly on the back plate of the switchgear Both versions can be used either in the three pole or four pole version The solenoid operator is supplied complete with 1m long cables and just for the superimposed version with a socket plug connector with 5 poles Both the opening and closing commands are operated by the solenoid which acts directly on the circuit breaker lever The solenoid operator functions are also guaranteed thanks to perman
359. ignal is actually an alarm signal only if it remains lit for more than 20s The connection cable shield must only be earthed on the circuit breaker side The connections between the TO toroidal transformer and the poles of the X13 or XV connector of the circuit breaker must be made using a four pole shielded cable with paired braided conductors BELDEN 9696 paired type with a length of not more than 15 m The shield must be earthed on the circuit breaker side 5 9 1SDC210015D0205 5 10 Wiring diagrams Information for reading ATSO10 for T4 T5 T6 State of operation represented The circuit diagram is for the following conditions Gircuit breakers open and connected circuit breakers de energized closing springs discharged overcurrent relays not tripped The present diagram shows withdrawable circuit breakers but is also valid for fixed circuit break ers connect terminal 17 to 20 and terminal 35 to 38 on the ATSO10 device The present diagram shows circuit breakers with overcurrent trip unit T4 T5 but is also valid for circuit breakers with thermomagnetic trip unit and to circuit breakers with out relay switch disconnectors connect terminal 18 to 20 and terminal 35 to 37 of the ATSO10 device Q The present diagram shows four pole circuit breakers but is also valid for two pole circuit break ers use only terminals 26 and 24 phase and neutral for the voltage connection of the normal power
360. inals i 35 35 35 55 35 435 O45 Mm Q 45 M4 SR Q 45 M4 Y Y M M ANUS FN N CN X DID DDD 5 l Ei s 3 b y 8 H xt x 8 A x 4 x42 SU m e 35 35 A neal 35 35 35 F 8 J 8 E PC CNICN C CONES E LA 4 i ES E MD OD i Y Q 45 M4 Y 3 25 Y 1 25 Y E 3 POLES 4 POLES 3 POLES 4 POLES 6 8 1SDC210015D0205 Terminals Front F MAX 24 d 17 5 14 85 kc o x zx X Caption e Front extended terminals Front terminals for cables 240 mm CuAI compulsory High terminal covers with degree of protection IP40 compulsory Drilling templates for sup port sheet 3 3 nsulating courtse plate 4 Caption Insulating barriers between phases compulsory Front for copper cables FC Cu 1SDC210H43F0001 Front for copper aluminium cables FC CuAl 240 mm a e Bi o o o o
361. ion C 9 Go 6 84 1SDC210015D0205 Withdrawable Rotary handle operating mechanism on the circuit breakers circuit breaker Caption e Rotary handle operating me chanism on circuit breakers Rear segregation for rear ter minals Flange for the compartment door Flange fixing screws Ap LL 3s Tightening torque 1 5 Nm 363 25 EELER 343 J Drilling template for fixing onto support sheet Key lock optional 1595 l N Tightening torque 9 Nm ei ei CO GG Compartment door with flange sheet drilling S 7 45 8 i S 1093 amp Front terminals 154 P S S S 249 gt gt 8 D Rear horizontal terminals 8 k gt 8 02 Rear vertical terminals Drilling templates of the compartment door d3 Rear segregation for front terminals 2785 E l E 165 5 N keal Ay L 1 Flange for the compartment p E 4 Kei door 160 75 9 Auxiliary contact terminal Insulating protection ff it it 144 5 DN Gem II 160 75 246 5 U R 1SDC210M14F0001 8 R mi
362. ions S and G to operate with higher trip thresholds during the start up phase This avoids untimely tripping caused by the high inrush currents of certain loads motors transformers lamps The start up phase lasts from 100 ms to 30 s in steps of 0 01 s It is automatically recognized by the PR332 P trip unit when the peak value of the maximum current exceeds the threshold that can be set by the user A new start up becomes possible after the current has fallen down to 0 1 x In if the trip unit is supplied from an external source Protection against overtemperature The user has the following signals or commands available for the protection against overtempera ture lighting up of the Warning LED when the temperature is higher than 70 C or lower than 20 C temperature at which the microprocessor is still able to operate correctly lighting up of the Alarm LED when the temperature is higher than 85 C or lower than 25 C temperature above which the microprocessor can no longer guarantee correct operation and when decided during the unit configuration stage simultaneous opening of the circuit breaker with indication of the trip directly on the display as for the other protections Self diagnosis The PR332 P range of trip units contains an electronic circuit which periodically checks the continu ity of internal connections trip coil and each current sensor including the Source Ground Return when present In the
363. isccccsectessersscssescessesvecsassceasettoatesascsavcsrssersccsesarssaascsedesscereattectod sete 4 2 Trip curves for power distribution Circuit breakers with thermomagnetic trip units Circuit breakers with electronic trip UNitS csccessesesteestcssstenseesscssoneesessenseessoeesesssenseeseesond Trip curves for zone selectivity Circuit breakers with PR223EF trip Unit csscssccsssssssescssscessorssetssssecsssesscesocsessstsonseesoees 413 Trip curves for motor protection Circuit breakers with magnetic only trip units nenne 4 14 Circuit breakers with PR221DS PR231 P e PR221MP electronic trip units 4 15 Use of the trip curves of circuit breakers with PR222MP electronic trip unit 4 16 Circuit breakers with PR222MP electronic trip unit Specific let through energy curves Technical information Temperature performances Circuit breakers with magnetic only or electronic trip units and switch disconnectors 4 39 Circuit breakers with thermomagnetic trip unten 4 57 Power H 4 59 Magnetic trip values nennen eterni tnn tinens tienne parre itia ia dn 4 60 Special applications Use of apparatus at 16 2 8Hz tee einreichen reris n is 4 61 Use of apparatus at 400 Hz nre titer ntn tnter th nion aua d ie ei a paas 4 64 Use of direct current apparatus erento
364. it breaker The T6 and T7 circuit breakers can be combined with the RCQ residual current switchgear release Apart from the protection against overloads and short circuits typical of automatic circuit breakers the residual current circuit breakers derived from them also guarantee protection of people and protection against earth fault currents thereby ensuring protection against direct contacts indirect contacts and fire hazards The residual current releases can also be mounted on the Tmax T1D T3D T4D and T5D switch disconnectors In that case the derived apparatus is a pure residual current circuit breaker i e one which only guarantees residual current protection and not the protections typical of circuit breakers Pure residual current circuit breakers are only sensitive to the earth fault current and are generally applied as main switch disconnectors in small distribution switchboards towards end users The use of pure and impure residual current circuit breakers allows continual monitoring of the state of plant insulation ensuring efficient protection against fire and explosion hazards and when the devices have lAn lt 30 mA ensure protection of people against indirect and direct earth contacts to fulfil the compulsory measures foreseen by the accident prevention regulations and prescriptions The residual current releases are constructed in compliance with the following Standards IEC 60947 2 appendix B IEC 61000 for pro
365. k x4 E zi B B p epo oo po E ELM 25 5 S RES 8 8 2 Y 7 222 lt 2 23 233 8 Drilling template of the compartment door 115 107 Y Y wm EE N e S ty x 2 X X Y S X With flange Without flange T5 70 46 5 93 55M5 e Q55 M5 Y 5 5 M5 Tv M E S 17 5 E 8 23 25 E Xx x S x S Xx x le e e S e 9 B 8 8 Y E Y 2 Y 2 4 POLES 3 POLES 4 POLES 6 71 1SDC210015D0205 Overall dimensions Accessories for Tmax T4 T5 Fixed version Front for lever operating mechanism Caption T4 T5 D Front for lever operating mech 105 146 13 5 anism T 103 5 gt 2 Lock for the compartment b Det A door supplied on request x x m D e i x TE 1SDC210K73F0001 1SDC210K74F0001 IA N 1SDC210K75F0001 Y 23 140 5 Flange for the Drilling template for the compartment door compartment door supplied as standard Drilling for detail A Det A Ut 117 27 14 27 14 Y Y ar 3 BR T ITT AN e o o Bd e E E d P m e E a oO n S GE xX x x S XLS d 3 8 En E Y S Y E N E 115 107 E R 200
366. kers N 20008 054943 060662 063559 KLF S arrangement for Ronis key lock 063560 KLF S arrangement for Profalux key lock 063561 Key lock for motor operator MOL Type 1SDA R1 T4 T5 T6 MOL D different key 054904 060611 MOL S same key for different groups of circuit breakers N 20005 054905 060612 MOL S same key for different groups of circuit breakers N 20006 054906 060613 MOL S same key for different groups of circuit breakers N 20007 054907 060614 MOL S same key for different groups of circuit breakers N 20008 054908 060615 MOL M lock only on manual operation with same key 054909 054909 Key lock in racked in test isolated racked out position Type 1SDA R1 T7 T7M For 1 circuit breaker different key 062153 For groups of circuit breakers same key N 20005 062154 For groups of circuit breakers same key N 20006 062155 For groups of circuit breakers same key N 20007 062156 For groups of circuit breakers same key N 20008 062157 Arrangement for Ronis key lock 063567 Arrangement for Profalux key lock 063570 Arrangement for Castell key lock 063568 Arrangement for Kirk key lock 063569 Note The fixed part can be equipped with two different key locks Accessory for lock in racked out position Type 1SDA R1 T7 T7M Lock in racked out position 062158 Note As optional in addition to the circuit breaker lock in racked in isolated test racked out position see Abbreviation caption page 7 2
367. l latching A18 VM210 type voltage measuring unit A2 Applications of the solenoid operator or motor operator A3 Applications of the RC221 RC222 or RC223 type residual current release A4 Indication apparatus and connections for control and signalling outside the circuit breaker D Electronic time delay device of the undervoltage release outside the circuit breaker H H1 Signalling lamps K Contactor for motor starting K51 Electronic trip unit PR221 type overcurrent release with the following protection functions Lagainst overload with inverse long time delay S against short circuit with inverse or definite short time delay against short circuit with instantaneous trip PR222DS P PR222DS PD PR223DS or PR223EF type overcurrent release with the following protection functions L against overload with inverse long time delay S against short circuit with inverse or definite short time delay against short circuit with instantaneous trip time G against earth fault with short time trip EFDP protection Earth Fault Detector Prevention for PR223EF trip unit only PR222MP motor protection type trip unit with the following protection functions against overload thermal protection against rotor block against short circuit against missing or unbalanced current between the phases K51 1 8 Contact for electrical signalling of the protection functions of the electronic trip unit K87 RC221 RC222
368. l64F0001 61 gx 5 5 M5 ry 25 5 M5 ke Y d s 30 5 2 x x 8 1x 8 e Ki S e Y 2 Y 3 POLES 4 POLES 6 38 1SDC210168F0001 l 27 3 2 7 105 5 5 S D x L Y 140 4P 1SDC210162F0001 Drilling templates of the compartment door 189 115 64 5 NE 1SDC210165F0001 Y With flange For rear terminals 5 5 M4 Y E 61 S ll X x8 xp y E Y 97 3 POLES el Kad U 1SDC210169F0001 1SDC210163F0001 107 60 5 1SDC210166F0001 eel Y Without flange 5 5 M5 Y N sl 30 5 96 Qu 1 3 UI x S I E E N Y 48 5 132 4 POLES 1SDC210170F0001 1SDC210015D0205 Terminals Caption e For Cu cables 2 For Cu Al cables 3 High terminal covers with degree of protection IP40 Front extended EF 209 105 3P 52 5 35 35 35 Y eo lt e 9 3 o8 Front for copper cables FC Cu or for copper aluminium cables FC CuAI
369. lected with In 160 A and the following adjustment carried out 0 85 x In 136 A The second step is to select the trip class according to the motor starting time For a motor with a start up overload of 6 seconds class 10 can be selected with a trip time of 8s at 7 2 x To trace the curve correctly on the glossy sheet according to l In simply place the glossy sheet over the graph of function L so that I In 0 85 on the glossy sheet corresponds to 1 1 1 on the graph and draw the curve relative to class 10 Function R can be excluded Protection against rotor blockage Protection against rotor blockage can be set both with regard to the trip current 3 10 x in this case 3 10 x 0 85 x 160 and with regard to the trip time t To trace the curve correctly on the glossy sheet simply place the glossy sheet over the graph of function R so that l In In on the glossy sheet corresponds to 1 1 1 on the graph In this case Vin In 0 85 and draw the desired curve Function cannot be excluded Protection against short circuit This protection function against short circuit recognises whether the motor is in the starting phase thereby avoiding unwarranted trips the trip threshold can be set from 6 x In to 13 x In To trace the curve correctly on the glossy sheet simply place the glossy sheet over the graph of function so that I In 1 on the glossy sheet corresponds to l In 1 on the g
370. ly in direct current DC k 2 1 1 a d A d KO2 KC2N kor D 2 Z 2 3 3 3 WW d T K02N KC2N KO KO 4 4 4 4 E e 6 ENE ET CB E C CB N C CB E O cg E c E ko2 KC2N KO K N 4 44 4 p 12 M 6 6 6 X vi S XAB 5 AS L4 E ese KEE E E qp XV LJ e LJ i i xve Li LJ i i A17 A17 3 3 se soh i D lt D al Ree 2 a LL aus NI i Q21 Gli i A1 Al A E fos FUN L 02 KC2 KOI KCI i WM us i i MJ T i A2 A A2 A sv DF gt E l S5 R N S3 S xve xve i e Lene L F T L E 3 XA8 1 XA8 1 N 8 A n n n 2 5 33 1SDC210015D0205 Wiring diagrams Automatic transfer switch ATSO10 for T7 Automatic transfer switch ATS010 for the automatic transfer switch of the two T7 circuit breakers without safety auxiliary voltage supply EMERGENCY SUPPLY NORMAL SUPPLY N Lt 12 L3 N L 12 L3 9 Q61 2 5 GI 5 4 3 e
371. ly on the circuit breaker once the residual current release has been mounted thereby ensuring simplifica tion and rationalisation of the installation procedure With Tmax T2 and T3 only front terminals for copper cables FC Cu at the bottom are mounted on the residual current releases For this reason when the residual current release is ordered the FC Cu terminal semi kit is always supplied consult the code section on page 7 36 On the other hand for four pole Tmax T1 it is also possible to mount the rear horizontal flat terminal kit below HR for RC221 RC222 Furthermore still for four pole T1 a version of the RC222 residual current release is available in 200 mm modules This release keeps the same technical characteristics as the normal RC222 for T1 T2 and T3 but thanks to its reduced height allows installation in 200 mm modules Its special shape also allows a reduction in the overall dimensions when two or more units are placed side by side The bracket for fixing onto DIN 50022 rail is available on request A circuit breaker cannot have the residual current release and the overlaid solenoid operator or the rotary handle operating mechanism mounted at the same time RC222 residual current release for T4 and T5 The RC222 release for T4 and T5 is available in the four pole version and is mounted below the circuit breaker The release is supplied with standard front terminals but it can also be combined with all the terminals
372. m Ka F T3 Plugs with screws 051478 051479 051476 051477 E M N F T4 Plugs with screws 054976 054977 054974 054975 F T5 Plugs with screws 055012 055013 055010 055011 F T6 630 800 Plugs with screws 060421 060422 060423 060424 F T7 T7M Plugs with screws 063099 063100 063101 063102 To be requested as loose kit Front extended spread terminals ES Type 1SDA R1 3 pieces 4 pieces 6 pieces 8 pieces ES T2 051470 051471 051468 051469 ES T3 051494 051495 051492 051493 ES T4 055004 055005 055002 055003 ES T5 055040 055041 055038 055039 ES T6 1 2 upper kit 050692 ES T6 1 2 lower kit 050704 ES T6 050693 050688 050689 ES T7 T7M 1 2 upper kit 063107 ES T7 T7M 1 2 lower kit 063108 ES T7 T7M 063109 063110 063111 see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 57 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210389F0004 1SDC210395F0004 1SDC210C50F0001 1SDC210N91F0004 1SDC210N92F0004 7 58 Ordering codes Accessories Front terminals for copper cables FC Cu Type 1SDA R1 3 pieces 4 pieces 6 pieces 8 pieces FC Cu T2 051454 051455 051452 051453 FC Cu T3 051482 051483 051480 051481 FC Cu T4 1x185mm 054980 054981 054978 054979 FC Cu T5 400 1x240mm 055016 055017 055014 055015 FC Cu T5 630 2x240mm 055364 055365 055362 055363 Rear terminals for copper aluminium cables RC CuAI Type 1SDA R1 3 pieces 4 pieces 6 pieces 8 pieces RC CuAI T6 630 2x240mm
373. m NT Y H i D 7 mi E d i e a E D T LI SES a S 7 B fo e a B Z S CH 3 8 E Yay E 8 u sw TE 3 2 6 59 1SDC210015D0205 Fixed version T4 Overall dimensions Circuit breaker with RC222 residual current release Tmax T4 T5 Front F fixing on sheet T5 400 A 186 Ts 69 75 2 103 5 E m 46 5 46 5 46 5 S 20 MAX8 gNm 17 5 20 LT eO 9 E 19 iO 105 T i S d x S X 305 N N x eC Cc 272 5 1SDC210K01F0001 Caption D Overall dimensions with cabled auxiliary contacts mounted only 3Q 1SY For T5 630 A ask ABB SACE 6 60 a E e zZ N E pO 99990299 E LJL ES MAX 358 zg Flange for the Drilling templates of compartment door compartment door and fitting flange 1 w 117 Y Y WRC i D Ko o o 8 p 4x Xy 4X x eo re x S x X56 X 8 3 5 2 Y 2 M 7 Kear 8 Ou
374. max T4 T5 T6 Tmax T7 Version AC VA DC W AC VA DC W AC VA DC W 12V DC 50 150 24 V AC DC 300 300 24 30 V AC DC 50 50 150 150 30 V AC DC 300 300 48 V AC DC 300 300 48 60 V AC DC 60 60 150 150 60 V AC DC 300 300 110 120 V AC DC 300 300 120 127 V AC DC 300 300 110 127 V AC 110 125 V DC 50 50 150 150 220 240 V AC DC 300 300 220 240 V AC 220 250 V DC 50 50 150 150 240 250 V AC DC 300 300 380 400 V AC 300 380 440 V AC 55 150 415 440 V AC 300 480 525 V AC 55 150 Opening times ms 15 15 15 15 50 50 3 16 1SDC210015D0205 bili E 3 a d 1SDC210D18F0001 1SDC210C56F0001 Shunt opening release with permanent service PS SOR Furthermore for T4 T5 and T6 opening coils with permanent service PS SOR are available with much lower power consumption and which can be supplied continuously in this case in fact they are not fitted with auxiliary limit contact The pre cabled or uncabled version can be chosen for these coils as well PS SOR Electrical characteristics Tmax T4 T5 T6 Version AC VA DC W 24 V AC DC 4 4 110 120V AC 4 SOR Test Unit The SOR Test Unit control monitoring unit allows correct operation of the shunt opening releases which can be mounted on the Tmax from T1 T7 circuit breaker to be verified to guarantee a high level of reliability for the circuit breaker opening command The SOR Test Unit control monitoring u
375. measurement function are present Voltage phase phase phase neutral and residual voltage Instantaneous values of voltages during a period of time data logger Power active reactive and apparent Power factor Frequency and peak factor Energy active reactive apparent counter Communication PR332 P electronic trip unit can be fitted with communication modules which make possible to exchange data and information with other industrial electronic devices by means of a network The basic communication protocol implemented is Modbus RTU a well known standard of wide spread use in industrial automation and power distribution equipment A Modbus RTU communica tion interface can be connected immediately and exchange data with the wide range of industrial devices featuring the same protocol ABB SACE has developed a complete series of accessories for electronic trip unit PR332 P PRG330 D M is the communication module for PR332 P protection trip units It is designed to allow easy integration of the Tmax circuit breakers in a Modbus network The Modbus RTU protocol is of widespread use in the power as well as the automation industry It is based on a master slave architecture with a bandrate of up to 19 2 kbps A standard Modbus network is easily wired up and configured by means of an RS485 physical layer ABB SACE trip units work as slaves in the field bus network All information required for simple integration
376. min JF B R 200 min NU 2 With flange Without flange Drilling template for support sheet B A 955 M5 Y 5 5 M5 R D X o C w LU o Lu E X X X X M Lu AX egal ES Z e Ki K amp 85 70 175 8 B Y S T i SE E ES 3 POLES 4 POLES 6 72 1SDC210015D0205 Caption O Interlocking mechanism Circuit breaker coupling plate 330 500 470 z 25 j E eae 9 99 F od A fin EP 3 KE T I t to 6 KA Si E Caption 0 Drilling template for all versions with rear terminals 295 65 d K d de 1SDC210K83F0001 470 235 97 Z E TZ P R10 Q o k P We u 210 15 Lit X Xm d 7 210 9 Y Ir re o Lys JX Interlock between two circuit breakers placed side by side 1SDC210K82F0001 Drilling templates for fixing the circuit breaker on the support sheet 1SDC210K84F0001 6 73 1SDC210015D0205 Fixed version Overall dimensions Accessories for Tmax T4 T5 Interlock between two circuit breakers placed side by side
377. mitted remotely opening and closing commands to be carried out by means of the electronic version motor operator the configuration and programming parameters of the unit to be stored such as the current thresholds of the protection functions and the protection curves All the information can be consulted both locally directly on the front of the circuit breaker with the front display unit FDU or on the HMIOSO switchgear multi meter and remotely by means of supervi sion and control systems Moreover by means of the BTO30 external module to be connected to the test connector of the PR222DS PD trip unit wireless communication to a PDA or Notebook is possible through a Blue tooth port The PR222DS PD trip units can be associated with the AUX E auxiliary contacts in electronic ver sion to know the state of the circuit breaker open closed and with MOE E motor operator the AUX E are compulsory when MOE E is to be used to remotely control circuit breaker opening and closing as well If the circuit breaker fitted with the PR222DS PD trip unit is inserted in a supervision system during the test phases with the PRO10 T unit communication is automatically abandoned and starts again on completion of this operation 2 17 1SDC210015D0205 Circuit breakers for power distribution Electronic trip units Communication functions PR222DS P PR222DS PD PR223DS Protocol Modbus
378. n 200 TIG P K 36 190 8 zi 8 i IV E 160 230 EM 206 276 Drilling templates for support sheet 219 289 Y AA gt 3205 UE E a iom mE E m L kat sE gt 9 8 un 3 l s ts rn Z X Z D 3 P e Ei S 2 8 lt S Y CO 8 8 Y A H 5 A Y E E 6 85 1SDC210015D0205 Caption Mechanical vertical interlock for fixed circuit breakers 4 Mechanical horizontal interlock for fixed circuit breakers 5 Sheet drilling for wire passage of the mechanical interlock 6 86 1000 MAX Overall dimensions Accessories for Tmax T7 L R70 MIN 50 1000 MAX Mechanical interlock for fixed circuit breakers Ern HERE Ern
379. n Rotary handle operating mechanism on circuit breaker e Rotary handle operating 157 5 mechanism on circuit 112 5 breaker 76 2 CH 67 7 28 532 605 bt 1SDC210K42F0001 1SDC210K43F0001 1 1 Nm 23 108 2 Drilling template of the compartment door Flange for the compartment door st p Ser ES Drilling see Det A gt 20 5 14 J d S 5 86 TE aed E Y 3 S L T 9 8 I am DET A d N S 2 Ke R x XL Ly X8 M B Y 8 81 S R min 200 E 6 66 1SDC210015D0205 Mechanical interlock between circuit breakers Front interlocking plate between two circuit breakers 305 3 110 5 92 81 MIN RS e z Sl X r x o g 7 E w H 2 1 1 Nm A B Caption B C A D 307 Drilling templates of the Y d 153 5 153 5 compartment door Ps 1 i N Y Ww UL 2 Drilling templates for sup SX X g X X port sheet ul u Z T i Z 2 3 Y N 4 5 M4 Y Red 9 Front interlocking plate between three circuit breakers 470 8 110 5 165 1SDC210K50F0001
380. n be reduced and cable and busbar siz ing can be optimised And the outcome Considerable reductions in plant costs NEW PR223DS TRIP UNIT FREEDOM OF CONTROL The new PR223DS trip unit has been conceived and built for power distribution circuit breakers Now all the different electrical values of the installation can be measured And that s not all there are LEDs available on the front of the trip unit which signal some configura tions and the presence of any alarms over load incorrect connections etc TMAX T7 FREEDOM TO THE N POWER The new Tmax T7 available in two versions up to 1600 A either A great news is the new rapid accessory wiring system No wires with manual operating mechanism or motor operator was con inside the circuit breaker rapid simple and safe connection to ceived with a really revolutionary design for circuit breakers of the external circuit and no screws for fixing the external power this type advanced electronics exceptional performances and supply cables new installation and accessory fitting solutions The exclusive news of the new cable interlock provides notable Flexibility is absolutely exceptional with Tmax T7 they can be benefits in terms of optimal sizing By using this accessory it is installed both vertically and horizontally in the withdrawable possible to interlock two circuit breakers in any position and version too there are all types of terminals am
381. n trips instantaneously in case of a short circuit The protection can be excluded G Protection against earth fault The protection against earth fault trips when the vectorial sum of the currents passing through the current sensors exceeds the set threshold value with long inverse time delay trip Ptzk ON or a constant trip time Ptk OFF The protection can be excluded Advanced protection functions IEC 60255 3 The PR332 P trip unit makes it possible to carry out highly developed protection against the most varied types of fault In fact it adds the following advanced protection functions to the basic protection functions L Protection against overload IEC 60255 3 This protection trips in case of an overload with inverse long time delay according to IEC 60255 3 Standard for the coordination with fuses and MV protections The protection can be excluded U Protection against unbalanced phase The protection function against unbalanced phase U can be used in those cases where a particularly precise control is needed regarding missing and or unbalance of the phase currents The trip time is instantaneous The protection can be excluded OT Protection against overtemperature The protection against overtemperature trips instantaneously when the temperature inside the trip unit exceeds 85 C in order to prevent any temporary or continual malfunction of the microprocessor The protection cannot be excluded Rc Pr
382. naling circuit breaker racked in racked out Early auxiliary contacts AUE Type 1SDA R1 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 AUE early contacts 051374 054925 060394 062112 Note On the T7 the anticipated auxiliary contacts AUE can only be ordered already installed on the circuit breaker For T7 in withdrawable version sliding contact blocks for fixed and moving part are necessary See page 3 4 and 7 43 Adapters ADP Type 1SDA R1 T4 T5 T6 ADP Adapters 5pin 055173 ADP Adapters 6pin 054922 ADP Adapters 12pin 054923 ADP Adapters 10pin 054924 Testing extension Type 1SDA R1 T4 T5 T6 5pin checking extension for blanck tests on T4 T5 T6 P W service releases 055351 6pin checking extension for blanck tests on T4 T5 T6 P W auxiliary contacts 1 1 service and residual current releases 055063 12pin checking extension for blanck tests on T4 T5 T6 P W auxiliary contacts 3 1 055064 10pin checking extension for blanck tests on T4 T5 T6 P W motor operator and early contacts 055065 Trip reset Type 1SDA R1 T7M Trip reset 24 30 V AC DC 063554 Trip reset 110 130 V AC DC 062118 Trip reset 200 240 V AC DC 062119 Note For T7 T7M in withdrawable version sliding contact blocks for fixed and moving part are necessary See page 3 4 and 7 43 see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210207F0004 1SDC210N79F0001 1SDC200580F0001 1SDC
383. nals 1 and 2 or 3 of current transformer UI O and poles T7 and T8 of the X or XV connector must be made with a two pole shielded and stranded cable see user manual no more than 15 m long The shield must be earthed on the circuit breaker side and current sensor side With PR332 P trip unit the connections to the zone selectivity inputs and outputs must be made with a two pole shielded and stranded cable see user manual no more than 300 m long The shield must be earthed on the selectivity input side Systems with rated voltage greater than 690V require the use of an insulation voltage trans former to connect to the busbars With PR332 P trip unit with communication module PR330 D M the coils YO and YC can be controlled directly from contacts K51 YO and K51 YC with maximum voltages of 110 120 V DC e 240 250 V AC The second opening release may be installed as an alternative to the undervoltage re lease The SACE SOR TEST UNIT opening release YO is guaranteed to operate starting at 75 of the Vaux of the opening release itself While the YO power supply contact is closing short circuit on terminals 4 and 5 the SACE SOR TEST UNIT is unable to detect the opening coil status Consequently For continuously powered opening coil the TEST FAILED and ALARM signals will be activated Ifthe coil opening command is of the pulsing type the TEST FAILED signal may appear at the same time In this case the TEST FAILED s
384. nals of the circuit breaker for use in networks with line voltages up to 690 V 2 Module with external voltage sockets with connection through the circuit breaker terminal box and voltage transformers for connections to the bottom terminals or for use in networks with line voltages higher than 690 V The new module will only be available mounted inside the circuit breaker The PR332 P LSIRc PR333 P LSI and PR333 P LSIG protection trip units are supplied as standard with the internal voltage sockets the external voltage sockets can be requested by specifying the relative extracode together with the circuit breaker code PR330 D M communication module Modbus RTU The PR330 D M communication module is the solution for connecting Tmax to a Modbus network for remote supervision and control of the circuit breaker It is suitable for the PR332 P trip unit for T7 As for the PR330 V this module can be added to the protection trip unit and its presence is recognised automatically The electronic trip unit is supplied with three LEDs on the front Power power supply LED which indicates the presence of auxiliary power supply to the PR333 D M module Tx data transmission LED Rx data reception LED PR330 R Actuator module The PR830 R actuator module is fitted in the right slot of T7 and it is used for opening for T7 with lever operating mechanism it is allowed only the opening operation and closing th
385. nd simplicity for installation Harmonisation of the accessories allows reduction in stocks and greater service flexibility offering increasing advantages for users of the Tmax series new system of rapid assembly for internal electrical accessories of Tmax T7 without cables for the connections to the terminal box same possibility of equipping with accessories in terms of connection devices terminals terminal covers and phase separators between fixed circuit breakers and fixed parts of plug in circuit breakers for Tmax T2 and T3 moreover Tmax offers a wide choice of residual current releases 1 2 three pole and four pole RC221 and RC222 up to 250 A with T1 T2 and T3 RC222 placed below four pole up to 500 A for T4 and T5 RC223 type B also sensitive to currents with continuous slowly variable components IEC 60947 2 Annex M four pole for T3 and T4 up to 250 A integrated residual current protection for PR332 P LSIRc trip unit available for Tmax T7 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210A37F0001 Compliance with Standards and company quality system Tmax circuit breakers and their accessories comply with the international IEC 60947 2 Standards and the EC directive Low Voltage Directives LVD no 2006 95 CE replaces 72 23 EEC and subsequent amend ments Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive EMC no 89 336 EEC Certification of compliance with the product Standards mentioned above is carried out in a
386. nd to the electromagnetic components in conformity with the standards on the matter The power supply needed for correct operation is supplied directly by the current sensors of the release and tripping is always guaranteed even under single phase load conditions and in corre spondence with the minimum setting Characteristics of the Tmax electronic trip units Operating temperature 25 C 70 C Relative humidity 98 Self supply 0 2 x In single phase Auxiliary power supply where applicable 24V DC Operating frequency 45 66 Hz Electromagnetic compatibility LF and HF IEC 60947 2 Annex F For Tmax T2 T4 T5 and T6 the protection trip unit consists of 3 or 4 current sensors current transformers external current sensors e g for the external neutral when available atrip unit atrip coil for T2 housed in the right slot for T4 T5 and T6 integrated in the electronic trip unit For Tmax T7 the protection trip unit consists of 3 or 4 current sensors Rogowski coils and current transformers external current sensors e g for the external neutral interchangeable rating plug atrip unit atrip coil housed in the body of the circuit breaker Rating plugs Circuit breaker CS Rated In A current 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600 T 800 9 EE RE EGER 1000 Sa SSS L L 1250 mem mz mz L S 1600 ES A E The current sensors supply the electronic tri
387. nections for each type of ter minal is summarised For connection with bare cables the minimum and maximum cross sections of the cables which can be clamped in the terminals the type of cables rigid or flexible and the diameter of the terminal are indicated For connections with busbars flat terminals of different sizes and composition are recommended The torque values to be applied to the tightening screws of the terminals for cables and to the screws used to connect the busbars to the flat terminals are indicated The circuit breakers can be ordered complete with the terminals required mounted directly in the factory by associating the terminal kit codes with the code of the standard version circuit breaker or the terminals can be ordered individually in packs of 3 4 6 or 8 pieces To receive the circuit breaker with mixed terminals the two terminal half kits must be specified loading the one to be mounted on top as the first half kit and then the one to be mounted below If the top terminals are the same as the bottom ones it is compulsory to order the complete kit 6 or 8 pieces and not the two half kits the configuration would not be accepted by the system Insulating terminal covers The terminal covers are applied to the circuit breaker to prevent accidental contact with live parts and thereby guarantee protection against direct contacts The following are available low terminal covers LTC these guarantee IP30 de
388. ng mechanism version and for the motor opera tor one The following interlocking combinations can be made IO OI OO 1SDC210015D0205 S a 2 a 9 Transparent pushbutton protection TCP A transparent protection for the circuit breaker opening and closing pushbuttons is available in two different versions on T7 with stored energy operating mechanism one which protects both the push buttons and the other which alternatively protects either the opening or the closing pushbutton There is the possibility of putting a padlock which adds the lock function to the protection In the closed position this lock does not prevent release of the mechanism following a fault or a remote command IP54 door protection Available with T7 motorizable it is made by means of a transparent plastic cover which completely protects the front of the circuit breaker and allows IP54 degree of protection to be reached Mounted on hinges it is provided with a key lock 3 35 1SDC210015D0205 3 36 Accessories Residual current releases All the Tmax series of circuit breakers both automatic circuit breakers and switch disconnectors are preset for combined assembly with residual current releases In particular the Tmax T1 T2 and T3 circuit breakers can be combined with the new version of the SACE RC221 or RC222 series of residual current releases and four pole T4 and T5 with RC222 or RC223 to be installed below the circu
389. ng of curves and protection thresholds Oo Synchronize system time Oo L Events Status changes in circuit breaker protections and all alarms L L with PR330 V no residual voltage H no apparent power available please ask ABB for further details 2 33 1SDC210015D0205 2 34 Circuit breakers for power distribution Electronic trip units Power supply The PR332 P trip unit does not normally require any external power supplies being self supplied from the current sensors CS to activate the protection and ammeter functions it is sufficient for at least one phase to have a current load higher than 80 A The unit ensures fully self supplied operation When an auxiliary power supply is present it is also possible to use the unit with the circuit breaker either open or closed with very low current flowing through 80 A It is also possible to use an auxiliary power supply provided by the PROSO B portable battery unit always supplied which allows the protection functions to be set when the trip unit is not self sup plied PR332 P stores and shows all the information needed after a trip protection tripped trip current time date No auxiliary supply is required for this functionality PR332 P PR330 D M Auxiliary power supply galvanically insulated 24 V DC 20 from PR332 P Maximum ripple 596 5 Inrush current 24 V 3 A for 5 ms 0 5 A for 5 ms Rated power 24 V 2 W 1 W Inrush current
390. ng templates of the compartment door 24 1SDC210J23F0001 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210J17F0001 Terminals Front for copper cables FC Cu Front for copper aluminium cables FC CuAl Front EF 84 1000462r0lzOdst x 8v S VOL 100082r0L2OQSL UN6 x dh 36 84 d e T 18 SL UZ 31 Nm 400042 rolzodst x 8v SEUL 000492rOLZOASL x lt 30 18 x18 10 Nm 6L Sci L0004S2l0L2OQS L x S POL Sc TEEN x 100048 l 0LcOQS Ki d lt o S O amp gt LI LO g x spor 602 100039 OLeOGS
391. nit allows continuity of the shunt opening releases with a rated service voltage between 24 V and 250 V AC and DO to be verified as well as operation of the electronic circuit of the opening coil The check of continuity is carried out cyclically at an interval of 20 seconds between one test and the next The unit has LED optic signals on the front which provide the following information POWER ON presence of power supply YO TESTING test being carried out TEST FAILED indication following a failed test or lack of auxiliary power supply ALARM signalling after three failed tests There are also two relays and a changeover switch available on board the unit which allow the fol lowing two events to be signalled remotely failure of a test resetting takes place automatically when the alarm goes off failure of three tests resetting only takes place by means of the manual RESET from the front of the unit Characteristics Auxiliary power supply 24 V 250 V AC DC Maximum interrupted current 6A Maximum interrupted voltage 250 V AC Shunt closing release SCR The shunt closing release only available on the motorizable versions of Tmax T7 allows remote closure of the circuit breaker when the circuit breaker closing springs are charged The technical characteristics and the service voltages of the shunt closing release are identical to those of the shunt opening release available on T7 The closing time of the
392. nits MA magnetic only trip units or PR221DS PR222DS P PR222DS PD PR222MP and PR223DS electronic trip units Similarly Tmax T7 can also mount the latest generation PR231 P PR232 P PR331 P and PR332 P electronic trip units Trip units Circuit breakers TMD TMA TMG In A 20 32 50 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 400 500 630 800 320 400 500 T4 250 m m m B E E E B HE T4 320 A A A A A A A A A T5 400 B E A A T5 630 A A BH A A A T6 630 L T6 800 E T6 1000 T7 800 T7 1000 T7 1250 T7 1600 E Complete circuit breaker already coded If ordered loose PR331 P and PR332 P must be completed with the trip unit adapters A Circuit breaker to be assembled see page 3 42 2 6 1SDC210015D0205 Range of application of the circuit breakers in alternating current and in direct current AC Trip unit Range A T1 1p 160 TMF 16 160 T1 160 TMD 16 160 T2 160 TMD 1 6 160 TMG 16 160 MF MA 1 100 PR221DS 10 160 PR221GP 63 160 PR221MP 40 100 T3 250 TMG 63 250 TMD 63 250 MA 100 200 T4 250 320 TMD 20 50 TMA 80 250 MA 10 200 PR221DS 100 320 PR222DS P PR222DS PD 100 320 PR223DS 160 320 T5 400 630 TMG 320 500 TMA 320 500 PR221DS 320 630 PR222DS P PR222DS PD 320 630 PR223DS 320 630 T6 630 800 1000 TMA 630 800 PR221DS 630 1000 PR222DS P PR222DS PD 630 1000 PR22
393. nnected to earth the installation method must be such as to make the probability of a second earth fault nil Diagram B Interruption with two poles in series for one polarity and one pole for the other polarity d o o o X x e e 2 Load E gd Note With negative polarity not connected to earth the installation method must be such as to make the probability of a second earth fault nil Diagram C Interruption with three poles in series for polarity b B xX xX S Y Y T S Load amp 4 67 1SDC210015D0205 4 68 Special applications Use of direct current apparatus Diagram D Interruption with four poles in series for one polar ity for use at 1000 V DC a at e at Load Diagram E Interruption with three poles in series on one polarity and one pole on the remaining polarity i A L 2 o o o o X X xX Y Y S t Load Note With negative polarity not connected to earth the installation method musi Diagram F Interruption with two poles in series for polarity be such as to make the probability of a second earth fault nil N dai b b o o o o o X X t T Y 2 Load Note With negative polarity not
394. nstantaneous trip I 1 5 2 5 3 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 5 7 7 5 8 9 9 5 10 5 12 x In instantaneous a t k Electronic setting l 2 1 5 12xIn9 step 0 1 x In Tolerance 10 Against earth fault with Manual setting Manual setting inverse short time delay 0 2 0 25 0 45 0 55 0 75 0 8 up to up to up to up to e trip and trip characteristic 1xIn 3 15xl 225xl 16xl 1 10xl according to an inverse time t 0 1s t 02s t 0 4s t 0 80s D t po curve I t k A Electronic setting Electronic setting 0 2 1 xin step 0 1 x In t 0 1 0 8s step 0 01s Tolerance 10 Tolerance 15 0 These tolerances hold in the following conditions For T4 In 320 A T5 In 630 A and T6 In 1000 A gt t 10 5s self powered trip unit at full power and or auxiliary supply 9 For T4 In 320 A and T5 In 630 A T6 In 1000 A I max 9 5 x In and Imax 9 5 x In two or three phase power supply For T6 In 800 A max 10 5 x In In conditions other than those considered the following tollerances hold Tolerance 10 ms The setting of the PR223DS trip unit is electronic only local remote Trip threshold Trip time The L protection can be set at I 0 18 1 x In For lt 0 4 x In the neutral setting must be at S 2096 x 2096 10096 of that of the phases t 2 ji H d d 1 20 50ms t K up to the current value indicated t k equating to the chosen setting beyond the current value indicated G 2096 x 2096 2 20 1SDC2
395. ntact terminal QQQOOW 6 30 Overall dimensions Tmax T7M Front extended spread ES Front extended EF 00 40 5 lt eo x i es C uM TEE E o P D X fi GE a SS ren i 7 wo Leg N SC 0 FE a 3 2 EN o a Ne WS i ola 9 E Sk 23 co o C 1SDC210M01F0001 1SDC210M02F0001 1SDC210015D0205 Terminals Caption O Front terminals for cable FC CuAl Tightening torque 43 Nm Tightening torque 18 Nm Protection plate Front for copper aluminium cables FC CuAl 2x240 mm ele je OO eel ej Y ER Front for copper aluminium cables FC CuAl 4x240 mm 320 250 X 101 L 1 ED SS de Bi 3 I X 6 31 1SDC210015D0205
396. nual setting instantaneous trip a 6 13 x In step 1 x In Tolerance 15 instantaneous t k Electronic setting 6 13 x In step 0 1 x In Tolerance 15 Against phase current Manual setting Manual setting unbalance or loss of b ON 0 4 x L OFF t 4s phase with delayed trip Tolerance 15 Tolerance 10 and trip characteristic with t k definite time Electronic setting Electronic setting 0 These tolerances hold in the following conditions Available in auxiliary supply at 24 V DC Full power t t Start up t lt L t Trip threshold Trip time R 20 20 I x 2096 lt 50ms U 20 20 2 56 1SDC210015D0205 Circuit breakers for use up to 1150 V AC and 1000 V DC Index Circuit breakers for use up to 1150 V AC and 1000 V DC Electrical characteristics 2 59 1SDC210015D0205 Circuit breakers for use up to 1150 V AC and 1000 V DC Electrical characteristics The range of T4 T5 and T6 circuit breakers for applications in direct current at 1000 V or in alternating current up to 1150 V T6 up to 1000 V also comes into the panorama of the Tmax proposals The typical sectors of use are installations in mines road and railway tunnels electrical transport and industrial applications in general The circuit breakers are available in the three pole and four pole version with TMD or TMA adjustable thermomagnetic releases or with PR221DS PR222DS P PR22
397. o T2 g LLL j i I Lee l l 3d x3 4 TI L3 J FDU j ll x3 31 l S T N KEE SAN E EE 1 DNUS NUR INUENIRI zi l ES n A B ji i Wi AT x3 D di l YO S51 ME oq l PR2220S PD l 24V l PR2230S i PR223EF EEUU MOOD EN 1SDC210G14F0001 5 22 1SDC210015D0205 PR222MP electronic trip unit connected with the PRO21 K signalling unit 47 EE TTT i x K51 Io A13 1 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 l na xs a ey JA T L2 xs s Ll K51 K51 K K51 K51 Kai K51 K51 AS J i 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 S TI L3 x32 II s EES i h x 2 I 2 1 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 10 xd Ge ER l x3 d YO1 S51 1 5 j xoT2 5 24V _ PR222MP l I ii LE E isle o d 8 I 8 3 PR222MP electronic trip unit connected with the PRO21 K signalling unit and with the PR212 CI contactor control unit d L1 L2 L3 o GE T 7 S T A13 rae Ac K51 e 1 3 15 17 19 21 23 2 x3 E L x3 5 d I E B S e L KIN S E e gt x3 2 8 P ji weit i A x3 y
398. o adapt the residual current device to the various industrial plant requirements according to the frequency of prospective faults generated on the load side of the release Typical installations which may require fault frequency thresholds other than the standard ones 50 60 Hz are welding plants for the automobile industry 1000 Hz textile industry 700 Hz airports and three phase drives 400 Hz A circuit breaker cannot have the residual current release and the motor operator mounted at the same time The RC223 residual current release for T3 has front terminals by default For connection of the T3 and RC223 assembly use the following on the top terminals of the CB terminal kit available for size T3 on the bottom terminals of the CB terminal kit available for size T4 3 37 1SDC210015D0205 Accessories Residual current releases HC221 HC222 RC223 Circuit breakers size T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 Feist a Type L shaped L shaped Placed below Placed below Technology microprocessor based microprocessor based microprocessor based microprocessor based Action with trip coil with trip coil with trip coil with trip coil Primary service voltage 85 500 85 500 85 500 110 500 Operating frequency Hz 50 609 50 609 50 609 50 609 Fault frequency Hz 0 400 0 700 0 1000 Self supply a L E EI Te
399. o the IEC 60068 2 27 Standard to resist shocks up to 12g for 11 ms Please ask ABB SACE for higher performances in terms of resist ance to shocks 9 Ask to ABB for Tmax certificates of approval 1SDC210015D0205 Versions and types All the Tmax circuit breakers are available in fixed versions T2 T3 T4 and T5 in the plug in version and T4 T5 T6 and T7 also in the withdrawable one All the circuit breakers can be manually operated by the operating lever or the rotary handle direct or transmitted and electrically operated For this issue different solutions are available The solenoid operator for T1 T2 and T3 The stored energy motor operator for T4 T5 and T6 T7 with the stored energy operating mechanism gear motor for the automatic charging of the closing springs and shunt opening and closing releases 1SDC210A40F0001 1SDC210A41F0001 Installation Tmax circuit breakers can be installed in the switchboards mounted in any horizontal vertical or lying down position on the back plate or on rails without undergoing any derating of their rated characteristics Tmax circuit breakers can be installed easily in all types of switchboards above all thanks to the possibility of being supplied either by top or bottom terminals without jeopardizing the apparatus functionality Apart from fixing on the base plate T1 T2 and T3 can also be installed on DIN 50022 rails thanks to the special fixing brackets
400. odule For all versions TT According to IEC 60255 3 2 14 1SDC210015D0205 PR221DS The PR221DS trip unit available for T2 T4 T5 and T6 provides protection functions against overload L and short circuit S I version PR221DS LS I with this version by moving the dedicated dip switch you can choose whether to have inverse time delay S or instantaneous protection against short circuit Alternatively the version with only the protection function against instantaneous short circuit is available version PR221DS l also see page 2 45 and following There is a single adjustment for the phases and the neutral However for the neutral it can be decided whether to request the protection threshold of the functions at 50 10096 of that of the phases for Tmax T2 In 160 A T2 In 160 A N 100 whereas for T4 T5 and T6 it is possible to select the protection threshold OFF 50 or 100 directly from the front of the trip unit by means of the specific dip switch The trip coil is always supplied with the PR221DS trip unit for Tmax T2 and is housed in the right hand slot of the circuit breaker Dedicated auxiliary contacts are available for T2 with electronic trip unit see page 3 22 For Tmax T4 T5 and T6 the opening solenoid is housed internally and therefore by not using the right hand slot of the circuit breaker all the auxiliary contacts available can be used PR221DS LS I Protection S Against short cir
401. of measurements as shown in the table Measurement With N Without N Effective current values Eech mm Effective voltage values Vas VON Vias Vos Vas Viar Vos Va Apparent powers Su Bun 93 Ds Sa Active powers c Pas PaPa EN Reactive powers Qor Qr Q Q Qio Power factors cos cos Active energy Oo E Reactive energy R Apparent energy E E Frequency E r1 Peak factors E E Circuit breaker state Protection function parameters Oo EI Trip warnings and alarms only with Vaux Phase 1 2 3 and N trip current E E Protection tripped L S EF G D Current levels and trip times L S EF G only PR223EF VM210 The VM210 accessory combined with the PR223DS and PR223EF trip units for T4 T5 and T6 is able to provide the various measurements of the electrical values of the plant The VM210 can provide the measurements relative to a maximum of 5 PR223DS or PR223EF trip units The maximum connection distance between the module and the trip unit is 15 meters For distances longer than 1 meters a shielded multi core cable must be used VM210 Conditions of use Values Power supply 24 V DC 20 Ripple 5 Operating Temp 25 C 70 C Relative humidity 5 98 Certifications Product IEC 60068 Electromagnetic compatibility IEC 61000 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210D33F0001 1SDC21028FF0001 1SDC210D32F0001 1SDC210D31F0001 HMI0
402. omax S and Tmax moulded case circuit breakers and SACE Emax air circuit breakers In particular for Tmax T4 T5 T6 and T7 circuit breakers fitted with the different versions of trip units the test programming and parameter reading functions are available All the functions mentioned can be carried out ON BOARD by connecting the SACE PRO10 T unit to the front multi pin connector on the protection units Special interfacing cables supplied as standard with the unit guarantee the connection The human machine interface is ensured by using a membrane keypad and a multi line alphanu merical display There are also two LEDs on the unit which indicate respectively POWER ON and STAND BY state state of the battery charge Two different types of test are provided manual and automatic By means of connection to a computer with the software supplied by ABB SACE it is possible to upgrade the software of the SACE PRO10 T unit to allow upgrading of the test unit as new products are developed The results of greatest interest regarding the test can moreover be stored in the unit itself and sent to the PC on specific request for issue of report In automatic and manual mode the SACE PRO10 T unit can test protection functions L S G protection functions L R I U for PR222MP monitoring correct operation of the microprocessor The SACE PRO10 T unit is portable operating with rechargeable batteries and or with
403. ong which flat above all to interlock a T7 with an air circuit breaker as well orientated rear terminals and a new faster and safer racking out Impossible until today this answer is ideal for automatic transfer system for the moving part Moreover cabling is considerably switch solutions facilitated by the reduced height Special attention has been paid to the electronics and the results are there to be seen PR231 PR232 PR331 and PR332 are the new interchangeable electronic trip units with modularity and rating plugs which can be replaced by the customer tm af nmn l mf Emi pa Be ge D wm s ka KI BPR BE mah apar bh SW zk TH es D ssar mrar UL athe RSS A T T ll Wil The PR231 and PR232 trip units with dip switches for setting the protection thresholds offer LEDs to signal protection tripped for each protection function this means the reason for circuit breaker tripping can always be found The PR332 is decidedly ahead of its time in the present refer ence panorama fitted with a large graphic display it allows all the information needed to be displayed simply and clearly It also offers advanced protection functions as well as the clas sic protection functions For example the exclusive data logger function allowing all the events and values before the fault to be recorded for later analysis Main characteristics Index Overview of the Tmax famil
404. ont extended EF e High terminal covers with Jagg qum degree of protection IPAO 46 5 46 5 46 5 Insulating barriers between 7 1 b eo 30 phases compulsory without 1 E Y S O11 ole 4 9 m S e AHA CH gt s he Y 6975 B ID L S 2 186 4P S Rear horizontal R 139 5 3P 103 5 Y li 46 5 46 5 46 5 30 er E e L on ka gii 2 oF D H ei S X IW E BI a ca 4 ce EN 5 e co 3 Q 4 2 Te Y S 8 1 69 75 B 186 4P 5 Caption Low terminal covers with degree of protection IP40 6 16 1SDC210H97F0001 1SDC210015D0205 Fixed circuit breaker Caption Overall dimensions with cabled accessories mounted SOR C UVR C 2 Overall dimensions with cabled auxiliary contacts mounted only 3Q 1SY Overall dimensions Tmax T6 Fixing on sheet Flange for the compartment door 77 75 138 152 E 1SDC210101F0001 1SDC210H98F0001 1SDC210H99F0001 Drilling templates of the compartment door 116 66 75 1SDC210102F0001 With flange 3 4 POLES Drilling templates for support sheet For front terminals E EF ES FC Cu FC CuAI 5 5 M5 Ea 237 70 N 118 5 A Y 2 POLES 1SDC210104F0001 ops M5 237 118 5 14
405. ontact blocks for fixed and moving part are necessary See page 3 4 and 7 43 see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 49 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210159F0004 1SDC210208F0004 T 1SDC210N81F0004 1SDC210158F0004 1SDC210209F0004 1SDC210N82F0004 AVI 1SDC210292F0023 7 50 Ordering codes Accessories Rotary handle operating mechanism Direct RHD Type 1SDA R1 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 RHD normal for fixed and plug in 051381 054926 060405 062120 RHD EM emergency for fixed and plug in 051382 054927 060406 062121 RHD normal for withdrawable 054928 060407 062120 RHD EM di emergency for withdrawable 055234 060408 062121 Transmitted RHE Type 1SDA R1 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 RHE normal for fixed and plug in 051383 054929 060409 062122 RHE EM emergency for fixed and plug in 051384 054930 060410 062123 RHE normal for withdrawable 054933 060411 062122 RHE EM di emergency for withdrawable 054934 060412 062123 Individual components RHE B just base for RHE for fixed and plug in 051385 054931 060413 062124 RHE_B just base for RHE withdrawable 054935 060414 062124 RHE_S just rod 500mm for RHE 051386 054932 054932 064104 RHE_H just handle for RHE 051387 054936 060415 062125 RHE_H_EM just emergency handle for RHE 051388 054937 060416 062126 IP54 protection for rotary handle Type 1SDA R1 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 HHE IP54 protection kit IP54 051392 0
406. ontrol circuit breaker opening and closing a T4V 250 with dialogue auxiliary contacts and motor operator 1SDA R1 TAV 250 PR222DS PD LSIG 250 3p F F 054104 Extracode Dialogue unit for LSIG 055067 AUX E C 1Q 1SY 054916 MOE E T4 T5 380 V AC 054903 X3 for PR222DS P PD T4 T5 F 055059 b T4V 250 moving part of withdrawable circuit breaker with dialogue auxiliary contacts and motor operator 1SDA R1 TAV 250 PR222DS PD LSIG 250 3p F F 054104 Extracode Dialogue unit for LSIG 055067 Kit W MP T4 054841 AUX E C 1Q 1SY 054916 ADP 6 pin adapter 054922 MOE E T4 T5 380 V AC 054903 ADP 10 pin adapter 054924 X3 for PR222DS P PD T4 T5 P W 055061 7 5 1SDC210015D0205 Ordering codes Instructions for ordering 8 Rating plug for Tmax T7 Thanks to the extra codes for the Tmax T7 rating plug see page 3 42 it is possible to ask for a Tmax T7 circuit breaker with lower rated current than the standard versions T7S 400 with PR332 P LSIG lever operating mechanism 1SDA R1 T7S 800 PR332 P LSIG In 800 3p F F 061968 Extra code for 400 A rating plug 063153 9 Sliding contacts for Tmax T7 in version withdrawable The electrical accessories of Tmax T7 in the withdrawable version must be fitted with suitable sliding contacts for the moving part and for the fixed part as per table on page 3 4 a T7S 1000 PR231 P with lever operating mechanism in withdrawable version opening coil
407. opening release necessarily mounted in the slot of the third pole T4 T5 T6 circuit breakers in the withdrawable version can be equipped only with pre cabled accessories the T4 T5 T6 circuit breakers complete with motorized controls can only be fitted with prewired undervoltage and shunt opening releases The T7 circuit breaker allows simultaneous mounting of all three service releases These two pos sibilities are available on the three pole version as well Moreover Tmax T7 can be equipped with two shunt opening releases instead of the undervoltage release to facilitate some specific applications where a very high safety level of the remote circuit breaker opening command is required SS Shunt opening release SOR Allows circuit breaker opening by means of an electric command Operation of the release is guar anteed for a voltage between 70 and 110 of the rated power supply voltage value Un both in alternating current and in direct current For Tmax T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 and T6 the SOR shunt opening release is fitted with a limit contact for cutting off the power supply in the open position and with the release tripped 1SDC210C52F0001 T1 T2 T3 Sg ao 1SDC210C53F0001 T4 T5 T6 1SDC210C54F0001 1SDC210C55F0001 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 SOR Electrical characteristics Inrush power consumption 1SDC210D18F0001 Tmax T1 T2 T3 T
408. operating mechanism standard supply for circuit breakers fitted with accessories in the factory excluding T7 rotary handle operating mechanism or motor operator The fixed part for withdrawable version is necessary to complete the circuit breaker The kit for converting a fixed CB into a withdrawable version is not available for the T6 1000 A circuit breaker 3 5 1SDC210015D0205 3 6 Accessories Versions and types Kit for conversion of fixed part into plug in for RC222 and RC223 residual current releases With the dedicated conversion kit the RC222 and RC223 residual current releases for T4 and T5 as well can be converted from the fixed to the plug in version The kit consists of four copper busbars which make the connection between the terminals of the residual current relay and the isolating contacts mounted on the circuit breaker terminals Therefore to obtain a circuit breaker fitted with the residual current release accessory in the plug in version the two kits for conversion of circuit breakers and for residual current release must be ordered The power circuit is connected to the connection terminals of the fixed part Kit for conversion of plug in into withdrawable for RC222 and RC223 residual current releases The RC222 and RC223 residual current releases for T4 and T5 can be converted from the plug in to withdrawable version by adding the special kit consisting of a bellows to be applied on the front of the resi
409. or RC223 type residual current trip unit M Motor for circuit breaker opening and circuit breaker closing spring charging M1 Three phase asynchronous motor Q Main circuit breaker Q 0 1 2 3 Auxiliary circuit breaker contacts 1SDC210015D0205 R Resistor see note F R1 Motor thermistor R2 Thermistor in the motor operator 1 S2 Contacts controlled by the cam of the motor operator S3 S3 1 Change over contact for electrical signalling of local remote selector status S4 1 2 Contacts activated by the circuit breaker rotary handle see note C S51 S Contact for electrical signalling of overload in progress start S75I 1 3 Contacts for electrical signalling of circuit breaker in racked in position only provided with circuit breakers in plug in and withdrawable version 75S 1 3 Contacts for electrical signalling of circuit breaker in racked out position only provided with circuit breakers in plug in and withdrawable version S87 1 Contact for electrical signalling of RC222 or RC223 type residual current release pre alarm S87 2 Contact for electrical signalling of RC222 Change over contact for electrical signalling of local remote selector status type residual current release alarm S87 3 Contact for electrical signalling of circuit breaker open due to RC221 RC222 or RC223 type residual current release trip SC Pushbutton or contact for closing the circuit breaker SC3 Pushbutton for motor st
410. or and to the back up one it is necessary to compensate the contactor actuation time Setting the PTC protection PTC by means of a PTC sensor inserted in the motor this protection controls the internal tempera ture of the protected motor In the case of excessive temperature the PR222MP release will com mand opening of the contactor if it is in Normal mode or of the circuit breaker if it is in Heavy mode 0 1 in this mode as an alternative to the PTC protection it is possible to signal the state of a generic contact without potential by means of the ABB SACE PRO21 K signalling unit see page 3 43 for the electrical circuit diagram see page 5 20 2 55 1SDC210015D0205 Circuit breakers for motor protection Integrated protection PR222MP PR222MP Protection R Against rotor block Protection L Against motor overload Socket for connection of SACE PRO10 T test unit and BTOS3O wireless communication unit Socket for SACE TT1 test unit Class Class of motor starting according to the IEC 60947 4 1 Standards Selection between PTC temperature sensor input 0 1 generic input Protection functions Against overload with long inverse time delay trip and trip characteristic according to an inverse time curve according to IEC 60947 4 1 Standard Trip threshold Manual setting 2 0 4 1x In Tolerance 1596 step 0 01 x In A special input is available to connect a P
411. ort sheet as 1SDC210L58F0001 p 100 d 29 5 15 250 118 5 1SDC210L80F0001 100 334 118 5 1SDC210L81F0001 II IV 70 140 6 25 1SDC210015D0205 Overall dimensions Tmax T7 Terminals Front for copper aluminium cables FC CuAl 2x240 mm Caption Front terminals for cables FC CuAl Tightening torque 48 Nm Drilling template for fixing onto support sheet Tightening torque 18 Nm ec Protection plate Front for copper aluminium cables FC CuAI 4x240 mm 320 921 5 6 26 1SDC210L83F0001 1SDC210L82F0001 1SDC210015D0205 Overall dimensions Tmax T7M Fixed
412. os sible plug in connected removed withdrawable connected removed racked out for test only for T7 racked out In the standard version the fixed parts of T2 and T3 are available with front terminals F A distinctive characteristic is the possibility of fitting these fixed parts with the same terminal terminal cover and phase separator kits used for the fixed circuit breakers With Tmax T4 T5 T6 and T7 fixed parts with dedicated front and rear terminals are available Moreover the fixed parts of T4 and T5 with front terminals can also be fitted with the special ES FC Cu and FC CuAl terminals The rear flat terminals of the fixed parts of Tmax T7 are orientated horizontally or vertically Factory assembly is horizontal as standard By means of the extra code 1SDA063571R1 it is possible to ask for the fixed part with vertical terminals This extra code can be associated either with the top terminals or with the bottom ones in the case of asking for assembly of both the terminals vertically the extra code must be repeated twice The anti racking in locks to be mounted on the left side of the fixed part and which prevent racking in of incorrect moving parts are supplied as standard fitting of the fixed parts of Tmax T7 In detail it is possible to define the different ways of combination between the fixed part and the moving part according to T7 with lever or which can be motorised breaking capacity and rated uninterrupted
413. otection 063728 In 1250 A for RC protection 063731 In 1600 A for RC protection 063732 For PR332 P LSIRc PR332 P LSIG with PR330 V and RC toroid see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 60 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210216F0004 1SDC210P03F0004 1SDC210P02F0004 Extracode rating plug Type 1SDA R1 n 400A 063153 n 630A 063154 n 800A 063155 n 1000A 063156 n 1250A 063157 n 400 A for RC protection 063733 n 630 A for RC protection 063734 n 800 A for RC protection 063735 n 1000 A for RC protection 063736 n 1250 A for RC protection 063737 n 1600 A for RC protection 064288 Note To be specified only in addition to the code of the automatic circuit breaker 0 For PR332 P LSIRc Homopolar toroid for residual current protection Type 1SDA R1 T7 T7M Toroid RC 063869 Homopolar sensor for the earthing conductor of the main power supply Type 1SDA R1 T7 T7M Sensor 059145 Accessories for electronic trip units Type 1SDA R1 T4 T5 T6 T7 T7M X3 Connector for fixed circuit breaker PR222DS or PR223DS 055059 X3 Connector for plug in withdrawable circuit breaker 055061 X4 Connector for fixed circuit breaker 055060 X4 Connector for plug in withdrawable circuit breaker 055062 TTT Test Unit 037121 TT1 Test Unit for PR231 P PR232 P electronic trip units 0371
414. otection against residual current This integrated protection is based on current measurements made by an external toroid and is alternative to protection against earth fault G The protection can be excluded ZS Zone selectivity ZS zone selectivity is an advanced method for carrying out coordination of the protections in order to reduce the trip times of the protection closest to the fault in relation to the time foreseen by time selectivity Zone selectivity can be applied to the protection functions S and G with constant time delay trip The protection can be excluded UV OV RV Protections against voltage The three protections trip with a constant time delay in the case of undervoltage overvoltage and residual volt age respectively The latter allows to detect interruptions of the neutral or of the earthing conductor in systems with earthed neutral and faults which cause movement of the star centre in systems with isolated neutral e g large earth faults to be identified Movement of the star centre is calculated by vectorially summing the phase voltages The protections can be excluded RP Protection against reversal of power The protection against reversal power causes tripping of the breaker with constant time delay trip when the flow of power reverses sign and exceeds as an absolute value the set threshold It is particularly suitable for protection of large machines such as generators The protection can be excl
415. ough two different combinations of connection of its terminals the In of the same toroid can be set at 100 A 250 A 400 A 800 A This is alternative to the homopolar toroid for residual current protection SACE RCQ switchboard residual current relay The Tmax circuit breakers can also be combined with the SACE RCQ switchboard relay with separate toroid to be installed externally on the line conductors and these fulfil requirements with thresholds up to 30A trips and times up to 5 s or when the installation conditions are particularly restrictive such as with circuit breakers already installed or limited space in the circuit breaker compartment Thanks to the wide range of settings the SACE RCQ switchboard relay is suitable for applications where a system of residual current protection coordinated with the various distribution levels from the main switchboard to the end user is required It is particularly recommended when low sensitiv ity residual current protection is required such as in partial current or total chronometric selective chains and for high sensitivity applications physiological sensitivity to provide protection of people against direct contacts On a drop in the auxiliary power supply voltage the opening command can intervene after a minimum time of 100 ms and after the time set plus 100 ms The SACE RCQ relay is a type A residual current relay and detects residual currents both of the alternating and pulsating type
416. overall length of the connection cable Cabling the different trip units is carried out as in the classic Bus topology see figure PR223EF PR223EF PR223EF PR223EF Cable RS485 1Km 1SDC210F23F0001 4 77 1SDC210015D0205 Special applications Zone selectivity Example of application The following example shows an installation where selectivity is obtained through EFDP system avail able on PR223EF Besides in brackets the circuit breakers to obtain selectivity with the traditional solution are reported Ik 54 5 kA V 400V Uie QF1 T6L800 PR223EF In800 E3H800 PR122 P LSI In800 WC1 6x 1x400 2x 1x240 1G400 Ib 740A Iz 1050 A L 17m PVC QS1 Switchboard A T6D800 E3S MS 1000 Ik 74 kA QF2 QFS T5L630 PR223EF In630 T4L250 PR223EF In250 T6L630 PR222DS LSI In630 T4L250 PR222DS LSI In250 WC2 WC3 6x 1x300 2x 1x150 1G300 3x 1x150 1x 1x95 1G95 lb 540 A Ib 200A Iz 681 6 A Iz 275 0 A L 25m L 10m Li l In 200 0 A Switchboard B QF4 i QF5 QF6 T4L250 PR223EF In250 T4L250 PR223EF In250 T4L250 PR223EF In250 T4L250 PR222DS LSI In250 T4H250 PR222DS LSI In250 T4H250 PR222DS LSI In250 WCA WC5 WCA 3x 1x95 1x 1x50 1G50 3x 1x95 1x 1x50 1G50 3x 1x95 1x 1x50 1G50 Ib 200A lb 170A Ib 170A Iz 207A Iz 207A Iz 207A L 40m L 60m L 30m L3 L4 In 170A 4 78 It is evident that selectivity th
417. p unit with the energy needed for correct operation of the trip unit and the signal needed to detect the current The current sensors are available with rated primary current as shown in the table In A 10 25 63 100 160 250 320 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600 PR221DS T2 H EH a a T4 E El E a T5 E E El T6 H E PR222DS P PR222DS PD T4 E E D D PR223DS T5 D H E T6 H E oO PR231 P PR232 P PR331 P PR332 P T7 e H E E a H For PR223DS the minimum rated current is In 160 A When a protection function trips the circuit breaker opens by means of the trip coil which changes over a contact AUX SA supplied on request see chapter Accessories at page 3 20 and follow ing to signal trip unit tripped Signalling reset is of mechanical type and takes place with resetting of the circuit breaker 2 11 1SDC210015D0205 Circuit breakers for power distribution Electronic trip units Basic protection functions L Protection against overload This protection function trips when there is an overload with inverse long time delay trip according to the IEC 60947 2 Standard Pk The protection cannot be excluded S Protection against short circuit with time delay This protection function trips when there is a short circuit with long inverse time delay trip l t k ON or a constant trip time Pt2k OFF The protection can be excluded I Instantaneous protection against short circuit This protection functio
418. pecific X3 connector It can be used with T7 with PR332 P electronic trip unit equipped with PR330 D M communication module When using EPO10 for profibus the PDP22 Fieldbus Plug must be used The PDP21 Fieldbus Plug cannot be used with EPO10 SACE PR212 CI contactor control unit The SACE PR212 CI accessory unit can be associated with PR222MP for Tmax and PR212MP for the SACE Isomax S family When the special dip switch on the front of the PR222 MP is positioned on Normal mode working mode it is possible to control contactor opening in the case of a fault due to overload L locked rotor R or missing unbalance of phase U The SACE PR212 CI unit can be installed either on a DIN rail or on the rear of the door 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210D37F0001 SACE PR021 K signalling unit The SACE PRO21 K signalling unit can convert the digital signals supplied by the PR222DS PD LSI or LSIG PR222MP PR223DS PR223EF PR331 and PR332 trip unit into electrical signals with normally open electrical contacts The unit is connected to the protection trip unit by means of the Modbus RTU standard serial changeover line on which all the information about the activation status of the protection functions flows The corresponding electrical contacts are closed based on these information In particular the following signals are available the alarm signal remains active throughout the overload until the trip unit is tripped th
419. protection functions and the PRO21 K signalling unit are available for the PR222MP trip unit The electronic trip units are self supplied and are made up of three current transformers the PR222MP protection unit and a trip coil which acts directly on the circuit breaker operating mechanism The current transformers housed inside the trip unit supply the energy and the signal required for correct protection opera tion Operation is guaranteed with a single phase current equal to 20 of the rated current The trip unit is temperature compensated and is sensitive to missing phase according to Table IV of the IEC60947 4 1 7 2 1 5 2 Standards The TA T5 and T6 circuit breakers for motor protection are perfectly integrated with the new line of ABB contactors The latter defined as A line together with the line of thermal relays and ABB SACE moulded case circuit breakers is the basis for the new generation of apparatus specially designed to guarantee a system of products which can be integrated according to the required applications All this has the aim not only of continually improving the products but above all of providing designers installers and end users with the best solutions in terms of performances and reliability combined with the simplicity of the system The Tmax T4 and T5 circuit breakers with PR222MP trip unit and the A series of contactors are in particular an extraordinary solution in terms of compactness sharing the same wi
420. pulsory with T4 T5 T6 in the withdrawable or motorized versions SOR Test Unit Type 1SDA R1 T7 T7M 050228 _ Shunt closing release SCR Type 1SDA R1 T7M cabled version SCR 24 V AC DC 062076 SCR 30 V AC DC 062077 SCR 48 V AC DC 062078 SCR 60 VAC DC 062079 SCR 110 120 V AC DC 062080 SCR 120 127 V AC DC 063549 SCR 220 240 V AC DC 063550 SCR 240 250 V AC DC 062081 SCR 380 400 V AC 062082 SCR 415 440 V AC 062083 Note For T7 T7M in withdrawable version sliding contact blocks for fixed and moving part are necessary See page 3 4 and 7 43 see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 45 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210204F0004 1SDC210N75F0001 T4 T5 T6 T7 7 46 Ordering codes Accessories Undervoltage release UVR Type 1SDA R1 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T7M uncabled version UVR 24 V AC DC 062087 UVR 24 30 V AC DC 051345 054880 UVR 30 V AC DC 062088 UVR 48 V AC DC 051346 054881 062089 UVR 60 V AC DC 052333 054882 062090 UVR 110 120 V AC DC 062091 UVR 110 127 V AC 110 125 V DC 051347 054883 UVR 120 127 V AC DC 063551 UVR 220 240 V AC DC 063552 UVR 220 240 V AC 220 250 V DC 051348 054884 UVR 240 250 V AC DC 062092 UVR 380 400 V AC 062093 UVR 380 440 V AC 051349 054885 UVR 415 440 V AC 062094 UVR 480
421. r see page 3 26 The traditional version of the auxiliary contacts can also be combined with the protection trip units with dialogue in this case only electrical signalling of the state of the circuit breaker will be provided and it will not be possible to communicate remotely or control the motor 1SDC210015D0205 AUX Electrical characteristics AUX 250 V T1 T6 1SDC210C64F0001 1SDC210C64F0001 Power supply voltage Service current Category of utilisation IEC 60947 5 1 AC 14 DC 13 125V 6A 0 3 A 250 V 5A 0 15 A Protection with gG 10x38 type fuse Imax 6 A AUX 400 V T4 T7 Power supply voltage Service current In A AC DC 125 V 0 3 250V 120 0 15 400 V 3 5 A for Tmax T7 AUX 24 V T1 T7 Power supply voltage Service current In A AC DC 24V z 0 75 mA DV 1mA AUX E T4 T6 Typical contact Mosfet Vmax 48 V DC 30 V AC Rmax 35 ohm Pmax resistive load 200 mW System contact earth insulation 2000 V AC 1 min 50 Hz Contact contact insulation 400 V DC Table of the possible combinations of the T7 T7M auxiliary contacts T7 SY Q1 Q2 Q3 SY Q1 Q2 Q3 1Q 1SY 2Q 3Q 18Y T7M Q2 Q3 2Q Q4 Q1 2Q Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 4Q 3 21 1SDC210015D0205 Accessories Electrical signals Types of auxiliary contacts
422. r RC222 and RC223 Type 1SDA R1 4 poles Kit W MP RC T4 T5 055366 Conversion kit from fixed part of plug in into fixed part of withdrawable Type 1SDA R1 Kit FP P in FPW T4 054854 Kit FP P in FP W T5 054855 Terminals for fixed parts T4 T7 Type 1SDA R1 3 pieces 4 pieces Front extended terminals EF 1SDC210N72F0001 EF T6 013984 013985 EF T7 T7M 062171 062172 3 Front extended spread terminals ES S ES T5 630 A 055271 055272 8 ES T7 T7M 065620 065621 g Front terminals for copper cables FC Cu FC Cu T4 1x185mm 054831 054832 5 FC Cu TB 1x240mm 054833 054834 E Front terminals for copper aluminium cables FC CuAl FC CuAl T4 1x185mm 054835 054836 2 FC CuAl T5 1x240mm 054837 054838 Rear flat vertical terminals VR VR T6 013988 013989 Rear flat horizontal terminals HR HR T6 013986 013987 Rear flat terminals HR VR HR VR T7 T7M 063089 063090 Rear spread terminals RS RS T7 T7M 063577 063578 Note The FC Cu and FC CuAl terminals are supplied with insulating terminal covers for TC FP fixed parts Lock for fixed part of withdrawable circuit breaker Type 1SDA R1 T4 T5 T6 KLF D FP Different key for each circuit breaker 055230 KLF S FP Same key for different groups of circuit breakers 055231 PLL FP Lock padlocks 055232 KLF D Ronis FP Lock type Ronis 055233 Terminal covers for fixed part TC FP
423. r use at 250 V AC T4 T5 and T6 AUX MO This auxiliary contact only in the cabled version must necessarily be combined with the motor operator and indicates the motor operation mode manual or remote T7 AUX RTC The circuit breaker ready to close auxiliary contact is available with wiring directly on the terminal box of the T7 circuit breaker with stored energy operating mechanism and signals that the circuit breaker is ready to accept a closing command if there are the following five conditions Gircuit breaker open closing springs charged any opening coil de energised any undervoltage coil energised opening solenoid armed T7 AUX SC Indicates the state of the circuit breaker operating mechanism closing springs remotely supplied only with the spring charging motor T4 T5 and T6 with PR222DS PD PR223DS and PR223EF electronic trip unit AUX E Only available in the pre cabled version the auxiliary contacts AUX E also called electronic version contacts communicate the state of the circuit breaker to the electronic trip unit and make an open closed signal available to the outside and another one for electronic trip unit tripped They can only be combined with the PR222DS PD or PR223DS electronic trip unit and only function when there is a 24 V DC auxiliary power supply to the trip unit for the communication functions The AUX E contacts can moreover be directly connected to the MOE E motor operato
424. raph and draw the desired curve Function U can be excluded Protection against loss and or unbalance of a phase Protection against loss or unbalance of a phase if set to ON intervenes when one or two phases have a current lower than 0 4 x I 0 4 x 0 85 x In 0 4 x 0 85 x 160A 54 4 A in this case To trace the curve correctly on the glossy sheet simply place the glossy sheet over the graph of function U so that Vin I In on the glossy sheet corresponds to l I 1 on the graph In this case V In In 0 85 and draw the desired curve 1SDC210015D0205 Characteristic operating curve of an asynchronous motor raf ta te t54 tp 1SDC210E32F0001 L function L trip current L function trip current I function R trip current t function R trip time function U trip current t function U trip time rated service current of the motor motor starting current peak value of the sub transient starting current motor starting time L L I L L duration of the sub transient starting phase m typical motor starting curve C example of trip curve of a motor protection circuit breaker with electronic trip unit 4 17 1SDC210015D0205 Trip curves for motor protection Circuit breakers with PR222MP electronic trip unit T4 250 T5 400 T6 800 PR222MP L Function hot and cold trip t s 107 1109 10 1SDC210E33F0001 T4 250 T5 4
425. rature performances Circuit breakers with magnetic only or electronic trip units and switch disconnectors T7 S H L 800 and T7D 800 Fixed up to 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C Imax A l Imax A l Imax A l Imax A l 1 1 VR 800 1 800 1 800 1 755 0 94 F EF HR 800 1 800 1 800 1 700 0 87 VR Rear flat vertical F Front flat terminals EF Extended front HR Rear flat horizontal lu A 850 800 VR J F EF HR 700 650 600 550 500 450 400 350 10 20 30 40 60 70 TPC T7 V 800 Fixed up to 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C Imax A l Imax A l Imax A l Imax A l VR 800 1 800 1 800 1 755 0 94 F EF HR 800 1 800 1 800 1 700 0 87 VR Rear flat vertical F Front flat terminals EF Extended front HR Rear flat horizontal lu A 850 VR d F EF HR 700 650 600 550 500 450 400 350 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 T C 4 50 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC21030FF0001 1SDC21031FF0001 T7 S H L 800 and T7D 800 Withdrawable VR up to 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C Imax A I Imax A I 1 Imax A l Imax A
426. rcuit breaker with face extending from the compartment door without Bracket for fixing onto rail 4 Bottom terminal covers with IP40 degree of protection 6 2 1SDC210H02F0001 Y Fixing on DIN EN 50022 rail 1 1 Nm 75 45 With inserts 76 152 i r R 1SDC210HO6FO001 T1 1P SINGLE POLE Drilling templates for support sheet For front terminals 25 Q 45 M4 Y E i 5 ac Y 3 POLES 425 4 25 Y N e Vi D S D G 45 M4 Y 4 POLES x 1SDC210H08F0001 Without inserts 35 M Y 53 5 107 x lt l 1SDC210H09F0001 83 With inserts 45 M4 T1 1P SINGLE POLE 1SDC210H07F0001 1SDC210H03F0001 1SDC210H10F0001 1SDC210015D0205 Terminals Front for copper aluminium cables FC CuAl Front extended EF 30
427. ree phase power supply L Release between 1 05 and 1 25 x x 2096 t t 8x 1 In conditions other than those considered the following s E m SS y zd x 1596 lt 1 tolerances hold For T7 In 1250 A 1600 A Imax 12 x In G 15 20 k 25 Ur Other 10 20 2 28 1SDC210015D0205 Setting the neutral In PR332 P the neutral protection is 50 of the value set for phase protection in the standard ver sion The neutral protection can be excluded or set to 10096 In installations where very high harmonics occur the resulting current at the neutral can be higher than that of the phases Therefore it is possible to set the neutral protection at 15096 or 20096 of the value set for the phases In this case it is necessary to reduce the setting of protection L accord ingly The table below lists the neutral settings for the various possible combinations between type of circuit breaker and the threshold setting Adjustable neutral protection settings Threshold settings overload protection Circuit breaker model 0 4 1 0 5 0 5 lt I lt 0 66 0 66 lt l lt 10 T7 0 50 100 150 20096 0 50 100 15096 0 50 10096 The setting I 21 indicates the maximum overload protection setting The actual maximum setting allowable must take into account any derating based on temperature the terminals used and the altitude see the Installations chapter Start up function The start up function allows protect
428. remote and on board diagnosis system 2 9 1SDC210015D0205 Circuit breakers for power distribution Electronic trip units PR222DS P PR222DS PD and PR223DS Protection functions and parameterisations Protection functions Trip threshold Trip curves Excludability Relation t TU Against overload with long Manual setting Manual setting inverse time delay trip and 0 40 1xIn step 0 02xIn at6xl trip characteristic according t 3 6 9 18s to an inverse time curve 8 t k Pt k according to Electronic setting Electronic setting E IEC 60947 2 Standard l 20 40 1xln stepOO1xln at6xl t 23 18s step O 5s Trip between 1 1 1 3 xl Tolerance 1096 Against short circuit with Manual setting Manual setting inverse short time delay trip 0 6 1 2 1 8 2 4 3 3 6 4 2 5 8 6 at 8 x In and trip characteristic with 4 7 7 6 8 2 8 8 9 4 10 x In9 t 0 05 0 1 0 25 0 5s inverse time St k a t KP or definite time Electronic setting Electronic setting 0 60 10xIn step 0 1 x In at 8 x In t 0 05 0 5s step 0 01s D Tolerance 10 Tolerance 10966 Manual setting Manual setting 0 6 1 2 1 8 2 4 3 3 6 4 2 5 8 6 t 0 05 0 1 0 25 0 5s 4 7 7 6 8 2 8 8 9 4 10 x In L t k Electronic setting Electronic setting 0 60 10xIn step 0 1 x In t 0 05 0 5s step 0 01s Tolerance 10 Tolerance 10 Against short circuit with Manual setting i
429. rical circuit breaker reset Contact for electrical signalling of circuit breaker open with springs charged and ready to close Contact for electrical signalling of circuit breaker open due to trip units tripped YO YO1 YO2 YU tripped position only for circuit breakers with direct control Current transformer located on phase L1 Current transformer located on phase L2 Current transformer located on phase L3 Homopolar Toroidal current transformer see note T Insulating voltage transformer Auxiliary power supply voltage see note F Current sensor Rogowski coil located on phase L1 Current sensor Rogowski coil located on phase L2 Current sensor Rogowski coil located on phase L3 Current sensor Rogowski coil located on neutral Current sensor Rogowski coil located on the conductor connecting to earth the star point of the MV LV transformer see note G Serial interface with control system external bus EIA RS485 interface see note E Serial interface with the accessories of PR331 P and PR332 P trip units internal bus Delivery connectors for auxiliary circuits of withdrawable version circuit breaker Connectors for the accessories of the circuit breaker Delivery terminal box for the position contacts of the withdrawable circuit breaker located on the fixed part of the circuit breaker Connector for YO1 release Connector for power circuits of PR231 P PR232 P PR331 P and PR
430. rnet card RS232 Serial port USB port for the license key Printer optional 1SDC210015D0205 SD Pocket SD Pocket is an application designed to connect the new protection trip units to a PDA or toa personal computer This means it is now possible to use wireless communication to configure the protection threshold function monitor measurement functions including reading of data recorded in data logger PR332 P or PRS333 P verify the status of the circuit breaker i e number of operations trip data according to the trip unit connected SD Pocket application scenarios include during start up of switchgear with rapid and error free transfer of the protection parameters to the trip units also using the dedicated exchange file directly from Docwin during normal installation service gathering information on the circuit breaker and load conditions last trip information runtime currents and other information To use all these functions it is sufficient to have a PDA with MS Windows Mobile 2003 and BT interface or a personal computer with MS Windows 2000 XP OS The trip units must be equipped with the PR120 D BT interface device or PROSO Its use does not require the presence of dialogue units for the trip units SD Pocket is freeware and it can be down loaded from the ABB SACE s website http www abb com SD TestBus2 SD TestBus2 is the commissioning and diagnostic software of ABB SACE for
431. rotection S alarm Protection alarm Protection G alarm Bus K O 7 Release trip Protection L pre alarm CO HD a FRJ O sm s 3 43 1SDC210015D0205 3 44 Accessories Accessories for electronic trip units Current sensor for external neutral This is applied to the external neutral conductor and allows protection G against earth faults to be carried out with external neutral three pole circuit breakers The current sensor must be connected to the trip unit by means of the specific connectors X4 for T4 T5 and T6 or with a direct connection in the terminal board for T7 The combination is not possible with electronic trip unit PR221 PR231 and PR232 T4 A T5 A T6 A T7 A 100 320 630 400 1600 160 400 800 250 630 1000 320 Connectors Connectors X3 and X4 allow connection of the electronic trip units with external plant units or compo nents In fact they are used to make the L alarm signal available outside connection of the external neutral connection to the PRO21 K signalling unit to the PR212 CI contactor control unit or to the temperature sensor of the PTC motor and allows two way communication from the circuit breaker fitted with dialogue towards the outside and vice versa Both the connectors are available both for fixed version circuit breakers and for plug in or withdraw able version circuit breakers Connector Function Trip unit x3 PRO21 K PR2
432. rotections alarms and trips and to HMIOSO for the remote user interfacing 1SDC210015D0205 PR332 P The SACE PR332 P trip unit for Tmax T7 available in four versions PR332 P LI PR332 P LSI PR332 P LSIG and PR332 P LSIRC is a sophisticated and flexible protection system based on a state of the art microprocessor and DSP technology Fitted with the optional internal PR330 D M dialogue unit PR332 P turns into an intelligent protection measurement and communication device based on the Modbus RTU protocol By means of the PR330 D M PR332 P can also be con nected to the ABB EPO10 Fieldbus plug adapter which makes it possible to choose among several different networks such as Profibus and DeviceNet The new PR332 P is the result of ABB SACE s experience in designing protection trip units The exhaustive range of settings makes this protection unit ideal for general use in power distribution Access to information and programming using a keyboard and graphic liquid crystal display is ex tremely simple and intuitive An integrated ammeter and many other additional features are provided over and above the protection functions These additional functions can be further increased with addition on board of the dialogue signalling measurement and wireless communication units All the thresholds and trip curve delays of the protection functions are stored in special memories which retain the information even when no power is supplied
433. rough the traditional techniques affects deeply the choice of the protec tion devices and direct it towards differentiated sizes according to the location of the circuit breakers in the installation The following table summarizes the advantages from a dimensional and economical point of view which derive from the use of the new electronic trip unit Traditional solution Solution with EFDP QF1 E3H800 PR122 P T6L800 PR223EF QS1 E3S MS1000 T6D800 QF2 T6L630 PR221DS T5L630 PR223EF Qs2 T6D630 T5D630 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210F24F0001 Wiring diagrams Index Information for reading Circuit breakers T1 T6 eere ener 5 2 Information for reading Circuit breakers T7 eese eene een nnne nennen 5 6 Information for reading ATSO10 for T4 T5 T6 oie tnnt nnn 5 10 Information for reading ATSO10 for T7 netter rnnt tnn 5 11 Graphic symbols IEC 60617 and CEI 3 14 3 26 Standards esses 5 12 Wiring diagram of the T1 T6 circuit breakers entretiens 5 13 Wiring diagram of the T7 circuit breakers reiner net nine inenens 5 15 Electrical accessories for T1 10 eeeot rre tinent eei rrn tienen reistaa 5 17 Electrical accessories for T7 roten tnnt iniret ieseatenacceriacinescesd 5 26 Automatic transfer switch ATSO10 for TA TB 5 30 Automatic transfer switch ATS010 for 7 rerit interi reinen totiens 5 34
434. rs or the adapters for isolation of the relative auxiliary circuits must also be ordered see page 3 28 1SDC210C03F0001 3 2 1SDC210015D0205 Withdrawable The circuit breakers in the WITHDRAWABLE version Tmax T4 T5 T6 and T7 are made up of fixed part to be installed directly on the back plate of the unit fitted with lateral guides to allow the moving part racking in and racking out operation to be carried out easily and a dedicated flange for the compartment door to replace the one provided with the circuit breaker in the fixed version moving part obtained from the fixed circuit breaker with addition of the relative conversion kit from fixed to withdrawable moving part mandatory accessory to be applied onto the front of the circuit breaker selected between front for lever operating mechanism standard supply for circuit breakers fitted with accessories in the factory excluding T7 motor operator and rotary handle operating mechanism Application of one of these accessories allows the racking in and racking out of the moving part with the compart ment door closed on T7 no accessory is required to have racking out with the door closed Racking in and racking out of the moving part is carried out by means of the special operating lever always supplied with the fixed part This particular device allows the circuit breaker to be placed in the isolated position with power and auxiliary circuits disconnect
435. s 6000 320A 5000 800A 5000 800A 3000 V version 4000 10004 No Hourly operations 120 60 60 60 Basic dimensions fixed version 3 poles W mm 105 140 210 210 4 poles W mm 140 184 280 280 D mm 103 5 103 5 103 5 154 manual 178 motorizable H mm 205 205 268 268 Weight fixed 3 4 poles kg 2 35 3 05 3 24 4 15 9 5 12 9 7 12 5 manual 11 14 motorizable plug in 3 4 poles kg 3 6 4 65 5 15 6 65 withdrawable 3 4 poles kg 3 85 4 9 5 4 6 9 12 1 15 1 29 7 39 6 manual 32 42 6 motorizable TERMINAL CAPTION HR Rear flat horizontal D Only for T7 800 1000 1250 A cw 20 kA S H L versions Note in the plug in withdrawable EF Front extended VR Rear flat vertical 75 for T5 630 15 kA V version version of T5 630 the F Front HR VR Rear flat horientated H 50 for T5 630 For applications at 1000 V only maximum rated current is ES Front extended spread F Fixed circuit breaker Only up to 630 V Icw 5 kA available in the fixed version derated by 10 at 40 C R Rear orientated P Plug in circuit breaker 9 lcw 7 6 kA 630 A 10 kA 800 A 8 For applications at 1000 V only MC Multi cable W Withdrawable circuit breaker available with Fc Cu terminals 2 38 1SDC210015D0205 Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 1SDC210B12F0001 This type of coordination a development of time coordination is made by means of logic connec tions between current measuring devices which once th
436. s X1 X2 X5 X6 X7 X8 and X9 are supplied on request They are always sup plied with T4 T5 and T6 circuit breakers in the fixed version or in the withdrawable version equipped with unwired electronic accessories Additional external resistor for undervoltage release supplied at 250 V DC 380 440 V AC and 480 500 V AC In the case of fixed version circuit breaker with current transformer on external neutral con ductor outside the circuit breaker when the circuit breaker is to be removed it is necessary to short circuit the terminals of the TI N transformer SQ and SY contacts of AUX E signalling unit are opto isolated contacts The connection to poles 3 4 of X4 connector can be used in two ways connecting a generic digital input or connecting the motor thermistor The two functions are alternative 5 5 1SDC210015D0205 5 6 Wiring diagrams Information for reading Circuit breakers T7 Warning Before installing the circuit breaker carefully read notes F and O on the circuit diagrams Operating status shown The circuit diagram is for the following conditions withdrawable circuit breaker open and racked in circuits de energised releases not tripped motor operating mechanism with springs discharged Versions Though the diagram shows a circuit breaker in withdrawable version it can be applied to a fixed ver Sion circuit breaker as well Fixed version The control circuits are fitted between
437. s the corresponding fixed circuit breakers With the phase separating partitions mounted on request with Tmax T1 T2 and T3 a special kit is available to reach IP40 degree of protection from the front of the circuit breaker It is possible to mount the phase separating partitions between two circuit breakers or fixed parts side by side Screws for sealing the terminal covers These are applied to the terminal covers of fixed circuit breakers or to the moving parts of plug in or withdrawable circuit breakers They prevent removal of both the high and low terminal covers and can be locked with a wire and lead seal Kit for taking up the auxiliary power supply Special kits are available with the fixed version of Tmax T2 T3 T4 and T5 circuit breakers for taking up the auxiliary power supply directly from the connection terminals They can only be combined with the front terminals for copper cables FC Cu for T2 T3 and T4 or with the front terminals F for T4 TO 1SDC210015D0205 Circuit breaker Connection terminals FC Cu FC CuAl FC CuAl MC RC CuAI HR VR HR for RC221 222 Front Front Front Front Front Front Multi cable Rear Rear Rear Rear Rear terminals extended extended terminals terminals terminals terminals terminals flat flat flat horizontal terminals spread forcopper forCuAl for CuAl for CuAl horizontal vertical horizontal terminals terminals cables cables cables cabl
438. settings they allow optimal motor protection They can be used in a wide range of start ups from 0 37 kW to 45 kW for T2 and up to 250 kW for T5 at 400 V Finally thanks to their wide setting range of protection against short circuit T2 T4 T5 and T6 in the three pole version equipped with PR221DS I electronic trip units and T7 in three pole version equipped with PR231 P I electronic trip units allow the most suitable trip value to be selected for any type of motor for rated currents up to 1250 A and 560 kW at 400 V 1SDC210B26F0001 MF Fixed magnetic only trip units Tmax T2 D In A 1 1 6 2 2 5 3 2 4 5 6 5 8 5 11 12 5 l 2 13x In 18 21 26 33 42 52 65 84 110 145 163 Note The magnetic only trip units which equip the Tmax T2 in three pole version circuit breaker have a trip threshold fixed at 13 x In according to what is indicated in the table MA Adjustable magnetic only trip units Tmax T2 T3 T4 In A 10 20 25 32 52 80 100 125 160 200 Tmax T2 El L L Tmax T3 L L E D Tmax T4 E EI a L L R R Tmax T2 T3 I 6 12 x In 120 240 192 384 312 624 480 960 600 1200 750 1500 960 1920 1200 2400 Tmax T4 l7 6 14xIn 60 140 150 350 E 312 728 480 1120 600 1400 750 1750 960 2240 1200 2800 Note The magnetic only trip units which equip the Tmax T2 and T3 three pole version circuit breakers have a trip thresould which can be adjusted from 6 to
439. sfer switch of two circuit breakers K1 Auxiliary contactor type VB6 30 01 for the emergency supply voltage presence K2 Auxiliary contactor type VB6 30 01 for the normal supply voltage presence K51 Q1 Overcurrent release for emergency supply line K51 Q2 Overcurrent release for normal supply line KC1 KC2 Auxiliary contactors type BC6 30 for circuit breaker closing KO1 KO2 Auxiliary contactors type BC6 30 for circuit breaker opening M Motor with series energization for the circuit breaker opening and closing Q 1 Circuit breaker auxiliary contact Q1 Circuit breaker for emergency supply line Q2 Circuit breaker for normal supply line Q61 1 2 Miniature circuit breakers for auxiliary circuits protection 11 516 Contacts for the ATSO10 device inputs S33M 1 Limit switch of the closing springs S51 Contact signalling circuit breaker tripped through the overcurrent relay S75I 1 Contact signalling circuit breaker in withdrawable version connected TA Current transformers feeding the overcurrent relay X12 X15 Connectors fort he auxiliary circuits of the circuit breaker in withdrawable version XF Terminal board fort he position contacts of the withdrawable circuit breaker XV Terminal boards of the accessories YC Shunt closing release YO Shunt opening release Note A For the auxiliary circuits of the circuit breakers see the relative diagrams The applications indicated in the following figures ar
440. st operation range 85 500 85 500 85 500 110 500 Rated service current A up to 250 A up to 250 A up to 500 A up to 250 A 225 A for T3 Rated residual current trip A 0 03 0 1 0 3 0 03 0 05 0 1 0 3 0 03 0 05 0 1 0 03 0 05 0 1 0 5 1 3 0 5 1 3 5 10 0 3 0 5 1 3 5 10 0 3 0 5 1 Time limit for non trip s instantaneous instantaneous instantaneous instantaneous 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 5 1 2 8 0 5 1 2 3 0 5 1 2 8 Tolerance over trip times x 2096 2096 x 2096 Power consumption lt 8 W at 400 V AC lt 10 W at 400 V AC lt 10 W at 400 V AC lt 10 W at 400 V AC Local trip signalling W D Trip coil with changeover contact for trip signalling i E E El nput for remote opening L m D NO contact for pre alarm signalling L L D NO contact for alarm signalling L E D ndication of pre alarm from 25 lAn tollerance 3 L L L D ndication of alarm timing at 75 lAn tollerance 3 L D E El A type for pulsanting alternating current AC for alternating current AE type for remote release device Oo D D Type B for pulsed current and direct current L Selective S type E E El Switch for insulation test L E D Power supply from above and below L E E El Assembly with three pole circuit breakers Oo m Assembly with four pole circuit breakers L L L D Kit for conversion of circuit breaker with residual current release from fixed to plug in m Operation up to
441. t A 250 250 250 250 250 Rated residual current trip lAn A 0 03 0 1 0 3 0 03 0 05 0 1 0 03 0 05 0 1 0 03 0 05 0 1 0 03 0 05 0 1 0 5 1 3 0 3 0 5 1 3 5 10 0 3 0 5 1 3 5 10 0 3 0 5 1 3 5 10 0 3 0 5 1 Time limit for non trip s instantaneous inst 0 1 0 2 0 3 inst 0 1 0 2 0 3 inst 0 1 0 2 0 3 inst 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 5 1 2 3 0 5 1 2 3 0 5 1 2 3 0 5 1 2 3 Tolerance over trip times 96 20 20 20 20 4 74 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210F21F0001 Tmax T7 can be equipped with a toroid fitted on the back of the circuit breaker so as to ensure protec tion against earth faults In particular the electronic trip unit types able to perform this function are PR882 P LSIG PR882 P LSIRc Furthermore ABB SACE moulded case circuit breakers serie Tmax can be combined with the switchboard residual current relay tyoe RCQ type A with separate toroid to be installed externally on the line conductors RCQ Power supply voltage AC M 80 500 DC M 48 125 Trip threshold adjustements lAn 1st range of adjustements A 0 03 0 05 0 1 0 3 0 5 2st range of adjustements A 1 3 5 10 30 Trip time adjustement s 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 5 0 7 1 2 3 5 Tolerance over trip times 20 The versions with adjustable trip times allow to obtain a residual current protection system coordinated from a discrimination point of view from the main switchboard up to the ultimate load 4 75 1SDC210015D0205 4 76 Special applications
442. t protection for buttons Type 1SDA R1 T7M Transparent protection for buttons 062132 Transparent protection for buttons independent 062133 IP54 door protection Type 1SDA R1 T7M IP54 door protection 062161 Residual current releases SACE RC221 SACE RC222 SACE RC223 Type 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles RC222 1 MOD 200 mm for T1 053869 RC221 1 for T1 051398 051401 RC222 for T1 051400 051402 RC221 2 for T2 051403 051405 RC222 2 for T2 051404 051406 RC221 8 for T3 051407 051409 RC222 8 for T3 051408 051410 RC223 8 for T3 064302 RC222 4 for T4 054954 RC223 A for T4 250 054956 RC222 5 for T5 054955 Note The residual current releases for the T2 and T3 circuit breakers except for the RC for T3 are always supplied complete with FC Cu terminal kits see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210172F0004 SACE RCQ Type 1SDA R1 T1 T7 T7M Relay and closed toroid diameter 60 mm 037388 Relay and closed toroid diameter 110 mm 037389 Relay and closed toroid diameter 185 mm 050542 Relay and toroid which can be opened diameter 110 mm 037390 Relay and toroid which can be opened diameter 180 mm 037391 Relay and toroid which can be opened diameter 280 mm 037392 Relay only 037393 Closed toroid only diameter 60 mm 037394 Closed toroid only diameter 110 mm 037395 Closed toroid only diameter 18
443. tandards IEC 60947 2 IEC 60947 2 IEC 60947 2 Thermomagnetic releases TMD L TMA E E E Electronic trip units PR221DS LS I D El n El PR221DS D El PR222DS P LSI Bl PR222DS P LSIG E E PR222DS PD LSI m E El D PR222DS PD_LSIG D E a m PR222MP E Terminals FC Cu FC Cu F FC CuAl R Version F P W F F P w F Fo Mechanical life No operations 20000 20000 20000 No hourly operations 240 120 120 Basic fixed dimensions 3 poles W mm 105 140 210 4 poles W mm 140 184 280 D mm 103 5 103 5 103 5 H mm 205 205 268 Weight fixed 3 4 poles kg 2 85 3 05 2 35 3 05 3 25 4 415 3 25 4 15 9 5 12 plug in 3 4 poles kg 3 6 4 65 5 15 6 65 withdrawable 3 4 poles kg 3 85 4 9 5 4 6 9 TERMINAL CAPTION R Rear Power supply only from the top F Front F Fixed circuit breakers 9 low lt 5 kA FC Cu Front for copper cables FC CuAI Front for copper cables CuAl P Plug in circuit breakers W Withdrawable circuit breakers 2 60 lcw 7 6 kA 630 A 10 kA 800 A Tmax T5630 is only available in the fixed version 9 For T6 in the withdrawable version please ask ABB SACE Circuit breaker without high terminal covers 1SDC210015D0205 PR221DS and PR222DS for use up to 1150 V AC Current sensor Tmax T4 T5 T6 In A 100 250 320 400 630 800 T4 250 a L TB 400 L E T5 630 a T6 630 E T6 800 a Note For the PR222MP setting please see page 2 56 up to 100
444. tection against unwarranted release They are constructed using electronic technology and act directly on the circuit breaker by means of a trip coil supplied with the residual current release to be housed in the special slot made in the left hand pole area They do not require an auxiliary power supply as they are supplied directly by the network and their operation is guaranteed even with only a single phase plus neutral or only two phases supplied with voltage and in the presence of unidirectional pulsating currents with direct components All the possible connection combinations are allowed except for guaranteeing in the four pole version connection of the neutral to the first pole on the left The RC221 and RC222 residual current releases can either be supplied from above or from below The operating conditions of the apparatus can be continually controlled by means of the electronic circuit test pushbutton and the magnetic indicator of residual current trip A disconnection device of the power supply during the insulation test is available The four pole circuit breaker complete with residual current release can be fitted with the electrical accessories normally available for the circuit breaker The shunt opening and undervoltage releases are housed in the special slot made in the neutral pole for the four pole circuit breakers whereas they are incompatible with the three pole circuit breakers The residual current releases are supplied
445. ted currents 1SDC210015D0205 18DC210014F0001 The electric arc interruption system used on the Tmax circuit breakers allows the short circuit cur rents of very high value to be interrupted extremely rapidly The considerable opening speed of the contacts the dynamic blasting action carried out by the magnetic field and the structure of the arcing chamber contribute to extinguishing the arc in the shortest possible time notably limiting the value of the specific let through energy Pt and the current peak Prospective short circuit current Limited let through current 1SDC210015F0001 1 5 1SDC210015D0205 Construction Characteristics Modularity of the series 1 6 1SDC210015D0205 Starting from the fixed version circuit breaker all the other versions used for various requirements are obtained by means of mounting conversion kits The following are available kit for converting a fixed circuit breaker into the moving part of a plug in and withdrawable one circuit breaker fixed parts for plug in and withdrawable circuit breakers conversion kit for the connection terminals Various accessories are also available Breaking unit Trip units Front Auxiliary contacts AUX and AUX E Undervoltage release UVR Shunt opening release SOR and P SOR Terminal covers Front for lever operating mechanism FLD Direct rotary handle RHD 10 Stored energy motor operator MOE 11 Key
446. tes directly with the trip unit by means of the dip switches Up to four LEDs according to the version are also available for signalling These LEDs one for each protection are active when e a protection is timing For protection L the pre alarm status is also shown aprotection has tripped the corresponding LED is activated by pressing the Info Test pushbut ton e a failure in connection of a current sensor or in the trip coil is detected The indication is active when the unit is powered through current sensors or an auxiliary power supply wrong rating plug for the circuit breaker The protection tripped indication works even with the circuit breaker open without the need for any internal or external auxiliary power supply This information is available for 48 hours of inactivity after the trip and is still available after reclosing If the query is made more than 48 hours later it is sufficient to connect a PRO30 B battery unit PRO10 T or a BTO30 wireless communication unit Setting the neutral Protection of the neutral can be set at 5096 10096 or 20096 of the phase currents In particular adjust ment of the neutral at 20096 of the phase current is possible if the following inequality is respected x In x Ne s lu The user can also switch the neutral protection OFF Test function The Test function is carried out by means of the Info Test pushbutton and the PRO30 B battery unit or BTO3O fitted with a polarize
447. the front of the door with acces sory A Dimension with AUE connector o O Oo early making contact S SE C F 32 105 R 200 min SE Minimum rotation radius for door fulcrum 1SDC210L05F0001 Caption Rotary handle operating mechanism on circuit breaker O Rotary handle operat 190 33 ing mechanism on circuit breaker Padlock device for open posi tion maximum 3 padlocks to be provided by the user 1SDC210L06F0001 Det A A ga 08 1SDC210L09F0001 early making contact 42 5 84 5 40 3 3 Dimension with AUE connector Compartment door lock 1SDC210L07F0001 lt Drilling template of the compartment door 151 90 E A De 96 5 142 85 u ot 96 5 dE d Y 8 5 Y 148 5 2 tho R min 200 d R min 200 With flange Without flange 6 78 1SDC210L11F0001 1SDC210L08F0001 Flange for the compartment door 152 100 25 173 x ies x 1SDC210L12F0001 1SDC210015D0205
448. the load current and the circuit breaker with In 2 250 A is not adequate It is therefore necessary to use a T4N 320 TMA In 320 circuit breaker since by adjust ing the thermomagnetic release to the median value 0 85 and considering the derating of 1096 the following magnetic trip threshold is obtained 0 85 320 244 A 100 1 med 400 Hz This value is higher than the rated load current and lower than the current carrying capacity of the cable and therefore the circuit breaker is adequate for 400 Hz application With regard to the mag netic threshold an adjustment at the minimum of the settings available is recommended 5 x In for a TMA so as not to have too high a trip value l 25 In Kmz5 3820 1 7 2720 A 1SDC210015D0205 Special applications Use of direct current apparatus Use of direct current apparatus To obtain the number of poles in series needed to guarantee the required breaking capacity at the various operating voltages suitable connection diagrams must be used For the breaking capacity Icu according to the voltage and the number of poles connected in series with reference to the connection diagrams please refer to the table on page 4 58 Protection and isolation of the circuit with three pole circuit breakers Diagram A Interruption with one pole for polarity AN Vv o o Q X X 0 0 8 d Z Load s Q 8 Note With negative polarity not co
449. the prescriptions in the standards regarding isolation behaviour The position of the operating lever corresponds definitely with that of the contacts positive operation 2 64 1SDC210015D0205 Tmax T3D Tmax T4D Tmax T5D Tmax T6D Tmax T7D 250 250 320 400 630 630 800 1000 1000 1 250 1600 250 250 320 400 630 630 800 1000 1000 1250 1600 200 250 400 630 800 800 1000 1250 1250 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 690 690 690 690 690 500 750 750 750 750 8 8 8 8 8 800 800 800 1000 1000 3000 3000 3000 3500 3000 5 8 5 8 11 30 40 105 440 440 440 440 3 6 3 6 6 15 20 IEC 60947 3 IEC 60947 3 IEC 60947 3 IEC 60947 3 IEC 60947 3 F P F P W F P W F W F W F FC CuAI FC Cu F FC CuAI FC Cu EF F FC CuAI FC Cu EF F FC CuAl EF F EF ES FC CuAI EF ES R ES R MC HR VR ES R HR VR ES R RC HR VR 25000 20000 20000 20000 10000 120 120 120 120 60 105 105 140 210 210 140 140 184 280 280 70 103 5 103 5 268 154 manual 178 motorizable 150 205 205 103 5 268 1 5 2 2 35 3 05 3 25 4 15 9 5 12 9 7 12 5 manual 11 14 motorizable 2 1 3 7 3 6 4 65 5 15 6 65 3 85 4 9 5 4 6 9 12 1 15 1 29 7 39 6 manual 32 42 6 motorizable Withdrawable version not available for T6 1000 A T5 630 T6 630 T6 800 T6 1000 T7 1000 T7 1250 T7 1600 N S H L V N S H L N S H L N S H L S H L V S H L V S H L 36 50 70 120 200 36 50 70 100 36 50 70 100 36 50 70 100 50 70 120 150 50 70 120 150 50 70 120
450. the trip unit is self supplied With the circuit breaker open they operate when the auxiliary power supply 24 V DC or PR330 V is present Measurement function The current measurement function ammeter is present on all versions of the PR332 P trip unit The display shows histograms showing the currents of the three phases and neutral on the main page Furthermore the most loaded phase current is indicated in numerical format Earth fault current where applicable is shown on a dedicated page The latter current value takes on two different meanings depending on whether the external toroidal transformer for the Source Ground Return function or the internal transformer residual type is connected 2 31 1SDC210015D0205 2 32 Circuit breakers for power distribution Electronic trip units The ammeter can operate either with self supply or with an auxiliary power supply voltage The display is rear lit and the ammeter is active even at current levels lower than 160 A Accuracy of the ammeter measurement chain current sensor plus ammeter is no more than 1 5 in the 0 3 6 x In current interval of In Ourrents three phases L1 L2 L3 neutral Ne and earth fault nstantaneous values of currents during a period of time data logger Maintenance number of operations percentage of contact wear opening data storage last 20 trips and 20 events When the optional PR330 V is connected the following additional
451. ties cs ssiessisccccsssavedsiaasiatssesatesteav veiace certiavasiacasiaasacssexaie General characteriStiCs ciii reip iata ro tn sa datae ouk Fro ka savais obe aad eva a Spesa ipods Thermomagnetic trip units Electronic thi po T iioi iori it tni ei po cc cio reca iaaii 2 3 1SDC210015D0205 Circuit breakers for power distribution Electrical characteristics Tmax T1 1P Tmax T1 Tmax T2 Rated uninterrupted current A 160 160 160 Poles No 1 3 4 3 4 Rated service voltage Ue AC 50 60 Hz 240 690 690 DC 125 500 500 Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp k 8 8 8 Rated insulation voltage Ui 500 800 800 Test voltage at industrial frequency for 1 min 3000 3000 3000 Rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity Icu B B C N N S H L AC 50 60 Hz 220 230 V kA 25 25 40 50 65 85 100 120 AC 50 60 Hz 380 400 415 V kA 16 25 36 36 50 70 85 AC 50 60 Hz 440 V kA 10 15 22 30 45 55 75 AC 50 60 Hz 500 V kA 8 10 15 25 30 36 50 AC 50 60 Hz 690 V kA 3 4 6 6 7 8 10 DC 250 V 2 poles in series kA 25 at 125 V 16 25 36 36 50 70 85 DC 250 V 3 poles in series kA 20 30 40 40 55 85 100 DC 500 V 2 poles in series kA DC 500 V 3 poles in series kA 16 25 36 36 50 70 85 DC 750 V
452. tiii oen te raaro 4 67 ZOMG e I fM NSE 4 76 For T1 1p and T2 with PR221DS please ask ABB SACE directly Ai 1SDC210015D0205 Examples of curve readout Example 1 T4N 250 ts Trip curves for power distribution thermomagnetic trip unit Considering a TAN 250 In 250 A circuit breaker By means of the thermal adjustment trimmer the current threshold I is selected for example at 0 9 x In 225 A the magnetic trip threshold adjustable from 5 to 10 x In we select at 10 x In equal to 2500 A It can be noted that on the basis of the conditions in which the overload is presented i e with the circuit breaker at thermal running or not the thermal relay trip varies considerably For example for an overload current of 2 x the trip time is between 21 4 and 105 3 s for hot trip and between 105 3 and 357 8 s for cold trip For fault current values higher than 2500 A the circuit breaker trips instantaneously with the magnetic protection 107 1 10 102 xh 1SDC210E01 F0001 Ip kA Example 2 T2S 160 Limitation curves The following figure shows the trend of the Tmax T2S 160 In 2 160 A circuit breaker current limiting curve The r m s of the prospective symmetrical short circuit current is indicated on the abscissa of the diagram whereas the peak short circuit current value is indicated on the ordinates The current limiting effect can
453. tor etc read and modify the trip characteristics of the protection units determine the status of the apparatus open closed number of operations trip for fault etc determine the abnormal operating situations e g overload and in the case of the releases trip ping the type of fault short circuit earth fault etc plot by means of graphs the temporal evolution of the installation through the history log of cur rents and voltages with a time span for 15 days Access to the various system functions can be enabled by means of passwords with different levels of authorization Usage of the system is really simple and the graphic pages relative to each device are particularly intuitive and easy to use Devices which can be connected The circuit breakers with electronic trip units which can be interfaced with SD View 2000 are Emax X1 air circuit breakers and Tmax T7 moulded case circuit breakers fitted with PR332 P or PR833 P trip units with Modbus RTU PR330 D M communication unit Emax air circuit breakers from E1 to E6 fitted with PR122 P or PR123 P trip units with Modbus RTU PR120 D M communication unit Emax air circuit breakers from E1 to EG fitted with PR112 PD or PR113 PD Modbus trip units Tmax moulded case circuit breakers from T4 T5 T6 fitted with PR222DS PD or PR223DS or PR223EF trip units Isomax circuit breakers from S4 to S7 fitted with PR212 P trip unit with Modbus RTU PR212 D M communication unit 3 53 1SDC21001
454. tronic auxiliary contacts AUX E have to be used 9 Signals Pre alarm L permanently lit Alarm L flashing 0 5 s ON 0 5 s OFF Incongruent manual setting L gt S S gt I flashing 1 s ON 2 s OFF WINK remote control to identify the relay flashing 0 125 s ON 0 125 s OFF 9 With VM210 2 18 1SDC210015D0205 PR222DS P Protection S Against short circuit with delayed trip Protection L Against overload Socket for TT1 test unit Socket for connection of PRO10 T test unit and BTOSO wireless communication unit 1SDC210B06F0001 Protection Against short circuit with instantaneous trip Dip switch for neutral setting Selection for electronic or manual setting PR222DS PD Protection S Against short circuit with delayed trip Protection L Against overload Socket for TT1 test unit Socket for connection of PRO10 T test unit and BTOSO wireless communication unit 1SDC210B07F0001 Protection Against short circuit with instantaneous trip Dip switch for neutral setting Enablement of remote operations Selection for electronic or manual setting PR223DS Socket for connection of PRO10 T test unit and BT030 wireless communication unit Socket for TT1 test unit LED signalling alarm of the circuit breaker 1SDC210B08F0001 LED signalling the status of the circuit breaker Push botton for operation mode selection local
455. uded oO 2 12 UF OF Protections of frequency The two protections detect the variation in network frequency above or below the adjustable thresholds opening the circuit breaker with constant time delay trip The protection can be excluded 0 t is not suitable for human protection For further information about zone selectivity please see the section Circuit breakers for zone selectivity 1SDC210015D0205 Electronic trip units for power distribution SACE PR221DS Gk LRN Ze PR221DS PR221DS PR221GP Protection functions D D D D id SACE PR222DS P PR222DS P PR222DS P Protection functions EH D D D D SACE PR222DS PD PR222DS PD PR222DS PD Protection functions D D D OI D SACE PR223DS PR223DS Protection functions D D D 2 13 1SDC210015D0205 Circuit breakers for power distribution Electronic trip units SACE PR231 P PR231 P PR231 P Protection functions D D D SACE PR232 P PR232 P Protection functions D D SACE PR331 P PR331 P Protection functions D D D SACE PR332 P PR332 P PR332 P PR332 P PR332 P Protection functions D D D D D D D el D D D EI Advanced protection function m DI eo m 03 m l DI m D o Opt ooooooooo ooooooooooooocooQ n alternative to Rc with external toroid Available with PR330 V Measurement m
456. uit S and instantaneous short circuit version PR232 P LSI Setting the trip parameters see table of the PR232 P release can be carried out by means of the dip switches and is unique for the phases and the neutral for which it is possible to set the protection threshold to OFF to 5096 10096 or 20096 of the threshold of the phases directly from the front of the release by means of a special dip switch In particular adjustment of the neutral to 20096 of the phase current requires setting protection L to respect the current carrying capacity of the circuit breaker To guarantee protection of the installation by means of the PR232 P protection release it is necessary to select the rated network frequency 50 60 Hz by means of the special dip switch PR232 P LED signalling Alarm for protection function S Protection S Against short circuit with delayed trip Protection Against short circuit with instantaneous trip LED signalling Alarm for protection function L Protection L LED signalling Alarm Against overload for protection function Ag mr Socket Tor TT1 test unit Dip switch for neutral setting Dip switch for Rating Plug network frequency 1SDC210B55F0001 Socket for connection of SACE PRO010 T BTO30 and PROS0 B PR232 P Protection functions and parameterisations c n A Thermal a Relation 1 Against overload 0 40 1 x In step 0 04xIn at6xl
457. use the circuit breaker must also be fitted with the AUX E auxiliary contacts standard supply with MOE E The MOE E allows use of the digital signals coming from the supervision and control system by means of the PR222DS PD PR223DS and PR228EF trip unit and the AUX E contacts and to convert these into power signals to operate the motor operator All the characteristics indicated above for the MOE mo tor operator are also valid for the MOE E The motor operator functions are also guaranteed thanks to permanent opening closing electric power The main parameters relative to the stored energy motor operator are indicated in the table MOE and MOE E Tmax T4 T5 Tmax T6 Rated voltage Un AC IV DC V AC IV DC M 24 24 48 60 48 60 110 125 110 125 110 125 110 125 220 250 220 250 220 250 220 250 380 380 Operating voltage 96 Un 85 110 85 110 85 110 85 110 Power consumption on inrush Ps lt 300 VA lt 300 W lt 400 VA lt 400 W Power consumption in service Pc lt 150 VA lt 150 W lt 150 VA lt 150 W Duration opening s 1 5 3 closing s lt 0 1 lt 0 1 resetting s 3 5 echanical life No operations 20000 10000 Degree of protection on the front IP30 IP30 Minimum control impulse time on opening and closing ms 2100 2100 1SDC210C76F0001 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210D23F00
458. vents can be recorded even in self supply mode PR223EF Measurements Measurements With distributed N Without distributed N Effective current values mo Ls lad Effective voltage values Ma Mas Mai Mass Mass Var Na Me Vas Phase peak factor mH Frequency f f The PR223EF trip unit is an integral part of the circuit breaker and is therefore not interchangeable with the other protection trip units available on T4 T5 and on T6 1SDC210015D0205 Circuit breaker for zone selectivity ZS Zone selectivity PR332 P With the PR332 P trip unit see chapter Tmax circuit breakers for power distribution page 2 27 and foll it is now possible to extend the ZS zone selectivity function already available on ABB SACE Emax air circuit breakers to the Tmax moulded case circuit breakers The ZS zone selectivity which is applicable to protection functions S and G can be enabled in the case where the curve with fixed time is selected and the auxiliary power supply is present To realize correctly the ZS zone selectivity the following settings are suggested for the upstream circuit breaker S t t set time 70 ms l OFF G t t set time 70 ms Selectivity time same setting for each circuit breaker At minimum between the trip times of two CBs in series with auxiliary power supply See page 2 28 for Leet and t set settings To carry out the cabling a shielded twisted pair cable not supplied with th
459. verall dimensions Accessories for Tmax T1 T2 T3 Solenoid operator superimposed Flange for compartment door 88 2 Y lt X be ae 2 8 Y 2 A B C 885 18 235 885 18 235 2977 ass ie T2 165 5 120 m 159 EXE B2 nlg d m a Y s 9 i l st ial 8 xi ig E d EE UJ re 2 g le i EC N 8 N S 70 lt 2 8 m D 2 23 1555 2 8 T3 165 5 159 aJ 140 8 S B a D mx f ZI p S 70 BEEN 2 wu D 2 23 1555 2 g Drilling templates of the compartment door 78 2 78 2 83 Y Y Y S Ir ce n Xx ay mei X X X X g 1 ge X MA Y Y Y a Without flange Without flange With flange Operating mechanism face extending Operating mechanism face flush with door Operating mechanism face flush with door 6 63 1SDC210015D0205 Overall dimensions Accessories for Tmax T1 T2 T3 Fixed version Solenoid operator
460. vertical Tc 1SDC210E92F0001 T4 250 and T4D 250 up to 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C Imax A L Imax A L Imax A L Imax A L Plug in FC 250 1 250 1 230 0 92 210 0 84 Withdrawable F 250 1 250 1 230 0 92 210 0 84 HR 250 1 250 1 230 0 92 210 0 84 VR 250 1 250 1 240 0 96 220 0 88 FC Front cables terminals F Front flat terminals HR Rear flat horizontal terminals VR Rear flat vertical terminals lu A 255 250 245 240 235 230 225 220 FC F R HR 215 210 205 TPC 1SDC210E93F0001 4 42 1SDC210015D0205 T4 320 and T4D 320 up to 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C Imax A I Imax A I Imax A I Imax A I Fixed FC 320 1 204 0 92 269 0 84 243 076 F 320 1 2904 0 09 269 0 84 243 076 R HR 320 1 R VR 320 1 307 0 96 281 0 88 256 080 FC Front cables terminals F Front flat terminals R HR Rear terminals horizontal R VR Rear terminals vertical lu A 330 320 310 R VR 300 290 280 270 FC F R HR 260 250 240 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 TC 1SDC210E94F0001 T4 320 and T4D 320 up to 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C Imax A 1 Imax A 1 Imax A I Imax A
461. vice continuity of the installations the way to keep the temperature within acceptable levels for operation of the various devices and not only of the circuit breakers must be carefully assessed such as using forced ventilation in the switchboards and in their installation room 1SDC210A21F0001 Altitude Up to an altitude of 2000 m the Tmax circuit breakers do not undergo any alterations in their rated performances As the altitude increases the atmospheric properties are altered in terms of composi tion dielectric resistance cooling capacity and pressure Therefore the circuit breaker performances undergo derating which can basically be measured by means of the variation in significant parameters such as the maximum rated operating voltage and the rated uninterrupted current Altitude m 2000 3000 4000 5000 Rated service voltage Ue V 690 600 500 440 Rated uninterrupted current 100 98 93 90 1 9 1SDC210015D0205 1 10 1SDC210A23F0001 1SDC210A25F0001 Construction characteristics Distinguishing features of the series Electromagnetic compatibility Operation of the protections is guaranteed in the presence of interferences caused by electronic apparatus atmospheric disturbances or electrical discharges by using the electronic trip units and the electronic residual current releases No interference with other electronic apparatus near the place of installation is generated either This is in compliance
462. well as that against missing or unbalanced phase and that against the rotor block All this must necessarily take into account the problems which arise at the moment of starting In particular when selecting these devices different factors must be taken into consideration such as the motor power the diagram and type of starting the type of motor with cage rotor or with wound rotor the fault current at the point of the network where the motor is installed t Circuit breaker with magnetic only release 7 1 L L Contactor Thermal relay Protection against short circuit Integrated protection 1SDC210015D0205 Circuit breakers for motor protection Protection against short circuit With the new series of Tmax moulded case circuit breakers ABB SACE proposes a range up to 400 A which implementing exclusively the protection against short circuit is suitable for use inside protected starters of traditional type The Tmax T2 T3 and T4 circuit breakers in the three pole version with fixed magnetic only trip unit only for T2 Le 13 x In up to In 12 5 A or adjustable between 6 and 12 times the rated service current for T2 and T3 and between 6 and 14 times for T4 stand out for their compactness and exceptional performances in terms of breaking capacity and limitation of the specific let through energy Furthermore thanks to the great flexibility given by the wide range of magnetic threshold
463. wer distribution circuit breakers T1 1p 160 Fixed F 1 Pole Front terminals for copper cables FC Cu 1SDA R1 B Thermomagnetic trip unit l with fixed thresholds TMF Icu 230 V 25 kA S 16 630 052616 5 20 630 052617 8 25 630 052618 i 32 630 052619 40 630 052620 50 630 052621 63 630 052622 80 800 052623 100 1000 052624 125 1250 052625 160 1600 052626 9 ln 16A In 20 A Icw 230 V 16 kA T1 160 Fixed F 3 Poles Front terminals for copper cables FC Cu 1SDC210302F0004 1SDA R1 B C N Thermomagnetic trip unit TMD Icu 415 V 16 kA 25 kA 36 kA 16 500 063514 630 050870 20 500 063515 630 050871 25 500 063516 063526 630 050872 050894 32 500 063517 063527 050917 630 050873 050895 40 500 063518 063528 050918 630 050874 050896 50 500 063519 063529 050919 630 050875 050897 63 630 050876 050898 050920 80 800 050877 050899 050921 100 1000 050878 050900 050922 125 1250 050879 050901 050923 160 1600 050880 050902 050924 1SDA R1 B C N Thermomagnetic trip unit TMD Icu 415 V 16 kA 25 kA 36 kA 16 500 063520 630 050881 20 500 063521 630 050882 25 500 063522 063530 630 050883 050905 32 500 06352
464. with continuous components The SACE RCQ relay is of the type with indirect action and acts on the circuit breaker release mecha nism by means of the shunt opening release or of the undervoltage release of the circuit breaker itself to be ordered by the user to be housed in the special slot made on the left hand pole of the circuit breaker Residual current relay SACE RCQ Power supply voltage AC V 80 500 DC V 48 125 Operating frequency Hz 45 66 Hz Power consumption on in rush 100 VA 100 W Power consumption in service 6 VA 6 W Trip threshold adjustment lAn 1st range of adjustments A 0 03 0 05 0 1 0 3 0 5 2nd range of adjustments A 1 3 5 10 30 Trip time adjustment s instantaneous O 1 0 2 0 3 0 5 0 7 1 2 3 5 Pre alarm threshold adjustment 96 x lAn 25 75 x IAN Range of use of closed transformers Toroidal transformer 60 mm A 0 03 20 Toroidal transformer 110 mm A 0 03 20 Toroidal transformer 185 mm A 0 1 30 Range of use of transformers which can be opened Toroidal transformer 110 mm A 0 3 30 Toroidal transformer 180 mm A 0 3 30 Toroidal transformer G 230 mm A 1 30 Signalling for alarm pre threshold Yellow flashing LED 1 N O change over contact 6 A 250 V AC 50 60 Hz Residual current relay trip signalling Yellow magnetic flag change over contacts N O N C
465. with long inverse Trip between 1 1 1 3 x t 23s t 6s t 12s t 18s time delay trip and Tolerance 10 trip characteristic according to an B t k l inverse time curve t k according to IEC 60947 2 Standard Against short circuit l 2 0 6 0 8 1 2 1 8 2 4 at 10 x In with inverse short 3 3 6 42 5 5 88 6 6 t 0 1s t 0 25s 1t 0 s t 0 8s time delay trip and 74 82 9 10xIn Tolerance 1096 a a t k P trip characteristic Tolerance 10 with inverse time Pt k or definite 0 6 0 8 1 2 1 8 2 4 Il tme 3 3 6 4 2 5 5 8 6 6 t 0 1s t 0 25s t 0 5s t 0 8s 74 82 9 10xln Tolerance 1096 i m Se Tolerance 10 Against short circuit l 215 25 3 4 45 5 with istantaneous 55 85 T L5 8 9 trip 9 5 10 5 12 x In instantaneous a t k Tolerance 10 9 These tolerances hold in the following conditions self powered trip unit at full power without start up two or three phase power supply In conditions other than those considered the following tollerances hold Trip threshold Trip time s x 1096 x 2096 l 15 x 60ms Active up to 7 min after tripping of the breaker ON OFF setting by means of PRO10 T test unit 2 23 1SDC210015D0205 2 24 Circuit breakers for power distribution Electronic trip units There are three red LEDs available on the front of the PR232 P trip unit dedicated to signalling alarm of protections L S and l Furthermore a yellow flashing LED allows the state of pre alarm
466. with the IEC 60947 2 Appendix B Appendix F Standards and European Directive No 89 336 regarding EMC electromagnetic compatibility Tropicalisation Circuit breakers and accessories in the Tmax series are tested in compliance with the IEC 60068 2 30 Standard carrying out 2 cycles at 55 C with the variant 1 method clause 7 3 3 The suitability of the Tmax series for use under the most severe environmental conditions is therefore ensured with the hot humid climate defined in the climatograph 8 of the IEC 60721 2 1 Standards thanks to moulded insulating cases made of synthetic resins reinforced with glass fibres anti corrosion treatment of the main metallic parts Fe Zn 12 zinc plating ISO 2081 protected by a conversion layer free from hexavalent cromium ROHS compliant with the same corrosion resistance guaranteed by ISO 4520 class 2c application of anti condensation protection for electronic overcurrent releases and relative acces sories Resistance to shocks and vibrations The circuit breakers are unaffected by vibrations generated mechanically and due to electromagnetic effects in compliance with the IEC 60068 2 6 Standards and the regulations of the major classifica tion organisations RINA Det Norske Veritas Bureau Veritas Lloyd s register of shipping Germanischer Lloyd ABS Russian Maritime Register of Shipping The T1 T5 Tmax circuit breakers are also tested according t
467. x T2 and T3 in the plug in version it is necessary on the other hand to order the socket plug connectors with 12 poles for the AUX auxiliary contacts 3 open closed changeover 1 release tripped changeover with 6 poles for the AUX auxiliary contacts 1 open closed changeover 1 release tripped changeover and with 3 poles for the service releases SOR or UVR For T2 in the plug in version with PR221 electronic trip unit and suitable auxiliary contacts it is nec essary to order a 6 and a 3 pole socket plug connector 1SDC210015D0205 Socket plug connectors In order to allow the racking in and racking out operations of the moving part of the plug in circuit breaker the wired and unwired electrical accessories of Tmax T2 and T3 and the unwired electrical accessories of Tmax T4 T5 and T6 must be fitted with one or more socket plug connectors as per the table below Socket plug connectors T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 3 poles 6 poles 12 poles SOR UVR UX 1Q 1SY 1 open closed changeover contact trip unit tripped changeover contact UX 3Q 1SY 3 open closed changeover contacts Al 1 AUX 2Q 2 open closed changeover contacts Al 1 trip unit tripped changeover contact T2 T3 MOS overload AUE AUX 2Q 1SY for PR221 2 open closed contacts 1 trip unit tripped changeover contact AUX 1851 1Q 1SY for PR221 1 changeover contact 1 SA electronic release trip contact 1 trip unit trippe
468. y 5 eicit cctanetesesveeresasaneneseciiniemeces sed aba ceu 1 2 LEIT E EET ED TETTE TD DL ELLO 1 4 Construction characteristics Modularity et 1 6 Distinguishing features of the series rre itur poen idt dei scott t see tario dee to steer ia diia 1 8 1 1 1SDC210015D0205 1 2 Overview of the Tmax family Circuit breakers for AC DC distribution T11p T1 Size A 160 160 In A 16 160 16 160 Poles Nr 1 3 4 Ue M AC 50 60 Hz 240 690 M DC 125 500 Icu 380 415 V AC kA B 25 220 230 V AC 16 kA C 25 kA N 36 kA S kA H kA L kA V Size A Poles Nr Ue M AC 50 60 Hz EFDP zone selectivity ZS zone selectivity Size A Poles MNM o Z o o LLL Ue M AC 50 60 Hz Magnetic only trip unit IEC 60947 2 PR221DS I trip unit IEC 60947 2 PR222MP trip unit IEC 60947 4 1 PR231 P I trip unit IEC 60947 2 Size A Poles Nr lcu max KA 1000 V AC KA 1150 VAC KA 1000 V DC 4 poles in series Switch disconnectors T1D Ith A 160 le A 125 Poles Nr 3 4 Ue M AC 50 60 Hz 690 M DC 500 lcm kA 2 8 lcw kA 2 For In 16 A and In 20 A Icu 220 230 V AC 16 kA Note ABB SACE s moulded case circuit breakers are also available in the versions according to UL Standards see catalogue ABB SACE molded case circuit breakers UL 489 and CSA C22 2
469. y the user function is enabled e EFDP zone selectivity is implemented on the S EF and G functions If it is under self supply conditions e the trip unit disables the EF implementing the classic protection functions which also characterize the PR223 DS trip unit L S and G e EFDP zone selectivity is not enabled Auxiliary power supply Electrical characteristics PR223EF Auxiliary power supply galvanically insulated 24 V DC 2096 Maximum ripple 5 Inrush current 24 V 4 A for 0 5 ms Rated current 24 V 80 mA Rated power 24 V 2W Connection of the logic interlock and auxiliary power supply is made by means of the X3 and X4 connectors located on the back of the trip unit For the neutral it is possible set the protection threshold of the functions to OFF at 5096 and at 10096 that of the phase by means of the dialogue function or PRO10 T Furthermore pre alarm and alarm signalling of protection L is available on the front of the trip units The pre alarm threshold value is 0 9 x The PR223EF trip unit just like the PR223DS one allows storage and display of information regarding a trip unit trip The information is saved permanently and up to 20 trip events are recorded which can be acquired by a supervision system using the Modbus protocol or can be displayed locally by means of the FDU or PRO10 T unit 1SDC210015D0205 PR223EF Socket for connection of PRO10 T test unit and BTOSO wireless
470. ype 1SDA R1 3 poles 4 poles STC T1 051431 051432 STC T2 051433 051434 STC T3 051435 051436 Sealable screws for terminal covers Type 1SDA R1 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T7M Sealable screws 051504 013699 1SDC210127F0004 Separating partitions PB 1 k Type 1SDA R1 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T7M PB100 low H 100 mm 8 4 pieces 3p 051427 054970 050696 054970 8 PB100 low H 100 mm 8 6 pieces 4p 051428 054971 050697 054971 PB200 high H 200 mm 4 pieces 3p 051429 054972 054972 PB200 high H 200 mm 6 pieces 4p 051430 054973 054973 Front extended terminals EF Type 1SDA R1 3 pieces 4 pieces 6 pieces 8 pieces 3 ERT 051442 051443 051440 051441 EC EF T2 051466 051467 051464 051465 B EF T3 051490 051491 051488 051489 8 EF T4 055000 055001 054998 054999 EF T5 055036 055037 055034 055035 EF T6 630 023379 023389 013920 013921 EF T6 800 023383 023393 013954 013955 EF T6 1000 064319 064320 064321 064322 EF T7 T7M 063103 063104 063105 063106 see Abbreviation caption page 7 2 7 56 1SDC210015D0205 1SDC210391F0004 1SDC210387F0004 1SDC210385F0004 1SDC210392F0004 Front terminals for copper aluminium cables FC CuAI Type 1SDA R1 3 pieces 4 pieces 6 pieces 8 pieces FC CuAI T1 50mm E L

Tmax T Generation - Electrocomponents

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents